Citizenrsquos Army Training

Hand Book

St Andrewrsquos School

SUBMITTED BY

Table of contents

I Drills and Ceremonies1A Definition of termsB Composition of units and their head 2C Drills command3

1 School of soldiers without arms72 School of soldiers with arms 83 Close order drills 9

D Military drills and ceremonies 101 Review2 Parade3 Drill commands 114 Supplementary commands5 Mass command6 Things to observe in giving a command

II Military courtesy and disciplineA Military courtesy 12

1 Salute2 Rules in rendering hand salute3 Types of salute13

B Reporting an officer1 Reporting indoors without arms2 Reporting indoors underarms143 Reporting outdoors4 Reporting for pay

C Other courtesy to individualsD Honors to the national anthem or to the colors

1 Outdoor142 Indoor15

E Display and salute to the flagF Military discipline16

1 Relation of courtesy and discipline2 Importance of discipline3 Maintenance of discipline

III Arm forces of the Philippines history17A Brief history of the AFPB Significant facts to remember

IV Military RanksA Commissioned officers rank insignias and equivalent to other major services23

B Enlisted personnel ranksC CMP and CATI ranks

V Military leadership and command26A DefinitionB CommandC Leadership

1 Two types of leader2 Basic elements of leadership3 Leadership responsibilities4 Leadership traits5 Leadership Principles276 Roles of a leader287 Objective of a leader

VI Map readingA Definition28B Map colors29C Two main parts of the map D Marginal information

1 Top margin2 Right margin3 Bottom margin

E Types of margin30F Uses and categories of military maps

1 Types of scale2 Types of north313 Measuring distance4 Location identifying

G Military symbols341 Color2 Figure3 Military units 4 Unit representation35

VII Preparatory Marksmanship36A DefinitionB Elements of marksmanshipC Steps in preparatory marksmanshipD Sighting and aiming exerciseE Kind of sling adjustmentF Position exerciseG Trigger squeeze37

H Important things to remember37I Zeroing the rifleJ Organization of firing line

VIII Basic weapon of the AFP38A The US rifle caliber 30M1 (grand)

1 Main group of cal 30M12 Characteristics3 Other data4 Sequence of disassembly5 Operation

B M 16 rifle (556 mm armalight)381 Characteristics2 Functioning393 General data4 Sequence of disassembly and assembly405 Parts of M 16 rifle41

DRILL AND CEREMONIES

All commands in CAT-I drills are given in Filipino language

TWO KINDS OF COMMANDS

A) Preparatory commandsB) Command of execution

- Preparatory command is written in small letters while the command of execution is written in capital letters as a rule

FIVE COMMANDS OF EXECUTION

1 TA ndash For manual of arms2 RAP ndash for facing and movement at rest3 KAD ndash from rest going to motion4 NA ndash while in motion to another motion5 TO ndash while in motion to stop

DEFINITION OF TERMS

1 ELEMENT ndash is a part of unit for example an individual is an element of a team or a squad a team is an element of a squad and an element is an element of a platoon

2 FORMATION ndash The arrangement of elements in a prescribed manner

3 LINE ndash a formation in which the element are placed side by side with each other

4 RANK ndash a single line of individuals or vehicles placed side by side facing to one direction

5 COLUMN ndash a formation where the elements are placed one behind the other

6 FILE ndash a single column of individuals

7 FLANK ndash the right or left side of an individual unit or formation

8 INTERVAL ndash the space between elements in line Close interval is four inches while normal is one arm length

9 DISTANCE ndash the space between elements in column

10 CENTERndash Middle of a formation

11 ALIGNMENT ndash the arrangement of individuals or troops of a straight of a formation

12 GUIDE ndash an individual ahead or at the straight of a platoon or formation designated to control direction and rate of march

13 PACE ndash a step of 28 inches the length of full step in quick time

14 STEP ndash normal step in marching A side step is 12 inches a half step of 14 inches and a back step is 12 inches

15 CADENCE ndash the correct step and timing in marching

16 QUICK TIME ndash a normal cadence in marching at 120 steps per minute

17 DOUBLE TIME ndash a faster cadence in marching at 180 steps per minute

18 DEPTH ndash the space from front to rear of any formation including the front and rear elements The depth of a man from his chest to his back is assumed to be 12 inches

19 BASE ndash the element on which a movement is planned and regulated

20 FRONT ndash the space occupied by an element measures from flank to flank

21 HEAD ndash the leading element in a column

22 in order of march or advance

23 POST ndash the correct place for an officer of non-commissioned officer to stand in a prescribed formation

24 COVER ndash aligning yourself if directly behind the man to your immediate front while maintaining proper distance

25 HALF STEP ndash the rate of marching 60 steps per minute

COMPOSITION OF UNITS AND THEIR HEADS

1 SQUADndash composed of 7 or more men in formation (squad leader)

2 PLATOON ndash composed of 2 or more squads plus one guide (platoon leader)

3 COMPANYndash composed of two or more platoons (company commander)

4 BATTALION ndash composed of two or more companies (battalion commander)

5 REGIMENT ndash composed of 2 or more battalions (regimental commander)

6 BRIGADE ndash Composed of 2 or more Regiments (BRIGADE COMMANDER)

7 DIVISION ndash Composed of 2 or more brigades (DIVISION COMMANDER)

TWO PARTS OF COMMAND

a PREPARATORY COMMAND ndash Alert the troops or subordinates and prepare them for

the movement they are going to execute

b COMMAND OF EXECUTION ndash Tell the troops to do or execute the movement

DRILL COMMANDS

ENGLISH FILIPINO

FilehelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipHanay

AssemblehelliphelliphelliphellipMagtipan

SquadhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTilap

PlatoonhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPulutong

CompanyhelliphelliphelliphellipBalanghay

BattalionhelliphelliphelliphellipTalupad

RegimenthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSampanaw

BrigadehelliphelliphelliphelliphellipBukluran

DivisionhelliphelliphelliphellipDanay

Fall InhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipHumanay

AttentionhelliphelliphelliphellipHumanda

Parade ResthelliphelliphellipTikas Pahinga

Stand AT EasehelliphellipTindigPaluwag

ResthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPahinga

Fall OuthelliphelliphelliphellipTumiwalag

ENGLISH FILIPINO

DismissedhelliphelliphelliphellipLumansag

Left FacehelliphelliphelliphellipHarapsakaliwa RAP

Right FacehelliphelliphelliphellipHarapsakanan RAP

Hand SalutehelliphelliphellipPugayKamay

Count CadencehelliphellipBilangHakbang NA

Forward MarchhelliphellipPasulong KAD

HalthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipHinto

March Time MarchLakadPatakda KAD

Half Step MarchhelliphellipHating Hakbang AD

Double time MarchhellipTakbongHakbang KAD

Quick Time MarchhellipSiglangHakbang KAD

Route MarchhelliphelliphelliphellipLayangHakbang KAD

Right Step MarchhelliphellipHakbangPakanan KAD

Left Step MarchhelliphellipHakbangPakaliwa KAD

ENGLISH FILIPINO

Route StephelliphelliphelliphellipLayangHakbangMarch KAD

Rifle SalutehelliphelliphelliphellipPugaySandata

Unsling ArmshelliphelliphellipIbis Sandata

Fix BayonethelliphelliphellipIkabitangsundang

Raise pistolhelliphelliphelliphellipItaasang pistol

Open ChamberhelliphelliphellipBuksanang pistol

Sir the paradehelliphelliphellipHandanapoangis formed parangal

ReporthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMag-ulat

OfficershelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgapinuno puma-Center March gitna KAD

LoadhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPunluan

Simulate LeadhelliphelliphellipMagpungloKunwari

Stack armshelliphelliphelliphellipBangkoSandata

Sound thehelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIhudyatangpagbabaretreat ngwatawat

Sound OffhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIhudyatangPangal

Attention tohelliphelliphelliphellipMakinigsathe Orderhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipkautusan

Officer of thehelliphelliphelliphellipPunongTagakalingaDay

By Order OfhelliphelliphelliphellipSautosni

ENGLISH FILIPINO

By the helliphellipSabaysaNumber Bilang

Sling ArmshelliphelliphelliphellipSakbitSandata

Adjust SlinghelliphelliphelliphellipAyusinangSakbit

Unfix bayonethelliphelliphellipAlisinangsundang

Withdraw magazinehellipAlisinangpungluan

Insert magazinehelliphellipIsauliangpungluan

Take your helliphelliphelliphellipSumalunan kayopool

Attention to helliphelliphellipMakinigsakautusanOrders

ColorhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIharappabalikangReverse March watawat KAD

UnloadhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipAlisPungla

Cease FiringhelliphelliphelliphellipItigilangPutukan

Take ArmshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipDampotSandata

AdjutantrsquoshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPanawagansaCall Parangal

PublishhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIpahayag andthe Order kautusan

Details forhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgaNakatalagathe day Ngayon

CommanderhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPunongTanodof the Guard

OfficerrsquoshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgapinunoPost March Balik Kad

Staff Behind Me Change PosthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgaKagawadMagpalitngLunan

ENGLISH FILIPINO

In place HalthelliphelliphellipSa lunan Hinto

File from thehelliphelliphellipSunuranmulasaRightLeft kanankaliwa

Guide LefthelliphelliphelliphellipGabayasaKaliwaCenterRight GitnaKanan

Stand FasthelliphelliphelliphellipTatag manatiliWalangkikilos

Left oliquehelliphelliphelliphellipHiligkaliwaMarch KAD

Two Arms LengthhellipIbayongDalawangExtended to the Left Pakaliwa KAD

TroophelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTipon

One TwohelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIsa DalawaThree Four Tatlo Apat

Assemble to thehelliphelliphellipMagtiponsakananRight left march Kaliwa

MounthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSakay

Close onhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipLumapitsaunangLeading Platoon pulutong

Gaiden on LeadinghellipGabaysaunangPlatoons on Line pulutongnghanay

PostshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSaLunan

Dismiss yourhelliphelliphellipTiwalaginanginyongCompany balangay

ENGLISH FILIPINO

Resume marchhelliphellipMagpatuloy KAD

Columns of twoshellipDalawangTatluhangThreesfours Apatangtudling

All present arehelliphelliphellipNaritopolahatAccounted for napagalaman

Right obliquehelliphelliphellipHilispakananMarch Kad

InspectionhelliphelliphelliphellipPagsisiyasat

DetailhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipNakatalaga

PatrolhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTaliba

Take intervalhelliphelliphelliphellipIbayongpatlang March KAD

Unsling equipmenthelliphellipIbabasagamit

Company MasshelliphelliphellipPulo-pulotongsaRightLeft March kanan

Garden on the LinehelliphellipMgagabaysahanay

Guide PosthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgagabaysalunan

Sir the BattalionhelliphelliphellipAngTalupadpo ayis informed handana

Persons to be decoratedhellipMgaparangalan atand all colors Center lahatngwatawatMarch pumagitna KAD

Form the shelter tentshellipMagsisayosngpagtatayongtolda

AT NORMAL INTERVAL

Dress righthelliphelliphelliphellipTuntonkananDress NA

Dress lefthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTuntonkaliwaDress NA

CoverhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPanakip

At Close IntervalhelliphellipMasinsinPagitanDress right Tunton callow NA

At Close IntervalhellipMasinsinPagitanDress left Tuntonkaliwa NA

At Close IntervalhellipMasinsinPagitanFall In Humanay

Close MarchhelliphelliphelliphellipLakadpasinsin KAD

Extended MarchhelliphellipLakadPadalang KAD

Column RighthelliphelliphellipLikoKananLeft March Kaliwa KAD

Column RighthelliphelliphellipLikoHulingKananLeft March (Half) Kaliwa KAD

Incline to thehelliphelliphelliphellipPagawingkananRightLeft Kaliwa KAD

Change StephelliphelliphelliphellipPalitHakbangMarch KAD

Left ShoulderhelliphelliphellipKaliwangBalikatArms Ta

Trail ArmshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipBitbit TA

Port armshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipAgap TA

Inspection ArmshelliphellipSiyasat TA

RightLefthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipKanangKaliwangFlank March Panig KAD

Count offhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSabayangbilang NA

Call offhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTuluyangbilang NA

Center facehelliphelliphelliphellipHumarapsaGitna RAP

Prepare forhelliphelliphelliphellipHumandasa

Inspection Pagsisiyasat

Open RankhelliphelliphelliphellipPabukangTaludtodMarch KAD

Close RankhelliphelliphelliphellipPasinsinTaludtodMarch KAD

Right TurnhelliphelliphelliphellipPihitsaKananMarch KAD

Pass In ReviewhelliphelliphellipPasa Masid

BackwardhelliphelliphelliphellipLakadPaurongMarch KAD

To the RearhelliphelliphelliphellipPabalikMarch KAD

Right shoulderhelliphelliphellipKanangbalikatArms TA

Order armshelliphelliphelliphellipBaba TA

Present ArmshelliphelliphelliphellipTangha TA

Ready EyeshelliphelliphellipHandaKananRightLeft Kaliwa Tingin

Ready FronthelliphelliphelliphellipHanda Harap

ENGLISH FILIPINO

Sir I present the commandhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Ihahandogkopoangpamunuan

Sir the Troop is ready forhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Handanapoangpangkatsa

Trooping for the linehelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip LibutinangHanay

To the LeftRight Marchhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip PakaliwaPakanan KAD

Column of the Platoon Leading Platoonhelliphelliphelliphellip TudlingngpulutongUnangpulutongby the LeftRight Flank March KaliwaKanangpanig KAD

Donrsquot anticipate the commandhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Huwagpangunahanangutos

Sir the Honod Guard is formedhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Handan a poangTanodPandangal

D The Salute ( Pagpugay )

1 Hand Salute - PugayKamay2 Ready Eyes Right - HandaTinginKanan3 Ready Front - Handa RAP

E Steps and Marching ( Hakbang at Lakad )

1 Count Cadence Count - BilangHakbang NA 2 Forward March - Pasulong KAD 3 Platoon Halt - Pulutong Hinto 4 Mark Time March - LakadPatakda KAD 5 Half Step March - Hating Hakbang KAD 6 Double Time March - TakbongHakbang KAD NA 7 Quick Time March - SiglangHakbang KADNA 8 Route March - LayangHakbang NA 9 In place Double Time March - Sa Lunan TakbongHakbang KADNA10 Right Step March - HakbangPakanan NAKAD11 Left Step March - HakbangPakaliwa NAKAD12 Backward March - LakadPaurong KAD13 To the Rear March - Pabalik NA14 Change Step March - PalitHakbang NA15 One Two Three Four - Isa Dalawa Tatlo Apat

2 SCHOOL OF SOLDIERS WITH ARMS ( PagsasanayngKawalna may sandata )

A Manual of Arms ( PagsanaysapaghawakngSandata )

1 Right Shoulder Arms - SaKanangBalikat TA2 Left Shoulder Arms - SaKaliwangBalikat TA3 Order Arms - Baba TA4 Present Arms - Tanghal TA5 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA6 Trail Arms - Bitbit TA7 Sling Arms - Sakbit Sandata8 Unsling Arms - AlisSakbit Sandata9 Fix Bayonet - IkabitBayoneta10 Unfix Bayonet - AlisBayoneta

B Manual of Gidon( ParaanngPagsasanaysaPaghawakngSagisag )

1 Order Guidon - IbabaSagisag2 Carry Guidon - BitbitSagisag3 Raise Guidon - ItaasSagisagC Manual of Arms for the Pistol ( PagsasanaysaPaghawakngPistola )

1 Raise Pistol - ItaasangPistola2 Withdraw Magazine - AlisinangPistola3 Open Chamber - BuksanangPistola4 Close Chamber - IsaraangPistola5 Insert Magazine - IsuksukangPistola6 Return Pistol - IsauliangPungluan

3 Close Order Drill ( MalapitangPagsasanay )

a At Close Interval Fall In - Sa MasinsinPagitan Humanayb Inspection Arms - Siyasat TAc Port Arms - Agap TAd Order Arms - Baba TA

A To Dismiss the Platoon (PagtiwalagngPulutong )

1 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA2 Port Arms - Agap TA3 Dismiss - Lumansag

B To Form the Platoons ( PaghahanayngPulutong )

1 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA2 Port Arms - Agap TA3 Order Arms - Baba TA4 Call Off - TuluyangBilang5 Report - Mag-ulat

C To Align the Squad ( PaghahanayngTilap )

1 Dress Right Dress - TuntonKanan NA2 Dress Left Dress -TuntonKaliwa NA3 At Close Interval Dress RightDress Left -MasinsinPagitan TuntonKananKaliwa NA4 Ready Fort - Handa RAP5 Cover - Tumakip

D To Change Interval while in Line ( PagpalitngpagitanSamantalangNakahanay )

1 Close March - LakadPasinsin KAD2 Extended March - LakadPadalang KAD3 Extended to the Left - IbayongLakadPakaliwa KADE Marching the Squad from a line ( PaglakadsaPangkatmulasaHanay ) 1 Right Face - HarapsaKanan RAP 2 Left Face - HarapsaKaliwa RAP 3 Forward March - Pasulong KAD 4 Column Right March - LikosaKanan KADNA 5 Column Left March - LikosaKaliwa KADNA 6 Column Half Right March - Liko Hating Kanan KADNA 7 Column Half Left March - Liko Hating Kaliwa KADNA 8 Incline to the Left - PagawingKanan 9 Incline to the Right - PagawingKaliwa 10 Right Left March - KaliwaKanangpanig NA

F Counting of Men ( PagbilangngKawal )

1 Count Off - SabayangBilang NA 2 Call Off - TuluyangBilang NA

G To Change Interval While in Column ( PagpalitngPagitanSamantalangNakatudling )

1 Close March - LakadPasinsin KAD 2 Extend March - LakadPadalang KAD

MILITARY DRILLS AND CEREMONIES

MILITARY CEREMONIES - The movement of the larger unit or troops in a prescribed manner from one place to another

1 REVIEW - A military ceremony held in honor of a visiting commander official or dignitary It is also a fittingaffair to present decorations and awards to deserving members or units of the command

A REVIEW IS NORMALLY CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING ELEMENTSa Formation of troopsb Presentation of troopsc Inspection of troopsd Presentation of awards and decorations

2 PARADE - A more formal ceremony than a review In this ceremony the appearance and movement of thetroops in the formation are the primary consideration The preparation and organization of troops forparades are similar to those of a review The line on which the troops are to be formed and the route ofmarch of the participating units are marked or designated The distance between the troops and thecommander for the parade formation is greater than that of a reviewTWO DISTINCT TYPES OF PARADES1 Evening Parade2 Moonlight Parade

DRILL COMMANDS - An oral of a commander

TWO PARTS 1 PREPARATORY COMMAND - States the movement or formation to be carried out and mentally prepares theindividual for its execution It is a command which indicates the movement

2 COMMAND OF EXECUTION - Tells when the movement is to be carried out It is a command which indicates when amovement is to be executed

EXAMPLE FORWARD MARCHForwardPreparatory Command MarchCommand of Execution

PREPARATORY COMMAND AND COMMAND OF EXECUTION

1 Fall in Fall out - Humanay Tumiwalag

2 Rest - Pahinga3 As you were - Manumbalik4 At ease - TindigPaluwag5 Change step - PalikHakbang

SUPPLEMENTARY COMMAND - The subordinate commander gives a supplementary command He turns his head towards themajority of his elements and gives command over his shoulder He does not face about

MASS COMMAND - May be used to develop confidence and enthusiasm All of the members of the unit being trained speak in unison and execute them

THINGS TO OBSERVE IN GIVING COMMANDS

Inflection - The rise and fall of pitch and the tone changes of the voice

Cadence In Command - The uniform and rhythmic flow of words

Snap - The extra quality in command that demands immediate responseREMEMBER

1 Correct commands have a tone cadence and snap that demands willingness correct and immediateresponse 2 The loudness of the command is adjusted to the number of men in the unit 3 The best posture for giving command is at the position of attention 4 The most desirable pitch when beginning a preparatory command is near the level of your natural speaking voice

MILITARY COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

MILITARY COURTESY - Is the expression or manifestation of consideration for others It is a virtue that is expected of all individuals from all walks of life In the Armed Forces courtesy is a great requirement because it is thebasic upon which military discipline stands With courtesy and respect among members of the organizationwould lose its orderliness and later disintegrate Furthermore courtesy promotes good relationship closer coordination and teamwork among members of the organization It makes theorganization dignified and insures good relations with the public

SALUTES- Is the most important form of military courtesy It is executed by raising the right man smartlyUntil the tip of the forefinger touches the eyebrow or the front brim of the head gear when coveredForefingers are extended and joined palm facing the left forearm inclined at an angle of about 45 degrees

and the right upper arm horizontal to the ground A person saluting looks at the person beingsaluted When the salute is returned he drops the right hand smartly to the side

RULES IN RENDERING HAND SALUTEa The salute is required on and off military installations during outside office hoursb Persons entitled to the saluted 1 All commissioned officers of the AFP both male and female 2 Commissioned officers of friendly nations when they are recognized as such 3 Officers of the Coast and Geodetic Survey and the Public Health Service when they are serving with the AFP 4 All civilian who are entitled by custom to salutec The salute is rendered at a distance of about 6 paces from the person saluted of at the recognizable distances about 30 pacesd The salute must be rendered to those entitled to it It is not rendered when running but at halt or walk Never salute with a cigarette cigar or pipe in the mouth The salute should not be executed in a haphazardway or perfunctory manner Salutes are exchange whether individuals are cover or uncoverede The salute is rendered at once if the senior remains in the immediate vicinity and no conversation takesplace the junior again salutes the senior when they are path from each otherf In making reports the person reporting salutes first regardless of rank An example of this case is whenthe unit commander is reporting to the adjutant during ceremoniesg) Whom not to salute

1 Standing to a horse or leading a horse2 While at work In case the officer calls the soldier stops working approaches and salutes him

and again when they are part to each other3 Indoors except when reporting to an officer or when the soldier is on duty sentry or guard4 When carrying articles with both hands or being so occupied as to make saluting practical5 When riding in a fast moving vehicle and the other is dismounted the salute is not rendered

Exception are when the vehicle is clearly marked to indicate a General Officer and when saluting is a part of the ceremony

6 When meeting a prisoner of war Soldier serving as military prisoner are not entitled to salute7 In case of doubt due to absence of specific instruction the salute is rendered

The term ldquooutdoorrdquo is constructed to include such buildings as drill halls gymnasiums and other roofed enclosures used for drill or exercise of troops Theaters covered walks and other shelters open on the side are also considered as outdoor

ldquoIndoorsrdquo include offices hallways kitchen orderly rooms recreation halls washroom and quarters

ldquoUnder armsrdquo means carrying arms having them attached to the person by sling holster or other means In the absence of arms the wearing of cartridge bells pistol holsters and automatic rifle belts also mean ldquounder armsrdquo

TYPES OF SALUTES

a Hand saluteb The Rifle Salute at Order Armsc The Rifle Salute at Trail Armsd The Rifle Salute at Present Armse The Rifle Salute at Shoulder Arms (Right Shoulder)f The Rifle Salute at Left Shoulder Armsg The Gun Saluteh Eyes Right by men in ranks when Pass in Review

REPORTING TO AN OFFICER

The salute is rendered by a junior when reporting to a senior He also salutes before leaving

a REPORTING INDOORS WITHOUT ARMS

A soldier removes his headgear knocks at the door of the office of the officer and enters when told to do so Upon entering he halts at about two paces from the officer and salutes and says Sir Cadet Airman Dela Cruz reporting to the squadron commander Sir The salute will be retained until he completes his report and the officer had returned his salute execute about face and leaves the office

b REPORTING INDOORS UNDER ARMS

The procedure for reporting is the same as discussed above except that the soldier remain covered If carrying a rifle the soldier carries it and salute at trail arms Otherwise the hand salute is given

c REPORTING OUTDOORS

The procedure for reporting to an officer the head gear is not removed Rifles should be carried at trail arms or at the right shoulder The hand salute or rifle salute is given as the case may be

d REPORTING FOR PAY

The soldier reporting for pay answers ldquoHererdquo when his name is called approaches and salutes the officer He picks up and count his money and leaves without saluting The officer does not return his salute

OTHER COURTESY TO INDIVIDUALS

a) When an officer enters the room or tent officersrsquo junior to him and enlisted men present with uncover (if unarmed and stand at attention until the officer directs otherwise or leaves the room) When more than one individual are present the first one who perceive the officer will command ldquoAttentionrdquo loud enough to be heard by everybody present

b) When an officer enters a room or tent used as an office working shop or recreation room those at work or at play are not required to come to attention unless addressed by the officer A transaction of routine business between individuals at work

c) When an officer enters an enlisted menus hall the group is called to ldquoAt Easerdquo by the person noticing him first Men remain seated at ease and continue eating unless the officer directs otherwise A soldiers addresses stop eating and sits at attention until the conversation has ended

d) When accompanying a senior a junior walks or ride on his left except when accompanying senior during inspection

e) When entering a car or a small boat the senior goes in first and others follow in the order of rank In getting off he junior goes out first and others follow in the inverse order of rank

HONORS TO THE NATIONAL ANTHEM OR TO THE COLORS

I OUTDOOR

- Wheneverwherever the National Anthem or the colors is played military personnel not in the formation must observe the following

1 At the first note of the music stand at attention and render the prescribed salute except atthe escort of the color or at retreat when they will face toward the color or flag and salute The salute is retained until the last note of the music

2 The mounted on animals will halt and render the salute mounted Individuals loadinganimals or standing to a horse will stand at attention having the salute

3 Vehicles in motion will be brought to a halt Persons riding on a passenger car or amotorcycle will dismount and salute as described above Occupants of combat vehicles such a tanks half trucks scout cars and armored cars will remain in their vehicles but stand at attention and salute

4 The above respect to the National Color is rendered to the National Anthem or colors offriendly nations

II INDOORS

- When the national anthem is played officer and men will stand at attention and face the music or the flag but do not salute

UNCOVERING- Officer and enlisted men under arms uncover when

a) Seated as a member of or in attendance at a court or board Sentinels guarding prisoners do not uncover

b) Entering places of divine worship

c) Indoors when not in duty

d) In attendance at an official reception

DISPLAY AND SALUTE TO THE FLAG

a The Philippine flag represents our nation and should always be given a place of runner

b The National Flag is never dipped for salute nor is it permitted to touch the ground It is not used as a costume dress or a drapery No lettering or object should be placed on it

c The flag is played in the following manners1 When hoisted at a flag pole it should be hoisted fully at the top of the pole blue part

up or above During mornings the flag is hoisted to the top of the pole first then hauled down until the flag is about midway of the length of the pole

2 When the national flag is displayed with another flag whether they are standing sideby side or with their staff crossed the National Flag is at the right side blue part up

3 When placed in the vertical manner the triangle is up the blue color at the right4 When displayed in the horizontal position the triangle is at the right side with the blue

part up5 When displayed over the casket the triangle is in the direction of the head of the cadaver with

the blue part on the right side

During the ceremonies wherein the holstering or lowering of the flag is done or when it passes by during parades or reviews all persons present except those detailed in holstering lowering and carrying the flag should face it at attention and salute while those in uniform remove their headdress with their right hand and place them over their left breast Women should salute by placing their right hand on their left breastMILITARY DISCIPLINE

Military discipline is the mental attitude and state of training which renders obedience and proper conduct instinctive under all conditions It is founded upon respect for loyalty to properly constituted authority While it is primarily developed by military drills every feature in military life has its effect upon military discipline It is generally indicated in an individual or unit by smartness of appearance and action cleanliness of dress equipment or quarters respect for senior and by the prompt and cheerful obedience by the subordinates of both the latter and spirit of the legal orders

RELATION OF COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

The relation of military discipline to courtesy is clearly explained by the fact that discipline is founded upon by respect and loyalty to superiors and lawfully constituted authorities In other words discipline originates and develops mutual respect and goodwill among members of an organization Without courtesy and respect among members of an organization discipline disappears there will be no peace and order in the organization hence it will disintegrate

IMPORTANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Mass discipline and morale are essential factors for securing cohesive action and for ensuring that singleness or purpose which alone can triumph over the most difficult conditions of war The successful leader will teach his men to recognize and face fear because fear is the enemy of discipline and morale Fear unchecked will lead to panic and a unit that is panicky is no longer a disciplined one but a mob There is no same person who is without fear but with good discipline and morale all will face danger if not willingly at least resignedly because of their inborn sentiment of duty or courage of loyalty and because of their sense of pride in their country in their unit and in themselves in other words because of their esprit de corps

The need for discipline is recognized in many places outside the Armed Forces It reaches at highest form in teams wherein individual desires are subordinated to the interests of the entire team The Armed Forces are more in need of discipline for several reasons First the task of making war is not doing it because we as individuals have to do it in the interest of our country Because of that we cannot be allowed as individual to decide which part of the job each of us will do or how each part to be done Second the organization must be prepared for situations wherein leaders may be lost Personal loyalty for the commandment is not enough If a leader is killed his men must accept orders from his successor immediately and without question to carry on the battle Finally the tremendous size of all Armed Forces demands that there be uniform ways of doing things Discipline subordinates personal and self considerations to the interest of the group

MAINTENANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Discipline is installed in men through instructions pride and traditions and regulations You will develop appreciation of the other factors which build discipline as time passes One must know and understand the different laws and regulations immediately

Discipline is maintained in much the same manner as it is attained The article of war punishes military individualsrsquo fairness and justice high moral pride and responsibility contribute to maintain discipline as to developing it

CHAPTER IVARMED FORCES OF THE PHILIPPINESrsquo HISTORY

Brief History of the AFPCommonwealth Act no 1 otherwise known as the National Defense Act was approved on 21

December 1935 which gave the basic organization of the AFP General Douglas McArthur served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon Major General Dwight D Eisenhower and Major General James Ord members of the McArthurrsquos Staff helped in the planting of the Philippine Military Establishment as well as organizing it

As President Quezon issued Executive Order no 11 on January 1936 which formally established the Army of the Philippines he recalled Colonel Jose Delos Reyes of the Philippine Constabulary to active duty and later promoted him to Brigadier General and designated him as Acting Chief of Staff of the Army Brigadier General Basilio J Valdez and Colonel Guillermo B Francisco were named 1 st and 2nd Asst Chief of Staff respectively

In the same order the Philippine Constabulary became the nucleus of the regular forces of the Philippine Army Filipino citizens were required to go training under the National Defense Act since 1936 that would compose reserve force By the end of the ten year Commonwealth period in 1946 there would have been a trained Philippine Army Reserve pool of 400000 officers and men including the graduates of the ROTC Basic and Advance Course in accredited colleges and universities

When the Philippine Constabulary became part of the Philippine Army the PC Air Corps which was activated on 2 January 1955 was re designated Philippine Air Force on 3 July 1947

On February 1939 an Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was organized as a unit of the Philippine Army Initially equipped with three Q-boats (torpedo boats) and a handful of officers and men hurriedly trained in the rudiments of Sea-Warfare the OSP squadron provided coastal support to the beleaguered Filipino-American forces in the battles of Bataan and Corregidor In October 1947 the OSP was renamed Philippine Naval Patrol and on 5 January 1951 it became the Philippine Navy The OSP was often referred to as Mosquito Fleet

When President Franklin D Roosevelt of the USA declared the state of National Emergency on 26 July 1941 and ordered the induction of the Philippine Army units into the US Armed Forces in the Far East under the command of General Douglas Mc Arthur the Philippine Army had a reserve force of about 100000 officers and men at the time of the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked the Pearl Harbor Clark Field and other targets on 8 December 1941 The Philippine Army Reserve Force totaled around 200000 officers and men

The Philippine Army retained its own organization while serving with the USAFFE After the fall of Bataan on 9 April 1942 many officers and men of the Philippine Army continued resistance against the Japanese by forming guerilla forces all over the country These USAFFE guerilla forces along with other units organized by civilians in various parts of the country fought the Japanese Forces from 1942 to 1945 When the US Liberation Forces landed in Leyte on 20 October 1944 all the guerilla forces participated actively on the liberation on their respective sectors of operations

On October 1947 President Manual A Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 which organized all government agencies The Military establishment was not spared from its official designation as Army of the Philippines and it became the Armed Forces of the Philippines The ten pre-war military districts were deactivated but 4 Military Areas were also activated to enhance the efficiency of the Constabulary personnel all over the country

The post-war Philippine Army eventually got its forces fighting another battle ndash the battle against the armed elements of the Communist Party of the Philippines the HUKBALAHAP later renamed HMB For the anti0dissident campaign Army Sector Command and Battalion Combat Teams were formed During the Korean war the 10th 20th 11th 19th and 2nd BCTrsquos were sent as Philippine Expeditionary Force as the member of the United Nations PEFTOK served in Korea from 1950-1955 On 25 December 1950 President Quirino issued Executive Order No 389 renaming headquarters AFP to General Headquarters AFP and activating the 4 major services The Philippine Army Philippine Constabulary Philippine Air Force and Philippine Navy

From the time the Philippines joined the Southeast Asia Treaty Organization (SEATO) in September 1954 the AFP cooperated actively with the other member nations in the enhancing of military preparedness in the area

As a member of the UN the Philippines also sent a Philippine Air Force Contingent of 77 officers and men on a pacification campaign to the Congo Republic on 11 February 1963

In 1966 the Philippine Civic Action Group (PHICAG) was activated to implement the provisions of RA 4644 Composed of engineers medical and rural community development teams and security personnel the PHILCAG was sent to the Republic of South Vietnam and engaged in socio-economic projects mutually agreed upon by the governments of the Republic of the Philippines and Republic of South Vietnam

The AFP has shown an increasing awareness of its arrival in the country and its vital role in the political and economic development of the country by engaging are actively in civic action programs

Pursuant to the Socio-economic Military Program under RA 2056 the Chief of Staff AFP ordered the assignment of military personnel for public works construction food production land settlement and rural development Several civic centers of the AFP

To give greater impetus on the civic action the 51st Engineer Brigade consisting of 10 Engineer Construction Battalion was activated on 10 March 1962 This unit had constructed several much needed highways roads and bridges in various parts of the country The 52nd Engineer Brigade which was organized on 1 July 1969 also performed similar functions to holster the national program for social and economical developments

Today the AFP is employing all its resources in assisting the socio-economic development programs of the government without prejudice to its primary missions of improving and maintaining the effectiveness of the countryrsquos defense posture

SIGNIFICANT FACTS TO REMEMBER

MACTAN ndash place where the first revolt against Spain took place on April 26 1951 The firstrebellion Spain flared up in Bohol and Leyte

ANDRES MALONG ndash led the first major revolt in Luzon in 1660 He proclaimed himself as aKing of PangasinanLAPU ndash LAPU ndash was the first Filipino hero

MIGUEL VICOS ndash the Spanish Meztiso who assassinated Diego Silang on May 28 1863

RED WITH A FIGURE OF A SUN ndash color of the first flag of the Philippines in 1897

ANDRES BONIFACIO ndash was the founder of the Revolutionary Society called Katipunan

GEN GREGORIO DEL PILAR ndash led the Filipino forces in the Battle of Tirad Pass

AUGUST 29 1896 ndash the date designated as the start of the revolution which was also known as

Cry of BalintawakDECEMBER 14 1897 ndashdate when the Treaty of Paris and Fact of Biak-na-bato was signed

FACT OF BIAK-NA-BATO ndash an agreement between the Filipino and the Spanish authoritieson December 14 1897 to stop all hostilities

MARCELA AGONCILLO ndash designed and made the first flag of the first Philippine Republic

JULIAN FELIPE ndash was the composer of the Philippine National AnthemEMILIO AGUINALDO ndash was the first president of the Philippines

BALANAN ISABELA ndash the place where Gen Emilio Aguinaldo was captured In 1922 the US War Dept authorized the establishment of the Dept of Military Science andTactics under the supervision of the US Army This was established in theUniversity of the Philippines

MANUEL LUIS QUEZON ndash the first president of the Philippine Commonwealth

COMMONWEALTH ACT NO1 ndash is otherwise known as the National Defense Act issued by President Quezon and approved on December 21 1935 and gave the basicorganization of the AFP

GENERAL DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon during the Commonwealth period that helped in the planning andorganization of the Philippine Military EstablishmentGENDOUGLAS MCARTHURrsquoS STAFF

1 MAJ GEN DWIGHT D EISENHOWER2 MAJ GEN JAMES ORD

JANUARY 11 1936 ndash the date President Manuel L Quezon issued Executive Order No 11 onthe establishment of the PA

BRIG GEN BASILIO J VALDEZ ndash first assistant Chief of staff

BRIG GEN JOSE DELOS REYES ndash designated as the first Chief of Staff of the PhilippineArmy

COL GUILLERMO B FRANCISCO ndash 2nd assistant Chief of Staff The PHILLIPINE CONSTABULARY became the nucleus of the Philippine Army and the Philippine Constabulary Air Corps (PCA) was activated on January 2 1937

FEBRUARY 9 1939 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was activated and organized as a unit of thePhilippine Army The Off-Shore Patrol was equipped with Q-Boats (Torpedo Boat)and referred to as the ldquoMosquito Fleetrdquo

PRESIDENT FRANKLIN DELANO ROOSEVELT ndash President of the USA who set July 26 1941 as the date for the declaration of State of National Emergency and at the sametime the induction of the Philippine Army to United States Armed Forces to the Far East (USAFFE) with a total force of 160000 officers and men

GEN DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash was designated as the USAFFE COMMANDER

DECEMBER 8 1941 ndash the date the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked Pearl Harbor Clark Fieldand other targets

APRIL 9 1942 ndash fall of Bataan

MAY 6 1942 ndash fall of Corregidor

MAJOR FERDINAND EDRALIN MARCOS ndash was the most decorated soldier during the World War II and was a recipient of 27 medals

OCTOBER 20 1944 ndash the date the US Liberation Forces landed in Red Beach in Palo Leyte

JULY 3 1947 ndash the date the PC Air Corps was re-designated as the Philippine Air Force

OCTOBER 1947 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol was renamed Phil Naval Patrol ndash the date President Manuel Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 remainingthe Army of the Philippines as Armed Forces of the Philippines andactivating the 4 military areas

ARAW NG KAGITINGAN ndash a day set to commemorate the Fall of Bataan Fall of Corregidorand Fall of Bessang Pass Based on the historical records the independenceof the Republic of the Philippines was on June 12 1898

JULY 4 1946 ndash declaration of the Independence by the USA celebrated today as PhilippineAmerican Friendship Day

JULY 1950 ndash the Philippine Army was separated from the Gen Headquarters Philippine Army

DECEMBER 23 1950 ndash President ElpidioQuirino issued Executive Order No 389 renamingthe Headquarters AFP to Gen Headquarters AFP (GHQ AFP)

JANUARY 5 1951 ndash the Phil Naval Patrol was renamed the Philippine Naval of thePHILIPPINE NAVY

1959 ndash 1955 ndash the Battalion Combat Teams were sent to Korea to comply with the commitmentsof the Philippines as member of the UN The BCT was known as the PHILIPPINE EXPEDITIONARY FORCE TO KOREA (PEFTOK)

SEPTEMBER 1954 ndash The Philippines joined the Southeast Asian Treaty Org (SEATO)

APRIL 11 1963 ndash the PAF contingent of 77 officers and men were sent to Congo Republic of South VietnamPHIL CIVIC ACTION GROUP (PHILCAG) ndash the group of engineers medical and ruralcommunity development team and security personnel were sent by thePhilippines to the representative of South Vietnam

FEBRUARY 22-25 1986 ndash the bloodless peoples revolution which deposed Ferdinand Marcosfrom the presidency and as Commander in elected President of thePhilippines commonly referred to as the EDSA Revolution

ACRONYMSBCT ndash Battalion Combat TeamGHQ ndash General HeadquartersHMB ndash HukbongMapagpalayang Bayan (HUKBALAHAP)PHILCAG-V ndash Philippine Civic Action Group to VietnamSEATO ndash Southeast Asian Treaty OrganizationOSP ndash Off-Shore PatrolPEFTOK ndash Philippine Expeditionary Force to Korea

ENLISTED PERSONNELrsquoS RANKS

MarinesArmy Navy Constabulary Air Force

C ndash CadetCadette M- MidshipmanMidshipwoman

CHAPTER V

MILITARY LEADERSHIP AND COMMAND

A Leadership ndash is the art of influencing and directing men to an assigned goal is such a way toobtain their obedience respect and loyal cooperation Leadership can beexercised by anyone at anytime respective of the frame work of the command

Command ndash is the authority which an individual in the military service lawfully exercisedover subordinates by virtue of his rank and assignment Command andleadership are inseparable whether the function of the command is complex orsimple the commander should always be the controlling head

B TWO TYPES OF LEADER

1 Authoritarian ndash a leader who leads his men by means of rank and position

2 Persuasive ndash a leader who leads his men by always setting examples

C BASIC ELEMENTS OF LEADERSHIP

1 Character ndash to be a leader a person must be of good character Some indications arehonesty good manners industrious self-control and bravery

2 Intelligence ndash is the ability to grasp knowledge easily It includes native ability goodcommon sense and judgment

3 Alertness ndash is mental and physical watchfulness vigilance and observance to his planned and future activity

D LEADERSHIP RESPONSIBILITIES

1 Accomplishment of the assigned mission or task

2 Work for the welfare of his men

E LEADERSHIP TRAITS

1 Knowledge ndash professional knowledge of the job Understands the characteristics of his men2 Bearing ndash dignified appearance and behavior

3 Courage ndash physical and moral ability to act in spite of danger or hardship

4 Decisiveness ndash ability to decide promptly and correctly the proper time and to announce his decision clearly and briefly with authority

5 Dependability ndash performance of duty with or without supervision

6 Endurance ndash physical and mental strength to continue or complete a task

7 Enthusiasm ndash interest in his work or task at hand

8 Force ndash the ability to compel obedience

9 Humility ndash state of being reasonable and proud but not arrogant and boastful

10 Humor ndash ability to appreciate and narrate amusing incidents of everyday life

11 Initiative ndash ability to start or originate an idea or work even when others are absent

12 Judgment ndash power of mind to weight factors affecting a problem and to decide properly

13 Integrity ndash good moral character

14 Justice ndash impartiality in dealing with others giving credit when due and punishment when so demanded

15 Loyalty - sincerity and faithfulness to superiors for the good of the unit

16 Sympathy ndash mutual feelings to others

17 Tact ndash ability to deal with people without hurting their feelings

18 Unselfishness - avoidance of personal consideration that gives a disadvantage

to others

F PRINCIPLES IN LEADERSHIP

1 Know your job - must have thorough professional knowledge of his duties and responsibilities to

command and gain respect from his men

2Know yourself and seek self-improvement - a leader should analyze himself to determine his

good qualities and learn to recognize and correct his weakness

3 Know your men and look after their welfare - understand each of your men personally

psychologically in order to effectively lead them

4 Keep your men informed - keep your men knowledgeable background in all aspects its

organization and mission in order to function effectively

5 Set an example -set a good example as a model in loyalty in superiors and subordinates good

bearing and attitudes pride and faithfulness to the organization

6 Insure the task is understood supervised and accomplished - a leader should give a clear and

concise order that can be understood He supervises his men to accomplish the

assigned mission

7 Train your men as a team - teamwork is a must within and among units from the

smallest to the largest Each men should understand that he has a job to perform

and must cooperate with others in achieving the common objective

8 Make sound and timely decisions - the ability to make raid estimate of the situation Arrive at the

sound decision and announce his decision in the correct form of the proper is

essential to a leader For any situation that may arise the leader should be able to

act logically

9 Develop a sense of responsibility among your subordinates - the leader should train his

subordinates to act in the absence of orders when the situation so demands He

develops responsibility among his subordinates byproper delegation of his

authority and holding them responsible for theaccomplishment of their mission

10 Employ your commands in accordance with its capability - the leader must have thorough knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of his command He must assign objectives that is responsible to be attained However when the situation so demands then men must be forced to action beyond their normal endurance so as to avoid a harder or more costly consequence on their part

11 See responsibility and take responsibility for your action - learn the seniors job for youmay assume his position later on Take advantage of the responsibility delegated toyou and do not back out in case of failure

ROLES OF A LEADER

1 The leader is a model soldier2 The leader is a commander3 The leader is an instructor4 The leader is a personal manager5 The leader is a councilor6 The leader is a custodian of his mens welfare

OBJECTIVES OF A LEADER

1 MORALE - the mental and emotional state of an individual 2 DISCIPLINE - the prompt and willing obedience to orders Complying to regulations and initiating appropriate action even in theabsence of orders 3 PROFICIENCY - the technical tactical and physical ability of an individual to perform their mission 4 ESPRIT DE CORPS - More than the aggregate personality it is how the individuals feel about their unit Jealous of enthusiasticfor pride in and devotion for

MAP READING

MAP - is a graphical representation of the earths surface drawn to a scale on aplane When you look at the map you are actually looking at a picture ofthe ground from a high spot in the air MAP COLOR - different colors are used on the printing of the maps to assist the use understanding it A GREEN - represents all types of vegetables B BLUE - signifies bodies of water such as rivers lakes swamps and streams C RED - indicates first class roads and prominent locations such as theProvincial or Municipal Capitals May be used to stress the significance ofimportant map locations

D BROWN - depicts contour lines which are representation of the relatives elevation and relief of the terrain

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

Table of contents

I Drills and Ceremonies1A Definition of termsB Composition of units and their head 2C Drills command3

1 School of soldiers without arms72 School of soldiers with arms 83 Close order drills 9

D Military drills and ceremonies 101 Review2 Parade3 Drill commands 114 Supplementary commands5 Mass command6 Things to observe in giving a command

II Military courtesy and disciplineA Military courtesy 12

1 Salute2 Rules in rendering hand salute3 Types of salute13

B Reporting an officer1 Reporting indoors without arms2 Reporting indoors underarms143 Reporting outdoors4 Reporting for pay

C Other courtesy to individualsD Honors to the national anthem or to the colors

1 Outdoor142 Indoor15

E Display and salute to the flagF Military discipline16

1 Relation of courtesy and discipline2 Importance of discipline3 Maintenance of discipline

III Arm forces of the Philippines history17A Brief history of the AFPB Significant facts to remember

IV Military RanksA Commissioned officers rank insignias and equivalent to other major services23

B Enlisted personnel ranksC CMP and CATI ranks

V Military leadership and command26A DefinitionB CommandC Leadership

1 Two types of leader2 Basic elements of leadership3 Leadership responsibilities4 Leadership traits5 Leadership Principles276 Roles of a leader287 Objective of a leader

VI Map readingA Definition28B Map colors29C Two main parts of the map D Marginal information

1 Top margin2 Right margin3 Bottom margin

E Types of margin30F Uses and categories of military maps

1 Types of scale2 Types of north313 Measuring distance4 Location identifying

G Military symbols341 Color2 Figure3 Military units 4 Unit representation35

VII Preparatory Marksmanship36A DefinitionB Elements of marksmanshipC Steps in preparatory marksmanshipD Sighting and aiming exerciseE Kind of sling adjustmentF Position exerciseG Trigger squeeze37

H Important things to remember37I Zeroing the rifleJ Organization of firing line

VIII Basic weapon of the AFP38A The US rifle caliber 30M1 (grand)

1 Main group of cal 30M12 Characteristics3 Other data4 Sequence of disassembly5 Operation

B M 16 rifle (556 mm armalight)381 Characteristics2 Functioning393 General data4 Sequence of disassembly and assembly405 Parts of M 16 rifle41

DRILL AND CEREMONIES

All commands in CAT-I drills are given in Filipino language

TWO KINDS OF COMMANDS

A) Preparatory commandsB) Command of execution

- Preparatory command is written in small letters while the command of execution is written in capital letters as a rule

FIVE COMMANDS OF EXECUTION

1 TA ndash For manual of arms2 RAP ndash for facing and movement at rest3 KAD ndash from rest going to motion4 NA ndash while in motion to another motion5 TO ndash while in motion to stop

DEFINITION OF TERMS

1 ELEMENT ndash is a part of unit for example an individual is an element of a team or a squad a team is an element of a squad and an element is an element of a platoon

2 FORMATION ndash The arrangement of elements in a prescribed manner

3 LINE ndash a formation in which the element are placed side by side with each other

4 RANK ndash a single line of individuals or vehicles placed side by side facing to one direction

5 COLUMN ndash a formation where the elements are placed one behind the other

6 FILE ndash a single column of individuals

7 FLANK ndash the right or left side of an individual unit or formation

8 INTERVAL ndash the space between elements in line Close interval is four inches while normal is one arm length

9 DISTANCE ndash the space between elements in column

10 CENTERndash Middle of a formation

11 ALIGNMENT ndash the arrangement of individuals or troops of a straight of a formation

12 GUIDE ndash an individual ahead or at the straight of a platoon or formation designated to control direction and rate of march

13 PACE ndash a step of 28 inches the length of full step in quick time

14 STEP ndash normal step in marching A side step is 12 inches a half step of 14 inches and a back step is 12 inches

15 CADENCE ndash the correct step and timing in marching

16 QUICK TIME ndash a normal cadence in marching at 120 steps per minute

17 DOUBLE TIME ndash a faster cadence in marching at 180 steps per minute

18 DEPTH ndash the space from front to rear of any formation including the front and rear elements The depth of a man from his chest to his back is assumed to be 12 inches

19 BASE ndash the element on which a movement is planned and regulated

20 FRONT ndash the space occupied by an element measures from flank to flank

21 HEAD ndash the leading element in a column

22 in order of march or advance

23 POST ndash the correct place for an officer of non-commissioned officer to stand in a prescribed formation

24 COVER ndash aligning yourself if directly behind the man to your immediate front while maintaining proper distance

25 HALF STEP ndash the rate of marching 60 steps per minute

COMPOSITION OF UNITS AND THEIR HEADS

1 SQUADndash composed of 7 or more men in formation (squad leader)

2 PLATOON ndash composed of 2 or more squads plus one guide (platoon leader)

3 COMPANYndash composed of two or more platoons (company commander)

4 BATTALION ndash composed of two or more companies (battalion commander)

5 REGIMENT ndash composed of 2 or more battalions (regimental commander)

6 BRIGADE ndash Composed of 2 or more Regiments (BRIGADE COMMANDER)

7 DIVISION ndash Composed of 2 or more brigades (DIVISION COMMANDER)

TWO PARTS OF COMMAND

a PREPARATORY COMMAND ndash Alert the troops or subordinates and prepare them for

the movement they are going to execute

b COMMAND OF EXECUTION ndash Tell the troops to do or execute the movement

DRILL COMMANDS

ENGLISH FILIPINO

FilehelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipHanay

AssemblehelliphelliphelliphellipMagtipan

SquadhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTilap

PlatoonhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPulutong

CompanyhelliphelliphelliphellipBalanghay

BattalionhelliphelliphelliphellipTalupad

RegimenthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSampanaw

BrigadehelliphelliphelliphelliphellipBukluran

DivisionhelliphelliphelliphellipDanay

Fall InhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipHumanay

AttentionhelliphelliphelliphellipHumanda

Parade ResthelliphelliphellipTikas Pahinga

Stand AT EasehelliphellipTindigPaluwag

ResthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPahinga

Fall OuthelliphelliphelliphellipTumiwalag

ENGLISH FILIPINO

DismissedhelliphelliphelliphellipLumansag

Left FacehelliphelliphelliphellipHarapsakaliwa RAP

Right FacehelliphelliphelliphellipHarapsakanan RAP

Hand SalutehelliphelliphellipPugayKamay

Count CadencehelliphellipBilangHakbang NA

Forward MarchhelliphellipPasulong KAD

HalthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipHinto

March Time MarchLakadPatakda KAD

Half Step MarchhelliphellipHating Hakbang AD

Double time MarchhellipTakbongHakbang KAD

Quick Time MarchhellipSiglangHakbang KAD

Route MarchhelliphelliphelliphellipLayangHakbang KAD

Right Step MarchhelliphellipHakbangPakanan KAD

Left Step MarchhelliphellipHakbangPakaliwa KAD

ENGLISH FILIPINO

Route StephelliphelliphelliphellipLayangHakbangMarch KAD

Rifle SalutehelliphelliphelliphellipPugaySandata

Unsling ArmshelliphelliphellipIbis Sandata

Fix BayonethelliphelliphellipIkabitangsundang

Raise pistolhelliphelliphelliphellipItaasang pistol

Open ChamberhelliphelliphellipBuksanang pistol

Sir the paradehelliphelliphellipHandanapoangis formed parangal

ReporthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMag-ulat

OfficershelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgapinuno puma-Center March gitna KAD

LoadhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPunluan

Simulate LeadhelliphelliphellipMagpungloKunwari

Stack armshelliphelliphelliphellipBangkoSandata

Sound thehelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIhudyatangpagbabaretreat ngwatawat

Sound OffhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIhudyatangPangal

Attention tohelliphelliphelliphellipMakinigsathe Orderhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipkautusan

Officer of thehelliphelliphelliphellipPunongTagakalingaDay

By Order OfhelliphelliphelliphellipSautosni

ENGLISH FILIPINO

By the helliphellipSabaysaNumber Bilang

Sling ArmshelliphelliphelliphellipSakbitSandata

Adjust SlinghelliphelliphelliphellipAyusinangSakbit

Unfix bayonethelliphelliphellipAlisinangsundang

Withdraw magazinehellipAlisinangpungluan

Insert magazinehelliphellipIsauliangpungluan

Take your helliphelliphelliphellipSumalunan kayopool

Attention to helliphelliphellipMakinigsakautusanOrders

ColorhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIharappabalikangReverse March watawat KAD

UnloadhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipAlisPungla

Cease FiringhelliphelliphelliphellipItigilangPutukan

Take ArmshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipDampotSandata

AdjutantrsquoshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPanawagansaCall Parangal

PublishhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIpahayag andthe Order kautusan

Details forhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgaNakatalagathe day Ngayon

CommanderhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPunongTanodof the Guard

OfficerrsquoshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgapinunoPost March Balik Kad

Staff Behind Me Change PosthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgaKagawadMagpalitngLunan

ENGLISH FILIPINO

In place HalthelliphelliphellipSa lunan Hinto

File from thehelliphelliphellipSunuranmulasaRightLeft kanankaliwa

Guide LefthelliphelliphelliphellipGabayasaKaliwaCenterRight GitnaKanan

Stand FasthelliphelliphelliphellipTatag manatiliWalangkikilos

Left oliquehelliphelliphelliphellipHiligkaliwaMarch KAD

Two Arms LengthhellipIbayongDalawangExtended to the Left Pakaliwa KAD

TroophelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTipon

One TwohelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIsa DalawaThree Four Tatlo Apat

Assemble to thehelliphelliphellipMagtiponsakananRight left march Kaliwa

MounthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSakay

Close onhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipLumapitsaunangLeading Platoon pulutong

Gaiden on LeadinghellipGabaysaunangPlatoons on Line pulutongnghanay

PostshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSaLunan

Dismiss yourhelliphelliphellipTiwalaginanginyongCompany balangay

ENGLISH FILIPINO

Resume marchhelliphellipMagpatuloy KAD

Columns of twoshellipDalawangTatluhangThreesfours Apatangtudling

All present arehelliphelliphellipNaritopolahatAccounted for napagalaman

Right obliquehelliphelliphellipHilispakananMarch Kad

InspectionhelliphelliphelliphellipPagsisiyasat

DetailhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipNakatalaga

PatrolhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTaliba

Take intervalhelliphelliphelliphellipIbayongpatlang March KAD

Unsling equipmenthelliphellipIbabasagamit

Company MasshelliphelliphellipPulo-pulotongsaRightLeft March kanan

Garden on the LinehelliphellipMgagabaysahanay

Guide PosthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgagabaysalunan

Sir the BattalionhelliphelliphellipAngTalupadpo ayis informed handana

Persons to be decoratedhellipMgaparangalan atand all colors Center lahatngwatawatMarch pumagitna KAD

Form the shelter tentshellipMagsisayosngpagtatayongtolda

AT NORMAL INTERVAL

Dress righthelliphelliphelliphellipTuntonkananDress NA

Dress lefthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTuntonkaliwaDress NA

CoverhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPanakip

At Close IntervalhelliphellipMasinsinPagitanDress right Tunton callow NA

At Close IntervalhellipMasinsinPagitanDress left Tuntonkaliwa NA

At Close IntervalhellipMasinsinPagitanFall In Humanay

Close MarchhelliphelliphelliphellipLakadpasinsin KAD

Extended MarchhelliphellipLakadPadalang KAD

Column RighthelliphelliphellipLikoKananLeft March Kaliwa KAD

Column RighthelliphelliphellipLikoHulingKananLeft March (Half) Kaliwa KAD

Incline to thehelliphelliphelliphellipPagawingkananRightLeft Kaliwa KAD

Change StephelliphelliphelliphellipPalitHakbangMarch KAD

Left ShoulderhelliphelliphellipKaliwangBalikatArms Ta

Trail ArmshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipBitbit TA

Port armshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipAgap TA

Inspection ArmshelliphellipSiyasat TA

RightLefthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipKanangKaliwangFlank March Panig KAD

Count offhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSabayangbilang NA

Call offhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTuluyangbilang NA

Center facehelliphelliphelliphellipHumarapsaGitna RAP

Prepare forhelliphelliphelliphellipHumandasa

Inspection Pagsisiyasat

Open RankhelliphelliphelliphellipPabukangTaludtodMarch KAD

Close RankhelliphelliphelliphellipPasinsinTaludtodMarch KAD

Right TurnhelliphelliphelliphellipPihitsaKananMarch KAD

Pass In ReviewhelliphelliphellipPasa Masid

BackwardhelliphelliphelliphellipLakadPaurongMarch KAD

To the RearhelliphelliphelliphellipPabalikMarch KAD

Right shoulderhelliphelliphellipKanangbalikatArms TA

Order armshelliphelliphelliphellipBaba TA

Present ArmshelliphelliphelliphellipTangha TA

Ready EyeshelliphelliphellipHandaKananRightLeft Kaliwa Tingin

Ready FronthelliphelliphelliphellipHanda Harap

ENGLISH FILIPINO

Sir I present the commandhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Ihahandogkopoangpamunuan

Sir the Troop is ready forhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Handanapoangpangkatsa

Trooping for the linehelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip LibutinangHanay

To the LeftRight Marchhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip PakaliwaPakanan KAD

Column of the Platoon Leading Platoonhelliphelliphelliphellip TudlingngpulutongUnangpulutongby the LeftRight Flank March KaliwaKanangpanig KAD

Donrsquot anticipate the commandhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Huwagpangunahanangutos

Sir the Honod Guard is formedhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Handan a poangTanodPandangal

D The Salute ( Pagpugay )

1 Hand Salute - PugayKamay2 Ready Eyes Right - HandaTinginKanan3 Ready Front - Handa RAP

E Steps and Marching ( Hakbang at Lakad )

1 Count Cadence Count - BilangHakbang NA 2 Forward March - Pasulong KAD 3 Platoon Halt - Pulutong Hinto 4 Mark Time March - LakadPatakda KAD 5 Half Step March - Hating Hakbang KAD 6 Double Time March - TakbongHakbang KAD NA 7 Quick Time March - SiglangHakbang KADNA 8 Route March - LayangHakbang NA 9 In place Double Time March - Sa Lunan TakbongHakbang KADNA10 Right Step March - HakbangPakanan NAKAD11 Left Step March - HakbangPakaliwa NAKAD12 Backward March - LakadPaurong KAD13 To the Rear March - Pabalik NA14 Change Step March - PalitHakbang NA15 One Two Three Four - Isa Dalawa Tatlo Apat

2 SCHOOL OF SOLDIERS WITH ARMS ( PagsasanayngKawalna may sandata )

A Manual of Arms ( PagsanaysapaghawakngSandata )

1 Right Shoulder Arms - SaKanangBalikat TA2 Left Shoulder Arms - SaKaliwangBalikat TA3 Order Arms - Baba TA4 Present Arms - Tanghal TA5 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA6 Trail Arms - Bitbit TA7 Sling Arms - Sakbit Sandata8 Unsling Arms - AlisSakbit Sandata9 Fix Bayonet - IkabitBayoneta10 Unfix Bayonet - AlisBayoneta

B Manual of Gidon( ParaanngPagsasanaysaPaghawakngSagisag )

1 Order Guidon - IbabaSagisag2 Carry Guidon - BitbitSagisag3 Raise Guidon - ItaasSagisagC Manual of Arms for the Pistol ( PagsasanaysaPaghawakngPistola )

1 Raise Pistol - ItaasangPistola2 Withdraw Magazine - AlisinangPistola3 Open Chamber - BuksanangPistola4 Close Chamber - IsaraangPistola5 Insert Magazine - IsuksukangPistola6 Return Pistol - IsauliangPungluan

3 Close Order Drill ( MalapitangPagsasanay )

a At Close Interval Fall In - Sa MasinsinPagitan Humanayb Inspection Arms - Siyasat TAc Port Arms - Agap TAd Order Arms - Baba TA

A To Dismiss the Platoon (PagtiwalagngPulutong )

1 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA2 Port Arms - Agap TA3 Dismiss - Lumansag

B To Form the Platoons ( PaghahanayngPulutong )

1 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA2 Port Arms - Agap TA3 Order Arms - Baba TA4 Call Off - TuluyangBilang5 Report - Mag-ulat

C To Align the Squad ( PaghahanayngTilap )

1 Dress Right Dress - TuntonKanan NA2 Dress Left Dress -TuntonKaliwa NA3 At Close Interval Dress RightDress Left -MasinsinPagitan TuntonKananKaliwa NA4 Ready Fort - Handa RAP5 Cover - Tumakip

D To Change Interval while in Line ( PagpalitngpagitanSamantalangNakahanay )

1 Close March - LakadPasinsin KAD2 Extended March - LakadPadalang KAD3 Extended to the Left - IbayongLakadPakaliwa KADE Marching the Squad from a line ( PaglakadsaPangkatmulasaHanay ) 1 Right Face - HarapsaKanan RAP 2 Left Face - HarapsaKaliwa RAP 3 Forward March - Pasulong KAD 4 Column Right March - LikosaKanan KADNA 5 Column Left March - LikosaKaliwa KADNA 6 Column Half Right March - Liko Hating Kanan KADNA 7 Column Half Left March - Liko Hating Kaliwa KADNA 8 Incline to the Left - PagawingKanan 9 Incline to the Right - PagawingKaliwa 10 Right Left March - KaliwaKanangpanig NA

F Counting of Men ( PagbilangngKawal )

1 Count Off - SabayangBilang NA 2 Call Off - TuluyangBilang NA

G To Change Interval While in Column ( PagpalitngPagitanSamantalangNakatudling )

1 Close March - LakadPasinsin KAD 2 Extend March - LakadPadalang KAD

MILITARY DRILLS AND CEREMONIES

MILITARY CEREMONIES - The movement of the larger unit or troops in a prescribed manner from one place to another

1 REVIEW - A military ceremony held in honor of a visiting commander official or dignitary It is also a fittingaffair to present decorations and awards to deserving members or units of the command

A REVIEW IS NORMALLY CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING ELEMENTSa Formation of troopsb Presentation of troopsc Inspection of troopsd Presentation of awards and decorations

2 PARADE - A more formal ceremony than a review In this ceremony the appearance and movement of thetroops in the formation are the primary consideration The preparation and organization of troops forparades are similar to those of a review The line on which the troops are to be formed and the route ofmarch of the participating units are marked or designated The distance between the troops and thecommander for the parade formation is greater than that of a reviewTWO DISTINCT TYPES OF PARADES1 Evening Parade2 Moonlight Parade

DRILL COMMANDS - An oral of a commander

TWO PARTS 1 PREPARATORY COMMAND - States the movement or formation to be carried out and mentally prepares theindividual for its execution It is a command which indicates the movement

2 COMMAND OF EXECUTION - Tells when the movement is to be carried out It is a command which indicates when amovement is to be executed

EXAMPLE FORWARD MARCHForwardPreparatory Command MarchCommand of Execution

PREPARATORY COMMAND AND COMMAND OF EXECUTION

1 Fall in Fall out - Humanay Tumiwalag

2 Rest - Pahinga3 As you were - Manumbalik4 At ease - TindigPaluwag5 Change step - PalikHakbang

SUPPLEMENTARY COMMAND - The subordinate commander gives a supplementary command He turns his head towards themajority of his elements and gives command over his shoulder He does not face about

MASS COMMAND - May be used to develop confidence and enthusiasm All of the members of the unit being trained speak in unison and execute them

THINGS TO OBSERVE IN GIVING COMMANDS

Inflection - The rise and fall of pitch and the tone changes of the voice

Cadence In Command - The uniform and rhythmic flow of words

Snap - The extra quality in command that demands immediate responseREMEMBER

1 Correct commands have a tone cadence and snap that demands willingness correct and immediateresponse 2 The loudness of the command is adjusted to the number of men in the unit 3 The best posture for giving command is at the position of attention 4 The most desirable pitch when beginning a preparatory command is near the level of your natural speaking voice

MILITARY COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

MILITARY COURTESY - Is the expression or manifestation of consideration for others It is a virtue that is expected of all individuals from all walks of life In the Armed Forces courtesy is a great requirement because it is thebasic upon which military discipline stands With courtesy and respect among members of the organizationwould lose its orderliness and later disintegrate Furthermore courtesy promotes good relationship closer coordination and teamwork among members of the organization It makes theorganization dignified and insures good relations with the public

SALUTES- Is the most important form of military courtesy It is executed by raising the right man smartlyUntil the tip of the forefinger touches the eyebrow or the front brim of the head gear when coveredForefingers are extended and joined palm facing the left forearm inclined at an angle of about 45 degrees

and the right upper arm horizontal to the ground A person saluting looks at the person beingsaluted When the salute is returned he drops the right hand smartly to the side

RULES IN RENDERING HAND SALUTEa The salute is required on and off military installations during outside office hoursb Persons entitled to the saluted 1 All commissioned officers of the AFP both male and female 2 Commissioned officers of friendly nations when they are recognized as such 3 Officers of the Coast and Geodetic Survey and the Public Health Service when they are serving with the AFP 4 All civilian who are entitled by custom to salutec The salute is rendered at a distance of about 6 paces from the person saluted of at the recognizable distances about 30 pacesd The salute must be rendered to those entitled to it It is not rendered when running but at halt or walk Never salute with a cigarette cigar or pipe in the mouth The salute should not be executed in a haphazardway or perfunctory manner Salutes are exchange whether individuals are cover or uncoverede The salute is rendered at once if the senior remains in the immediate vicinity and no conversation takesplace the junior again salutes the senior when they are path from each otherf In making reports the person reporting salutes first regardless of rank An example of this case is whenthe unit commander is reporting to the adjutant during ceremoniesg) Whom not to salute

1 Standing to a horse or leading a horse2 While at work In case the officer calls the soldier stops working approaches and salutes him

and again when they are part to each other3 Indoors except when reporting to an officer or when the soldier is on duty sentry or guard4 When carrying articles with both hands or being so occupied as to make saluting practical5 When riding in a fast moving vehicle and the other is dismounted the salute is not rendered

Exception are when the vehicle is clearly marked to indicate a General Officer and when saluting is a part of the ceremony

6 When meeting a prisoner of war Soldier serving as military prisoner are not entitled to salute7 In case of doubt due to absence of specific instruction the salute is rendered

The term ldquooutdoorrdquo is constructed to include such buildings as drill halls gymnasiums and other roofed enclosures used for drill or exercise of troops Theaters covered walks and other shelters open on the side are also considered as outdoor

ldquoIndoorsrdquo include offices hallways kitchen orderly rooms recreation halls washroom and quarters

ldquoUnder armsrdquo means carrying arms having them attached to the person by sling holster or other means In the absence of arms the wearing of cartridge bells pistol holsters and automatic rifle belts also mean ldquounder armsrdquo

TYPES OF SALUTES

a Hand saluteb The Rifle Salute at Order Armsc The Rifle Salute at Trail Armsd The Rifle Salute at Present Armse The Rifle Salute at Shoulder Arms (Right Shoulder)f The Rifle Salute at Left Shoulder Armsg The Gun Saluteh Eyes Right by men in ranks when Pass in Review

REPORTING TO AN OFFICER

The salute is rendered by a junior when reporting to a senior He also salutes before leaving

a REPORTING INDOORS WITHOUT ARMS

A soldier removes his headgear knocks at the door of the office of the officer and enters when told to do so Upon entering he halts at about two paces from the officer and salutes and says Sir Cadet Airman Dela Cruz reporting to the squadron commander Sir The salute will be retained until he completes his report and the officer had returned his salute execute about face and leaves the office

b REPORTING INDOORS UNDER ARMS

The procedure for reporting is the same as discussed above except that the soldier remain covered If carrying a rifle the soldier carries it and salute at trail arms Otherwise the hand salute is given

c REPORTING OUTDOORS

The procedure for reporting to an officer the head gear is not removed Rifles should be carried at trail arms or at the right shoulder The hand salute or rifle salute is given as the case may be

d REPORTING FOR PAY

The soldier reporting for pay answers ldquoHererdquo when his name is called approaches and salutes the officer He picks up and count his money and leaves without saluting The officer does not return his salute

OTHER COURTESY TO INDIVIDUALS

a) When an officer enters the room or tent officersrsquo junior to him and enlisted men present with uncover (if unarmed and stand at attention until the officer directs otherwise or leaves the room) When more than one individual are present the first one who perceive the officer will command ldquoAttentionrdquo loud enough to be heard by everybody present

b) When an officer enters a room or tent used as an office working shop or recreation room those at work or at play are not required to come to attention unless addressed by the officer A transaction of routine business between individuals at work

c) When an officer enters an enlisted menus hall the group is called to ldquoAt Easerdquo by the person noticing him first Men remain seated at ease and continue eating unless the officer directs otherwise A soldiers addresses stop eating and sits at attention until the conversation has ended

d) When accompanying a senior a junior walks or ride on his left except when accompanying senior during inspection

e) When entering a car or a small boat the senior goes in first and others follow in the order of rank In getting off he junior goes out first and others follow in the inverse order of rank

HONORS TO THE NATIONAL ANTHEM OR TO THE COLORS

I OUTDOOR

- Wheneverwherever the National Anthem or the colors is played military personnel not in the formation must observe the following

1 At the first note of the music stand at attention and render the prescribed salute except atthe escort of the color or at retreat when they will face toward the color or flag and salute The salute is retained until the last note of the music

2 The mounted on animals will halt and render the salute mounted Individuals loadinganimals or standing to a horse will stand at attention having the salute

3 Vehicles in motion will be brought to a halt Persons riding on a passenger car or amotorcycle will dismount and salute as described above Occupants of combat vehicles such a tanks half trucks scout cars and armored cars will remain in their vehicles but stand at attention and salute

4 The above respect to the National Color is rendered to the National Anthem or colors offriendly nations

II INDOORS

- When the national anthem is played officer and men will stand at attention and face the music or the flag but do not salute

UNCOVERING- Officer and enlisted men under arms uncover when

a) Seated as a member of or in attendance at a court or board Sentinels guarding prisoners do not uncover

b) Entering places of divine worship

c) Indoors when not in duty

d) In attendance at an official reception

DISPLAY AND SALUTE TO THE FLAG

a The Philippine flag represents our nation and should always be given a place of runner

b The National Flag is never dipped for salute nor is it permitted to touch the ground It is not used as a costume dress or a drapery No lettering or object should be placed on it

c The flag is played in the following manners1 When hoisted at a flag pole it should be hoisted fully at the top of the pole blue part

up or above During mornings the flag is hoisted to the top of the pole first then hauled down until the flag is about midway of the length of the pole

2 When the national flag is displayed with another flag whether they are standing sideby side or with their staff crossed the National Flag is at the right side blue part up

3 When placed in the vertical manner the triangle is up the blue color at the right4 When displayed in the horizontal position the triangle is at the right side with the blue

part up5 When displayed over the casket the triangle is in the direction of the head of the cadaver with

the blue part on the right side

During the ceremonies wherein the holstering or lowering of the flag is done or when it passes by during parades or reviews all persons present except those detailed in holstering lowering and carrying the flag should face it at attention and salute while those in uniform remove their headdress with their right hand and place them over their left breast Women should salute by placing their right hand on their left breastMILITARY DISCIPLINE

Military discipline is the mental attitude and state of training which renders obedience and proper conduct instinctive under all conditions It is founded upon respect for loyalty to properly constituted authority While it is primarily developed by military drills every feature in military life has its effect upon military discipline It is generally indicated in an individual or unit by smartness of appearance and action cleanliness of dress equipment or quarters respect for senior and by the prompt and cheerful obedience by the subordinates of both the latter and spirit of the legal orders

RELATION OF COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

The relation of military discipline to courtesy is clearly explained by the fact that discipline is founded upon by respect and loyalty to superiors and lawfully constituted authorities In other words discipline originates and develops mutual respect and goodwill among members of an organization Without courtesy and respect among members of an organization discipline disappears there will be no peace and order in the organization hence it will disintegrate

IMPORTANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Mass discipline and morale are essential factors for securing cohesive action and for ensuring that singleness or purpose which alone can triumph over the most difficult conditions of war The successful leader will teach his men to recognize and face fear because fear is the enemy of discipline and morale Fear unchecked will lead to panic and a unit that is panicky is no longer a disciplined one but a mob There is no same person who is without fear but with good discipline and morale all will face danger if not willingly at least resignedly because of their inborn sentiment of duty or courage of loyalty and because of their sense of pride in their country in their unit and in themselves in other words because of their esprit de corps

The need for discipline is recognized in many places outside the Armed Forces It reaches at highest form in teams wherein individual desires are subordinated to the interests of the entire team The Armed Forces are more in need of discipline for several reasons First the task of making war is not doing it because we as individuals have to do it in the interest of our country Because of that we cannot be allowed as individual to decide which part of the job each of us will do or how each part to be done Second the organization must be prepared for situations wherein leaders may be lost Personal loyalty for the commandment is not enough If a leader is killed his men must accept orders from his successor immediately and without question to carry on the battle Finally the tremendous size of all Armed Forces demands that there be uniform ways of doing things Discipline subordinates personal and self considerations to the interest of the group

MAINTENANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Discipline is installed in men through instructions pride and traditions and regulations You will develop appreciation of the other factors which build discipline as time passes One must know and understand the different laws and regulations immediately

Discipline is maintained in much the same manner as it is attained The article of war punishes military individualsrsquo fairness and justice high moral pride and responsibility contribute to maintain discipline as to developing it

CHAPTER IVARMED FORCES OF THE PHILIPPINESrsquo HISTORY

Brief History of the AFPCommonwealth Act no 1 otherwise known as the National Defense Act was approved on 21

December 1935 which gave the basic organization of the AFP General Douglas McArthur served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon Major General Dwight D Eisenhower and Major General James Ord members of the McArthurrsquos Staff helped in the planting of the Philippine Military Establishment as well as organizing it

As President Quezon issued Executive Order no 11 on January 1936 which formally established the Army of the Philippines he recalled Colonel Jose Delos Reyes of the Philippine Constabulary to active duty and later promoted him to Brigadier General and designated him as Acting Chief of Staff of the Army Brigadier General Basilio J Valdez and Colonel Guillermo B Francisco were named 1 st and 2nd Asst Chief of Staff respectively

In the same order the Philippine Constabulary became the nucleus of the regular forces of the Philippine Army Filipino citizens were required to go training under the National Defense Act since 1936 that would compose reserve force By the end of the ten year Commonwealth period in 1946 there would have been a trained Philippine Army Reserve pool of 400000 officers and men including the graduates of the ROTC Basic and Advance Course in accredited colleges and universities

When the Philippine Constabulary became part of the Philippine Army the PC Air Corps which was activated on 2 January 1955 was re designated Philippine Air Force on 3 July 1947

On February 1939 an Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was organized as a unit of the Philippine Army Initially equipped with three Q-boats (torpedo boats) and a handful of officers and men hurriedly trained in the rudiments of Sea-Warfare the OSP squadron provided coastal support to the beleaguered Filipino-American forces in the battles of Bataan and Corregidor In October 1947 the OSP was renamed Philippine Naval Patrol and on 5 January 1951 it became the Philippine Navy The OSP was often referred to as Mosquito Fleet

When President Franklin D Roosevelt of the USA declared the state of National Emergency on 26 July 1941 and ordered the induction of the Philippine Army units into the US Armed Forces in the Far East under the command of General Douglas Mc Arthur the Philippine Army had a reserve force of about 100000 officers and men at the time of the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked the Pearl Harbor Clark Field and other targets on 8 December 1941 The Philippine Army Reserve Force totaled around 200000 officers and men

The Philippine Army retained its own organization while serving with the USAFFE After the fall of Bataan on 9 April 1942 many officers and men of the Philippine Army continued resistance against the Japanese by forming guerilla forces all over the country These USAFFE guerilla forces along with other units organized by civilians in various parts of the country fought the Japanese Forces from 1942 to 1945 When the US Liberation Forces landed in Leyte on 20 October 1944 all the guerilla forces participated actively on the liberation on their respective sectors of operations

On October 1947 President Manual A Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 which organized all government agencies The Military establishment was not spared from its official designation as Army of the Philippines and it became the Armed Forces of the Philippines The ten pre-war military districts were deactivated but 4 Military Areas were also activated to enhance the efficiency of the Constabulary personnel all over the country

The post-war Philippine Army eventually got its forces fighting another battle ndash the battle against the armed elements of the Communist Party of the Philippines the HUKBALAHAP later renamed HMB For the anti0dissident campaign Army Sector Command and Battalion Combat Teams were formed During the Korean war the 10th 20th 11th 19th and 2nd BCTrsquos were sent as Philippine Expeditionary Force as the member of the United Nations PEFTOK served in Korea from 1950-1955 On 25 December 1950 President Quirino issued Executive Order No 389 renaming headquarters AFP to General Headquarters AFP and activating the 4 major services The Philippine Army Philippine Constabulary Philippine Air Force and Philippine Navy

From the time the Philippines joined the Southeast Asia Treaty Organization (SEATO) in September 1954 the AFP cooperated actively with the other member nations in the enhancing of military preparedness in the area

As a member of the UN the Philippines also sent a Philippine Air Force Contingent of 77 officers and men on a pacification campaign to the Congo Republic on 11 February 1963

In 1966 the Philippine Civic Action Group (PHICAG) was activated to implement the provisions of RA 4644 Composed of engineers medical and rural community development teams and security personnel the PHILCAG was sent to the Republic of South Vietnam and engaged in socio-economic projects mutually agreed upon by the governments of the Republic of the Philippines and Republic of South Vietnam

The AFP has shown an increasing awareness of its arrival in the country and its vital role in the political and economic development of the country by engaging are actively in civic action programs

Pursuant to the Socio-economic Military Program under RA 2056 the Chief of Staff AFP ordered the assignment of military personnel for public works construction food production land settlement and rural development Several civic centers of the AFP

To give greater impetus on the civic action the 51st Engineer Brigade consisting of 10 Engineer Construction Battalion was activated on 10 March 1962 This unit had constructed several much needed highways roads and bridges in various parts of the country The 52nd Engineer Brigade which was organized on 1 July 1969 also performed similar functions to holster the national program for social and economical developments

Today the AFP is employing all its resources in assisting the socio-economic development programs of the government without prejudice to its primary missions of improving and maintaining the effectiveness of the countryrsquos defense posture

SIGNIFICANT FACTS TO REMEMBER

MACTAN ndash place where the first revolt against Spain took place on April 26 1951 The firstrebellion Spain flared up in Bohol and Leyte

ANDRES MALONG ndash led the first major revolt in Luzon in 1660 He proclaimed himself as aKing of PangasinanLAPU ndash LAPU ndash was the first Filipino hero

MIGUEL VICOS ndash the Spanish Meztiso who assassinated Diego Silang on May 28 1863

RED WITH A FIGURE OF A SUN ndash color of the first flag of the Philippines in 1897

ANDRES BONIFACIO ndash was the founder of the Revolutionary Society called Katipunan

GEN GREGORIO DEL PILAR ndash led the Filipino forces in the Battle of Tirad Pass

AUGUST 29 1896 ndash the date designated as the start of the revolution which was also known as

Cry of BalintawakDECEMBER 14 1897 ndashdate when the Treaty of Paris and Fact of Biak-na-bato was signed

FACT OF BIAK-NA-BATO ndash an agreement between the Filipino and the Spanish authoritieson December 14 1897 to stop all hostilities

MARCELA AGONCILLO ndash designed and made the first flag of the first Philippine Republic

JULIAN FELIPE ndash was the composer of the Philippine National AnthemEMILIO AGUINALDO ndash was the first president of the Philippines

BALANAN ISABELA ndash the place where Gen Emilio Aguinaldo was captured In 1922 the US War Dept authorized the establishment of the Dept of Military Science andTactics under the supervision of the US Army This was established in theUniversity of the Philippines

MANUEL LUIS QUEZON ndash the first president of the Philippine Commonwealth

COMMONWEALTH ACT NO1 ndash is otherwise known as the National Defense Act issued by President Quezon and approved on December 21 1935 and gave the basicorganization of the AFP

GENERAL DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon during the Commonwealth period that helped in the planning andorganization of the Philippine Military EstablishmentGENDOUGLAS MCARTHURrsquoS STAFF

1 MAJ GEN DWIGHT D EISENHOWER2 MAJ GEN JAMES ORD

JANUARY 11 1936 ndash the date President Manuel L Quezon issued Executive Order No 11 onthe establishment of the PA

BRIG GEN BASILIO J VALDEZ ndash first assistant Chief of staff

BRIG GEN JOSE DELOS REYES ndash designated as the first Chief of Staff of the PhilippineArmy

COL GUILLERMO B FRANCISCO ndash 2nd assistant Chief of Staff The PHILLIPINE CONSTABULARY became the nucleus of the Philippine Army and the Philippine Constabulary Air Corps (PCA) was activated on January 2 1937

FEBRUARY 9 1939 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was activated and organized as a unit of thePhilippine Army The Off-Shore Patrol was equipped with Q-Boats (Torpedo Boat)and referred to as the ldquoMosquito Fleetrdquo

PRESIDENT FRANKLIN DELANO ROOSEVELT ndash President of the USA who set July 26 1941 as the date for the declaration of State of National Emergency and at the sametime the induction of the Philippine Army to United States Armed Forces to the Far East (USAFFE) with a total force of 160000 officers and men

GEN DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash was designated as the USAFFE COMMANDER

DECEMBER 8 1941 ndash the date the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked Pearl Harbor Clark Fieldand other targets

APRIL 9 1942 ndash fall of Bataan

MAY 6 1942 ndash fall of Corregidor

MAJOR FERDINAND EDRALIN MARCOS ndash was the most decorated soldier during the World War II and was a recipient of 27 medals

OCTOBER 20 1944 ndash the date the US Liberation Forces landed in Red Beach in Palo Leyte

JULY 3 1947 ndash the date the PC Air Corps was re-designated as the Philippine Air Force

OCTOBER 1947 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol was renamed Phil Naval Patrol ndash the date President Manuel Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 remainingthe Army of the Philippines as Armed Forces of the Philippines andactivating the 4 military areas

ARAW NG KAGITINGAN ndash a day set to commemorate the Fall of Bataan Fall of Corregidorand Fall of Bessang Pass Based on the historical records the independenceof the Republic of the Philippines was on June 12 1898

JULY 4 1946 ndash declaration of the Independence by the USA celebrated today as PhilippineAmerican Friendship Day

JULY 1950 ndash the Philippine Army was separated from the Gen Headquarters Philippine Army

DECEMBER 23 1950 ndash President ElpidioQuirino issued Executive Order No 389 renamingthe Headquarters AFP to Gen Headquarters AFP (GHQ AFP)

JANUARY 5 1951 ndash the Phil Naval Patrol was renamed the Philippine Naval of thePHILIPPINE NAVY

1959 ndash 1955 ndash the Battalion Combat Teams were sent to Korea to comply with the commitmentsof the Philippines as member of the UN The BCT was known as the PHILIPPINE EXPEDITIONARY FORCE TO KOREA (PEFTOK)

SEPTEMBER 1954 ndash The Philippines joined the Southeast Asian Treaty Org (SEATO)

APRIL 11 1963 ndash the PAF contingent of 77 officers and men were sent to Congo Republic of South VietnamPHIL CIVIC ACTION GROUP (PHILCAG) ndash the group of engineers medical and ruralcommunity development team and security personnel were sent by thePhilippines to the representative of South Vietnam

FEBRUARY 22-25 1986 ndash the bloodless peoples revolution which deposed Ferdinand Marcosfrom the presidency and as Commander in elected President of thePhilippines commonly referred to as the EDSA Revolution

ACRONYMSBCT ndash Battalion Combat TeamGHQ ndash General HeadquartersHMB ndash HukbongMapagpalayang Bayan (HUKBALAHAP)PHILCAG-V ndash Philippine Civic Action Group to VietnamSEATO ndash Southeast Asian Treaty OrganizationOSP ndash Off-Shore PatrolPEFTOK ndash Philippine Expeditionary Force to Korea

ENLISTED PERSONNELrsquoS RANKS

MarinesArmy Navy Constabulary Air Force

C ndash CadetCadette M- MidshipmanMidshipwoman

CHAPTER V

MILITARY LEADERSHIP AND COMMAND

A Leadership ndash is the art of influencing and directing men to an assigned goal is such a way toobtain their obedience respect and loyal cooperation Leadership can beexercised by anyone at anytime respective of the frame work of the command

Command ndash is the authority which an individual in the military service lawfully exercisedover subordinates by virtue of his rank and assignment Command andleadership are inseparable whether the function of the command is complex orsimple the commander should always be the controlling head

B TWO TYPES OF LEADER

1 Authoritarian ndash a leader who leads his men by means of rank and position

2 Persuasive ndash a leader who leads his men by always setting examples

C BASIC ELEMENTS OF LEADERSHIP

1 Character ndash to be a leader a person must be of good character Some indications arehonesty good manners industrious self-control and bravery

2 Intelligence ndash is the ability to grasp knowledge easily It includes native ability goodcommon sense and judgment

3 Alertness ndash is mental and physical watchfulness vigilance and observance to his planned and future activity

D LEADERSHIP RESPONSIBILITIES

1 Accomplishment of the assigned mission or task

2 Work for the welfare of his men

E LEADERSHIP TRAITS

1 Knowledge ndash professional knowledge of the job Understands the characteristics of his men2 Bearing ndash dignified appearance and behavior

3 Courage ndash physical and moral ability to act in spite of danger or hardship

4 Decisiveness ndash ability to decide promptly and correctly the proper time and to announce his decision clearly and briefly with authority

5 Dependability ndash performance of duty with or without supervision

6 Endurance ndash physical and mental strength to continue or complete a task

7 Enthusiasm ndash interest in his work or task at hand

8 Force ndash the ability to compel obedience

9 Humility ndash state of being reasonable and proud but not arrogant and boastful

10 Humor ndash ability to appreciate and narrate amusing incidents of everyday life

11 Initiative ndash ability to start or originate an idea or work even when others are absent

12 Judgment ndash power of mind to weight factors affecting a problem and to decide properly

13 Integrity ndash good moral character

14 Justice ndash impartiality in dealing with others giving credit when due and punishment when so demanded

15 Loyalty - sincerity and faithfulness to superiors for the good of the unit

16 Sympathy ndash mutual feelings to others

17 Tact ndash ability to deal with people without hurting their feelings

18 Unselfishness - avoidance of personal consideration that gives a disadvantage

to others

F PRINCIPLES IN LEADERSHIP

1 Know your job - must have thorough professional knowledge of his duties and responsibilities to

command and gain respect from his men

2Know yourself and seek self-improvement - a leader should analyze himself to determine his

good qualities and learn to recognize and correct his weakness

3 Know your men and look after their welfare - understand each of your men personally

psychologically in order to effectively lead them

4 Keep your men informed - keep your men knowledgeable background in all aspects its

organization and mission in order to function effectively

5 Set an example -set a good example as a model in loyalty in superiors and subordinates good

bearing and attitudes pride and faithfulness to the organization

6 Insure the task is understood supervised and accomplished - a leader should give a clear and

concise order that can be understood He supervises his men to accomplish the

assigned mission

7 Train your men as a team - teamwork is a must within and among units from the

smallest to the largest Each men should understand that he has a job to perform

and must cooperate with others in achieving the common objective

8 Make sound and timely decisions - the ability to make raid estimate of the situation Arrive at the

sound decision and announce his decision in the correct form of the proper is

essential to a leader For any situation that may arise the leader should be able to

act logically

9 Develop a sense of responsibility among your subordinates - the leader should train his

subordinates to act in the absence of orders when the situation so demands He

develops responsibility among his subordinates byproper delegation of his

authority and holding them responsible for theaccomplishment of their mission

10 Employ your commands in accordance with its capability - the leader must have thorough knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of his command He must assign objectives that is responsible to be attained However when the situation so demands then men must be forced to action beyond their normal endurance so as to avoid a harder or more costly consequence on their part

11 See responsibility and take responsibility for your action - learn the seniors job for youmay assume his position later on Take advantage of the responsibility delegated toyou and do not back out in case of failure

ROLES OF A LEADER

1 The leader is a model soldier2 The leader is a commander3 The leader is an instructor4 The leader is a personal manager5 The leader is a councilor6 The leader is a custodian of his mens welfare

OBJECTIVES OF A LEADER

1 MORALE - the mental and emotional state of an individual 2 DISCIPLINE - the prompt and willing obedience to orders Complying to regulations and initiating appropriate action even in theabsence of orders 3 PROFICIENCY - the technical tactical and physical ability of an individual to perform their mission 4 ESPRIT DE CORPS - More than the aggregate personality it is how the individuals feel about their unit Jealous of enthusiasticfor pride in and devotion for

MAP READING

MAP - is a graphical representation of the earths surface drawn to a scale on aplane When you look at the map you are actually looking at a picture ofthe ground from a high spot in the air MAP COLOR - different colors are used on the printing of the maps to assist the use understanding it A GREEN - represents all types of vegetables B BLUE - signifies bodies of water such as rivers lakes swamps and streams C RED - indicates first class roads and prominent locations such as theProvincial or Municipal Capitals May be used to stress the significance ofimportant map locations

D BROWN - depicts contour lines which are representation of the relatives elevation and relief of the terrain

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

B Enlisted personnel ranksC CMP and CATI ranks

V Military leadership and command26A DefinitionB CommandC Leadership

1 Two types of leader2 Basic elements of leadership3 Leadership responsibilities4 Leadership traits5 Leadership Principles276 Roles of a leader287 Objective of a leader

VI Map readingA Definition28B Map colors29C Two main parts of the map D Marginal information

1 Top margin2 Right margin3 Bottom margin

E Types of margin30F Uses and categories of military maps

1 Types of scale2 Types of north313 Measuring distance4 Location identifying

G Military symbols341 Color2 Figure3 Military units 4 Unit representation35

VII Preparatory Marksmanship36A DefinitionB Elements of marksmanshipC Steps in preparatory marksmanshipD Sighting and aiming exerciseE Kind of sling adjustmentF Position exerciseG Trigger squeeze37

H Important things to remember37I Zeroing the rifleJ Organization of firing line

VIII Basic weapon of the AFP38A The US rifle caliber 30M1 (grand)

1 Main group of cal 30M12 Characteristics3 Other data4 Sequence of disassembly5 Operation

B M 16 rifle (556 mm armalight)381 Characteristics2 Functioning393 General data4 Sequence of disassembly and assembly405 Parts of M 16 rifle41

DRILL AND CEREMONIES

All commands in CAT-I drills are given in Filipino language

TWO KINDS OF COMMANDS

A) Preparatory commandsB) Command of execution

- Preparatory command is written in small letters while the command of execution is written in capital letters as a rule

FIVE COMMANDS OF EXECUTION

1 TA ndash For manual of arms2 RAP ndash for facing and movement at rest3 KAD ndash from rest going to motion4 NA ndash while in motion to another motion5 TO ndash while in motion to stop

DEFINITION OF TERMS

1 ELEMENT ndash is a part of unit for example an individual is an element of a team or a squad a team is an element of a squad and an element is an element of a platoon

2 FORMATION ndash The arrangement of elements in a prescribed manner

3 LINE ndash a formation in which the element are placed side by side with each other

4 RANK ndash a single line of individuals or vehicles placed side by side facing to one direction

5 COLUMN ndash a formation where the elements are placed one behind the other

6 FILE ndash a single column of individuals

7 FLANK ndash the right or left side of an individual unit or formation

8 INTERVAL ndash the space between elements in line Close interval is four inches while normal is one arm length

9 DISTANCE ndash the space between elements in column

10 CENTERndash Middle of a formation

11 ALIGNMENT ndash the arrangement of individuals or troops of a straight of a formation

12 GUIDE ndash an individual ahead or at the straight of a platoon or formation designated to control direction and rate of march

13 PACE ndash a step of 28 inches the length of full step in quick time

14 STEP ndash normal step in marching A side step is 12 inches a half step of 14 inches and a back step is 12 inches

15 CADENCE ndash the correct step and timing in marching

16 QUICK TIME ndash a normal cadence in marching at 120 steps per minute

17 DOUBLE TIME ndash a faster cadence in marching at 180 steps per minute

18 DEPTH ndash the space from front to rear of any formation including the front and rear elements The depth of a man from his chest to his back is assumed to be 12 inches

19 BASE ndash the element on which a movement is planned and regulated

20 FRONT ndash the space occupied by an element measures from flank to flank

21 HEAD ndash the leading element in a column

22 in order of march or advance

23 POST ndash the correct place for an officer of non-commissioned officer to stand in a prescribed formation

24 COVER ndash aligning yourself if directly behind the man to your immediate front while maintaining proper distance

25 HALF STEP ndash the rate of marching 60 steps per minute

COMPOSITION OF UNITS AND THEIR HEADS

1 SQUADndash composed of 7 or more men in formation (squad leader)

2 PLATOON ndash composed of 2 or more squads plus one guide (platoon leader)

3 COMPANYndash composed of two or more platoons (company commander)

4 BATTALION ndash composed of two or more companies (battalion commander)

5 REGIMENT ndash composed of 2 or more battalions (regimental commander)

6 BRIGADE ndash Composed of 2 or more Regiments (BRIGADE COMMANDER)

7 DIVISION ndash Composed of 2 or more brigades (DIVISION COMMANDER)

TWO PARTS OF COMMAND

a PREPARATORY COMMAND ndash Alert the troops or subordinates and prepare them for

the movement they are going to execute

b COMMAND OF EXECUTION ndash Tell the troops to do or execute the movement

DRILL COMMANDS

ENGLISH FILIPINO

FilehelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipHanay

AssemblehelliphelliphelliphellipMagtipan

SquadhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTilap

PlatoonhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPulutong

CompanyhelliphelliphelliphellipBalanghay

BattalionhelliphelliphelliphellipTalupad

RegimenthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSampanaw

BrigadehelliphelliphelliphelliphellipBukluran

DivisionhelliphelliphelliphellipDanay

Fall InhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipHumanay

AttentionhelliphelliphelliphellipHumanda

Parade ResthelliphelliphellipTikas Pahinga

Stand AT EasehelliphellipTindigPaluwag

ResthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPahinga

Fall OuthelliphelliphelliphellipTumiwalag

ENGLISH FILIPINO

DismissedhelliphelliphelliphellipLumansag

Left FacehelliphelliphelliphellipHarapsakaliwa RAP

Right FacehelliphelliphelliphellipHarapsakanan RAP

Hand SalutehelliphelliphellipPugayKamay

Count CadencehelliphellipBilangHakbang NA

Forward MarchhelliphellipPasulong KAD

HalthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipHinto

March Time MarchLakadPatakda KAD

Half Step MarchhelliphellipHating Hakbang AD

Double time MarchhellipTakbongHakbang KAD

Quick Time MarchhellipSiglangHakbang KAD

Route MarchhelliphelliphelliphellipLayangHakbang KAD

Right Step MarchhelliphellipHakbangPakanan KAD

Left Step MarchhelliphellipHakbangPakaliwa KAD

ENGLISH FILIPINO

Route StephelliphelliphelliphellipLayangHakbangMarch KAD

Rifle SalutehelliphelliphelliphellipPugaySandata

Unsling ArmshelliphelliphellipIbis Sandata

Fix BayonethelliphelliphellipIkabitangsundang

Raise pistolhelliphelliphelliphellipItaasang pistol

Open ChamberhelliphelliphellipBuksanang pistol

Sir the paradehelliphelliphellipHandanapoangis formed parangal

ReporthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMag-ulat

OfficershelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgapinuno puma-Center March gitna KAD

LoadhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPunluan

Simulate LeadhelliphelliphellipMagpungloKunwari

Stack armshelliphelliphelliphellipBangkoSandata

Sound thehelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIhudyatangpagbabaretreat ngwatawat

Sound OffhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIhudyatangPangal

Attention tohelliphelliphelliphellipMakinigsathe Orderhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipkautusan

Officer of thehelliphelliphelliphellipPunongTagakalingaDay

By Order OfhelliphelliphelliphellipSautosni

ENGLISH FILIPINO

By the helliphellipSabaysaNumber Bilang

Sling ArmshelliphelliphelliphellipSakbitSandata

Adjust SlinghelliphelliphelliphellipAyusinangSakbit

Unfix bayonethelliphelliphellipAlisinangsundang

Withdraw magazinehellipAlisinangpungluan

Insert magazinehelliphellipIsauliangpungluan

Take your helliphelliphelliphellipSumalunan kayopool

Attention to helliphelliphellipMakinigsakautusanOrders

ColorhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIharappabalikangReverse March watawat KAD

UnloadhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipAlisPungla

Cease FiringhelliphelliphelliphellipItigilangPutukan

Take ArmshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipDampotSandata

AdjutantrsquoshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPanawagansaCall Parangal

PublishhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIpahayag andthe Order kautusan

Details forhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgaNakatalagathe day Ngayon

CommanderhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPunongTanodof the Guard

OfficerrsquoshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgapinunoPost March Balik Kad

Staff Behind Me Change PosthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgaKagawadMagpalitngLunan

ENGLISH FILIPINO

In place HalthelliphelliphellipSa lunan Hinto

File from thehelliphelliphellipSunuranmulasaRightLeft kanankaliwa

Guide LefthelliphelliphelliphellipGabayasaKaliwaCenterRight GitnaKanan

Stand FasthelliphelliphelliphellipTatag manatiliWalangkikilos

Left oliquehelliphelliphelliphellipHiligkaliwaMarch KAD

Two Arms LengthhellipIbayongDalawangExtended to the Left Pakaliwa KAD

TroophelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTipon

One TwohelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIsa DalawaThree Four Tatlo Apat

Assemble to thehelliphelliphellipMagtiponsakananRight left march Kaliwa

MounthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSakay

Close onhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipLumapitsaunangLeading Platoon pulutong

Gaiden on LeadinghellipGabaysaunangPlatoons on Line pulutongnghanay

PostshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSaLunan

Dismiss yourhelliphelliphellipTiwalaginanginyongCompany balangay

ENGLISH FILIPINO

Resume marchhelliphellipMagpatuloy KAD

Columns of twoshellipDalawangTatluhangThreesfours Apatangtudling

All present arehelliphelliphellipNaritopolahatAccounted for napagalaman

Right obliquehelliphelliphellipHilispakananMarch Kad

InspectionhelliphelliphelliphellipPagsisiyasat

DetailhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipNakatalaga

PatrolhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTaliba

Take intervalhelliphelliphelliphellipIbayongpatlang March KAD

Unsling equipmenthelliphellipIbabasagamit

Company MasshelliphelliphellipPulo-pulotongsaRightLeft March kanan

Garden on the LinehelliphellipMgagabaysahanay

Guide PosthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgagabaysalunan

Sir the BattalionhelliphelliphellipAngTalupadpo ayis informed handana

Persons to be decoratedhellipMgaparangalan atand all colors Center lahatngwatawatMarch pumagitna KAD

Form the shelter tentshellipMagsisayosngpagtatayongtolda

AT NORMAL INTERVAL

Dress righthelliphelliphelliphellipTuntonkananDress NA

Dress lefthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTuntonkaliwaDress NA

CoverhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPanakip

At Close IntervalhelliphellipMasinsinPagitanDress right Tunton callow NA

At Close IntervalhellipMasinsinPagitanDress left Tuntonkaliwa NA

At Close IntervalhellipMasinsinPagitanFall In Humanay

Close MarchhelliphelliphelliphellipLakadpasinsin KAD

Extended MarchhelliphellipLakadPadalang KAD

Column RighthelliphelliphellipLikoKananLeft March Kaliwa KAD

Column RighthelliphelliphellipLikoHulingKananLeft March (Half) Kaliwa KAD

Incline to thehelliphelliphelliphellipPagawingkananRightLeft Kaliwa KAD

Change StephelliphelliphelliphellipPalitHakbangMarch KAD

Left ShoulderhelliphelliphellipKaliwangBalikatArms Ta

Trail ArmshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipBitbit TA

Port armshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipAgap TA

Inspection ArmshelliphellipSiyasat TA

RightLefthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipKanangKaliwangFlank March Panig KAD

Count offhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSabayangbilang NA

Call offhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTuluyangbilang NA

Center facehelliphelliphelliphellipHumarapsaGitna RAP

Prepare forhelliphelliphelliphellipHumandasa

Inspection Pagsisiyasat

Open RankhelliphelliphelliphellipPabukangTaludtodMarch KAD

Close RankhelliphelliphelliphellipPasinsinTaludtodMarch KAD

Right TurnhelliphelliphelliphellipPihitsaKananMarch KAD

Pass In ReviewhelliphelliphellipPasa Masid

BackwardhelliphelliphelliphellipLakadPaurongMarch KAD

To the RearhelliphelliphelliphellipPabalikMarch KAD

Right shoulderhelliphelliphellipKanangbalikatArms TA

Order armshelliphelliphelliphellipBaba TA

Present ArmshelliphelliphelliphellipTangha TA

Ready EyeshelliphelliphellipHandaKananRightLeft Kaliwa Tingin

Ready FronthelliphelliphelliphellipHanda Harap

ENGLISH FILIPINO

Sir I present the commandhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Ihahandogkopoangpamunuan

Sir the Troop is ready forhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Handanapoangpangkatsa

Trooping for the linehelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip LibutinangHanay

To the LeftRight Marchhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip PakaliwaPakanan KAD

Column of the Platoon Leading Platoonhelliphelliphelliphellip TudlingngpulutongUnangpulutongby the LeftRight Flank March KaliwaKanangpanig KAD

Donrsquot anticipate the commandhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Huwagpangunahanangutos

Sir the Honod Guard is formedhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Handan a poangTanodPandangal

D The Salute ( Pagpugay )

1 Hand Salute - PugayKamay2 Ready Eyes Right - HandaTinginKanan3 Ready Front - Handa RAP

E Steps and Marching ( Hakbang at Lakad )

1 Count Cadence Count - BilangHakbang NA 2 Forward March - Pasulong KAD 3 Platoon Halt - Pulutong Hinto 4 Mark Time March - LakadPatakda KAD 5 Half Step March - Hating Hakbang KAD 6 Double Time March - TakbongHakbang KAD NA 7 Quick Time March - SiglangHakbang KADNA 8 Route March - LayangHakbang NA 9 In place Double Time March - Sa Lunan TakbongHakbang KADNA10 Right Step March - HakbangPakanan NAKAD11 Left Step March - HakbangPakaliwa NAKAD12 Backward March - LakadPaurong KAD13 To the Rear March - Pabalik NA14 Change Step March - PalitHakbang NA15 One Two Three Four - Isa Dalawa Tatlo Apat

2 SCHOOL OF SOLDIERS WITH ARMS ( PagsasanayngKawalna may sandata )

A Manual of Arms ( PagsanaysapaghawakngSandata )

1 Right Shoulder Arms - SaKanangBalikat TA2 Left Shoulder Arms - SaKaliwangBalikat TA3 Order Arms - Baba TA4 Present Arms - Tanghal TA5 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA6 Trail Arms - Bitbit TA7 Sling Arms - Sakbit Sandata8 Unsling Arms - AlisSakbit Sandata9 Fix Bayonet - IkabitBayoneta10 Unfix Bayonet - AlisBayoneta

B Manual of Gidon( ParaanngPagsasanaysaPaghawakngSagisag )

1 Order Guidon - IbabaSagisag2 Carry Guidon - BitbitSagisag3 Raise Guidon - ItaasSagisagC Manual of Arms for the Pistol ( PagsasanaysaPaghawakngPistola )

1 Raise Pistol - ItaasangPistola2 Withdraw Magazine - AlisinangPistola3 Open Chamber - BuksanangPistola4 Close Chamber - IsaraangPistola5 Insert Magazine - IsuksukangPistola6 Return Pistol - IsauliangPungluan

3 Close Order Drill ( MalapitangPagsasanay )

a At Close Interval Fall In - Sa MasinsinPagitan Humanayb Inspection Arms - Siyasat TAc Port Arms - Agap TAd Order Arms - Baba TA

A To Dismiss the Platoon (PagtiwalagngPulutong )

1 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA2 Port Arms - Agap TA3 Dismiss - Lumansag

B To Form the Platoons ( PaghahanayngPulutong )

1 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA2 Port Arms - Agap TA3 Order Arms - Baba TA4 Call Off - TuluyangBilang5 Report - Mag-ulat

C To Align the Squad ( PaghahanayngTilap )

1 Dress Right Dress - TuntonKanan NA2 Dress Left Dress -TuntonKaliwa NA3 At Close Interval Dress RightDress Left -MasinsinPagitan TuntonKananKaliwa NA4 Ready Fort - Handa RAP5 Cover - Tumakip

D To Change Interval while in Line ( PagpalitngpagitanSamantalangNakahanay )

1 Close March - LakadPasinsin KAD2 Extended March - LakadPadalang KAD3 Extended to the Left - IbayongLakadPakaliwa KADE Marching the Squad from a line ( PaglakadsaPangkatmulasaHanay ) 1 Right Face - HarapsaKanan RAP 2 Left Face - HarapsaKaliwa RAP 3 Forward March - Pasulong KAD 4 Column Right March - LikosaKanan KADNA 5 Column Left March - LikosaKaliwa KADNA 6 Column Half Right March - Liko Hating Kanan KADNA 7 Column Half Left March - Liko Hating Kaliwa KADNA 8 Incline to the Left - PagawingKanan 9 Incline to the Right - PagawingKaliwa 10 Right Left March - KaliwaKanangpanig NA

F Counting of Men ( PagbilangngKawal )

1 Count Off - SabayangBilang NA 2 Call Off - TuluyangBilang NA

G To Change Interval While in Column ( PagpalitngPagitanSamantalangNakatudling )

1 Close March - LakadPasinsin KAD 2 Extend March - LakadPadalang KAD

MILITARY DRILLS AND CEREMONIES

MILITARY CEREMONIES - The movement of the larger unit or troops in a prescribed manner from one place to another

1 REVIEW - A military ceremony held in honor of a visiting commander official or dignitary It is also a fittingaffair to present decorations and awards to deserving members or units of the command

A REVIEW IS NORMALLY CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING ELEMENTSa Formation of troopsb Presentation of troopsc Inspection of troopsd Presentation of awards and decorations

2 PARADE - A more formal ceremony than a review In this ceremony the appearance and movement of thetroops in the formation are the primary consideration The preparation and organization of troops forparades are similar to those of a review The line on which the troops are to be formed and the route ofmarch of the participating units are marked or designated The distance between the troops and thecommander for the parade formation is greater than that of a reviewTWO DISTINCT TYPES OF PARADES1 Evening Parade2 Moonlight Parade

DRILL COMMANDS - An oral of a commander

TWO PARTS 1 PREPARATORY COMMAND - States the movement or formation to be carried out and mentally prepares theindividual for its execution It is a command which indicates the movement

2 COMMAND OF EXECUTION - Tells when the movement is to be carried out It is a command which indicates when amovement is to be executed

EXAMPLE FORWARD MARCHForwardPreparatory Command MarchCommand of Execution

PREPARATORY COMMAND AND COMMAND OF EXECUTION

1 Fall in Fall out - Humanay Tumiwalag

2 Rest - Pahinga3 As you were - Manumbalik4 At ease - TindigPaluwag5 Change step - PalikHakbang

SUPPLEMENTARY COMMAND - The subordinate commander gives a supplementary command He turns his head towards themajority of his elements and gives command over his shoulder He does not face about

MASS COMMAND - May be used to develop confidence and enthusiasm All of the members of the unit being trained speak in unison and execute them

THINGS TO OBSERVE IN GIVING COMMANDS

Inflection - The rise and fall of pitch and the tone changes of the voice

Cadence In Command - The uniform and rhythmic flow of words

Snap - The extra quality in command that demands immediate responseREMEMBER

1 Correct commands have a tone cadence and snap that demands willingness correct and immediateresponse 2 The loudness of the command is adjusted to the number of men in the unit 3 The best posture for giving command is at the position of attention 4 The most desirable pitch when beginning a preparatory command is near the level of your natural speaking voice

MILITARY COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

MILITARY COURTESY - Is the expression or manifestation of consideration for others It is a virtue that is expected of all individuals from all walks of life In the Armed Forces courtesy is a great requirement because it is thebasic upon which military discipline stands With courtesy and respect among members of the organizationwould lose its orderliness and later disintegrate Furthermore courtesy promotes good relationship closer coordination and teamwork among members of the organization It makes theorganization dignified and insures good relations with the public

SALUTES- Is the most important form of military courtesy It is executed by raising the right man smartlyUntil the tip of the forefinger touches the eyebrow or the front brim of the head gear when coveredForefingers are extended and joined palm facing the left forearm inclined at an angle of about 45 degrees

and the right upper arm horizontal to the ground A person saluting looks at the person beingsaluted When the salute is returned he drops the right hand smartly to the side

RULES IN RENDERING HAND SALUTEa The salute is required on and off military installations during outside office hoursb Persons entitled to the saluted 1 All commissioned officers of the AFP both male and female 2 Commissioned officers of friendly nations when they are recognized as such 3 Officers of the Coast and Geodetic Survey and the Public Health Service when they are serving with the AFP 4 All civilian who are entitled by custom to salutec The salute is rendered at a distance of about 6 paces from the person saluted of at the recognizable distances about 30 pacesd The salute must be rendered to those entitled to it It is not rendered when running but at halt or walk Never salute with a cigarette cigar or pipe in the mouth The salute should not be executed in a haphazardway or perfunctory manner Salutes are exchange whether individuals are cover or uncoverede The salute is rendered at once if the senior remains in the immediate vicinity and no conversation takesplace the junior again salutes the senior when they are path from each otherf In making reports the person reporting salutes first regardless of rank An example of this case is whenthe unit commander is reporting to the adjutant during ceremoniesg) Whom not to salute

1 Standing to a horse or leading a horse2 While at work In case the officer calls the soldier stops working approaches and salutes him

and again when they are part to each other3 Indoors except when reporting to an officer or when the soldier is on duty sentry or guard4 When carrying articles with both hands or being so occupied as to make saluting practical5 When riding in a fast moving vehicle and the other is dismounted the salute is not rendered

Exception are when the vehicle is clearly marked to indicate a General Officer and when saluting is a part of the ceremony

6 When meeting a prisoner of war Soldier serving as military prisoner are not entitled to salute7 In case of doubt due to absence of specific instruction the salute is rendered

The term ldquooutdoorrdquo is constructed to include such buildings as drill halls gymnasiums and other roofed enclosures used for drill or exercise of troops Theaters covered walks and other shelters open on the side are also considered as outdoor

ldquoIndoorsrdquo include offices hallways kitchen orderly rooms recreation halls washroom and quarters

ldquoUnder armsrdquo means carrying arms having them attached to the person by sling holster or other means In the absence of arms the wearing of cartridge bells pistol holsters and automatic rifle belts also mean ldquounder armsrdquo

TYPES OF SALUTES

a Hand saluteb The Rifle Salute at Order Armsc The Rifle Salute at Trail Armsd The Rifle Salute at Present Armse The Rifle Salute at Shoulder Arms (Right Shoulder)f The Rifle Salute at Left Shoulder Armsg The Gun Saluteh Eyes Right by men in ranks when Pass in Review

REPORTING TO AN OFFICER

The salute is rendered by a junior when reporting to a senior He also salutes before leaving

a REPORTING INDOORS WITHOUT ARMS

A soldier removes his headgear knocks at the door of the office of the officer and enters when told to do so Upon entering he halts at about two paces from the officer and salutes and says Sir Cadet Airman Dela Cruz reporting to the squadron commander Sir The salute will be retained until he completes his report and the officer had returned his salute execute about face and leaves the office

b REPORTING INDOORS UNDER ARMS

The procedure for reporting is the same as discussed above except that the soldier remain covered If carrying a rifle the soldier carries it and salute at trail arms Otherwise the hand salute is given

c REPORTING OUTDOORS

The procedure for reporting to an officer the head gear is not removed Rifles should be carried at trail arms or at the right shoulder The hand salute or rifle salute is given as the case may be

d REPORTING FOR PAY

The soldier reporting for pay answers ldquoHererdquo when his name is called approaches and salutes the officer He picks up and count his money and leaves without saluting The officer does not return his salute

OTHER COURTESY TO INDIVIDUALS

a) When an officer enters the room or tent officersrsquo junior to him and enlisted men present with uncover (if unarmed and stand at attention until the officer directs otherwise or leaves the room) When more than one individual are present the first one who perceive the officer will command ldquoAttentionrdquo loud enough to be heard by everybody present

b) When an officer enters a room or tent used as an office working shop or recreation room those at work or at play are not required to come to attention unless addressed by the officer A transaction of routine business between individuals at work

c) When an officer enters an enlisted menus hall the group is called to ldquoAt Easerdquo by the person noticing him first Men remain seated at ease and continue eating unless the officer directs otherwise A soldiers addresses stop eating and sits at attention until the conversation has ended

d) When accompanying a senior a junior walks or ride on his left except when accompanying senior during inspection

e) When entering a car or a small boat the senior goes in first and others follow in the order of rank In getting off he junior goes out first and others follow in the inverse order of rank

HONORS TO THE NATIONAL ANTHEM OR TO THE COLORS

I OUTDOOR

- Wheneverwherever the National Anthem or the colors is played military personnel not in the formation must observe the following

1 At the first note of the music stand at attention and render the prescribed salute except atthe escort of the color or at retreat when they will face toward the color or flag and salute The salute is retained until the last note of the music

2 The mounted on animals will halt and render the salute mounted Individuals loadinganimals or standing to a horse will stand at attention having the salute

3 Vehicles in motion will be brought to a halt Persons riding on a passenger car or amotorcycle will dismount and salute as described above Occupants of combat vehicles such a tanks half trucks scout cars and armored cars will remain in their vehicles but stand at attention and salute

4 The above respect to the National Color is rendered to the National Anthem or colors offriendly nations

II INDOORS

- When the national anthem is played officer and men will stand at attention and face the music or the flag but do not salute

UNCOVERING- Officer and enlisted men under arms uncover when

a) Seated as a member of or in attendance at a court or board Sentinels guarding prisoners do not uncover

b) Entering places of divine worship

c) Indoors when not in duty

d) In attendance at an official reception

DISPLAY AND SALUTE TO THE FLAG

a The Philippine flag represents our nation and should always be given a place of runner

b The National Flag is never dipped for salute nor is it permitted to touch the ground It is not used as a costume dress or a drapery No lettering or object should be placed on it

c The flag is played in the following manners1 When hoisted at a flag pole it should be hoisted fully at the top of the pole blue part

up or above During mornings the flag is hoisted to the top of the pole first then hauled down until the flag is about midway of the length of the pole

2 When the national flag is displayed with another flag whether they are standing sideby side or with their staff crossed the National Flag is at the right side blue part up

3 When placed in the vertical manner the triangle is up the blue color at the right4 When displayed in the horizontal position the triangle is at the right side with the blue

part up5 When displayed over the casket the triangle is in the direction of the head of the cadaver with

the blue part on the right side

During the ceremonies wherein the holstering or lowering of the flag is done or when it passes by during parades or reviews all persons present except those detailed in holstering lowering and carrying the flag should face it at attention and salute while those in uniform remove their headdress with their right hand and place them over their left breast Women should salute by placing their right hand on their left breastMILITARY DISCIPLINE

Military discipline is the mental attitude and state of training which renders obedience and proper conduct instinctive under all conditions It is founded upon respect for loyalty to properly constituted authority While it is primarily developed by military drills every feature in military life has its effect upon military discipline It is generally indicated in an individual or unit by smartness of appearance and action cleanliness of dress equipment or quarters respect for senior and by the prompt and cheerful obedience by the subordinates of both the latter and spirit of the legal orders

RELATION OF COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

The relation of military discipline to courtesy is clearly explained by the fact that discipline is founded upon by respect and loyalty to superiors and lawfully constituted authorities In other words discipline originates and develops mutual respect and goodwill among members of an organization Without courtesy and respect among members of an organization discipline disappears there will be no peace and order in the organization hence it will disintegrate

IMPORTANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Mass discipline and morale are essential factors for securing cohesive action and for ensuring that singleness or purpose which alone can triumph over the most difficult conditions of war The successful leader will teach his men to recognize and face fear because fear is the enemy of discipline and morale Fear unchecked will lead to panic and a unit that is panicky is no longer a disciplined one but a mob There is no same person who is without fear but with good discipline and morale all will face danger if not willingly at least resignedly because of their inborn sentiment of duty or courage of loyalty and because of their sense of pride in their country in their unit and in themselves in other words because of their esprit de corps

The need for discipline is recognized in many places outside the Armed Forces It reaches at highest form in teams wherein individual desires are subordinated to the interests of the entire team The Armed Forces are more in need of discipline for several reasons First the task of making war is not doing it because we as individuals have to do it in the interest of our country Because of that we cannot be allowed as individual to decide which part of the job each of us will do or how each part to be done Second the organization must be prepared for situations wherein leaders may be lost Personal loyalty for the commandment is not enough If a leader is killed his men must accept orders from his successor immediately and without question to carry on the battle Finally the tremendous size of all Armed Forces demands that there be uniform ways of doing things Discipline subordinates personal and self considerations to the interest of the group

MAINTENANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Discipline is installed in men through instructions pride and traditions and regulations You will develop appreciation of the other factors which build discipline as time passes One must know and understand the different laws and regulations immediately

Discipline is maintained in much the same manner as it is attained The article of war punishes military individualsrsquo fairness and justice high moral pride and responsibility contribute to maintain discipline as to developing it

CHAPTER IVARMED FORCES OF THE PHILIPPINESrsquo HISTORY

Brief History of the AFPCommonwealth Act no 1 otherwise known as the National Defense Act was approved on 21

December 1935 which gave the basic organization of the AFP General Douglas McArthur served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon Major General Dwight D Eisenhower and Major General James Ord members of the McArthurrsquos Staff helped in the planting of the Philippine Military Establishment as well as organizing it

As President Quezon issued Executive Order no 11 on January 1936 which formally established the Army of the Philippines he recalled Colonel Jose Delos Reyes of the Philippine Constabulary to active duty and later promoted him to Brigadier General and designated him as Acting Chief of Staff of the Army Brigadier General Basilio J Valdez and Colonel Guillermo B Francisco were named 1 st and 2nd Asst Chief of Staff respectively

In the same order the Philippine Constabulary became the nucleus of the regular forces of the Philippine Army Filipino citizens were required to go training under the National Defense Act since 1936 that would compose reserve force By the end of the ten year Commonwealth period in 1946 there would have been a trained Philippine Army Reserve pool of 400000 officers and men including the graduates of the ROTC Basic and Advance Course in accredited colleges and universities

When the Philippine Constabulary became part of the Philippine Army the PC Air Corps which was activated on 2 January 1955 was re designated Philippine Air Force on 3 July 1947

On February 1939 an Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was organized as a unit of the Philippine Army Initially equipped with three Q-boats (torpedo boats) and a handful of officers and men hurriedly trained in the rudiments of Sea-Warfare the OSP squadron provided coastal support to the beleaguered Filipino-American forces in the battles of Bataan and Corregidor In October 1947 the OSP was renamed Philippine Naval Patrol and on 5 January 1951 it became the Philippine Navy The OSP was often referred to as Mosquito Fleet

When President Franklin D Roosevelt of the USA declared the state of National Emergency on 26 July 1941 and ordered the induction of the Philippine Army units into the US Armed Forces in the Far East under the command of General Douglas Mc Arthur the Philippine Army had a reserve force of about 100000 officers and men at the time of the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked the Pearl Harbor Clark Field and other targets on 8 December 1941 The Philippine Army Reserve Force totaled around 200000 officers and men

The Philippine Army retained its own organization while serving with the USAFFE After the fall of Bataan on 9 April 1942 many officers and men of the Philippine Army continued resistance against the Japanese by forming guerilla forces all over the country These USAFFE guerilla forces along with other units organized by civilians in various parts of the country fought the Japanese Forces from 1942 to 1945 When the US Liberation Forces landed in Leyte on 20 October 1944 all the guerilla forces participated actively on the liberation on their respective sectors of operations

On October 1947 President Manual A Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 which organized all government agencies The Military establishment was not spared from its official designation as Army of the Philippines and it became the Armed Forces of the Philippines The ten pre-war military districts were deactivated but 4 Military Areas were also activated to enhance the efficiency of the Constabulary personnel all over the country

The post-war Philippine Army eventually got its forces fighting another battle ndash the battle against the armed elements of the Communist Party of the Philippines the HUKBALAHAP later renamed HMB For the anti0dissident campaign Army Sector Command and Battalion Combat Teams were formed During the Korean war the 10th 20th 11th 19th and 2nd BCTrsquos were sent as Philippine Expeditionary Force as the member of the United Nations PEFTOK served in Korea from 1950-1955 On 25 December 1950 President Quirino issued Executive Order No 389 renaming headquarters AFP to General Headquarters AFP and activating the 4 major services The Philippine Army Philippine Constabulary Philippine Air Force and Philippine Navy

From the time the Philippines joined the Southeast Asia Treaty Organization (SEATO) in September 1954 the AFP cooperated actively with the other member nations in the enhancing of military preparedness in the area

As a member of the UN the Philippines also sent a Philippine Air Force Contingent of 77 officers and men on a pacification campaign to the Congo Republic on 11 February 1963

In 1966 the Philippine Civic Action Group (PHICAG) was activated to implement the provisions of RA 4644 Composed of engineers medical and rural community development teams and security personnel the PHILCAG was sent to the Republic of South Vietnam and engaged in socio-economic projects mutually agreed upon by the governments of the Republic of the Philippines and Republic of South Vietnam

The AFP has shown an increasing awareness of its arrival in the country and its vital role in the political and economic development of the country by engaging are actively in civic action programs

Pursuant to the Socio-economic Military Program under RA 2056 the Chief of Staff AFP ordered the assignment of military personnel for public works construction food production land settlement and rural development Several civic centers of the AFP

To give greater impetus on the civic action the 51st Engineer Brigade consisting of 10 Engineer Construction Battalion was activated on 10 March 1962 This unit had constructed several much needed highways roads and bridges in various parts of the country The 52nd Engineer Brigade which was organized on 1 July 1969 also performed similar functions to holster the national program for social and economical developments

Today the AFP is employing all its resources in assisting the socio-economic development programs of the government without prejudice to its primary missions of improving and maintaining the effectiveness of the countryrsquos defense posture

SIGNIFICANT FACTS TO REMEMBER

MACTAN ndash place where the first revolt against Spain took place on April 26 1951 The firstrebellion Spain flared up in Bohol and Leyte

ANDRES MALONG ndash led the first major revolt in Luzon in 1660 He proclaimed himself as aKing of PangasinanLAPU ndash LAPU ndash was the first Filipino hero

MIGUEL VICOS ndash the Spanish Meztiso who assassinated Diego Silang on May 28 1863

RED WITH A FIGURE OF A SUN ndash color of the first flag of the Philippines in 1897

ANDRES BONIFACIO ndash was the founder of the Revolutionary Society called Katipunan

GEN GREGORIO DEL PILAR ndash led the Filipino forces in the Battle of Tirad Pass

AUGUST 29 1896 ndash the date designated as the start of the revolution which was also known as

Cry of BalintawakDECEMBER 14 1897 ndashdate when the Treaty of Paris and Fact of Biak-na-bato was signed

FACT OF BIAK-NA-BATO ndash an agreement between the Filipino and the Spanish authoritieson December 14 1897 to stop all hostilities

MARCELA AGONCILLO ndash designed and made the first flag of the first Philippine Republic

JULIAN FELIPE ndash was the composer of the Philippine National AnthemEMILIO AGUINALDO ndash was the first president of the Philippines

BALANAN ISABELA ndash the place where Gen Emilio Aguinaldo was captured In 1922 the US War Dept authorized the establishment of the Dept of Military Science andTactics under the supervision of the US Army This was established in theUniversity of the Philippines

MANUEL LUIS QUEZON ndash the first president of the Philippine Commonwealth

COMMONWEALTH ACT NO1 ndash is otherwise known as the National Defense Act issued by President Quezon and approved on December 21 1935 and gave the basicorganization of the AFP

GENERAL DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon during the Commonwealth period that helped in the planning andorganization of the Philippine Military EstablishmentGENDOUGLAS MCARTHURrsquoS STAFF

1 MAJ GEN DWIGHT D EISENHOWER2 MAJ GEN JAMES ORD

JANUARY 11 1936 ndash the date President Manuel L Quezon issued Executive Order No 11 onthe establishment of the PA

BRIG GEN BASILIO J VALDEZ ndash first assistant Chief of staff

BRIG GEN JOSE DELOS REYES ndash designated as the first Chief of Staff of the PhilippineArmy

COL GUILLERMO B FRANCISCO ndash 2nd assistant Chief of Staff The PHILLIPINE CONSTABULARY became the nucleus of the Philippine Army and the Philippine Constabulary Air Corps (PCA) was activated on January 2 1937

FEBRUARY 9 1939 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was activated and organized as a unit of thePhilippine Army The Off-Shore Patrol was equipped with Q-Boats (Torpedo Boat)and referred to as the ldquoMosquito Fleetrdquo

PRESIDENT FRANKLIN DELANO ROOSEVELT ndash President of the USA who set July 26 1941 as the date for the declaration of State of National Emergency and at the sametime the induction of the Philippine Army to United States Armed Forces to the Far East (USAFFE) with a total force of 160000 officers and men

GEN DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash was designated as the USAFFE COMMANDER

DECEMBER 8 1941 ndash the date the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked Pearl Harbor Clark Fieldand other targets

APRIL 9 1942 ndash fall of Bataan

MAY 6 1942 ndash fall of Corregidor

MAJOR FERDINAND EDRALIN MARCOS ndash was the most decorated soldier during the World War II and was a recipient of 27 medals

OCTOBER 20 1944 ndash the date the US Liberation Forces landed in Red Beach in Palo Leyte

JULY 3 1947 ndash the date the PC Air Corps was re-designated as the Philippine Air Force

OCTOBER 1947 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol was renamed Phil Naval Patrol ndash the date President Manuel Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 remainingthe Army of the Philippines as Armed Forces of the Philippines andactivating the 4 military areas

ARAW NG KAGITINGAN ndash a day set to commemorate the Fall of Bataan Fall of Corregidorand Fall of Bessang Pass Based on the historical records the independenceof the Republic of the Philippines was on June 12 1898

JULY 4 1946 ndash declaration of the Independence by the USA celebrated today as PhilippineAmerican Friendship Day

JULY 1950 ndash the Philippine Army was separated from the Gen Headquarters Philippine Army

DECEMBER 23 1950 ndash President ElpidioQuirino issued Executive Order No 389 renamingthe Headquarters AFP to Gen Headquarters AFP (GHQ AFP)

JANUARY 5 1951 ndash the Phil Naval Patrol was renamed the Philippine Naval of thePHILIPPINE NAVY

1959 ndash 1955 ndash the Battalion Combat Teams were sent to Korea to comply with the commitmentsof the Philippines as member of the UN The BCT was known as the PHILIPPINE EXPEDITIONARY FORCE TO KOREA (PEFTOK)

SEPTEMBER 1954 ndash The Philippines joined the Southeast Asian Treaty Org (SEATO)

APRIL 11 1963 ndash the PAF contingent of 77 officers and men were sent to Congo Republic of South VietnamPHIL CIVIC ACTION GROUP (PHILCAG) ndash the group of engineers medical and ruralcommunity development team and security personnel were sent by thePhilippines to the representative of South Vietnam

FEBRUARY 22-25 1986 ndash the bloodless peoples revolution which deposed Ferdinand Marcosfrom the presidency and as Commander in elected President of thePhilippines commonly referred to as the EDSA Revolution

ACRONYMSBCT ndash Battalion Combat TeamGHQ ndash General HeadquartersHMB ndash HukbongMapagpalayang Bayan (HUKBALAHAP)PHILCAG-V ndash Philippine Civic Action Group to VietnamSEATO ndash Southeast Asian Treaty OrganizationOSP ndash Off-Shore PatrolPEFTOK ndash Philippine Expeditionary Force to Korea

ENLISTED PERSONNELrsquoS RANKS

MarinesArmy Navy Constabulary Air Force

C ndash CadetCadette M- MidshipmanMidshipwoman

CHAPTER V

MILITARY LEADERSHIP AND COMMAND

A Leadership ndash is the art of influencing and directing men to an assigned goal is such a way toobtain their obedience respect and loyal cooperation Leadership can beexercised by anyone at anytime respective of the frame work of the command

Command ndash is the authority which an individual in the military service lawfully exercisedover subordinates by virtue of his rank and assignment Command andleadership are inseparable whether the function of the command is complex orsimple the commander should always be the controlling head

B TWO TYPES OF LEADER

1 Authoritarian ndash a leader who leads his men by means of rank and position

2 Persuasive ndash a leader who leads his men by always setting examples

C BASIC ELEMENTS OF LEADERSHIP

1 Character ndash to be a leader a person must be of good character Some indications arehonesty good manners industrious self-control and bravery

2 Intelligence ndash is the ability to grasp knowledge easily It includes native ability goodcommon sense and judgment

3 Alertness ndash is mental and physical watchfulness vigilance and observance to his planned and future activity

D LEADERSHIP RESPONSIBILITIES

1 Accomplishment of the assigned mission or task

2 Work for the welfare of his men

E LEADERSHIP TRAITS

1 Knowledge ndash professional knowledge of the job Understands the characteristics of his men2 Bearing ndash dignified appearance and behavior

3 Courage ndash physical and moral ability to act in spite of danger or hardship

4 Decisiveness ndash ability to decide promptly and correctly the proper time and to announce his decision clearly and briefly with authority

5 Dependability ndash performance of duty with or without supervision

6 Endurance ndash physical and mental strength to continue or complete a task

7 Enthusiasm ndash interest in his work or task at hand

8 Force ndash the ability to compel obedience

9 Humility ndash state of being reasonable and proud but not arrogant and boastful

10 Humor ndash ability to appreciate and narrate amusing incidents of everyday life

11 Initiative ndash ability to start or originate an idea or work even when others are absent

12 Judgment ndash power of mind to weight factors affecting a problem and to decide properly

13 Integrity ndash good moral character

14 Justice ndash impartiality in dealing with others giving credit when due and punishment when so demanded

15 Loyalty - sincerity and faithfulness to superiors for the good of the unit

16 Sympathy ndash mutual feelings to others

17 Tact ndash ability to deal with people without hurting their feelings

18 Unselfishness - avoidance of personal consideration that gives a disadvantage

to others

F PRINCIPLES IN LEADERSHIP

1 Know your job - must have thorough professional knowledge of his duties and responsibilities to

command and gain respect from his men

2Know yourself and seek self-improvement - a leader should analyze himself to determine his

good qualities and learn to recognize and correct his weakness

3 Know your men and look after their welfare - understand each of your men personally

psychologically in order to effectively lead them

4 Keep your men informed - keep your men knowledgeable background in all aspects its

organization and mission in order to function effectively

5 Set an example -set a good example as a model in loyalty in superiors and subordinates good

bearing and attitudes pride and faithfulness to the organization

6 Insure the task is understood supervised and accomplished - a leader should give a clear and

concise order that can be understood He supervises his men to accomplish the

assigned mission

7 Train your men as a team - teamwork is a must within and among units from the

smallest to the largest Each men should understand that he has a job to perform

and must cooperate with others in achieving the common objective

8 Make sound and timely decisions - the ability to make raid estimate of the situation Arrive at the

sound decision and announce his decision in the correct form of the proper is

essential to a leader For any situation that may arise the leader should be able to

act logically

9 Develop a sense of responsibility among your subordinates - the leader should train his

subordinates to act in the absence of orders when the situation so demands He

develops responsibility among his subordinates byproper delegation of his

authority and holding them responsible for theaccomplishment of their mission

10 Employ your commands in accordance with its capability - the leader must have thorough knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of his command He must assign objectives that is responsible to be attained However when the situation so demands then men must be forced to action beyond their normal endurance so as to avoid a harder or more costly consequence on their part

11 See responsibility and take responsibility for your action - learn the seniors job for youmay assume his position later on Take advantage of the responsibility delegated toyou and do not back out in case of failure

ROLES OF A LEADER

1 The leader is a model soldier2 The leader is a commander3 The leader is an instructor4 The leader is a personal manager5 The leader is a councilor6 The leader is a custodian of his mens welfare

OBJECTIVES OF A LEADER

1 MORALE - the mental and emotional state of an individual 2 DISCIPLINE - the prompt and willing obedience to orders Complying to regulations and initiating appropriate action even in theabsence of orders 3 PROFICIENCY - the technical tactical and physical ability of an individual to perform their mission 4 ESPRIT DE CORPS - More than the aggregate personality it is how the individuals feel about their unit Jealous of enthusiasticfor pride in and devotion for

MAP READING

MAP - is a graphical representation of the earths surface drawn to a scale on aplane When you look at the map you are actually looking at a picture ofthe ground from a high spot in the air MAP COLOR - different colors are used on the printing of the maps to assist the use understanding it A GREEN - represents all types of vegetables B BLUE - signifies bodies of water such as rivers lakes swamps and streams C RED - indicates first class roads and prominent locations such as theProvincial or Municipal Capitals May be used to stress the significance ofimportant map locations

D BROWN - depicts contour lines which are representation of the relatives elevation and relief of the terrain

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

H Important things to remember37I Zeroing the rifleJ Organization of firing line

VIII Basic weapon of the AFP38A The US rifle caliber 30M1 (grand)

1 Main group of cal 30M12 Characteristics3 Other data4 Sequence of disassembly5 Operation

B M 16 rifle (556 mm armalight)381 Characteristics2 Functioning393 General data4 Sequence of disassembly and assembly405 Parts of M 16 rifle41

DRILL AND CEREMONIES

All commands in CAT-I drills are given in Filipino language

TWO KINDS OF COMMANDS

A) Preparatory commandsB) Command of execution

- Preparatory command is written in small letters while the command of execution is written in capital letters as a rule

FIVE COMMANDS OF EXECUTION

1 TA ndash For manual of arms2 RAP ndash for facing and movement at rest3 KAD ndash from rest going to motion4 NA ndash while in motion to another motion5 TO ndash while in motion to stop

DEFINITION OF TERMS

1 ELEMENT ndash is a part of unit for example an individual is an element of a team or a squad a team is an element of a squad and an element is an element of a platoon

2 FORMATION ndash The arrangement of elements in a prescribed manner

3 LINE ndash a formation in which the element are placed side by side with each other

4 RANK ndash a single line of individuals or vehicles placed side by side facing to one direction

5 COLUMN ndash a formation where the elements are placed one behind the other

6 FILE ndash a single column of individuals

7 FLANK ndash the right or left side of an individual unit or formation

8 INTERVAL ndash the space between elements in line Close interval is four inches while normal is one arm length

9 DISTANCE ndash the space between elements in column

10 CENTERndash Middle of a formation

11 ALIGNMENT ndash the arrangement of individuals or troops of a straight of a formation

12 GUIDE ndash an individual ahead or at the straight of a platoon or formation designated to control direction and rate of march

13 PACE ndash a step of 28 inches the length of full step in quick time

14 STEP ndash normal step in marching A side step is 12 inches a half step of 14 inches and a back step is 12 inches

15 CADENCE ndash the correct step and timing in marching

16 QUICK TIME ndash a normal cadence in marching at 120 steps per minute

17 DOUBLE TIME ndash a faster cadence in marching at 180 steps per minute

18 DEPTH ndash the space from front to rear of any formation including the front and rear elements The depth of a man from his chest to his back is assumed to be 12 inches

19 BASE ndash the element on which a movement is planned and regulated

20 FRONT ndash the space occupied by an element measures from flank to flank

21 HEAD ndash the leading element in a column

22 in order of march or advance

23 POST ndash the correct place for an officer of non-commissioned officer to stand in a prescribed formation

24 COVER ndash aligning yourself if directly behind the man to your immediate front while maintaining proper distance

25 HALF STEP ndash the rate of marching 60 steps per minute

COMPOSITION OF UNITS AND THEIR HEADS

1 SQUADndash composed of 7 or more men in formation (squad leader)

2 PLATOON ndash composed of 2 or more squads plus one guide (platoon leader)

3 COMPANYndash composed of two or more platoons (company commander)

4 BATTALION ndash composed of two or more companies (battalion commander)

5 REGIMENT ndash composed of 2 or more battalions (regimental commander)

6 BRIGADE ndash Composed of 2 or more Regiments (BRIGADE COMMANDER)

7 DIVISION ndash Composed of 2 or more brigades (DIVISION COMMANDER)

TWO PARTS OF COMMAND

a PREPARATORY COMMAND ndash Alert the troops or subordinates and prepare them for

the movement they are going to execute

b COMMAND OF EXECUTION ndash Tell the troops to do or execute the movement

DRILL COMMANDS

ENGLISH FILIPINO

FilehelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipHanay

AssemblehelliphelliphelliphellipMagtipan

SquadhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTilap

PlatoonhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPulutong

CompanyhelliphelliphelliphellipBalanghay

BattalionhelliphelliphelliphellipTalupad

RegimenthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSampanaw

BrigadehelliphelliphelliphelliphellipBukluran

DivisionhelliphelliphelliphellipDanay

Fall InhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipHumanay

AttentionhelliphelliphelliphellipHumanda

Parade ResthelliphelliphellipTikas Pahinga

Stand AT EasehelliphellipTindigPaluwag

ResthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPahinga

Fall OuthelliphelliphelliphellipTumiwalag

ENGLISH FILIPINO

DismissedhelliphelliphelliphellipLumansag

Left FacehelliphelliphelliphellipHarapsakaliwa RAP

Right FacehelliphelliphelliphellipHarapsakanan RAP

Hand SalutehelliphelliphellipPugayKamay

Count CadencehelliphellipBilangHakbang NA

Forward MarchhelliphellipPasulong KAD

HalthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipHinto

March Time MarchLakadPatakda KAD

Half Step MarchhelliphellipHating Hakbang AD

Double time MarchhellipTakbongHakbang KAD

Quick Time MarchhellipSiglangHakbang KAD

Route MarchhelliphelliphelliphellipLayangHakbang KAD

Right Step MarchhelliphellipHakbangPakanan KAD

Left Step MarchhelliphellipHakbangPakaliwa KAD

ENGLISH FILIPINO

Route StephelliphelliphelliphellipLayangHakbangMarch KAD

Rifle SalutehelliphelliphelliphellipPugaySandata

Unsling ArmshelliphelliphellipIbis Sandata

Fix BayonethelliphelliphellipIkabitangsundang

Raise pistolhelliphelliphelliphellipItaasang pistol

Open ChamberhelliphelliphellipBuksanang pistol

Sir the paradehelliphelliphellipHandanapoangis formed parangal

ReporthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMag-ulat

OfficershelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgapinuno puma-Center March gitna KAD

LoadhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPunluan

Simulate LeadhelliphelliphellipMagpungloKunwari

Stack armshelliphelliphelliphellipBangkoSandata

Sound thehelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIhudyatangpagbabaretreat ngwatawat

Sound OffhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIhudyatangPangal

Attention tohelliphelliphelliphellipMakinigsathe Orderhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipkautusan

Officer of thehelliphelliphelliphellipPunongTagakalingaDay

By Order OfhelliphelliphelliphellipSautosni

ENGLISH FILIPINO

By the helliphellipSabaysaNumber Bilang

Sling ArmshelliphelliphelliphellipSakbitSandata

Adjust SlinghelliphelliphelliphellipAyusinangSakbit

Unfix bayonethelliphelliphellipAlisinangsundang

Withdraw magazinehellipAlisinangpungluan

Insert magazinehelliphellipIsauliangpungluan

Take your helliphelliphelliphellipSumalunan kayopool

Attention to helliphelliphellipMakinigsakautusanOrders

ColorhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIharappabalikangReverse March watawat KAD

UnloadhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipAlisPungla

Cease FiringhelliphelliphelliphellipItigilangPutukan

Take ArmshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipDampotSandata

AdjutantrsquoshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPanawagansaCall Parangal

PublishhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIpahayag andthe Order kautusan

Details forhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgaNakatalagathe day Ngayon

CommanderhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPunongTanodof the Guard

OfficerrsquoshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgapinunoPost March Balik Kad

Staff Behind Me Change PosthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgaKagawadMagpalitngLunan

ENGLISH FILIPINO

In place HalthelliphelliphellipSa lunan Hinto

File from thehelliphelliphellipSunuranmulasaRightLeft kanankaliwa

Guide LefthelliphelliphelliphellipGabayasaKaliwaCenterRight GitnaKanan

Stand FasthelliphelliphelliphellipTatag manatiliWalangkikilos

Left oliquehelliphelliphelliphellipHiligkaliwaMarch KAD

Two Arms LengthhellipIbayongDalawangExtended to the Left Pakaliwa KAD

TroophelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTipon

One TwohelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIsa DalawaThree Four Tatlo Apat

Assemble to thehelliphelliphellipMagtiponsakananRight left march Kaliwa

MounthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSakay

Close onhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipLumapitsaunangLeading Platoon pulutong

Gaiden on LeadinghellipGabaysaunangPlatoons on Line pulutongnghanay

PostshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSaLunan

Dismiss yourhelliphelliphellipTiwalaginanginyongCompany balangay

ENGLISH FILIPINO

Resume marchhelliphellipMagpatuloy KAD

Columns of twoshellipDalawangTatluhangThreesfours Apatangtudling

All present arehelliphelliphellipNaritopolahatAccounted for napagalaman

Right obliquehelliphelliphellipHilispakananMarch Kad

InspectionhelliphelliphelliphellipPagsisiyasat

DetailhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipNakatalaga

PatrolhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTaliba

Take intervalhelliphelliphelliphellipIbayongpatlang March KAD

Unsling equipmenthelliphellipIbabasagamit

Company MasshelliphelliphellipPulo-pulotongsaRightLeft March kanan

Garden on the LinehelliphellipMgagabaysahanay

Guide PosthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgagabaysalunan

Sir the BattalionhelliphelliphellipAngTalupadpo ayis informed handana

Persons to be decoratedhellipMgaparangalan atand all colors Center lahatngwatawatMarch pumagitna KAD

Form the shelter tentshellipMagsisayosngpagtatayongtolda

AT NORMAL INTERVAL

Dress righthelliphelliphelliphellipTuntonkananDress NA

Dress lefthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTuntonkaliwaDress NA

CoverhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPanakip

At Close IntervalhelliphellipMasinsinPagitanDress right Tunton callow NA

At Close IntervalhellipMasinsinPagitanDress left Tuntonkaliwa NA

At Close IntervalhellipMasinsinPagitanFall In Humanay

Close MarchhelliphelliphelliphellipLakadpasinsin KAD

Extended MarchhelliphellipLakadPadalang KAD

Column RighthelliphelliphellipLikoKananLeft March Kaliwa KAD

Column RighthelliphelliphellipLikoHulingKananLeft March (Half) Kaliwa KAD

Incline to thehelliphelliphelliphellipPagawingkananRightLeft Kaliwa KAD

Change StephelliphelliphelliphellipPalitHakbangMarch KAD

Left ShoulderhelliphelliphellipKaliwangBalikatArms Ta

Trail ArmshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipBitbit TA

Port armshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipAgap TA

Inspection ArmshelliphellipSiyasat TA

RightLefthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipKanangKaliwangFlank March Panig KAD

Count offhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSabayangbilang NA

Call offhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTuluyangbilang NA

Center facehelliphelliphelliphellipHumarapsaGitna RAP

Prepare forhelliphelliphelliphellipHumandasa

Inspection Pagsisiyasat

Open RankhelliphelliphelliphellipPabukangTaludtodMarch KAD

Close RankhelliphelliphelliphellipPasinsinTaludtodMarch KAD

Right TurnhelliphelliphelliphellipPihitsaKananMarch KAD

Pass In ReviewhelliphelliphellipPasa Masid

BackwardhelliphelliphelliphellipLakadPaurongMarch KAD

To the RearhelliphelliphelliphellipPabalikMarch KAD

Right shoulderhelliphelliphellipKanangbalikatArms TA

Order armshelliphelliphelliphellipBaba TA

Present ArmshelliphelliphelliphellipTangha TA

Ready EyeshelliphelliphellipHandaKananRightLeft Kaliwa Tingin

Ready FronthelliphelliphelliphellipHanda Harap

ENGLISH FILIPINO

Sir I present the commandhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Ihahandogkopoangpamunuan

Sir the Troop is ready forhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Handanapoangpangkatsa

Trooping for the linehelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip LibutinangHanay

To the LeftRight Marchhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip PakaliwaPakanan KAD

Column of the Platoon Leading Platoonhelliphelliphelliphellip TudlingngpulutongUnangpulutongby the LeftRight Flank March KaliwaKanangpanig KAD

Donrsquot anticipate the commandhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Huwagpangunahanangutos

Sir the Honod Guard is formedhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Handan a poangTanodPandangal

D The Salute ( Pagpugay )

1 Hand Salute - PugayKamay2 Ready Eyes Right - HandaTinginKanan3 Ready Front - Handa RAP

E Steps and Marching ( Hakbang at Lakad )

1 Count Cadence Count - BilangHakbang NA 2 Forward March - Pasulong KAD 3 Platoon Halt - Pulutong Hinto 4 Mark Time March - LakadPatakda KAD 5 Half Step March - Hating Hakbang KAD 6 Double Time March - TakbongHakbang KAD NA 7 Quick Time March - SiglangHakbang KADNA 8 Route March - LayangHakbang NA 9 In place Double Time March - Sa Lunan TakbongHakbang KADNA10 Right Step March - HakbangPakanan NAKAD11 Left Step March - HakbangPakaliwa NAKAD12 Backward March - LakadPaurong KAD13 To the Rear March - Pabalik NA14 Change Step March - PalitHakbang NA15 One Two Three Four - Isa Dalawa Tatlo Apat

2 SCHOOL OF SOLDIERS WITH ARMS ( PagsasanayngKawalna may sandata )

A Manual of Arms ( PagsanaysapaghawakngSandata )

1 Right Shoulder Arms - SaKanangBalikat TA2 Left Shoulder Arms - SaKaliwangBalikat TA3 Order Arms - Baba TA4 Present Arms - Tanghal TA5 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA6 Trail Arms - Bitbit TA7 Sling Arms - Sakbit Sandata8 Unsling Arms - AlisSakbit Sandata9 Fix Bayonet - IkabitBayoneta10 Unfix Bayonet - AlisBayoneta

B Manual of Gidon( ParaanngPagsasanaysaPaghawakngSagisag )

1 Order Guidon - IbabaSagisag2 Carry Guidon - BitbitSagisag3 Raise Guidon - ItaasSagisagC Manual of Arms for the Pistol ( PagsasanaysaPaghawakngPistola )

1 Raise Pistol - ItaasangPistola2 Withdraw Magazine - AlisinangPistola3 Open Chamber - BuksanangPistola4 Close Chamber - IsaraangPistola5 Insert Magazine - IsuksukangPistola6 Return Pistol - IsauliangPungluan

3 Close Order Drill ( MalapitangPagsasanay )

a At Close Interval Fall In - Sa MasinsinPagitan Humanayb Inspection Arms - Siyasat TAc Port Arms - Agap TAd Order Arms - Baba TA

A To Dismiss the Platoon (PagtiwalagngPulutong )

1 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA2 Port Arms - Agap TA3 Dismiss - Lumansag

B To Form the Platoons ( PaghahanayngPulutong )

1 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA2 Port Arms - Agap TA3 Order Arms - Baba TA4 Call Off - TuluyangBilang5 Report - Mag-ulat

C To Align the Squad ( PaghahanayngTilap )

1 Dress Right Dress - TuntonKanan NA2 Dress Left Dress -TuntonKaliwa NA3 At Close Interval Dress RightDress Left -MasinsinPagitan TuntonKananKaliwa NA4 Ready Fort - Handa RAP5 Cover - Tumakip

D To Change Interval while in Line ( PagpalitngpagitanSamantalangNakahanay )

1 Close March - LakadPasinsin KAD2 Extended March - LakadPadalang KAD3 Extended to the Left - IbayongLakadPakaliwa KADE Marching the Squad from a line ( PaglakadsaPangkatmulasaHanay ) 1 Right Face - HarapsaKanan RAP 2 Left Face - HarapsaKaliwa RAP 3 Forward March - Pasulong KAD 4 Column Right March - LikosaKanan KADNA 5 Column Left March - LikosaKaliwa KADNA 6 Column Half Right March - Liko Hating Kanan KADNA 7 Column Half Left March - Liko Hating Kaliwa KADNA 8 Incline to the Left - PagawingKanan 9 Incline to the Right - PagawingKaliwa 10 Right Left March - KaliwaKanangpanig NA

F Counting of Men ( PagbilangngKawal )

1 Count Off - SabayangBilang NA 2 Call Off - TuluyangBilang NA

G To Change Interval While in Column ( PagpalitngPagitanSamantalangNakatudling )

1 Close March - LakadPasinsin KAD 2 Extend March - LakadPadalang KAD

MILITARY DRILLS AND CEREMONIES

MILITARY CEREMONIES - The movement of the larger unit or troops in a prescribed manner from one place to another

1 REVIEW - A military ceremony held in honor of a visiting commander official or dignitary It is also a fittingaffair to present decorations and awards to deserving members or units of the command

A REVIEW IS NORMALLY CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING ELEMENTSa Formation of troopsb Presentation of troopsc Inspection of troopsd Presentation of awards and decorations

2 PARADE - A more formal ceremony than a review In this ceremony the appearance and movement of thetroops in the formation are the primary consideration The preparation and organization of troops forparades are similar to those of a review The line on which the troops are to be formed and the route ofmarch of the participating units are marked or designated The distance between the troops and thecommander for the parade formation is greater than that of a reviewTWO DISTINCT TYPES OF PARADES1 Evening Parade2 Moonlight Parade

DRILL COMMANDS - An oral of a commander

TWO PARTS 1 PREPARATORY COMMAND - States the movement or formation to be carried out and mentally prepares theindividual for its execution It is a command which indicates the movement

2 COMMAND OF EXECUTION - Tells when the movement is to be carried out It is a command which indicates when amovement is to be executed

EXAMPLE FORWARD MARCHForwardPreparatory Command MarchCommand of Execution

PREPARATORY COMMAND AND COMMAND OF EXECUTION

1 Fall in Fall out - Humanay Tumiwalag

2 Rest - Pahinga3 As you were - Manumbalik4 At ease - TindigPaluwag5 Change step - PalikHakbang

SUPPLEMENTARY COMMAND - The subordinate commander gives a supplementary command He turns his head towards themajority of his elements and gives command over his shoulder He does not face about

MASS COMMAND - May be used to develop confidence and enthusiasm All of the members of the unit being trained speak in unison and execute them

THINGS TO OBSERVE IN GIVING COMMANDS

Inflection - The rise and fall of pitch and the tone changes of the voice

Cadence In Command - The uniform and rhythmic flow of words

Snap - The extra quality in command that demands immediate responseREMEMBER

1 Correct commands have a tone cadence and snap that demands willingness correct and immediateresponse 2 The loudness of the command is adjusted to the number of men in the unit 3 The best posture for giving command is at the position of attention 4 The most desirable pitch when beginning a preparatory command is near the level of your natural speaking voice

MILITARY COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

MILITARY COURTESY - Is the expression or manifestation of consideration for others It is a virtue that is expected of all individuals from all walks of life In the Armed Forces courtesy is a great requirement because it is thebasic upon which military discipline stands With courtesy and respect among members of the organizationwould lose its orderliness and later disintegrate Furthermore courtesy promotes good relationship closer coordination and teamwork among members of the organization It makes theorganization dignified and insures good relations with the public

SALUTES- Is the most important form of military courtesy It is executed by raising the right man smartlyUntil the tip of the forefinger touches the eyebrow or the front brim of the head gear when coveredForefingers are extended and joined palm facing the left forearm inclined at an angle of about 45 degrees

and the right upper arm horizontal to the ground A person saluting looks at the person beingsaluted When the salute is returned he drops the right hand smartly to the side

RULES IN RENDERING HAND SALUTEa The salute is required on and off military installations during outside office hoursb Persons entitled to the saluted 1 All commissioned officers of the AFP both male and female 2 Commissioned officers of friendly nations when they are recognized as such 3 Officers of the Coast and Geodetic Survey and the Public Health Service when they are serving with the AFP 4 All civilian who are entitled by custom to salutec The salute is rendered at a distance of about 6 paces from the person saluted of at the recognizable distances about 30 pacesd The salute must be rendered to those entitled to it It is not rendered when running but at halt or walk Never salute with a cigarette cigar or pipe in the mouth The salute should not be executed in a haphazardway or perfunctory manner Salutes are exchange whether individuals are cover or uncoverede The salute is rendered at once if the senior remains in the immediate vicinity and no conversation takesplace the junior again salutes the senior when they are path from each otherf In making reports the person reporting salutes first regardless of rank An example of this case is whenthe unit commander is reporting to the adjutant during ceremoniesg) Whom not to salute

1 Standing to a horse or leading a horse2 While at work In case the officer calls the soldier stops working approaches and salutes him

and again when they are part to each other3 Indoors except when reporting to an officer or when the soldier is on duty sentry or guard4 When carrying articles with both hands or being so occupied as to make saluting practical5 When riding in a fast moving vehicle and the other is dismounted the salute is not rendered

Exception are when the vehicle is clearly marked to indicate a General Officer and when saluting is a part of the ceremony

6 When meeting a prisoner of war Soldier serving as military prisoner are not entitled to salute7 In case of doubt due to absence of specific instruction the salute is rendered

The term ldquooutdoorrdquo is constructed to include such buildings as drill halls gymnasiums and other roofed enclosures used for drill or exercise of troops Theaters covered walks and other shelters open on the side are also considered as outdoor

ldquoIndoorsrdquo include offices hallways kitchen orderly rooms recreation halls washroom and quarters

ldquoUnder armsrdquo means carrying arms having them attached to the person by sling holster or other means In the absence of arms the wearing of cartridge bells pistol holsters and automatic rifle belts also mean ldquounder armsrdquo

TYPES OF SALUTES

a Hand saluteb The Rifle Salute at Order Armsc The Rifle Salute at Trail Armsd The Rifle Salute at Present Armse The Rifle Salute at Shoulder Arms (Right Shoulder)f The Rifle Salute at Left Shoulder Armsg The Gun Saluteh Eyes Right by men in ranks when Pass in Review

REPORTING TO AN OFFICER

The salute is rendered by a junior when reporting to a senior He also salutes before leaving

a REPORTING INDOORS WITHOUT ARMS

A soldier removes his headgear knocks at the door of the office of the officer and enters when told to do so Upon entering he halts at about two paces from the officer and salutes and says Sir Cadet Airman Dela Cruz reporting to the squadron commander Sir The salute will be retained until he completes his report and the officer had returned his salute execute about face and leaves the office

b REPORTING INDOORS UNDER ARMS

The procedure for reporting is the same as discussed above except that the soldier remain covered If carrying a rifle the soldier carries it and salute at trail arms Otherwise the hand salute is given

c REPORTING OUTDOORS

The procedure for reporting to an officer the head gear is not removed Rifles should be carried at trail arms or at the right shoulder The hand salute or rifle salute is given as the case may be

d REPORTING FOR PAY

The soldier reporting for pay answers ldquoHererdquo when his name is called approaches and salutes the officer He picks up and count his money and leaves without saluting The officer does not return his salute

OTHER COURTESY TO INDIVIDUALS

a) When an officer enters the room or tent officersrsquo junior to him and enlisted men present with uncover (if unarmed and stand at attention until the officer directs otherwise or leaves the room) When more than one individual are present the first one who perceive the officer will command ldquoAttentionrdquo loud enough to be heard by everybody present

b) When an officer enters a room or tent used as an office working shop or recreation room those at work or at play are not required to come to attention unless addressed by the officer A transaction of routine business between individuals at work

c) When an officer enters an enlisted menus hall the group is called to ldquoAt Easerdquo by the person noticing him first Men remain seated at ease and continue eating unless the officer directs otherwise A soldiers addresses stop eating and sits at attention until the conversation has ended

d) When accompanying a senior a junior walks or ride on his left except when accompanying senior during inspection

e) When entering a car or a small boat the senior goes in first and others follow in the order of rank In getting off he junior goes out first and others follow in the inverse order of rank

HONORS TO THE NATIONAL ANTHEM OR TO THE COLORS

I OUTDOOR

- Wheneverwherever the National Anthem or the colors is played military personnel not in the formation must observe the following

1 At the first note of the music stand at attention and render the prescribed salute except atthe escort of the color or at retreat when they will face toward the color or flag and salute The salute is retained until the last note of the music

2 The mounted on animals will halt and render the salute mounted Individuals loadinganimals or standing to a horse will stand at attention having the salute

3 Vehicles in motion will be brought to a halt Persons riding on a passenger car or amotorcycle will dismount and salute as described above Occupants of combat vehicles such a tanks half trucks scout cars and armored cars will remain in their vehicles but stand at attention and salute

4 The above respect to the National Color is rendered to the National Anthem or colors offriendly nations

II INDOORS

- When the national anthem is played officer and men will stand at attention and face the music or the flag but do not salute

UNCOVERING- Officer and enlisted men under arms uncover when

a) Seated as a member of or in attendance at a court or board Sentinels guarding prisoners do not uncover

b) Entering places of divine worship

c) Indoors when not in duty

d) In attendance at an official reception

DISPLAY AND SALUTE TO THE FLAG

a The Philippine flag represents our nation and should always be given a place of runner

b The National Flag is never dipped for salute nor is it permitted to touch the ground It is not used as a costume dress or a drapery No lettering or object should be placed on it

c The flag is played in the following manners1 When hoisted at a flag pole it should be hoisted fully at the top of the pole blue part

up or above During mornings the flag is hoisted to the top of the pole first then hauled down until the flag is about midway of the length of the pole

2 When the national flag is displayed with another flag whether they are standing sideby side or with their staff crossed the National Flag is at the right side blue part up

3 When placed in the vertical manner the triangle is up the blue color at the right4 When displayed in the horizontal position the triangle is at the right side with the blue

part up5 When displayed over the casket the triangle is in the direction of the head of the cadaver with

the blue part on the right side

During the ceremonies wherein the holstering or lowering of the flag is done or when it passes by during parades or reviews all persons present except those detailed in holstering lowering and carrying the flag should face it at attention and salute while those in uniform remove their headdress with their right hand and place them over their left breast Women should salute by placing their right hand on their left breastMILITARY DISCIPLINE

Military discipline is the mental attitude and state of training which renders obedience and proper conduct instinctive under all conditions It is founded upon respect for loyalty to properly constituted authority While it is primarily developed by military drills every feature in military life has its effect upon military discipline It is generally indicated in an individual or unit by smartness of appearance and action cleanliness of dress equipment or quarters respect for senior and by the prompt and cheerful obedience by the subordinates of both the latter and spirit of the legal orders

RELATION OF COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

The relation of military discipline to courtesy is clearly explained by the fact that discipline is founded upon by respect and loyalty to superiors and lawfully constituted authorities In other words discipline originates and develops mutual respect and goodwill among members of an organization Without courtesy and respect among members of an organization discipline disappears there will be no peace and order in the organization hence it will disintegrate

IMPORTANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Mass discipline and morale are essential factors for securing cohesive action and for ensuring that singleness or purpose which alone can triumph over the most difficult conditions of war The successful leader will teach his men to recognize and face fear because fear is the enemy of discipline and morale Fear unchecked will lead to panic and a unit that is panicky is no longer a disciplined one but a mob There is no same person who is without fear but with good discipline and morale all will face danger if not willingly at least resignedly because of their inborn sentiment of duty or courage of loyalty and because of their sense of pride in their country in their unit and in themselves in other words because of their esprit de corps

The need for discipline is recognized in many places outside the Armed Forces It reaches at highest form in teams wherein individual desires are subordinated to the interests of the entire team The Armed Forces are more in need of discipline for several reasons First the task of making war is not doing it because we as individuals have to do it in the interest of our country Because of that we cannot be allowed as individual to decide which part of the job each of us will do or how each part to be done Second the organization must be prepared for situations wherein leaders may be lost Personal loyalty for the commandment is not enough If a leader is killed his men must accept orders from his successor immediately and without question to carry on the battle Finally the tremendous size of all Armed Forces demands that there be uniform ways of doing things Discipline subordinates personal and self considerations to the interest of the group

MAINTENANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Discipline is installed in men through instructions pride and traditions and regulations You will develop appreciation of the other factors which build discipline as time passes One must know and understand the different laws and regulations immediately

Discipline is maintained in much the same manner as it is attained The article of war punishes military individualsrsquo fairness and justice high moral pride and responsibility contribute to maintain discipline as to developing it

CHAPTER IVARMED FORCES OF THE PHILIPPINESrsquo HISTORY

Brief History of the AFPCommonwealth Act no 1 otherwise known as the National Defense Act was approved on 21

December 1935 which gave the basic organization of the AFP General Douglas McArthur served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon Major General Dwight D Eisenhower and Major General James Ord members of the McArthurrsquos Staff helped in the planting of the Philippine Military Establishment as well as organizing it

As President Quezon issued Executive Order no 11 on January 1936 which formally established the Army of the Philippines he recalled Colonel Jose Delos Reyes of the Philippine Constabulary to active duty and later promoted him to Brigadier General and designated him as Acting Chief of Staff of the Army Brigadier General Basilio J Valdez and Colonel Guillermo B Francisco were named 1 st and 2nd Asst Chief of Staff respectively

In the same order the Philippine Constabulary became the nucleus of the regular forces of the Philippine Army Filipino citizens were required to go training under the National Defense Act since 1936 that would compose reserve force By the end of the ten year Commonwealth period in 1946 there would have been a trained Philippine Army Reserve pool of 400000 officers and men including the graduates of the ROTC Basic and Advance Course in accredited colleges and universities

When the Philippine Constabulary became part of the Philippine Army the PC Air Corps which was activated on 2 January 1955 was re designated Philippine Air Force on 3 July 1947

On February 1939 an Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was organized as a unit of the Philippine Army Initially equipped with three Q-boats (torpedo boats) and a handful of officers and men hurriedly trained in the rudiments of Sea-Warfare the OSP squadron provided coastal support to the beleaguered Filipino-American forces in the battles of Bataan and Corregidor In October 1947 the OSP was renamed Philippine Naval Patrol and on 5 January 1951 it became the Philippine Navy The OSP was often referred to as Mosquito Fleet

When President Franklin D Roosevelt of the USA declared the state of National Emergency on 26 July 1941 and ordered the induction of the Philippine Army units into the US Armed Forces in the Far East under the command of General Douglas Mc Arthur the Philippine Army had a reserve force of about 100000 officers and men at the time of the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked the Pearl Harbor Clark Field and other targets on 8 December 1941 The Philippine Army Reserve Force totaled around 200000 officers and men

The Philippine Army retained its own organization while serving with the USAFFE After the fall of Bataan on 9 April 1942 many officers and men of the Philippine Army continued resistance against the Japanese by forming guerilla forces all over the country These USAFFE guerilla forces along with other units organized by civilians in various parts of the country fought the Japanese Forces from 1942 to 1945 When the US Liberation Forces landed in Leyte on 20 October 1944 all the guerilla forces participated actively on the liberation on their respective sectors of operations

On October 1947 President Manual A Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 which organized all government agencies The Military establishment was not spared from its official designation as Army of the Philippines and it became the Armed Forces of the Philippines The ten pre-war military districts were deactivated but 4 Military Areas were also activated to enhance the efficiency of the Constabulary personnel all over the country

The post-war Philippine Army eventually got its forces fighting another battle ndash the battle against the armed elements of the Communist Party of the Philippines the HUKBALAHAP later renamed HMB For the anti0dissident campaign Army Sector Command and Battalion Combat Teams were formed During the Korean war the 10th 20th 11th 19th and 2nd BCTrsquos were sent as Philippine Expeditionary Force as the member of the United Nations PEFTOK served in Korea from 1950-1955 On 25 December 1950 President Quirino issued Executive Order No 389 renaming headquarters AFP to General Headquarters AFP and activating the 4 major services The Philippine Army Philippine Constabulary Philippine Air Force and Philippine Navy

From the time the Philippines joined the Southeast Asia Treaty Organization (SEATO) in September 1954 the AFP cooperated actively with the other member nations in the enhancing of military preparedness in the area

As a member of the UN the Philippines also sent a Philippine Air Force Contingent of 77 officers and men on a pacification campaign to the Congo Republic on 11 February 1963

In 1966 the Philippine Civic Action Group (PHICAG) was activated to implement the provisions of RA 4644 Composed of engineers medical and rural community development teams and security personnel the PHILCAG was sent to the Republic of South Vietnam and engaged in socio-economic projects mutually agreed upon by the governments of the Republic of the Philippines and Republic of South Vietnam

The AFP has shown an increasing awareness of its arrival in the country and its vital role in the political and economic development of the country by engaging are actively in civic action programs

Pursuant to the Socio-economic Military Program under RA 2056 the Chief of Staff AFP ordered the assignment of military personnel for public works construction food production land settlement and rural development Several civic centers of the AFP

To give greater impetus on the civic action the 51st Engineer Brigade consisting of 10 Engineer Construction Battalion was activated on 10 March 1962 This unit had constructed several much needed highways roads and bridges in various parts of the country The 52nd Engineer Brigade which was organized on 1 July 1969 also performed similar functions to holster the national program for social and economical developments

Today the AFP is employing all its resources in assisting the socio-economic development programs of the government without prejudice to its primary missions of improving and maintaining the effectiveness of the countryrsquos defense posture

SIGNIFICANT FACTS TO REMEMBER

MACTAN ndash place where the first revolt against Spain took place on April 26 1951 The firstrebellion Spain flared up in Bohol and Leyte

ANDRES MALONG ndash led the first major revolt in Luzon in 1660 He proclaimed himself as aKing of PangasinanLAPU ndash LAPU ndash was the first Filipino hero

MIGUEL VICOS ndash the Spanish Meztiso who assassinated Diego Silang on May 28 1863

RED WITH A FIGURE OF A SUN ndash color of the first flag of the Philippines in 1897

ANDRES BONIFACIO ndash was the founder of the Revolutionary Society called Katipunan

GEN GREGORIO DEL PILAR ndash led the Filipino forces in the Battle of Tirad Pass

AUGUST 29 1896 ndash the date designated as the start of the revolution which was also known as

Cry of BalintawakDECEMBER 14 1897 ndashdate when the Treaty of Paris and Fact of Biak-na-bato was signed

FACT OF BIAK-NA-BATO ndash an agreement between the Filipino and the Spanish authoritieson December 14 1897 to stop all hostilities

MARCELA AGONCILLO ndash designed and made the first flag of the first Philippine Republic

JULIAN FELIPE ndash was the composer of the Philippine National AnthemEMILIO AGUINALDO ndash was the first president of the Philippines

BALANAN ISABELA ndash the place where Gen Emilio Aguinaldo was captured In 1922 the US War Dept authorized the establishment of the Dept of Military Science andTactics under the supervision of the US Army This was established in theUniversity of the Philippines

MANUEL LUIS QUEZON ndash the first president of the Philippine Commonwealth

COMMONWEALTH ACT NO1 ndash is otherwise known as the National Defense Act issued by President Quezon and approved on December 21 1935 and gave the basicorganization of the AFP

GENERAL DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon during the Commonwealth period that helped in the planning andorganization of the Philippine Military EstablishmentGENDOUGLAS MCARTHURrsquoS STAFF

1 MAJ GEN DWIGHT D EISENHOWER2 MAJ GEN JAMES ORD

JANUARY 11 1936 ndash the date President Manuel L Quezon issued Executive Order No 11 onthe establishment of the PA

BRIG GEN BASILIO J VALDEZ ndash first assistant Chief of staff

BRIG GEN JOSE DELOS REYES ndash designated as the first Chief of Staff of the PhilippineArmy

COL GUILLERMO B FRANCISCO ndash 2nd assistant Chief of Staff The PHILLIPINE CONSTABULARY became the nucleus of the Philippine Army and the Philippine Constabulary Air Corps (PCA) was activated on January 2 1937

FEBRUARY 9 1939 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was activated and organized as a unit of thePhilippine Army The Off-Shore Patrol was equipped with Q-Boats (Torpedo Boat)and referred to as the ldquoMosquito Fleetrdquo

PRESIDENT FRANKLIN DELANO ROOSEVELT ndash President of the USA who set July 26 1941 as the date for the declaration of State of National Emergency and at the sametime the induction of the Philippine Army to United States Armed Forces to the Far East (USAFFE) with a total force of 160000 officers and men

GEN DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash was designated as the USAFFE COMMANDER

DECEMBER 8 1941 ndash the date the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked Pearl Harbor Clark Fieldand other targets

APRIL 9 1942 ndash fall of Bataan

MAY 6 1942 ndash fall of Corregidor

MAJOR FERDINAND EDRALIN MARCOS ndash was the most decorated soldier during the World War II and was a recipient of 27 medals

OCTOBER 20 1944 ndash the date the US Liberation Forces landed in Red Beach in Palo Leyte

JULY 3 1947 ndash the date the PC Air Corps was re-designated as the Philippine Air Force

OCTOBER 1947 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol was renamed Phil Naval Patrol ndash the date President Manuel Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 remainingthe Army of the Philippines as Armed Forces of the Philippines andactivating the 4 military areas

ARAW NG KAGITINGAN ndash a day set to commemorate the Fall of Bataan Fall of Corregidorand Fall of Bessang Pass Based on the historical records the independenceof the Republic of the Philippines was on June 12 1898

JULY 4 1946 ndash declaration of the Independence by the USA celebrated today as PhilippineAmerican Friendship Day

JULY 1950 ndash the Philippine Army was separated from the Gen Headquarters Philippine Army

DECEMBER 23 1950 ndash President ElpidioQuirino issued Executive Order No 389 renamingthe Headquarters AFP to Gen Headquarters AFP (GHQ AFP)

JANUARY 5 1951 ndash the Phil Naval Patrol was renamed the Philippine Naval of thePHILIPPINE NAVY

1959 ndash 1955 ndash the Battalion Combat Teams were sent to Korea to comply with the commitmentsof the Philippines as member of the UN The BCT was known as the PHILIPPINE EXPEDITIONARY FORCE TO KOREA (PEFTOK)

SEPTEMBER 1954 ndash The Philippines joined the Southeast Asian Treaty Org (SEATO)

APRIL 11 1963 ndash the PAF contingent of 77 officers and men were sent to Congo Republic of South VietnamPHIL CIVIC ACTION GROUP (PHILCAG) ndash the group of engineers medical and ruralcommunity development team and security personnel were sent by thePhilippines to the representative of South Vietnam

FEBRUARY 22-25 1986 ndash the bloodless peoples revolution which deposed Ferdinand Marcosfrom the presidency and as Commander in elected President of thePhilippines commonly referred to as the EDSA Revolution

ACRONYMSBCT ndash Battalion Combat TeamGHQ ndash General HeadquartersHMB ndash HukbongMapagpalayang Bayan (HUKBALAHAP)PHILCAG-V ndash Philippine Civic Action Group to VietnamSEATO ndash Southeast Asian Treaty OrganizationOSP ndash Off-Shore PatrolPEFTOK ndash Philippine Expeditionary Force to Korea

ENLISTED PERSONNELrsquoS RANKS

MarinesArmy Navy Constabulary Air Force

C ndash CadetCadette M- MidshipmanMidshipwoman

CHAPTER V

MILITARY LEADERSHIP AND COMMAND

A Leadership ndash is the art of influencing and directing men to an assigned goal is such a way toobtain their obedience respect and loyal cooperation Leadership can beexercised by anyone at anytime respective of the frame work of the command

Command ndash is the authority which an individual in the military service lawfully exercisedover subordinates by virtue of his rank and assignment Command andleadership are inseparable whether the function of the command is complex orsimple the commander should always be the controlling head

B TWO TYPES OF LEADER

1 Authoritarian ndash a leader who leads his men by means of rank and position

2 Persuasive ndash a leader who leads his men by always setting examples

C BASIC ELEMENTS OF LEADERSHIP

1 Character ndash to be a leader a person must be of good character Some indications arehonesty good manners industrious self-control and bravery

2 Intelligence ndash is the ability to grasp knowledge easily It includes native ability goodcommon sense and judgment

3 Alertness ndash is mental and physical watchfulness vigilance and observance to his planned and future activity

D LEADERSHIP RESPONSIBILITIES

1 Accomplishment of the assigned mission or task

2 Work for the welfare of his men

E LEADERSHIP TRAITS

1 Knowledge ndash professional knowledge of the job Understands the characteristics of his men2 Bearing ndash dignified appearance and behavior

3 Courage ndash physical and moral ability to act in spite of danger or hardship

4 Decisiveness ndash ability to decide promptly and correctly the proper time and to announce his decision clearly and briefly with authority

5 Dependability ndash performance of duty with or without supervision

6 Endurance ndash physical and mental strength to continue or complete a task

7 Enthusiasm ndash interest in his work or task at hand

8 Force ndash the ability to compel obedience

9 Humility ndash state of being reasonable and proud but not arrogant and boastful

10 Humor ndash ability to appreciate and narrate amusing incidents of everyday life

11 Initiative ndash ability to start or originate an idea or work even when others are absent

12 Judgment ndash power of mind to weight factors affecting a problem and to decide properly

13 Integrity ndash good moral character

14 Justice ndash impartiality in dealing with others giving credit when due and punishment when so demanded

15 Loyalty - sincerity and faithfulness to superiors for the good of the unit

16 Sympathy ndash mutual feelings to others

17 Tact ndash ability to deal with people without hurting their feelings

18 Unselfishness - avoidance of personal consideration that gives a disadvantage

to others

F PRINCIPLES IN LEADERSHIP

1 Know your job - must have thorough professional knowledge of his duties and responsibilities to

command and gain respect from his men

2Know yourself and seek self-improvement - a leader should analyze himself to determine his

good qualities and learn to recognize and correct his weakness

3 Know your men and look after their welfare - understand each of your men personally

psychologically in order to effectively lead them

4 Keep your men informed - keep your men knowledgeable background in all aspects its

organization and mission in order to function effectively

5 Set an example -set a good example as a model in loyalty in superiors and subordinates good

bearing and attitudes pride and faithfulness to the organization

6 Insure the task is understood supervised and accomplished - a leader should give a clear and

concise order that can be understood He supervises his men to accomplish the

assigned mission

7 Train your men as a team - teamwork is a must within and among units from the

smallest to the largest Each men should understand that he has a job to perform

and must cooperate with others in achieving the common objective

8 Make sound and timely decisions - the ability to make raid estimate of the situation Arrive at the

sound decision and announce his decision in the correct form of the proper is

essential to a leader For any situation that may arise the leader should be able to

act logically

9 Develop a sense of responsibility among your subordinates - the leader should train his

subordinates to act in the absence of orders when the situation so demands He

develops responsibility among his subordinates byproper delegation of his

authority and holding them responsible for theaccomplishment of their mission

10 Employ your commands in accordance with its capability - the leader must have thorough knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of his command He must assign objectives that is responsible to be attained However when the situation so demands then men must be forced to action beyond their normal endurance so as to avoid a harder or more costly consequence on their part

11 See responsibility and take responsibility for your action - learn the seniors job for youmay assume his position later on Take advantage of the responsibility delegated toyou and do not back out in case of failure

ROLES OF A LEADER

1 The leader is a model soldier2 The leader is a commander3 The leader is an instructor4 The leader is a personal manager5 The leader is a councilor6 The leader is a custodian of his mens welfare

OBJECTIVES OF A LEADER

1 MORALE - the mental and emotional state of an individual 2 DISCIPLINE - the prompt and willing obedience to orders Complying to regulations and initiating appropriate action even in theabsence of orders 3 PROFICIENCY - the technical tactical and physical ability of an individual to perform their mission 4 ESPRIT DE CORPS - More than the aggregate personality it is how the individuals feel about their unit Jealous of enthusiasticfor pride in and devotion for

MAP READING

MAP - is a graphical representation of the earths surface drawn to a scale on aplane When you look at the map you are actually looking at a picture ofthe ground from a high spot in the air MAP COLOR - different colors are used on the printing of the maps to assist the use understanding it A GREEN - represents all types of vegetables B BLUE - signifies bodies of water such as rivers lakes swamps and streams C RED - indicates first class roads and prominent locations such as theProvincial or Municipal Capitals May be used to stress the significance ofimportant map locations

D BROWN - depicts contour lines which are representation of the relatives elevation and relief of the terrain

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

DRILL AND CEREMONIES

All commands in CAT-I drills are given in Filipino language

TWO KINDS OF COMMANDS

A) Preparatory commandsB) Command of execution

- Preparatory command is written in small letters while the command of execution is written in capital letters as a rule

FIVE COMMANDS OF EXECUTION

1 TA ndash For manual of arms2 RAP ndash for facing and movement at rest3 KAD ndash from rest going to motion4 NA ndash while in motion to another motion5 TO ndash while in motion to stop

DEFINITION OF TERMS

1 ELEMENT ndash is a part of unit for example an individual is an element of a team or a squad a team is an element of a squad and an element is an element of a platoon

2 FORMATION ndash The arrangement of elements in a prescribed manner

3 LINE ndash a formation in which the element are placed side by side with each other

4 RANK ndash a single line of individuals or vehicles placed side by side facing to one direction

5 COLUMN ndash a formation where the elements are placed one behind the other

6 FILE ndash a single column of individuals

7 FLANK ndash the right or left side of an individual unit or formation

8 INTERVAL ndash the space between elements in line Close interval is four inches while normal is one arm length

9 DISTANCE ndash the space between elements in column

10 CENTERndash Middle of a formation

11 ALIGNMENT ndash the arrangement of individuals or troops of a straight of a formation

12 GUIDE ndash an individual ahead or at the straight of a platoon or formation designated to control direction and rate of march

13 PACE ndash a step of 28 inches the length of full step in quick time

14 STEP ndash normal step in marching A side step is 12 inches a half step of 14 inches and a back step is 12 inches

15 CADENCE ndash the correct step and timing in marching

16 QUICK TIME ndash a normal cadence in marching at 120 steps per minute

17 DOUBLE TIME ndash a faster cadence in marching at 180 steps per minute

18 DEPTH ndash the space from front to rear of any formation including the front and rear elements The depth of a man from his chest to his back is assumed to be 12 inches

19 BASE ndash the element on which a movement is planned and regulated

20 FRONT ndash the space occupied by an element measures from flank to flank

21 HEAD ndash the leading element in a column

22 in order of march or advance

23 POST ndash the correct place for an officer of non-commissioned officer to stand in a prescribed formation

24 COVER ndash aligning yourself if directly behind the man to your immediate front while maintaining proper distance

25 HALF STEP ndash the rate of marching 60 steps per minute

COMPOSITION OF UNITS AND THEIR HEADS

1 SQUADndash composed of 7 or more men in formation (squad leader)

2 PLATOON ndash composed of 2 or more squads plus one guide (platoon leader)

3 COMPANYndash composed of two or more platoons (company commander)

4 BATTALION ndash composed of two or more companies (battalion commander)

5 REGIMENT ndash composed of 2 or more battalions (regimental commander)

6 BRIGADE ndash Composed of 2 or more Regiments (BRIGADE COMMANDER)

7 DIVISION ndash Composed of 2 or more brigades (DIVISION COMMANDER)

TWO PARTS OF COMMAND

a PREPARATORY COMMAND ndash Alert the troops or subordinates and prepare them for

the movement they are going to execute

b COMMAND OF EXECUTION ndash Tell the troops to do or execute the movement

DRILL COMMANDS

ENGLISH FILIPINO

FilehelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipHanay

AssemblehelliphelliphelliphellipMagtipan

SquadhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTilap

PlatoonhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPulutong

CompanyhelliphelliphelliphellipBalanghay

BattalionhelliphelliphelliphellipTalupad

RegimenthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSampanaw

BrigadehelliphelliphelliphelliphellipBukluran

DivisionhelliphelliphelliphellipDanay

Fall InhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipHumanay

AttentionhelliphelliphelliphellipHumanda

Parade ResthelliphelliphellipTikas Pahinga

Stand AT EasehelliphellipTindigPaluwag

ResthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPahinga

Fall OuthelliphelliphelliphellipTumiwalag

ENGLISH FILIPINO

DismissedhelliphelliphelliphellipLumansag

Left FacehelliphelliphelliphellipHarapsakaliwa RAP

Right FacehelliphelliphelliphellipHarapsakanan RAP

Hand SalutehelliphelliphellipPugayKamay

Count CadencehelliphellipBilangHakbang NA

Forward MarchhelliphellipPasulong KAD

HalthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipHinto

March Time MarchLakadPatakda KAD

Half Step MarchhelliphellipHating Hakbang AD

Double time MarchhellipTakbongHakbang KAD

Quick Time MarchhellipSiglangHakbang KAD

Route MarchhelliphelliphelliphellipLayangHakbang KAD

Right Step MarchhelliphellipHakbangPakanan KAD

Left Step MarchhelliphellipHakbangPakaliwa KAD

ENGLISH FILIPINO

Route StephelliphelliphelliphellipLayangHakbangMarch KAD

Rifle SalutehelliphelliphelliphellipPugaySandata

Unsling ArmshelliphelliphellipIbis Sandata

Fix BayonethelliphelliphellipIkabitangsundang

Raise pistolhelliphelliphelliphellipItaasang pistol

Open ChamberhelliphelliphellipBuksanang pistol

Sir the paradehelliphelliphellipHandanapoangis formed parangal

ReporthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMag-ulat

OfficershelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgapinuno puma-Center March gitna KAD

LoadhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPunluan

Simulate LeadhelliphelliphellipMagpungloKunwari

Stack armshelliphelliphelliphellipBangkoSandata

Sound thehelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIhudyatangpagbabaretreat ngwatawat

Sound OffhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIhudyatangPangal

Attention tohelliphelliphelliphellipMakinigsathe Orderhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipkautusan

Officer of thehelliphelliphelliphellipPunongTagakalingaDay

By Order OfhelliphelliphelliphellipSautosni

ENGLISH FILIPINO

By the helliphellipSabaysaNumber Bilang

Sling ArmshelliphelliphelliphellipSakbitSandata

Adjust SlinghelliphelliphelliphellipAyusinangSakbit

Unfix bayonethelliphelliphellipAlisinangsundang

Withdraw magazinehellipAlisinangpungluan

Insert magazinehelliphellipIsauliangpungluan

Take your helliphelliphelliphellipSumalunan kayopool

Attention to helliphelliphellipMakinigsakautusanOrders

ColorhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIharappabalikangReverse March watawat KAD

UnloadhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipAlisPungla

Cease FiringhelliphelliphelliphellipItigilangPutukan

Take ArmshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipDampotSandata

AdjutantrsquoshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPanawagansaCall Parangal

PublishhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIpahayag andthe Order kautusan

Details forhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgaNakatalagathe day Ngayon

CommanderhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPunongTanodof the Guard

OfficerrsquoshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgapinunoPost March Balik Kad

Staff Behind Me Change PosthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgaKagawadMagpalitngLunan

ENGLISH FILIPINO

In place HalthelliphelliphellipSa lunan Hinto

File from thehelliphelliphellipSunuranmulasaRightLeft kanankaliwa

Guide LefthelliphelliphelliphellipGabayasaKaliwaCenterRight GitnaKanan

Stand FasthelliphelliphelliphellipTatag manatiliWalangkikilos

Left oliquehelliphelliphelliphellipHiligkaliwaMarch KAD

Two Arms LengthhellipIbayongDalawangExtended to the Left Pakaliwa KAD

TroophelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTipon

One TwohelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIsa DalawaThree Four Tatlo Apat

Assemble to thehelliphelliphellipMagtiponsakananRight left march Kaliwa

MounthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSakay

Close onhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipLumapitsaunangLeading Platoon pulutong

Gaiden on LeadinghellipGabaysaunangPlatoons on Line pulutongnghanay

PostshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSaLunan

Dismiss yourhelliphelliphellipTiwalaginanginyongCompany balangay

ENGLISH FILIPINO

Resume marchhelliphellipMagpatuloy KAD

Columns of twoshellipDalawangTatluhangThreesfours Apatangtudling

All present arehelliphelliphellipNaritopolahatAccounted for napagalaman

Right obliquehelliphelliphellipHilispakananMarch Kad

InspectionhelliphelliphelliphellipPagsisiyasat

DetailhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipNakatalaga

PatrolhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTaliba

Take intervalhelliphelliphelliphellipIbayongpatlang March KAD

Unsling equipmenthelliphellipIbabasagamit

Company MasshelliphelliphellipPulo-pulotongsaRightLeft March kanan

Garden on the LinehelliphellipMgagabaysahanay

Guide PosthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgagabaysalunan

Sir the BattalionhelliphelliphellipAngTalupadpo ayis informed handana

Persons to be decoratedhellipMgaparangalan atand all colors Center lahatngwatawatMarch pumagitna KAD

Form the shelter tentshellipMagsisayosngpagtatayongtolda

AT NORMAL INTERVAL

Dress righthelliphelliphelliphellipTuntonkananDress NA

Dress lefthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTuntonkaliwaDress NA

CoverhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPanakip

At Close IntervalhelliphellipMasinsinPagitanDress right Tunton callow NA

At Close IntervalhellipMasinsinPagitanDress left Tuntonkaliwa NA

At Close IntervalhellipMasinsinPagitanFall In Humanay

Close MarchhelliphelliphelliphellipLakadpasinsin KAD

Extended MarchhelliphellipLakadPadalang KAD

Column RighthelliphelliphellipLikoKananLeft March Kaliwa KAD

Column RighthelliphelliphellipLikoHulingKananLeft March (Half) Kaliwa KAD

Incline to thehelliphelliphelliphellipPagawingkananRightLeft Kaliwa KAD

Change StephelliphelliphelliphellipPalitHakbangMarch KAD

Left ShoulderhelliphelliphellipKaliwangBalikatArms Ta

Trail ArmshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipBitbit TA

Port armshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipAgap TA

Inspection ArmshelliphellipSiyasat TA

RightLefthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipKanangKaliwangFlank March Panig KAD

Count offhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSabayangbilang NA

Call offhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTuluyangbilang NA

Center facehelliphelliphelliphellipHumarapsaGitna RAP

Prepare forhelliphelliphelliphellipHumandasa

Inspection Pagsisiyasat

Open RankhelliphelliphelliphellipPabukangTaludtodMarch KAD

Close RankhelliphelliphelliphellipPasinsinTaludtodMarch KAD

Right TurnhelliphelliphelliphellipPihitsaKananMarch KAD

Pass In ReviewhelliphelliphellipPasa Masid

BackwardhelliphelliphelliphellipLakadPaurongMarch KAD

To the RearhelliphelliphelliphellipPabalikMarch KAD

Right shoulderhelliphelliphellipKanangbalikatArms TA

Order armshelliphelliphelliphellipBaba TA

Present ArmshelliphelliphelliphellipTangha TA

Ready EyeshelliphelliphellipHandaKananRightLeft Kaliwa Tingin

Ready FronthelliphelliphelliphellipHanda Harap

ENGLISH FILIPINO

Sir I present the commandhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Ihahandogkopoangpamunuan

Sir the Troop is ready forhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Handanapoangpangkatsa

Trooping for the linehelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip LibutinangHanay

To the LeftRight Marchhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip PakaliwaPakanan KAD

Column of the Platoon Leading Platoonhelliphelliphelliphellip TudlingngpulutongUnangpulutongby the LeftRight Flank March KaliwaKanangpanig KAD

Donrsquot anticipate the commandhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Huwagpangunahanangutos

Sir the Honod Guard is formedhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Handan a poangTanodPandangal

D The Salute ( Pagpugay )

1 Hand Salute - PugayKamay2 Ready Eyes Right - HandaTinginKanan3 Ready Front - Handa RAP

E Steps and Marching ( Hakbang at Lakad )

1 Count Cadence Count - BilangHakbang NA 2 Forward March - Pasulong KAD 3 Platoon Halt - Pulutong Hinto 4 Mark Time March - LakadPatakda KAD 5 Half Step March - Hating Hakbang KAD 6 Double Time March - TakbongHakbang KAD NA 7 Quick Time March - SiglangHakbang KADNA 8 Route March - LayangHakbang NA 9 In place Double Time March - Sa Lunan TakbongHakbang KADNA10 Right Step March - HakbangPakanan NAKAD11 Left Step March - HakbangPakaliwa NAKAD12 Backward March - LakadPaurong KAD13 To the Rear March - Pabalik NA14 Change Step March - PalitHakbang NA15 One Two Three Four - Isa Dalawa Tatlo Apat

2 SCHOOL OF SOLDIERS WITH ARMS ( PagsasanayngKawalna may sandata )

A Manual of Arms ( PagsanaysapaghawakngSandata )

1 Right Shoulder Arms - SaKanangBalikat TA2 Left Shoulder Arms - SaKaliwangBalikat TA3 Order Arms - Baba TA4 Present Arms - Tanghal TA5 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA6 Trail Arms - Bitbit TA7 Sling Arms - Sakbit Sandata8 Unsling Arms - AlisSakbit Sandata9 Fix Bayonet - IkabitBayoneta10 Unfix Bayonet - AlisBayoneta

B Manual of Gidon( ParaanngPagsasanaysaPaghawakngSagisag )

1 Order Guidon - IbabaSagisag2 Carry Guidon - BitbitSagisag3 Raise Guidon - ItaasSagisagC Manual of Arms for the Pistol ( PagsasanaysaPaghawakngPistola )

1 Raise Pistol - ItaasangPistola2 Withdraw Magazine - AlisinangPistola3 Open Chamber - BuksanangPistola4 Close Chamber - IsaraangPistola5 Insert Magazine - IsuksukangPistola6 Return Pistol - IsauliangPungluan

3 Close Order Drill ( MalapitangPagsasanay )

a At Close Interval Fall In - Sa MasinsinPagitan Humanayb Inspection Arms - Siyasat TAc Port Arms - Agap TAd Order Arms - Baba TA

A To Dismiss the Platoon (PagtiwalagngPulutong )

1 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA2 Port Arms - Agap TA3 Dismiss - Lumansag

B To Form the Platoons ( PaghahanayngPulutong )

1 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA2 Port Arms - Agap TA3 Order Arms - Baba TA4 Call Off - TuluyangBilang5 Report - Mag-ulat

C To Align the Squad ( PaghahanayngTilap )

1 Dress Right Dress - TuntonKanan NA2 Dress Left Dress -TuntonKaliwa NA3 At Close Interval Dress RightDress Left -MasinsinPagitan TuntonKananKaliwa NA4 Ready Fort - Handa RAP5 Cover - Tumakip

D To Change Interval while in Line ( PagpalitngpagitanSamantalangNakahanay )

1 Close March - LakadPasinsin KAD2 Extended March - LakadPadalang KAD3 Extended to the Left - IbayongLakadPakaliwa KADE Marching the Squad from a line ( PaglakadsaPangkatmulasaHanay ) 1 Right Face - HarapsaKanan RAP 2 Left Face - HarapsaKaliwa RAP 3 Forward March - Pasulong KAD 4 Column Right March - LikosaKanan KADNA 5 Column Left March - LikosaKaliwa KADNA 6 Column Half Right March - Liko Hating Kanan KADNA 7 Column Half Left March - Liko Hating Kaliwa KADNA 8 Incline to the Left - PagawingKanan 9 Incline to the Right - PagawingKaliwa 10 Right Left March - KaliwaKanangpanig NA

F Counting of Men ( PagbilangngKawal )

1 Count Off - SabayangBilang NA 2 Call Off - TuluyangBilang NA

G To Change Interval While in Column ( PagpalitngPagitanSamantalangNakatudling )

1 Close March - LakadPasinsin KAD 2 Extend March - LakadPadalang KAD

MILITARY DRILLS AND CEREMONIES

MILITARY CEREMONIES - The movement of the larger unit or troops in a prescribed manner from one place to another

1 REVIEW - A military ceremony held in honor of a visiting commander official or dignitary It is also a fittingaffair to present decorations and awards to deserving members or units of the command

A REVIEW IS NORMALLY CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING ELEMENTSa Formation of troopsb Presentation of troopsc Inspection of troopsd Presentation of awards and decorations

2 PARADE - A more formal ceremony than a review In this ceremony the appearance and movement of thetroops in the formation are the primary consideration The preparation and organization of troops forparades are similar to those of a review The line on which the troops are to be formed and the route ofmarch of the participating units are marked or designated The distance between the troops and thecommander for the parade formation is greater than that of a reviewTWO DISTINCT TYPES OF PARADES1 Evening Parade2 Moonlight Parade

DRILL COMMANDS - An oral of a commander

TWO PARTS 1 PREPARATORY COMMAND - States the movement or formation to be carried out and mentally prepares theindividual for its execution It is a command which indicates the movement

2 COMMAND OF EXECUTION - Tells when the movement is to be carried out It is a command which indicates when amovement is to be executed

EXAMPLE FORWARD MARCHForwardPreparatory Command MarchCommand of Execution

PREPARATORY COMMAND AND COMMAND OF EXECUTION

1 Fall in Fall out - Humanay Tumiwalag

2 Rest - Pahinga3 As you were - Manumbalik4 At ease - TindigPaluwag5 Change step - PalikHakbang

SUPPLEMENTARY COMMAND - The subordinate commander gives a supplementary command He turns his head towards themajority of his elements and gives command over his shoulder He does not face about

MASS COMMAND - May be used to develop confidence and enthusiasm All of the members of the unit being trained speak in unison and execute them

THINGS TO OBSERVE IN GIVING COMMANDS

Inflection - The rise and fall of pitch and the tone changes of the voice

Cadence In Command - The uniform and rhythmic flow of words

Snap - The extra quality in command that demands immediate responseREMEMBER

1 Correct commands have a tone cadence and snap that demands willingness correct and immediateresponse 2 The loudness of the command is adjusted to the number of men in the unit 3 The best posture for giving command is at the position of attention 4 The most desirable pitch when beginning a preparatory command is near the level of your natural speaking voice

MILITARY COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

MILITARY COURTESY - Is the expression or manifestation of consideration for others It is a virtue that is expected of all individuals from all walks of life In the Armed Forces courtesy is a great requirement because it is thebasic upon which military discipline stands With courtesy and respect among members of the organizationwould lose its orderliness and later disintegrate Furthermore courtesy promotes good relationship closer coordination and teamwork among members of the organization It makes theorganization dignified and insures good relations with the public

SALUTES- Is the most important form of military courtesy It is executed by raising the right man smartlyUntil the tip of the forefinger touches the eyebrow or the front brim of the head gear when coveredForefingers are extended and joined palm facing the left forearm inclined at an angle of about 45 degrees

and the right upper arm horizontal to the ground A person saluting looks at the person beingsaluted When the salute is returned he drops the right hand smartly to the side

RULES IN RENDERING HAND SALUTEa The salute is required on and off military installations during outside office hoursb Persons entitled to the saluted 1 All commissioned officers of the AFP both male and female 2 Commissioned officers of friendly nations when they are recognized as such 3 Officers of the Coast and Geodetic Survey and the Public Health Service when they are serving with the AFP 4 All civilian who are entitled by custom to salutec The salute is rendered at a distance of about 6 paces from the person saluted of at the recognizable distances about 30 pacesd The salute must be rendered to those entitled to it It is not rendered when running but at halt or walk Never salute with a cigarette cigar or pipe in the mouth The salute should not be executed in a haphazardway or perfunctory manner Salutes are exchange whether individuals are cover or uncoverede The salute is rendered at once if the senior remains in the immediate vicinity and no conversation takesplace the junior again salutes the senior when they are path from each otherf In making reports the person reporting salutes first regardless of rank An example of this case is whenthe unit commander is reporting to the adjutant during ceremoniesg) Whom not to salute

1 Standing to a horse or leading a horse2 While at work In case the officer calls the soldier stops working approaches and salutes him

and again when they are part to each other3 Indoors except when reporting to an officer or when the soldier is on duty sentry or guard4 When carrying articles with both hands or being so occupied as to make saluting practical5 When riding in a fast moving vehicle and the other is dismounted the salute is not rendered

Exception are when the vehicle is clearly marked to indicate a General Officer and when saluting is a part of the ceremony

6 When meeting a prisoner of war Soldier serving as military prisoner are not entitled to salute7 In case of doubt due to absence of specific instruction the salute is rendered

The term ldquooutdoorrdquo is constructed to include such buildings as drill halls gymnasiums and other roofed enclosures used for drill or exercise of troops Theaters covered walks and other shelters open on the side are also considered as outdoor

ldquoIndoorsrdquo include offices hallways kitchen orderly rooms recreation halls washroom and quarters

ldquoUnder armsrdquo means carrying arms having them attached to the person by sling holster or other means In the absence of arms the wearing of cartridge bells pistol holsters and automatic rifle belts also mean ldquounder armsrdquo

TYPES OF SALUTES

a Hand saluteb The Rifle Salute at Order Armsc The Rifle Salute at Trail Armsd The Rifle Salute at Present Armse The Rifle Salute at Shoulder Arms (Right Shoulder)f The Rifle Salute at Left Shoulder Armsg The Gun Saluteh Eyes Right by men in ranks when Pass in Review

REPORTING TO AN OFFICER

The salute is rendered by a junior when reporting to a senior He also salutes before leaving

a REPORTING INDOORS WITHOUT ARMS

A soldier removes his headgear knocks at the door of the office of the officer and enters when told to do so Upon entering he halts at about two paces from the officer and salutes and says Sir Cadet Airman Dela Cruz reporting to the squadron commander Sir The salute will be retained until he completes his report and the officer had returned his salute execute about face and leaves the office

b REPORTING INDOORS UNDER ARMS

The procedure for reporting is the same as discussed above except that the soldier remain covered If carrying a rifle the soldier carries it and salute at trail arms Otherwise the hand salute is given

c REPORTING OUTDOORS

The procedure for reporting to an officer the head gear is not removed Rifles should be carried at trail arms or at the right shoulder The hand salute or rifle salute is given as the case may be

d REPORTING FOR PAY

The soldier reporting for pay answers ldquoHererdquo when his name is called approaches and salutes the officer He picks up and count his money and leaves without saluting The officer does not return his salute

OTHER COURTESY TO INDIVIDUALS

a) When an officer enters the room or tent officersrsquo junior to him and enlisted men present with uncover (if unarmed and stand at attention until the officer directs otherwise or leaves the room) When more than one individual are present the first one who perceive the officer will command ldquoAttentionrdquo loud enough to be heard by everybody present

b) When an officer enters a room or tent used as an office working shop or recreation room those at work or at play are not required to come to attention unless addressed by the officer A transaction of routine business between individuals at work

c) When an officer enters an enlisted menus hall the group is called to ldquoAt Easerdquo by the person noticing him first Men remain seated at ease and continue eating unless the officer directs otherwise A soldiers addresses stop eating and sits at attention until the conversation has ended

d) When accompanying a senior a junior walks or ride on his left except when accompanying senior during inspection

e) When entering a car or a small boat the senior goes in first and others follow in the order of rank In getting off he junior goes out first and others follow in the inverse order of rank

HONORS TO THE NATIONAL ANTHEM OR TO THE COLORS

I OUTDOOR

- Wheneverwherever the National Anthem or the colors is played military personnel not in the formation must observe the following

1 At the first note of the music stand at attention and render the prescribed salute except atthe escort of the color or at retreat when they will face toward the color or flag and salute The salute is retained until the last note of the music

2 The mounted on animals will halt and render the salute mounted Individuals loadinganimals or standing to a horse will stand at attention having the salute

3 Vehicles in motion will be brought to a halt Persons riding on a passenger car or amotorcycle will dismount and salute as described above Occupants of combat vehicles such a tanks half trucks scout cars and armored cars will remain in their vehicles but stand at attention and salute

4 The above respect to the National Color is rendered to the National Anthem or colors offriendly nations

II INDOORS

- When the national anthem is played officer and men will stand at attention and face the music or the flag but do not salute

UNCOVERING- Officer and enlisted men under arms uncover when

a) Seated as a member of or in attendance at a court or board Sentinels guarding prisoners do not uncover

b) Entering places of divine worship

c) Indoors when not in duty

d) In attendance at an official reception

DISPLAY AND SALUTE TO THE FLAG

a The Philippine flag represents our nation and should always be given a place of runner

b The National Flag is never dipped for salute nor is it permitted to touch the ground It is not used as a costume dress or a drapery No lettering or object should be placed on it

c The flag is played in the following manners1 When hoisted at a flag pole it should be hoisted fully at the top of the pole blue part

up or above During mornings the flag is hoisted to the top of the pole first then hauled down until the flag is about midway of the length of the pole

2 When the national flag is displayed with another flag whether they are standing sideby side or with their staff crossed the National Flag is at the right side blue part up

3 When placed in the vertical manner the triangle is up the blue color at the right4 When displayed in the horizontal position the triangle is at the right side with the blue

part up5 When displayed over the casket the triangle is in the direction of the head of the cadaver with

the blue part on the right side

During the ceremonies wherein the holstering or lowering of the flag is done or when it passes by during parades or reviews all persons present except those detailed in holstering lowering and carrying the flag should face it at attention and salute while those in uniform remove their headdress with their right hand and place them over their left breast Women should salute by placing their right hand on their left breastMILITARY DISCIPLINE

Military discipline is the mental attitude and state of training which renders obedience and proper conduct instinctive under all conditions It is founded upon respect for loyalty to properly constituted authority While it is primarily developed by military drills every feature in military life has its effect upon military discipline It is generally indicated in an individual or unit by smartness of appearance and action cleanliness of dress equipment or quarters respect for senior and by the prompt and cheerful obedience by the subordinates of both the latter and spirit of the legal orders

RELATION OF COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

The relation of military discipline to courtesy is clearly explained by the fact that discipline is founded upon by respect and loyalty to superiors and lawfully constituted authorities In other words discipline originates and develops mutual respect and goodwill among members of an organization Without courtesy and respect among members of an organization discipline disappears there will be no peace and order in the organization hence it will disintegrate

IMPORTANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Mass discipline and morale are essential factors for securing cohesive action and for ensuring that singleness or purpose which alone can triumph over the most difficult conditions of war The successful leader will teach his men to recognize and face fear because fear is the enemy of discipline and morale Fear unchecked will lead to panic and a unit that is panicky is no longer a disciplined one but a mob There is no same person who is without fear but with good discipline and morale all will face danger if not willingly at least resignedly because of their inborn sentiment of duty or courage of loyalty and because of their sense of pride in their country in their unit and in themselves in other words because of their esprit de corps

The need for discipline is recognized in many places outside the Armed Forces It reaches at highest form in teams wherein individual desires are subordinated to the interests of the entire team The Armed Forces are more in need of discipline for several reasons First the task of making war is not doing it because we as individuals have to do it in the interest of our country Because of that we cannot be allowed as individual to decide which part of the job each of us will do or how each part to be done Second the organization must be prepared for situations wherein leaders may be lost Personal loyalty for the commandment is not enough If a leader is killed his men must accept orders from his successor immediately and without question to carry on the battle Finally the tremendous size of all Armed Forces demands that there be uniform ways of doing things Discipline subordinates personal and self considerations to the interest of the group

MAINTENANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Discipline is installed in men through instructions pride and traditions and regulations You will develop appreciation of the other factors which build discipline as time passes One must know and understand the different laws and regulations immediately

Discipline is maintained in much the same manner as it is attained The article of war punishes military individualsrsquo fairness and justice high moral pride and responsibility contribute to maintain discipline as to developing it

CHAPTER IVARMED FORCES OF THE PHILIPPINESrsquo HISTORY

Brief History of the AFPCommonwealth Act no 1 otherwise known as the National Defense Act was approved on 21

December 1935 which gave the basic organization of the AFP General Douglas McArthur served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon Major General Dwight D Eisenhower and Major General James Ord members of the McArthurrsquos Staff helped in the planting of the Philippine Military Establishment as well as organizing it

As President Quezon issued Executive Order no 11 on January 1936 which formally established the Army of the Philippines he recalled Colonel Jose Delos Reyes of the Philippine Constabulary to active duty and later promoted him to Brigadier General and designated him as Acting Chief of Staff of the Army Brigadier General Basilio J Valdez and Colonel Guillermo B Francisco were named 1 st and 2nd Asst Chief of Staff respectively

In the same order the Philippine Constabulary became the nucleus of the regular forces of the Philippine Army Filipino citizens were required to go training under the National Defense Act since 1936 that would compose reserve force By the end of the ten year Commonwealth period in 1946 there would have been a trained Philippine Army Reserve pool of 400000 officers and men including the graduates of the ROTC Basic and Advance Course in accredited colleges and universities

When the Philippine Constabulary became part of the Philippine Army the PC Air Corps which was activated on 2 January 1955 was re designated Philippine Air Force on 3 July 1947

On February 1939 an Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was organized as a unit of the Philippine Army Initially equipped with three Q-boats (torpedo boats) and a handful of officers and men hurriedly trained in the rudiments of Sea-Warfare the OSP squadron provided coastal support to the beleaguered Filipino-American forces in the battles of Bataan and Corregidor In October 1947 the OSP was renamed Philippine Naval Patrol and on 5 January 1951 it became the Philippine Navy The OSP was often referred to as Mosquito Fleet

When President Franklin D Roosevelt of the USA declared the state of National Emergency on 26 July 1941 and ordered the induction of the Philippine Army units into the US Armed Forces in the Far East under the command of General Douglas Mc Arthur the Philippine Army had a reserve force of about 100000 officers and men at the time of the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked the Pearl Harbor Clark Field and other targets on 8 December 1941 The Philippine Army Reserve Force totaled around 200000 officers and men

The Philippine Army retained its own organization while serving with the USAFFE After the fall of Bataan on 9 April 1942 many officers and men of the Philippine Army continued resistance against the Japanese by forming guerilla forces all over the country These USAFFE guerilla forces along with other units organized by civilians in various parts of the country fought the Japanese Forces from 1942 to 1945 When the US Liberation Forces landed in Leyte on 20 October 1944 all the guerilla forces participated actively on the liberation on their respective sectors of operations

On October 1947 President Manual A Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 which organized all government agencies The Military establishment was not spared from its official designation as Army of the Philippines and it became the Armed Forces of the Philippines The ten pre-war military districts were deactivated but 4 Military Areas were also activated to enhance the efficiency of the Constabulary personnel all over the country

The post-war Philippine Army eventually got its forces fighting another battle ndash the battle against the armed elements of the Communist Party of the Philippines the HUKBALAHAP later renamed HMB For the anti0dissident campaign Army Sector Command and Battalion Combat Teams were formed During the Korean war the 10th 20th 11th 19th and 2nd BCTrsquos were sent as Philippine Expeditionary Force as the member of the United Nations PEFTOK served in Korea from 1950-1955 On 25 December 1950 President Quirino issued Executive Order No 389 renaming headquarters AFP to General Headquarters AFP and activating the 4 major services The Philippine Army Philippine Constabulary Philippine Air Force and Philippine Navy

From the time the Philippines joined the Southeast Asia Treaty Organization (SEATO) in September 1954 the AFP cooperated actively with the other member nations in the enhancing of military preparedness in the area

As a member of the UN the Philippines also sent a Philippine Air Force Contingent of 77 officers and men on a pacification campaign to the Congo Republic on 11 February 1963

In 1966 the Philippine Civic Action Group (PHICAG) was activated to implement the provisions of RA 4644 Composed of engineers medical and rural community development teams and security personnel the PHILCAG was sent to the Republic of South Vietnam and engaged in socio-economic projects mutually agreed upon by the governments of the Republic of the Philippines and Republic of South Vietnam

The AFP has shown an increasing awareness of its arrival in the country and its vital role in the political and economic development of the country by engaging are actively in civic action programs

Pursuant to the Socio-economic Military Program under RA 2056 the Chief of Staff AFP ordered the assignment of military personnel for public works construction food production land settlement and rural development Several civic centers of the AFP

To give greater impetus on the civic action the 51st Engineer Brigade consisting of 10 Engineer Construction Battalion was activated on 10 March 1962 This unit had constructed several much needed highways roads and bridges in various parts of the country The 52nd Engineer Brigade which was organized on 1 July 1969 also performed similar functions to holster the national program for social and economical developments

Today the AFP is employing all its resources in assisting the socio-economic development programs of the government without prejudice to its primary missions of improving and maintaining the effectiveness of the countryrsquos defense posture

SIGNIFICANT FACTS TO REMEMBER

MACTAN ndash place where the first revolt against Spain took place on April 26 1951 The firstrebellion Spain flared up in Bohol and Leyte

ANDRES MALONG ndash led the first major revolt in Luzon in 1660 He proclaimed himself as aKing of PangasinanLAPU ndash LAPU ndash was the first Filipino hero

MIGUEL VICOS ndash the Spanish Meztiso who assassinated Diego Silang on May 28 1863

RED WITH A FIGURE OF A SUN ndash color of the first flag of the Philippines in 1897

ANDRES BONIFACIO ndash was the founder of the Revolutionary Society called Katipunan

GEN GREGORIO DEL PILAR ndash led the Filipino forces in the Battle of Tirad Pass

AUGUST 29 1896 ndash the date designated as the start of the revolution which was also known as

Cry of BalintawakDECEMBER 14 1897 ndashdate when the Treaty of Paris and Fact of Biak-na-bato was signed

FACT OF BIAK-NA-BATO ndash an agreement between the Filipino and the Spanish authoritieson December 14 1897 to stop all hostilities

MARCELA AGONCILLO ndash designed and made the first flag of the first Philippine Republic

JULIAN FELIPE ndash was the composer of the Philippine National AnthemEMILIO AGUINALDO ndash was the first president of the Philippines

BALANAN ISABELA ndash the place where Gen Emilio Aguinaldo was captured In 1922 the US War Dept authorized the establishment of the Dept of Military Science andTactics under the supervision of the US Army This was established in theUniversity of the Philippines

MANUEL LUIS QUEZON ndash the first president of the Philippine Commonwealth

COMMONWEALTH ACT NO1 ndash is otherwise known as the National Defense Act issued by President Quezon and approved on December 21 1935 and gave the basicorganization of the AFP

GENERAL DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon during the Commonwealth period that helped in the planning andorganization of the Philippine Military EstablishmentGENDOUGLAS MCARTHURrsquoS STAFF

1 MAJ GEN DWIGHT D EISENHOWER2 MAJ GEN JAMES ORD

JANUARY 11 1936 ndash the date President Manuel L Quezon issued Executive Order No 11 onthe establishment of the PA

BRIG GEN BASILIO J VALDEZ ndash first assistant Chief of staff

BRIG GEN JOSE DELOS REYES ndash designated as the first Chief of Staff of the PhilippineArmy

COL GUILLERMO B FRANCISCO ndash 2nd assistant Chief of Staff The PHILLIPINE CONSTABULARY became the nucleus of the Philippine Army and the Philippine Constabulary Air Corps (PCA) was activated on January 2 1937

FEBRUARY 9 1939 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was activated and organized as a unit of thePhilippine Army The Off-Shore Patrol was equipped with Q-Boats (Torpedo Boat)and referred to as the ldquoMosquito Fleetrdquo

PRESIDENT FRANKLIN DELANO ROOSEVELT ndash President of the USA who set July 26 1941 as the date for the declaration of State of National Emergency and at the sametime the induction of the Philippine Army to United States Armed Forces to the Far East (USAFFE) with a total force of 160000 officers and men

GEN DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash was designated as the USAFFE COMMANDER

DECEMBER 8 1941 ndash the date the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked Pearl Harbor Clark Fieldand other targets

APRIL 9 1942 ndash fall of Bataan

MAY 6 1942 ndash fall of Corregidor

MAJOR FERDINAND EDRALIN MARCOS ndash was the most decorated soldier during the World War II and was a recipient of 27 medals

OCTOBER 20 1944 ndash the date the US Liberation Forces landed in Red Beach in Palo Leyte

JULY 3 1947 ndash the date the PC Air Corps was re-designated as the Philippine Air Force

OCTOBER 1947 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol was renamed Phil Naval Patrol ndash the date President Manuel Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 remainingthe Army of the Philippines as Armed Forces of the Philippines andactivating the 4 military areas

ARAW NG KAGITINGAN ndash a day set to commemorate the Fall of Bataan Fall of Corregidorand Fall of Bessang Pass Based on the historical records the independenceof the Republic of the Philippines was on June 12 1898

JULY 4 1946 ndash declaration of the Independence by the USA celebrated today as PhilippineAmerican Friendship Day

JULY 1950 ndash the Philippine Army was separated from the Gen Headquarters Philippine Army

DECEMBER 23 1950 ndash President ElpidioQuirino issued Executive Order No 389 renamingthe Headquarters AFP to Gen Headquarters AFP (GHQ AFP)

JANUARY 5 1951 ndash the Phil Naval Patrol was renamed the Philippine Naval of thePHILIPPINE NAVY

1959 ndash 1955 ndash the Battalion Combat Teams were sent to Korea to comply with the commitmentsof the Philippines as member of the UN The BCT was known as the PHILIPPINE EXPEDITIONARY FORCE TO KOREA (PEFTOK)

SEPTEMBER 1954 ndash The Philippines joined the Southeast Asian Treaty Org (SEATO)

APRIL 11 1963 ndash the PAF contingent of 77 officers and men were sent to Congo Republic of South VietnamPHIL CIVIC ACTION GROUP (PHILCAG) ndash the group of engineers medical and ruralcommunity development team and security personnel were sent by thePhilippines to the representative of South Vietnam

FEBRUARY 22-25 1986 ndash the bloodless peoples revolution which deposed Ferdinand Marcosfrom the presidency and as Commander in elected President of thePhilippines commonly referred to as the EDSA Revolution

ACRONYMSBCT ndash Battalion Combat TeamGHQ ndash General HeadquartersHMB ndash HukbongMapagpalayang Bayan (HUKBALAHAP)PHILCAG-V ndash Philippine Civic Action Group to VietnamSEATO ndash Southeast Asian Treaty OrganizationOSP ndash Off-Shore PatrolPEFTOK ndash Philippine Expeditionary Force to Korea

ENLISTED PERSONNELrsquoS RANKS

MarinesArmy Navy Constabulary Air Force

C ndash CadetCadette M- MidshipmanMidshipwoman

CHAPTER V

MILITARY LEADERSHIP AND COMMAND

A Leadership ndash is the art of influencing and directing men to an assigned goal is such a way toobtain their obedience respect and loyal cooperation Leadership can beexercised by anyone at anytime respective of the frame work of the command

Command ndash is the authority which an individual in the military service lawfully exercisedover subordinates by virtue of his rank and assignment Command andleadership are inseparable whether the function of the command is complex orsimple the commander should always be the controlling head

B TWO TYPES OF LEADER

1 Authoritarian ndash a leader who leads his men by means of rank and position

2 Persuasive ndash a leader who leads his men by always setting examples

C BASIC ELEMENTS OF LEADERSHIP

1 Character ndash to be a leader a person must be of good character Some indications arehonesty good manners industrious self-control and bravery

2 Intelligence ndash is the ability to grasp knowledge easily It includes native ability goodcommon sense and judgment

3 Alertness ndash is mental and physical watchfulness vigilance and observance to his planned and future activity

D LEADERSHIP RESPONSIBILITIES

1 Accomplishment of the assigned mission or task

2 Work for the welfare of his men

E LEADERSHIP TRAITS

1 Knowledge ndash professional knowledge of the job Understands the characteristics of his men2 Bearing ndash dignified appearance and behavior

3 Courage ndash physical and moral ability to act in spite of danger or hardship

4 Decisiveness ndash ability to decide promptly and correctly the proper time and to announce his decision clearly and briefly with authority

5 Dependability ndash performance of duty with or without supervision

6 Endurance ndash physical and mental strength to continue or complete a task

7 Enthusiasm ndash interest in his work or task at hand

8 Force ndash the ability to compel obedience

9 Humility ndash state of being reasonable and proud but not arrogant and boastful

10 Humor ndash ability to appreciate and narrate amusing incidents of everyday life

11 Initiative ndash ability to start or originate an idea or work even when others are absent

12 Judgment ndash power of mind to weight factors affecting a problem and to decide properly

13 Integrity ndash good moral character

14 Justice ndash impartiality in dealing with others giving credit when due and punishment when so demanded

15 Loyalty - sincerity and faithfulness to superiors for the good of the unit

16 Sympathy ndash mutual feelings to others

17 Tact ndash ability to deal with people without hurting their feelings

18 Unselfishness - avoidance of personal consideration that gives a disadvantage

to others

F PRINCIPLES IN LEADERSHIP

1 Know your job - must have thorough professional knowledge of his duties and responsibilities to

command and gain respect from his men

2Know yourself and seek self-improvement - a leader should analyze himself to determine his

good qualities and learn to recognize and correct his weakness

3 Know your men and look after their welfare - understand each of your men personally

psychologically in order to effectively lead them

4 Keep your men informed - keep your men knowledgeable background in all aspects its

organization and mission in order to function effectively

5 Set an example -set a good example as a model in loyalty in superiors and subordinates good

bearing and attitudes pride and faithfulness to the organization

6 Insure the task is understood supervised and accomplished - a leader should give a clear and

concise order that can be understood He supervises his men to accomplish the

assigned mission

7 Train your men as a team - teamwork is a must within and among units from the

smallest to the largest Each men should understand that he has a job to perform

and must cooperate with others in achieving the common objective

8 Make sound and timely decisions - the ability to make raid estimate of the situation Arrive at the

sound decision and announce his decision in the correct form of the proper is

essential to a leader For any situation that may arise the leader should be able to

act logically

9 Develop a sense of responsibility among your subordinates - the leader should train his

subordinates to act in the absence of orders when the situation so demands He

develops responsibility among his subordinates byproper delegation of his

authority and holding them responsible for theaccomplishment of their mission

10 Employ your commands in accordance with its capability - the leader must have thorough knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of his command He must assign objectives that is responsible to be attained However when the situation so demands then men must be forced to action beyond their normal endurance so as to avoid a harder or more costly consequence on their part

11 See responsibility and take responsibility for your action - learn the seniors job for youmay assume his position later on Take advantage of the responsibility delegated toyou and do not back out in case of failure

ROLES OF A LEADER

1 The leader is a model soldier2 The leader is a commander3 The leader is an instructor4 The leader is a personal manager5 The leader is a councilor6 The leader is a custodian of his mens welfare

OBJECTIVES OF A LEADER

1 MORALE - the mental and emotional state of an individual 2 DISCIPLINE - the prompt and willing obedience to orders Complying to regulations and initiating appropriate action even in theabsence of orders 3 PROFICIENCY - the technical tactical and physical ability of an individual to perform their mission 4 ESPRIT DE CORPS - More than the aggregate personality it is how the individuals feel about their unit Jealous of enthusiasticfor pride in and devotion for

MAP READING

MAP - is a graphical representation of the earths surface drawn to a scale on aplane When you look at the map you are actually looking at a picture ofthe ground from a high spot in the air MAP COLOR - different colors are used on the printing of the maps to assist the use understanding it A GREEN - represents all types of vegetables B BLUE - signifies bodies of water such as rivers lakes swamps and streams C RED - indicates first class roads and prominent locations such as theProvincial or Municipal Capitals May be used to stress the significance ofimportant map locations

D BROWN - depicts contour lines which are representation of the relatives elevation and relief of the terrain

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

11 ALIGNMENT ndash the arrangement of individuals or troops of a straight of a formation

12 GUIDE ndash an individual ahead or at the straight of a platoon or formation designated to control direction and rate of march

13 PACE ndash a step of 28 inches the length of full step in quick time

14 STEP ndash normal step in marching A side step is 12 inches a half step of 14 inches and a back step is 12 inches

15 CADENCE ndash the correct step and timing in marching

16 QUICK TIME ndash a normal cadence in marching at 120 steps per minute

17 DOUBLE TIME ndash a faster cadence in marching at 180 steps per minute

18 DEPTH ndash the space from front to rear of any formation including the front and rear elements The depth of a man from his chest to his back is assumed to be 12 inches

19 BASE ndash the element on which a movement is planned and regulated

20 FRONT ndash the space occupied by an element measures from flank to flank

21 HEAD ndash the leading element in a column

22 in order of march or advance

23 POST ndash the correct place for an officer of non-commissioned officer to stand in a prescribed formation

24 COVER ndash aligning yourself if directly behind the man to your immediate front while maintaining proper distance

25 HALF STEP ndash the rate of marching 60 steps per minute

COMPOSITION OF UNITS AND THEIR HEADS

1 SQUADndash composed of 7 or more men in formation (squad leader)

2 PLATOON ndash composed of 2 or more squads plus one guide (platoon leader)

3 COMPANYndash composed of two or more platoons (company commander)

4 BATTALION ndash composed of two or more companies (battalion commander)

5 REGIMENT ndash composed of 2 or more battalions (regimental commander)

6 BRIGADE ndash Composed of 2 or more Regiments (BRIGADE COMMANDER)

7 DIVISION ndash Composed of 2 or more brigades (DIVISION COMMANDER)

TWO PARTS OF COMMAND

a PREPARATORY COMMAND ndash Alert the troops or subordinates and prepare them for

the movement they are going to execute

b COMMAND OF EXECUTION ndash Tell the troops to do or execute the movement

DRILL COMMANDS

ENGLISH FILIPINO

FilehelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipHanay

AssemblehelliphelliphelliphellipMagtipan

SquadhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTilap

PlatoonhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPulutong

CompanyhelliphelliphelliphellipBalanghay

BattalionhelliphelliphelliphellipTalupad

RegimenthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSampanaw

BrigadehelliphelliphelliphelliphellipBukluran

DivisionhelliphelliphelliphellipDanay

Fall InhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipHumanay

AttentionhelliphelliphelliphellipHumanda

Parade ResthelliphelliphellipTikas Pahinga

Stand AT EasehelliphellipTindigPaluwag

ResthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPahinga

Fall OuthelliphelliphelliphellipTumiwalag

ENGLISH FILIPINO

DismissedhelliphelliphelliphellipLumansag

Left FacehelliphelliphelliphellipHarapsakaliwa RAP

Right FacehelliphelliphelliphellipHarapsakanan RAP

Hand SalutehelliphelliphellipPugayKamay

Count CadencehelliphellipBilangHakbang NA

Forward MarchhelliphellipPasulong KAD

HalthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipHinto

March Time MarchLakadPatakda KAD

Half Step MarchhelliphellipHating Hakbang AD

Double time MarchhellipTakbongHakbang KAD

Quick Time MarchhellipSiglangHakbang KAD

Route MarchhelliphelliphelliphellipLayangHakbang KAD

Right Step MarchhelliphellipHakbangPakanan KAD

Left Step MarchhelliphellipHakbangPakaliwa KAD

ENGLISH FILIPINO

Route StephelliphelliphelliphellipLayangHakbangMarch KAD

Rifle SalutehelliphelliphelliphellipPugaySandata

Unsling ArmshelliphelliphellipIbis Sandata

Fix BayonethelliphelliphellipIkabitangsundang

Raise pistolhelliphelliphelliphellipItaasang pistol

Open ChamberhelliphelliphellipBuksanang pistol

Sir the paradehelliphelliphellipHandanapoangis formed parangal

ReporthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMag-ulat

OfficershelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgapinuno puma-Center March gitna KAD

LoadhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPunluan

Simulate LeadhelliphelliphellipMagpungloKunwari

Stack armshelliphelliphelliphellipBangkoSandata

Sound thehelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIhudyatangpagbabaretreat ngwatawat

Sound OffhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIhudyatangPangal

Attention tohelliphelliphelliphellipMakinigsathe Orderhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipkautusan

Officer of thehelliphelliphelliphellipPunongTagakalingaDay

By Order OfhelliphelliphelliphellipSautosni

ENGLISH FILIPINO

By the helliphellipSabaysaNumber Bilang

Sling ArmshelliphelliphelliphellipSakbitSandata

Adjust SlinghelliphelliphelliphellipAyusinangSakbit

Unfix bayonethelliphelliphellipAlisinangsundang

Withdraw magazinehellipAlisinangpungluan

Insert magazinehelliphellipIsauliangpungluan

Take your helliphelliphelliphellipSumalunan kayopool

Attention to helliphelliphellipMakinigsakautusanOrders

ColorhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIharappabalikangReverse March watawat KAD

UnloadhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipAlisPungla

Cease FiringhelliphelliphelliphellipItigilangPutukan

Take ArmshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipDampotSandata

AdjutantrsquoshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPanawagansaCall Parangal

PublishhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIpahayag andthe Order kautusan

Details forhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgaNakatalagathe day Ngayon

CommanderhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPunongTanodof the Guard

OfficerrsquoshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgapinunoPost March Balik Kad

Staff Behind Me Change PosthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgaKagawadMagpalitngLunan

ENGLISH FILIPINO

In place HalthelliphelliphellipSa lunan Hinto

File from thehelliphelliphellipSunuranmulasaRightLeft kanankaliwa

Guide LefthelliphelliphelliphellipGabayasaKaliwaCenterRight GitnaKanan

Stand FasthelliphelliphelliphellipTatag manatiliWalangkikilos

Left oliquehelliphelliphelliphellipHiligkaliwaMarch KAD

Two Arms LengthhellipIbayongDalawangExtended to the Left Pakaliwa KAD

TroophelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTipon

One TwohelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIsa DalawaThree Four Tatlo Apat

Assemble to thehelliphelliphellipMagtiponsakananRight left march Kaliwa

MounthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSakay

Close onhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipLumapitsaunangLeading Platoon pulutong

Gaiden on LeadinghellipGabaysaunangPlatoons on Line pulutongnghanay

PostshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSaLunan

Dismiss yourhelliphelliphellipTiwalaginanginyongCompany balangay

ENGLISH FILIPINO

Resume marchhelliphellipMagpatuloy KAD

Columns of twoshellipDalawangTatluhangThreesfours Apatangtudling

All present arehelliphelliphellipNaritopolahatAccounted for napagalaman

Right obliquehelliphelliphellipHilispakananMarch Kad

InspectionhelliphelliphelliphellipPagsisiyasat

DetailhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipNakatalaga

PatrolhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTaliba

Take intervalhelliphelliphelliphellipIbayongpatlang March KAD

Unsling equipmenthelliphellipIbabasagamit

Company MasshelliphelliphellipPulo-pulotongsaRightLeft March kanan

Garden on the LinehelliphellipMgagabaysahanay

Guide PosthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgagabaysalunan

Sir the BattalionhelliphelliphellipAngTalupadpo ayis informed handana

Persons to be decoratedhellipMgaparangalan atand all colors Center lahatngwatawatMarch pumagitna KAD

Form the shelter tentshellipMagsisayosngpagtatayongtolda

AT NORMAL INTERVAL

Dress righthelliphelliphelliphellipTuntonkananDress NA

Dress lefthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTuntonkaliwaDress NA

CoverhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPanakip

At Close IntervalhelliphellipMasinsinPagitanDress right Tunton callow NA

At Close IntervalhellipMasinsinPagitanDress left Tuntonkaliwa NA

At Close IntervalhellipMasinsinPagitanFall In Humanay

Close MarchhelliphelliphelliphellipLakadpasinsin KAD

Extended MarchhelliphellipLakadPadalang KAD

Column RighthelliphelliphellipLikoKananLeft March Kaliwa KAD

Column RighthelliphelliphellipLikoHulingKananLeft March (Half) Kaliwa KAD

Incline to thehelliphelliphelliphellipPagawingkananRightLeft Kaliwa KAD

Change StephelliphelliphelliphellipPalitHakbangMarch KAD

Left ShoulderhelliphelliphellipKaliwangBalikatArms Ta

Trail ArmshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipBitbit TA

Port armshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipAgap TA

Inspection ArmshelliphellipSiyasat TA

RightLefthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipKanangKaliwangFlank March Panig KAD

Count offhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSabayangbilang NA

Call offhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTuluyangbilang NA

Center facehelliphelliphelliphellipHumarapsaGitna RAP

Prepare forhelliphelliphelliphellipHumandasa

Inspection Pagsisiyasat

Open RankhelliphelliphelliphellipPabukangTaludtodMarch KAD

Close RankhelliphelliphelliphellipPasinsinTaludtodMarch KAD

Right TurnhelliphelliphelliphellipPihitsaKananMarch KAD

Pass In ReviewhelliphelliphellipPasa Masid

BackwardhelliphelliphelliphellipLakadPaurongMarch KAD

To the RearhelliphelliphelliphellipPabalikMarch KAD

Right shoulderhelliphelliphellipKanangbalikatArms TA

Order armshelliphelliphelliphellipBaba TA

Present ArmshelliphelliphelliphellipTangha TA

Ready EyeshelliphelliphellipHandaKananRightLeft Kaliwa Tingin

Ready FronthelliphelliphelliphellipHanda Harap

ENGLISH FILIPINO

Sir I present the commandhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Ihahandogkopoangpamunuan

Sir the Troop is ready forhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Handanapoangpangkatsa

Trooping for the linehelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip LibutinangHanay

To the LeftRight Marchhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip PakaliwaPakanan KAD

Column of the Platoon Leading Platoonhelliphelliphelliphellip TudlingngpulutongUnangpulutongby the LeftRight Flank March KaliwaKanangpanig KAD

Donrsquot anticipate the commandhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Huwagpangunahanangutos

Sir the Honod Guard is formedhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Handan a poangTanodPandangal

D The Salute ( Pagpugay )

1 Hand Salute - PugayKamay2 Ready Eyes Right - HandaTinginKanan3 Ready Front - Handa RAP

E Steps and Marching ( Hakbang at Lakad )

1 Count Cadence Count - BilangHakbang NA 2 Forward March - Pasulong KAD 3 Platoon Halt - Pulutong Hinto 4 Mark Time March - LakadPatakda KAD 5 Half Step March - Hating Hakbang KAD 6 Double Time March - TakbongHakbang KAD NA 7 Quick Time March - SiglangHakbang KADNA 8 Route March - LayangHakbang NA 9 In place Double Time March - Sa Lunan TakbongHakbang KADNA10 Right Step March - HakbangPakanan NAKAD11 Left Step March - HakbangPakaliwa NAKAD12 Backward March - LakadPaurong KAD13 To the Rear March - Pabalik NA14 Change Step March - PalitHakbang NA15 One Two Three Four - Isa Dalawa Tatlo Apat

2 SCHOOL OF SOLDIERS WITH ARMS ( PagsasanayngKawalna may sandata )

A Manual of Arms ( PagsanaysapaghawakngSandata )

1 Right Shoulder Arms - SaKanangBalikat TA2 Left Shoulder Arms - SaKaliwangBalikat TA3 Order Arms - Baba TA4 Present Arms - Tanghal TA5 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA6 Trail Arms - Bitbit TA7 Sling Arms - Sakbit Sandata8 Unsling Arms - AlisSakbit Sandata9 Fix Bayonet - IkabitBayoneta10 Unfix Bayonet - AlisBayoneta

B Manual of Gidon( ParaanngPagsasanaysaPaghawakngSagisag )

1 Order Guidon - IbabaSagisag2 Carry Guidon - BitbitSagisag3 Raise Guidon - ItaasSagisagC Manual of Arms for the Pistol ( PagsasanaysaPaghawakngPistola )

1 Raise Pistol - ItaasangPistola2 Withdraw Magazine - AlisinangPistola3 Open Chamber - BuksanangPistola4 Close Chamber - IsaraangPistola5 Insert Magazine - IsuksukangPistola6 Return Pistol - IsauliangPungluan

3 Close Order Drill ( MalapitangPagsasanay )

a At Close Interval Fall In - Sa MasinsinPagitan Humanayb Inspection Arms - Siyasat TAc Port Arms - Agap TAd Order Arms - Baba TA

A To Dismiss the Platoon (PagtiwalagngPulutong )

1 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA2 Port Arms - Agap TA3 Dismiss - Lumansag

B To Form the Platoons ( PaghahanayngPulutong )

1 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA2 Port Arms - Agap TA3 Order Arms - Baba TA4 Call Off - TuluyangBilang5 Report - Mag-ulat

C To Align the Squad ( PaghahanayngTilap )

1 Dress Right Dress - TuntonKanan NA2 Dress Left Dress -TuntonKaliwa NA3 At Close Interval Dress RightDress Left -MasinsinPagitan TuntonKananKaliwa NA4 Ready Fort - Handa RAP5 Cover - Tumakip

D To Change Interval while in Line ( PagpalitngpagitanSamantalangNakahanay )

1 Close March - LakadPasinsin KAD2 Extended March - LakadPadalang KAD3 Extended to the Left - IbayongLakadPakaliwa KADE Marching the Squad from a line ( PaglakadsaPangkatmulasaHanay ) 1 Right Face - HarapsaKanan RAP 2 Left Face - HarapsaKaliwa RAP 3 Forward March - Pasulong KAD 4 Column Right March - LikosaKanan KADNA 5 Column Left March - LikosaKaliwa KADNA 6 Column Half Right March - Liko Hating Kanan KADNA 7 Column Half Left March - Liko Hating Kaliwa KADNA 8 Incline to the Left - PagawingKanan 9 Incline to the Right - PagawingKaliwa 10 Right Left March - KaliwaKanangpanig NA

F Counting of Men ( PagbilangngKawal )

1 Count Off - SabayangBilang NA 2 Call Off - TuluyangBilang NA

G To Change Interval While in Column ( PagpalitngPagitanSamantalangNakatudling )

1 Close March - LakadPasinsin KAD 2 Extend March - LakadPadalang KAD

MILITARY DRILLS AND CEREMONIES

MILITARY CEREMONIES - The movement of the larger unit or troops in a prescribed manner from one place to another

1 REVIEW - A military ceremony held in honor of a visiting commander official or dignitary It is also a fittingaffair to present decorations and awards to deserving members or units of the command

A REVIEW IS NORMALLY CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING ELEMENTSa Formation of troopsb Presentation of troopsc Inspection of troopsd Presentation of awards and decorations

2 PARADE - A more formal ceremony than a review In this ceremony the appearance and movement of thetroops in the formation are the primary consideration The preparation and organization of troops forparades are similar to those of a review The line on which the troops are to be formed and the route ofmarch of the participating units are marked or designated The distance between the troops and thecommander for the parade formation is greater than that of a reviewTWO DISTINCT TYPES OF PARADES1 Evening Parade2 Moonlight Parade

DRILL COMMANDS - An oral of a commander

TWO PARTS 1 PREPARATORY COMMAND - States the movement or formation to be carried out and mentally prepares theindividual for its execution It is a command which indicates the movement

2 COMMAND OF EXECUTION - Tells when the movement is to be carried out It is a command which indicates when amovement is to be executed

EXAMPLE FORWARD MARCHForwardPreparatory Command MarchCommand of Execution

PREPARATORY COMMAND AND COMMAND OF EXECUTION

1 Fall in Fall out - Humanay Tumiwalag

2 Rest - Pahinga3 As you were - Manumbalik4 At ease - TindigPaluwag5 Change step - PalikHakbang

SUPPLEMENTARY COMMAND - The subordinate commander gives a supplementary command He turns his head towards themajority of his elements and gives command over his shoulder He does not face about

MASS COMMAND - May be used to develop confidence and enthusiasm All of the members of the unit being trained speak in unison and execute them

THINGS TO OBSERVE IN GIVING COMMANDS

Inflection - The rise and fall of pitch and the tone changes of the voice

Cadence In Command - The uniform and rhythmic flow of words

Snap - The extra quality in command that demands immediate responseREMEMBER

1 Correct commands have a tone cadence and snap that demands willingness correct and immediateresponse 2 The loudness of the command is adjusted to the number of men in the unit 3 The best posture for giving command is at the position of attention 4 The most desirable pitch when beginning a preparatory command is near the level of your natural speaking voice

MILITARY COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

MILITARY COURTESY - Is the expression or manifestation of consideration for others It is a virtue that is expected of all individuals from all walks of life In the Armed Forces courtesy is a great requirement because it is thebasic upon which military discipline stands With courtesy and respect among members of the organizationwould lose its orderliness and later disintegrate Furthermore courtesy promotes good relationship closer coordination and teamwork among members of the organization It makes theorganization dignified and insures good relations with the public

SALUTES- Is the most important form of military courtesy It is executed by raising the right man smartlyUntil the tip of the forefinger touches the eyebrow or the front brim of the head gear when coveredForefingers are extended and joined palm facing the left forearm inclined at an angle of about 45 degrees

and the right upper arm horizontal to the ground A person saluting looks at the person beingsaluted When the salute is returned he drops the right hand smartly to the side

RULES IN RENDERING HAND SALUTEa The salute is required on and off military installations during outside office hoursb Persons entitled to the saluted 1 All commissioned officers of the AFP both male and female 2 Commissioned officers of friendly nations when they are recognized as such 3 Officers of the Coast and Geodetic Survey and the Public Health Service when they are serving with the AFP 4 All civilian who are entitled by custom to salutec The salute is rendered at a distance of about 6 paces from the person saluted of at the recognizable distances about 30 pacesd The salute must be rendered to those entitled to it It is not rendered when running but at halt or walk Never salute with a cigarette cigar or pipe in the mouth The salute should not be executed in a haphazardway or perfunctory manner Salutes are exchange whether individuals are cover or uncoverede The salute is rendered at once if the senior remains in the immediate vicinity and no conversation takesplace the junior again salutes the senior when they are path from each otherf In making reports the person reporting salutes first regardless of rank An example of this case is whenthe unit commander is reporting to the adjutant during ceremoniesg) Whom not to salute

1 Standing to a horse or leading a horse2 While at work In case the officer calls the soldier stops working approaches and salutes him

and again when they are part to each other3 Indoors except when reporting to an officer or when the soldier is on duty sentry or guard4 When carrying articles with both hands or being so occupied as to make saluting practical5 When riding in a fast moving vehicle and the other is dismounted the salute is not rendered

Exception are when the vehicle is clearly marked to indicate a General Officer and when saluting is a part of the ceremony

6 When meeting a prisoner of war Soldier serving as military prisoner are not entitled to salute7 In case of doubt due to absence of specific instruction the salute is rendered

The term ldquooutdoorrdquo is constructed to include such buildings as drill halls gymnasiums and other roofed enclosures used for drill or exercise of troops Theaters covered walks and other shelters open on the side are also considered as outdoor

ldquoIndoorsrdquo include offices hallways kitchen orderly rooms recreation halls washroom and quarters

ldquoUnder armsrdquo means carrying arms having them attached to the person by sling holster or other means In the absence of arms the wearing of cartridge bells pistol holsters and automatic rifle belts also mean ldquounder armsrdquo

TYPES OF SALUTES

a Hand saluteb The Rifle Salute at Order Armsc The Rifle Salute at Trail Armsd The Rifle Salute at Present Armse The Rifle Salute at Shoulder Arms (Right Shoulder)f The Rifle Salute at Left Shoulder Armsg The Gun Saluteh Eyes Right by men in ranks when Pass in Review

REPORTING TO AN OFFICER

The salute is rendered by a junior when reporting to a senior He also salutes before leaving

a REPORTING INDOORS WITHOUT ARMS

A soldier removes his headgear knocks at the door of the office of the officer and enters when told to do so Upon entering he halts at about two paces from the officer and salutes and says Sir Cadet Airman Dela Cruz reporting to the squadron commander Sir The salute will be retained until he completes his report and the officer had returned his salute execute about face and leaves the office

b REPORTING INDOORS UNDER ARMS

The procedure for reporting is the same as discussed above except that the soldier remain covered If carrying a rifle the soldier carries it and salute at trail arms Otherwise the hand salute is given

c REPORTING OUTDOORS

The procedure for reporting to an officer the head gear is not removed Rifles should be carried at trail arms or at the right shoulder The hand salute or rifle salute is given as the case may be

d REPORTING FOR PAY

The soldier reporting for pay answers ldquoHererdquo when his name is called approaches and salutes the officer He picks up and count his money and leaves without saluting The officer does not return his salute

OTHER COURTESY TO INDIVIDUALS

a) When an officer enters the room or tent officersrsquo junior to him and enlisted men present with uncover (if unarmed and stand at attention until the officer directs otherwise or leaves the room) When more than one individual are present the first one who perceive the officer will command ldquoAttentionrdquo loud enough to be heard by everybody present

b) When an officer enters a room or tent used as an office working shop or recreation room those at work or at play are not required to come to attention unless addressed by the officer A transaction of routine business between individuals at work

c) When an officer enters an enlisted menus hall the group is called to ldquoAt Easerdquo by the person noticing him first Men remain seated at ease and continue eating unless the officer directs otherwise A soldiers addresses stop eating and sits at attention until the conversation has ended

d) When accompanying a senior a junior walks or ride on his left except when accompanying senior during inspection

e) When entering a car or a small boat the senior goes in first and others follow in the order of rank In getting off he junior goes out first and others follow in the inverse order of rank

HONORS TO THE NATIONAL ANTHEM OR TO THE COLORS

I OUTDOOR

- Wheneverwherever the National Anthem or the colors is played military personnel not in the formation must observe the following

1 At the first note of the music stand at attention and render the prescribed salute except atthe escort of the color or at retreat when they will face toward the color or flag and salute The salute is retained until the last note of the music

2 The mounted on animals will halt and render the salute mounted Individuals loadinganimals or standing to a horse will stand at attention having the salute

3 Vehicles in motion will be brought to a halt Persons riding on a passenger car or amotorcycle will dismount and salute as described above Occupants of combat vehicles such a tanks half trucks scout cars and armored cars will remain in their vehicles but stand at attention and salute

4 The above respect to the National Color is rendered to the National Anthem or colors offriendly nations

II INDOORS

- When the national anthem is played officer and men will stand at attention and face the music or the flag but do not salute

UNCOVERING- Officer and enlisted men under arms uncover when

a) Seated as a member of or in attendance at a court or board Sentinels guarding prisoners do not uncover

b) Entering places of divine worship

c) Indoors when not in duty

d) In attendance at an official reception

DISPLAY AND SALUTE TO THE FLAG

a The Philippine flag represents our nation and should always be given a place of runner

b The National Flag is never dipped for salute nor is it permitted to touch the ground It is not used as a costume dress or a drapery No lettering or object should be placed on it

c The flag is played in the following manners1 When hoisted at a flag pole it should be hoisted fully at the top of the pole blue part

up or above During mornings the flag is hoisted to the top of the pole first then hauled down until the flag is about midway of the length of the pole

2 When the national flag is displayed with another flag whether they are standing sideby side or with their staff crossed the National Flag is at the right side blue part up

3 When placed in the vertical manner the triangle is up the blue color at the right4 When displayed in the horizontal position the triangle is at the right side with the blue

part up5 When displayed over the casket the triangle is in the direction of the head of the cadaver with

the blue part on the right side

During the ceremonies wherein the holstering or lowering of the flag is done or when it passes by during parades or reviews all persons present except those detailed in holstering lowering and carrying the flag should face it at attention and salute while those in uniform remove their headdress with their right hand and place them over their left breast Women should salute by placing their right hand on their left breastMILITARY DISCIPLINE

Military discipline is the mental attitude and state of training which renders obedience and proper conduct instinctive under all conditions It is founded upon respect for loyalty to properly constituted authority While it is primarily developed by military drills every feature in military life has its effect upon military discipline It is generally indicated in an individual or unit by smartness of appearance and action cleanliness of dress equipment or quarters respect for senior and by the prompt and cheerful obedience by the subordinates of both the latter and spirit of the legal orders

RELATION OF COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

The relation of military discipline to courtesy is clearly explained by the fact that discipline is founded upon by respect and loyalty to superiors and lawfully constituted authorities In other words discipline originates and develops mutual respect and goodwill among members of an organization Without courtesy and respect among members of an organization discipline disappears there will be no peace and order in the organization hence it will disintegrate

IMPORTANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Mass discipline and morale are essential factors for securing cohesive action and for ensuring that singleness or purpose which alone can triumph over the most difficult conditions of war The successful leader will teach his men to recognize and face fear because fear is the enemy of discipline and morale Fear unchecked will lead to panic and a unit that is panicky is no longer a disciplined one but a mob There is no same person who is without fear but with good discipline and morale all will face danger if not willingly at least resignedly because of their inborn sentiment of duty or courage of loyalty and because of their sense of pride in their country in their unit and in themselves in other words because of their esprit de corps

The need for discipline is recognized in many places outside the Armed Forces It reaches at highest form in teams wherein individual desires are subordinated to the interests of the entire team The Armed Forces are more in need of discipline for several reasons First the task of making war is not doing it because we as individuals have to do it in the interest of our country Because of that we cannot be allowed as individual to decide which part of the job each of us will do or how each part to be done Second the organization must be prepared for situations wherein leaders may be lost Personal loyalty for the commandment is not enough If a leader is killed his men must accept orders from his successor immediately and without question to carry on the battle Finally the tremendous size of all Armed Forces demands that there be uniform ways of doing things Discipline subordinates personal and self considerations to the interest of the group

MAINTENANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Discipline is installed in men through instructions pride and traditions and regulations You will develop appreciation of the other factors which build discipline as time passes One must know and understand the different laws and regulations immediately

Discipline is maintained in much the same manner as it is attained The article of war punishes military individualsrsquo fairness and justice high moral pride and responsibility contribute to maintain discipline as to developing it

CHAPTER IVARMED FORCES OF THE PHILIPPINESrsquo HISTORY

Brief History of the AFPCommonwealth Act no 1 otherwise known as the National Defense Act was approved on 21

December 1935 which gave the basic organization of the AFP General Douglas McArthur served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon Major General Dwight D Eisenhower and Major General James Ord members of the McArthurrsquos Staff helped in the planting of the Philippine Military Establishment as well as organizing it

As President Quezon issued Executive Order no 11 on January 1936 which formally established the Army of the Philippines he recalled Colonel Jose Delos Reyes of the Philippine Constabulary to active duty and later promoted him to Brigadier General and designated him as Acting Chief of Staff of the Army Brigadier General Basilio J Valdez and Colonel Guillermo B Francisco were named 1 st and 2nd Asst Chief of Staff respectively

In the same order the Philippine Constabulary became the nucleus of the regular forces of the Philippine Army Filipino citizens were required to go training under the National Defense Act since 1936 that would compose reserve force By the end of the ten year Commonwealth period in 1946 there would have been a trained Philippine Army Reserve pool of 400000 officers and men including the graduates of the ROTC Basic and Advance Course in accredited colleges and universities

When the Philippine Constabulary became part of the Philippine Army the PC Air Corps which was activated on 2 January 1955 was re designated Philippine Air Force on 3 July 1947

On February 1939 an Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was organized as a unit of the Philippine Army Initially equipped with three Q-boats (torpedo boats) and a handful of officers and men hurriedly trained in the rudiments of Sea-Warfare the OSP squadron provided coastal support to the beleaguered Filipino-American forces in the battles of Bataan and Corregidor In October 1947 the OSP was renamed Philippine Naval Patrol and on 5 January 1951 it became the Philippine Navy The OSP was often referred to as Mosquito Fleet

When President Franklin D Roosevelt of the USA declared the state of National Emergency on 26 July 1941 and ordered the induction of the Philippine Army units into the US Armed Forces in the Far East under the command of General Douglas Mc Arthur the Philippine Army had a reserve force of about 100000 officers and men at the time of the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked the Pearl Harbor Clark Field and other targets on 8 December 1941 The Philippine Army Reserve Force totaled around 200000 officers and men

The Philippine Army retained its own organization while serving with the USAFFE After the fall of Bataan on 9 April 1942 many officers and men of the Philippine Army continued resistance against the Japanese by forming guerilla forces all over the country These USAFFE guerilla forces along with other units organized by civilians in various parts of the country fought the Japanese Forces from 1942 to 1945 When the US Liberation Forces landed in Leyte on 20 October 1944 all the guerilla forces participated actively on the liberation on their respective sectors of operations

On October 1947 President Manual A Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 which organized all government agencies The Military establishment was not spared from its official designation as Army of the Philippines and it became the Armed Forces of the Philippines The ten pre-war military districts were deactivated but 4 Military Areas were also activated to enhance the efficiency of the Constabulary personnel all over the country

The post-war Philippine Army eventually got its forces fighting another battle ndash the battle against the armed elements of the Communist Party of the Philippines the HUKBALAHAP later renamed HMB For the anti0dissident campaign Army Sector Command and Battalion Combat Teams were formed During the Korean war the 10th 20th 11th 19th and 2nd BCTrsquos were sent as Philippine Expeditionary Force as the member of the United Nations PEFTOK served in Korea from 1950-1955 On 25 December 1950 President Quirino issued Executive Order No 389 renaming headquarters AFP to General Headquarters AFP and activating the 4 major services The Philippine Army Philippine Constabulary Philippine Air Force and Philippine Navy

From the time the Philippines joined the Southeast Asia Treaty Organization (SEATO) in September 1954 the AFP cooperated actively with the other member nations in the enhancing of military preparedness in the area

As a member of the UN the Philippines also sent a Philippine Air Force Contingent of 77 officers and men on a pacification campaign to the Congo Republic on 11 February 1963

In 1966 the Philippine Civic Action Group (PHICAG) was activated to implement the provisions of RA 4644 Composed of engineers medical and rural community development teams and security personnel the PHILCAG was sent to the Republic of South Vietnam and engaged in socio-economic projects mutually agreed upon by the governments of the Republic of the Philippines and Republic of South Vietnam

The AFP has shown an increasing awareness of its arrival in the country and its vital role in the political and economic development of the country by engaging are actively in civic action programs

Pursuant to the Socio-economic Military Program under RA 2056 the Chief of Staff AFP ordered the assignment of military personnel for public works construction food production land settlement and rural development Several civic centers of the AFP

To give greater impetus on the civic action the 51st Engineer Brigade consisting of 10 Engineer Construction Battalion was activated on 10 March 1962 This unit had constructed several much needed highways roads and bridges in various parts of the country The 52nd Engineer Brigade which was organized on 1 July 1969 also performed similar functions to holster the national program for social and economical developments

Today the AFP is employing all its resources in assisting the socio-economic development programs of the government without prejudice to its primary missions of improving and maintaining the effectiveness of the countryrsquos defense posture

SIGNIFICANT FACTS TO REMEMBER

MACTAN ndash place where the first revolt against Spain took place on April 26 1951 The firstrebellion Spain flared up in Bohol and Leyte

ANDRES MALONG ndash led the first major revolt in Luzon in 1660 He proclaimed himself as aKing of PangasinanLAPU ndash LAPU ndash was the first Filipino hero

MIGUEL VICOS ndash the Spanish Meztiso who assassinated Diego Silang on May 28 1863

RED WITH A FIGURE OF A SUN ndash color of the first flag of the Philippines in 1897

ANDRES BONIFACIO ndash was the founder of the Revolutionary Society called Katipunan

GEN GREGORIO DEL PILAR ndash led the Filipino forces in the Battle of Tirad Pass

AUGUST 29 1896 ndash the date designated as the start of the revolution which was also known as

Cry of BalintawakDECEMBER 14 1897 ndashdate when the Treaty of Paris and Fact of Biak-na-bato was signed

FACT OF BIAK-NA-BATO ndash an agreement between the Filipino and the Spanish authoritieson December 14 1897 to stop all hostilities

MARCELA AGONCILLO ndash designed and made the first flag of the first Philippine Republic

JULIAN FELIPE ndash was the composer of the Philippine National AnthemEMILIO AGUINALDO ndash was the first president of the Philippines

BALANAN ISABELA ndash the place where Gen Emilio Aguinaldo was captured In 1922 the US War Dept authorized the establishment of the Dept of Military Science andTactics under the supervision of the US Army This was established in theUniversity of the Philippines

MANUEL LUIS QUEZON ndash the first president of the Philippine Commonwealth

COMMONWEALTH ACT NO1 ndash is otherwise known as the National Defense Act issued by President Quezon and approved on December 21 1935 and gave the basicorganization of the AFP

GENERAL DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon during the Commonwealth period that helped in the planning andorganization of the Philippine Military EstablishmentGENDOUGLAS MCARTHURrsquoS STAFF

1 MAJ GEN DWIGHT D EISENHOWER2 MAJ GEN JAMES ORD

JANUARY 11 1936 ndash the date President Manuel L Quezon issued Executive Order No 11 onthe establishment of the PA

BRIG GEN BASILIO J VALDEZ ndash first assistant Chief of staff

BRIG GEN JOSE DELOS REYES ndash designated as the first Chief of Staff of the PhilippineArmy

COL GUILLERMO B FRANCISCO ndash 2nd assistant Chief of Staff The PHILLIPINE CONSTABULARY became the nucleus of the Philippine Army and the Philippine Constabulary Air Corps (PCA) was activated on January 2 1937

FEBRUARY 9 1939 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was activated and organized as a unit of thePhilippine Army The Off-Shore Patrol was equipped with Q-Boats (Torpedo Boat)and referred to as the ldquoMosquito Fleetrdquo

PRESIDENT FRANKLIN DELANO ROOSEVELT ndash President of the USA who set July 26 1941 as the date for the declaration of State of National Emergency and at the sametime the induction of the Philippine Army to United States Armed Forces to the Far East (USAFFE) with a total force of 160000 officers and men

GEN DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash was designated as the USAFFE COMMANDER

DECEMBER 8 1941 ndash the date the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked Pearl Harbor Clark Fieldand other targets

APRIL 9 1942 ndash fall of Bataan

MAY 6 1942 ndash fall of Corregidor

MAJOR FERDINAND EDRALIN MARCOS ndash was the most decorated soldier during the World War II and was a recipient of 27 medals

OCTOBER 20 1944 ndash the date the US Liberation Forces landed in Red Beach in Palo Leyte

JULY 3 1947 ndash the date the PC Air Corps was re-designated as the Philippine Air Force

OCTOBER 1947 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol was renamed Phil Naval Patrol ndash the date President Manuel Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 remainingthe Army of the Philippines as Armed Forces of the Philippines andactivating the 4 military areas

ARAW NG KAGITINGAN ndash a day set to commemorate the Fall of Bataan Fall of Corregidorand Fall of Bessang Pass Based on the historical records the independenceof the Republic of the Philippines was on June 12 1898

JULY 4 1946 ndash declaration of the Independence by the USA celebrated today as PhilippineAmerican Friendship Day

JULY 1950 ndash the Philippine Army was separated from the Gen Headquarters Philippine Army

DECEMBER 23 1950 ndash President ElpidioQuirino issued Executive Order No 389 renamingthe Headquarters AFP to Gen Headquarters AFP (GHQ AFP)

JANUARY 5 1951 ndash the Phil Naval Patrol was renamed the Philippine Naval of thePHILIPPINE NAVY

1959 ndash 1955 ndash the Battalion Combat Teams were sent to Korea to comply with the commitmentsof the Philippines as member of the UN The BCT was known as the PHILIPPINE EXPEDITIONARY FORCE TO KOREA (PEFTOK)

SEPTEMBER 1954 ndash The Philippines joined the Southeast Asian Treaty Org (SEATO)

APRIL 11 1963 ndash the PAF contingent of 77 officers and men were sent to Congo Republic of South VietnamPHIL CIVIC ACTION GROUP (PHILCAG) ndash the group of engineers medical and ruralcommunity development team and security personnel were sent by thePhilippines to the representative of South Vietnam

FEBRUARY 22-25 1986 ndash the bloodless peoples revolution which deposed Ferdinand Marcosfrom the presidency and as Commander in elected President of thePhilippines commonly referred to as the EDSA Revolution

ACRONYMSBCT ndash Battalion Combat TeamGHQ ndash General HeadquartersHMB ndash HukbongMapagpalayang Bayan (HUKBALAHAP)PHILCAG-V ndash Philippine Civic Action Group to VietnamSEATO ndash Southeast Asian Treaty OrganizationOSP ndash Off-Shore PatrolPEFTOK ndash Philippine Expeditionary Force to Korea

ENLISTED PERSONNELrsquoS RANKS

MarinesArmy Navy Constabulary Air Force

C ndash CadetCadette M- MidshipmanMidshipwoman

CHAPTER V

MILITARY LEADERSHIP AND COMMAND

A Leadership ndash is the art of influencing and directing men to an assigned goal is such a way toobtain their obedience respect and loyal cooperation Leadership can beexercised by anyone at anytime respective of the frame work of the command

Command ndash is the authority which an individual in the military service lawfully exercisedover subordinates by virtue of his rank and assignment Command andleadership are inseparable whether the function of the command is complex orsimple the commander should always be the controlling head

B TWO TYPES OF LEADER

1 Authoritarian ndash a leader who leads his men by means of rank and position

2 Persuasive ndash a leader who leads his men by always setting examples

C BASIC ELEMENTS OF LEADERSHIP

1 Character ndash to be a leader a person must be of good character Some indications arehonesty good manners industrious self-control and bravery

2 Intelligence ndash is the ability to grasp knowledge easily It includes native ability goodcommon sense and judgment

3 Alertness ndash is mental and physical watchfulness vigilance and observance to his planned and future activity

D LEADERSHIP RESPONSIBILITIES

1 Accomplishment of the assigned mission or task

2 Work for the welfare of his men

E LEADERSHIP TRAITS

1 Knowledge ndash professional knowledge of the job Understands the characteristics of his men2 Bearing ndash dignified appearance and behavior

3 Courage ndash physical and moral ability to act in spite of danger or hardship

4 Decisiveness ndash ability to decide promptly and correctly the proper time and to announce his decision clearly and briefly with authority

5 Dependability ndash performance of duty with or without supervision

6 Endurance ndash physical and mental strength to continue or complete a task

7 Enthusiasm ndash interest in his work or task at hand

8 Force ndash the ability to compel obedience

9 Humility ndash state of being reasonable and proud but not arrogant and boastful

10 Humor ndash ability to appreciate and narrate amusing incidents of everyday life

11 Initiative ndash ability to start or originate an idea or work even when others are absent

12 Judgment ndash power of mind to weight factors affecting a problem and to decide properly

13 Integrity ndash good moral character

14 Justice ndash impartiality in dealing with others giving credit when due and punishment when so demanded

15 Loyalty - sincerity and faithfulness to superiors for the good of the unit

16 Sympathy ndash mutual feelings to others

17 Tact ndash ability to deal with people without hurting their feelings

18 Unselfishness - avoidance of personal consideration that gives a disadvantage

to others

F PRINCIPLES IN LEADERSHIP

1 Know your job - must have thorough professional knowledge of his duties and responsibilities to

command and gain respect from his men

2Know yourself and seek self-improvement - a leader should analyze himself to determine his

good qualities and learn to recognize and correct his weakness

3 Know your men and look after their welfare - understand each of your men personally

psychologically in order to effectively lead them

4 Keep your men informed - keep your men knowledgeable background in all aspects its

organization and mission in order to function effectively

5 Set an example -set a good example as a model in loyalty in superiors and subordinates good

bearing and attitudes pride and faithfulness to the organization

6 Insure the task is understood supervised and accomplished - a leader should give a clear and

concise order that can be understood He supervises his men to accomplish the

assigned mission

7 Train your men as a team - teamwork is a must within and among units from the

smallest to the largest Each men should understand that he has a job to perform

and must cooperate with others in achieving the common objective

8 Make sound and timely decisions - the ability to make raid estimate of the situation Arrive at the

sound decision and announce his decision in the correct form of the proper is

essential to a leader For any situation that may arise the leader should be able to

act logically

9 Develop a sense of responsibility among your subordinates - the leader should train his

subordinates to act in the absence of orders when the situation so demands He

develops responsibility among his subordinates byproper delegation of his

authority and holding them responsible for theaccomplishment of their mission

10 Employ your commands in accordance with its capability - the leader must have thorough knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of his command He must assign objectives that is responsible to be attained However when the situation so demands then men must be forced to action beyond their normal endurance so as to avoid a harder or more costly consequence on their part

11 See responsibility and take responsibility for your action - learn the seniors job for youmay assume his position later on Take advantage of the responsibility delegated toyou and do not back out in case of failure

ROLES OF A LEADER

1 The leader is a model soldier2 The leader is a commander3 The leader is an instructor4 The leader is a personal manager5 The leader is a councilor6 The leader is a custodian of his mens welfare

OBJECTIVES OF A LEADER

1 MORALE - the mental and emotional state of an individual 2 DISCIPLINE - the prompt and willing obedience to orders Complying to regulations and initiating appropriate action even in theabsence of orders 3 PROFICIENCY - the technical tactical and physical ability of an individual to perform their mission 4 ESPRIT DE CORPS - More than the aggregate personality it is how the individuals feel about their unit Jealous of enthusiasticfor pride in and devotion for

MAP READING

MAP - is a graphical representation of the earths surface drawn to a scale on aplane When you look at the map you are actually looking at a picture ofthe ground from a high spot in the air MAP COLOR - different colors are used on the printing of the maps to assist the use understanding it A GREEN - represents all types of vegetables B BLUE - signifies bodies of water such as rivers lakes swamps and streams C RED - indicates first class roads and prominent locations such as theProvincial or Municipal Capitals May be used to stress the significance ofimportant map locations

D BROWN - depicts contour lines which are representation of the relatives elevation and relief of the terrain

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

4 BATTALION ndash composed of two or more companies (battalion commander)

5 REGIMENT ndash composed of 2 or more battalions (regimental commander)

6 BRIGADE ndash Composed of 2 or more Regiments (BRIGADE COMMANDER)

7 DIVISION ndash Composed of 2 or more brigades (DIVISION COMMANDER)

TWO PARTS OF COMMAND

a PREPARATORY COMMAND ndash Alert the troops or subordinates and prepare them for

the movement they are going to execute

b COMMAND OF EXECUTION ndash Tell the troops to do or execute the movement

DRILL COMMANDS

ENGLISH FILIPINO

FilehelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipHanay

AssemblehelliphelliphelliphellipMagtipan

SquadhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTilap

PlatoonhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPulutong

CompanyhelliphelliphelliphellipBalanghay

BattalionhelliphelliphelliphellipTalupad

RegimenthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSampanaw

BrigadehelliphelliphelliphelliphellipBukluran

DivisionhelliphelliphelliphellipDanay

Fall InhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipHumanay

AttentionhelliphelliphelliphellipHumanda

Parade ResthelliphelliphellipTikas Pahinga

Stand AT EasehelliphellipTindigPaluwag

ResthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPahinga

Fall OuthelliphelliphelliphellipTumiwalag

ENGLISH FILIPINO

DismissedhelliphelliphelliphellipLumansag

Left FacehelliphelliphelliphellipHarapsakaliwa RAP

Right FacehelliphelliphelliphellipHarapsakanan RAP

Hand SalutehelliphelliphellipPugayKamay

Count CadencehelliphellipBilangHakbang NA

Forward MarchhelliphellipPasulong KAD

HalthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipHinto

March Time MarchLakadPatakda KAD

Half Step MarchhelliphellipHating Hakbang AD

Double time MarchhellipTakbongHakbang KAD

Quick Time MarchhellipSiglangHakbang KAD

Route MarchhelliphelliphelliphellipLayangHakbang KAD

Right Step MarchhelliphellipHakbangPakanan KAD

Left Step MarchhelliphellipHakbangPakaliwa KAD

ENGLISH FILIPINO

Route StephelliphelliphelliphellipLayangHakbangMarch KAD

Rifle SalutehelliphelliphelliphellipPugaySandata

Unsling ArmshelliphelliphellipIbis Sandata

Fix BayonethelliphelliphellipIkabitangsundang

Raise pistolhelliphelliphelliphellipItaasang pistol

Open ChamberhelliphelliphellipBuksanang pistol

Sir the paradehelliphelliphellipHandanapoangis formed parangal

ReporthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMag-ulat

OfficershelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgapinuno puma-Center March gitna KAD

LoadhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPunluan

Simulate LeadhelliphelliphellipMagpungloKunwari

Stack armshelliphelliphelliphellipBangkoSandata

Sound thehelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIhudyatangpagbabaretreat ngwatawat

Sound OffhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIhudyatangPangal

Attention tohelliphelliphelliphellipMakinigsathe Orderhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipkautusan

Officer of thehelliphelliphelliphellipPunongTagakalingaDay

By Order OfhelliphelliphelliphellipSautosni

ENGLISH FILIPINO

By the helliphellipSabaysaNumber Bilang

Sling ArmshelliphelliphelliphellipSakbitSandata

Adjust SlinghelliphelliphelliphellipAyusinangSakbit

Unfix bayonethelliphelliphellipAlisinangsundang

Withdraw magazinehellipAlisinangpungluan

Insert magazinehelliphellipIsauliangpungluan

Take your helliphelliphelliphellipSumalunan kayopool

Attention to helliphelliphellipMakinigsakautusanOrders

ColorhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIharappabalikangReverse March watawat KAD

UnloadhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipAlisPungla

Cease FiringhelliphelliphelliphellipItigilangPutukan

Take ArmshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipDampotSandata

AdjutantrsquoshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPanawagansaCall Parangal

PublishhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIpahayag andthe Order kautusan

Details forhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgaNakatalagathe day Ngayon

CommanderhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPunongTanodof the Guard

OfficerrsquoshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgapinunoPost March Balik Kad

Staff Behind Me Change PosthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgaKagawadMagpalitngLunan

ENGLISH FILIPINO

In place HalthelliphelliphellipSa lunan Hinto

File from thehelliphelliphellipSunuranmulasaRightLeft kanankaliwa

Guide LefthelliphelliphelliphellipGabayasaKaliwaCenterRight GitnaKanan

Stand FasthelliphelliphelliphellipTatag manatiliWalangkikilos

Left oliquehelliphelliphelliphellipHiligkaliwaMarch KAD

Two Arms LengthhellipIbayongDalawangExtended to the Left Pakaliwa KAD

TroophelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTipon

One TwohelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIsa DalawaThree Four Tatlo Apat

Assemble to thehelliphelliphellipMagtiponsakananRight left march Kaliwa

MounthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSakay

Close onhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipLumapitsaunangLeading Platoon pulutong

Gaiden on LeadinghellipGabaysaunangPlatoons on Line pulutongnghanay

PostshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSaLunan

Dismiss yourhelliphelliphellipTiwalaginanginyongCompany balangay

ENGLISH FILIPINO

Resume marchhelliphellipMagpatuloy KAD

Columns of twoshellipDalawangTatluhangThreesfours Apatangtudling

All present arehelliphelliphellipNaritopolahatAccounted for napagalaman

Right obliquehelliphelliphellipHilispakananMarch Kad

InspectionhelliphelliphelliphellipPagsisiyasat

DetailhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipNakatalaga

PatrolhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTaliba

Take intervalhelliphelliphelliphellipIbayongpatlang March KAD

Unsling equipmenthelliphellipIbabasagamit

Company MasshelliphelliphellipPulo-pulotongsaRightLeft March kanan

Garden on the LinehelliphellipMgagabaysahanay

Guide PosthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgagabaysalunan

Sir the BattalionhelliphelliphellipAngTalupadpo ayis informed handana

Persons to be decoratedhellipMgaparangalan atand all colors Center lahatngwatawatMarch pumagitna KAD

Form the shelter tentshellipMagsisayosngpagtatayongtolda

AT NORMAL INTERVAL

Dress righthelliphelliphelliphellipTuntonkananDress NA

Dress lefthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTuntonkaliwaDress NA

CoverhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPanakip

At Close IntervalhelliphellipMasinsinPagitanDress right Tunton callow NA

At Close IntervalhellipMasinsinPagitanDress left Tuntonkaliwa NA

At Close IntervalhellipMasinsinPagitanFall In Humanay

Close MarchhelliphelliphelliphellipLakadpasinsin KAD

Extended MarchhelliphellipLakadPadalang KAD

Column RighthelliphelliphellipLikoKananLeft March Kaliwa KAD

Column RighthelliphelliphellipLikoHulingKananLeft March (Half) Kaliwa KAD

Incline to thehelliphelliphelliphellipPagawingkananRightLeft Kaliwa KAD

Change StephelliphelliphelliphellipPalitHakbangMarch KAD

Left ShoulderhelliphelliphellipKaliwangBalikatArms Ta

Trail ArmshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipBitbit TA

Port armshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipAgap TA

Inspection ArmshelliphellipSiyasat TA

RightLefthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipKanangKaliwangFlank March Panig KAD

Count offhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSabayangbilang NA

Call offhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTuluyangbilang NA

Center facehelliphelliphelliphellipHumarapsaGitna RAP

Prepare forhelliphelliphelliphellipHumandasa

Inspection Pagsisiyasat

Open RankhelliphelliphelliphellipPabukangTaludtodMarch KAD

Close RankhelliphelliphelliphellipPasinsinTaludtodMarch KAD

Right TurnhelliphelliphelliphellipPihitsaKananMarch KAD

Pass In ReviewhelliphelliphellipPasa Masid

BackwardhelliphelliphelliphellipLakadPaurongMarch KAD

To the RearhelliphelliphelliphellipPabalikMarch KAD

Right shoulderhelliphelliphellipKanangbalikatArms TA

Order armshelliphelliphelliphellipBaba TA

Present ArmshelliphelliphelliphellipTangha TA

Ready EyeshelliphelliphellipHandaKananRightLeft Kaliwa Tingin

Ready FronthelliphelliphelliphellipHanda Harap

ENGLISH FILIPINO

Sir I present the commandhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Ihahandogkopoangpamunuan

Sir the Troop is ready forhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Handanapoangpangkatsa

Trooping for the linehelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip LibutinangHanay

To the LeftRight Marchhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip PakaliwaPakanan KAD

Column of the Platoon Leading Platoonhelliphelliphelliphellip TudlingngpulutongUnangpulutongby the LeftRight Flank March KaliwaKanangpanig KAD

Donrsquot anticipate the commandhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Huwagpangunahanangutos

Sir the Honod Guard is formedhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Handan a poangTanodPandangal

D The Salute ( Pagpugay )

1 Hand Salute - PugayKamay2 Ready Eyes Right - HandaTinginKanan3 Ready Front - Handa RAP

E Steps and Marching ( Hakbang at Lakad )

1 Count Cadence Count - BilangHakbang NA 2 Forward March - Pasulong KAD 3 Platoon Halt - Pulutong Hinto 4 Mark Time March - LakadPatakda KAD 5 Half Step March - Hating Hakbang KAD 6 Double Time March - TakbongHakbang KAD NA 7 Quick Time March - SiglangHakbang KADNA 8 Route March - LayangHakbang NA 9 In place Double Time March - Sa Lunan TakbongHakbang KADNA10 Right Step March - HakbangPakanan NAKAD11 Left Step March - HakbangPakaliwa NAKAD12 Backward March - LakadPaurong KAD13 To the Rear March - Pabalik NA14 Change Step March - PalitHakbang NA15 One Two Three Four - Isa Dalawa Tatlo Apat

2 SCHOOL OF SOLDIERS WITH ARMS ( PagsasanayngKawalna may sandata )

A Manual of Arms ( PagsanaysapaghawakngSandata )

1 Right Shoulder Arms - SaKanangBalikat TA2 Left Shoulder Arms - SaKaliwangBalikat TA3 Order Arms - Baba TA4 Present Arms - Tanghal TA5 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA6 Trail Arms - Bitbit TA7 Sling Arms - Sakbit Sandata8 Unsling Arms - AlisSakbit Sandata9 Fix Bayonet - IkabitBayoneta10 Unfix Bayonet - AlisBayoneta

B Manual of Gidon( ParaanngPagsasanaysaPaghawakngSagisag )

1 Order Guidon - IbabaSagisag2 Carry Guidon - BitbitSagisag3 Raise Guidon - ItaasSagisagC Manual of Arms for the Pistol ( PagsasanaysaPaghawakngPistola )

1 Raise Pistol - ItaasangPistola2 Withdraw Magazine - AlisinangPistola3 Open Chamber - BuksanangPistola4 Close Chamber - IsaraangPistola5 Insert Magazine - IsuksukangPistola6 Return Pistol - IsauliangPungluan

3 Close Order Drill ( MalapitangPagsasanay )

a At Close Interval Fall In - Sa MasinsinPagitan Humanayb Inspection Arms - Siyasat TAc Port Arms - Agap TAd Order Arms - Baba TA

A To Dismiss the Platoon (PagtiwalagngPulutong )

1 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA2 Port Arms - Agap TA3 Dismiss - Lumansag

B To Form the Platoons ( PaghahanayngPulutong )

1 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA2 Port Arms - Agap TA3 Order Arms - Baba TA4 Call Off - TuluyangBilang5 Report - Mag-ulat

C To Align the Squad ( PaghahanayngTilap )

1 Dress Right Dress - TuntonKanan NA2 Dress Left Dress -TuntonKaliwa NA3 At Close Interval Dress RightDress Left -MasinsinPagitan TuntonKananKaliwa NA4 Ready Fort - Handa RAP5 Cover - Tumakip

D To Change Interval while in Line ( PagpalitngpagitanSamantalangNakahanay )

1 Close March - LakadPasinsin KAD2 Extended March - LakadPadalang KAD3 Extended to the Left - IbayongLakadPakaliwa KADE Marching the Squad from a line ( PaglakadsaPangkatmulasaHanay ) 1 Right Face - HarapsaKanan RAP 2 Left Face - HarapsaKaliwa RAP 3 Forward March - Pasulong KAD 4 Column Right March - LikosaKanan KADNA 5 Column Left March - LikosaKaliwa KADNA 6 Column Half Right March - Liko Hating Kanan KADNA 7 Column Half Left March - Liko Hating Kaliwa KADNA 8 Incline to the Left - PagawingKanan 9 Incline to the Right - PagawingKaliwa 10 Right Left March - KaliwaKanangpanig NA

F Counting of Men ( PagbilangngKawal )

1 Count Off - SabayangBilang NA 2 Call Off - TuluyangBilang NA

G To Change Interval While in Column ( PagpalitngPagitanSamantalangNakatudling )

1 Close March - LakadPasinsin KAD 2 Extend March - LakadPadalang KAD

MILITARY DRILLS AND CEREMONIES

MILITARY CEREMONIES - The movement of the larger unit or troops in a prescribed manner from one place to another

1 REVIEW - A military ceremony held in honor of a visiting commander official or dignitary It is also a fittingaffair to present decorations and awards to deserving members or units of the command

A REVIEW IS NORMALLY CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING ELEMENTSa Formation of troopsb Presentation of troopsc Inspection of troopsd Presentation of awards and decorations

2 PARADE - A more formal ceremony than a review In this ceremony the appearance and movement of thetroops in the formation are the primary consideration The preparation and organization of troops forparades are similar to those of a review The line on which the troops are to be formed and the route ofmarch of the participating units are marked or designated The distance between the troops and thecommander for the parade formation is greater than that of a reviewTWO DISTINCT TYPES OF PARADES1 Evening Parade2 Moonlight Parade

DRILL COMMANDS - An oral of a commander

TWO PARTS 1 PREPARATORY COMMAND - States the movement or formation to be carried out and mentally prepares theindividual for its execution It is a command which indicates the movement

2 COMMAND OF EXECUTION - Tells when the movement is to be carried out It is a command which indicates when amovement is to be executed

EXAMPLE FORWARD MARCHForwardPreparatory Command MarchCommand of Execution

PREPARATORY COMMAND AND COMMAND OF EXECUTION

1 Fall in Fall out - Humanay Tumiwalag

2 Rest - Pahinga3 As you were - Manumbalik4 At ease - TindigPaluwag5 Change step - PalikHakbang

SUPPLEMENTARY COMMAND - The subordinate commander gives a supplementary command He turns his head towards themajority of his elements and gives command over his shoulder He does not face about

MASS COMMAND - May be used to develop confidence and enthusiasm All of the members of the unit being trained speak in unison and execute them

THINGS TO OBSERVE IN GIVING COMMANDS

Inflection - The rise and fall of pitch and the tone changes of the voice

Cadence In Command - The uniform and rhythmic flow of words

Snap - The extra quality in command that demands immediate responseREMEMBER

1 Correct commands have a tone cadence and snap that demands willingness correct and immediateresponse 2 The loudness of the command is adjusted to the number of men in the unit 3 The best posture for giving command is at the position of attention 4 The most desirable pitch when beginning a preparatory command is near the level of your natural speaking voice

MILITARY COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

MILITARY COURTESY - Is the expression or manifestation of consideration for others It is a virtue that is expected of all individuals from all walks of life In the Armed Forces courtesy is a great requirement because it is thebasic upon which military discipline stands With courtesy and respect among members of the organizationwould lose its orderliness and later disintegrate Furthermore courtesy promotes good relationship closer coordination and teamwork among members of the organization It makes theorganization dignified and insures good relations with the public

SALUTES- Is the most important form of military courtesy It is executed by raising the right man smartlyUntil the tip of the forefinger touches the eyebrow or the front brim of the head gear when coveredForefingers are extended and joined palm facing the left forearm inclined at an angle of about 45 degrees

and the right upper arm horizontal to the ground A person saluting looks at the person beingsaluted When the salute is returned he drops the right hand smartly to the side

RULES IN RENDERING HAND SALUTEa The salute is required on and off military installations during outside office hoursb Persons entitled to the saluted 1 All commissioned officers of the AFP both male and female 2 Commissioned officers of friendly nations when they are recognized as such 3 Officers of the Coast and Geodetic Survey and the Public Health Service when they are serving with the AFP 4 All civilian who are entitled by custom to salutec The salute is rendered at a distance of about 6 paces from the person saluted of at the recognizable distances about 30 pacesd The salute must be rendered to those entitled to it It is not rendered when running but at halt or walk Never salute with a cigarette cigar or pipe in the mouth The salute should not be executed in a haphazardway or perfunctory manner Salutes are exchange whether individuals are cover or uncoverede The salute is rendered at once if the senior remains in the immediate vicinity and no conversation takesplace the junior again salutes the senior when they are path from each otherf In making reports the person reporting salutes first regardless of rank An example of this case is whenthe unit commander is reporting to the adjutant during ceremoniesg) Whom not to salute

1 Standing to a horse or leading a horse2 While at work In case the officer calls the soldier stops working approaches and salutes him

and again when they are part to each other3 Indoors except when reporting to an officer or when the soldier is on duty sentry or guard4 When carrying articles with both hands or being so occupied as to make saluting practical5 When riding in a fast moving vehicle and the other is dismounted the salute is not rendered

Exception are when the vehicle is clearly marked to indicate a General Officer and when saluting is a part of the ceremony

6 When meeting a prisoner of war Soldier serving as military prisoner are not entitled to salute7 In case of doubt due to absence of specific instruction the salute is rendered

The term ldquooutdoorrdquo is constructed to include such buildings as drill halls gymnasiums and other roofed enclosures used for drill or exercise of troops Theaters covered walks and other shelters open on the side are also considered as outdoor

ldquoIndoorsrdquo include offices hallways kitchen orderly rooms recreation halls washroom and quarters

ldquoUnder armsrdquo means carrying arms having them attached to the person by sling holster or other means In the absence of arms the wearing of cartridge bells pistol holsters and automatic rifle belts also mean ldquounder armsrdquo

TYPES OF SALUTES

a Hand saluteb The Rifle Salute at Order Armsc The Rifle Salute at Trail Armsd The Rifle Salute at Present Armse The Rifle Salute at Shoulder Arms (Right Shoulder)f The Rifle Salute at Left Shoulder Armsg The Gun Saluteh Eyes Right by men in ranks when Pass in Review

REPORTING TO AN OFFICER

The salute is rendered by a junior when reporting to a senior He also salutes before leaving

a REPORTING INDOORS WITHOUT ARMS

A soldier removes his headgear knocks at the door of the office of the officer and enters when told to do so Upon entering he halts at about two paces from the officer and salutes and says Sir Cadet Airman Dela Cruz reporting to the squadron commander Sir The salute will be retained until he completes his report and the officer had returned his salute execute about face and leaves the office

b REPORTING INDOORS UNDER ARMS

The procedure for reporting is the same as discussed above except that the soldier remain covered If carrying a rifle the soldier carries it and salute at trail arms Otherwise the hand salute is given

c REPORTING OUTDOORS

The procedure for reporting to an officer the head gear is not removed Rifles should be carried at trail arms or at the right shoulder The hand salute or rifle salute is given as the case may be

d REPORTING FOR PAY

The soldier reporting for pay answers ldquoHererdquo when his name is called approaches and salutes the officer He picks up and count his money and leaves without saluting The officer does not return his salute

OTHER COURTESY TO INDIVIDUALS

a) When an officer enters the room or tent officersrsquo junior to him and enlisted men present with uncover (if unarmed and stand at attention until the officer directs otherwise or leaves the room) When more than one individual are present the first one who perceive the officer will command ldquoAttentionrdquo loud enough to be heard by everybody present

b) When an officer enters a room or tent used as an office working shop or recreation room those at work or at play are not required to come to attention unless addressed by the officer A transaction of routine business between individuals at work

c) When an officer enters an enlisted menus hall the group is called to ldquoAt Easerdquo by the person noticing him first Men remain seated at ease and continue eating unless the officer directs otherwise A soldiers addresses stop eating and sits at attention until the conversation has ended

d) When accompanying a senior a junior walks or ride on his left except when accompanying senior during inspection

e) When entering a car or a small boat the senior goes in first and others follow in the order of rank In getting off he junior goes out first and others follow in the inverse order of rank

HONORS TO THE NATIONAL ANTHEM OR TO THE COLORS

I OUTDOOR

- Wheneverwherever the National Anthem or the colors is played military personnel not in the formation must observe the following

1 At the first note of the music stand at attention and render the prescribed salute except atthe escort of the color or at retreat when they will face toward the color or flag and salute The salute is retained until the last note of the music

2 The mounted on animals will halt and render the salute mounted Individuals loadinganimals or standing to a horse will stand at attention having the salute

3 Vehicles in motion will be brought to a halt Persons riding on a passenger car or amotorcycle will dismount and salute as described above Occupants of combat vehicles such a tanks half trucks scout cars and armored cars will remain in their vehicles but stand at attention and salute

4 The above respect to the National Color is rendered to the National Anthem or colors offriendly nations

II INDOORS

- When the national anthem is played officer and men will stand at attention and face the music or the flag but do not salute

UNCOVERING- Officer and enlisted men under arms uncover when

a) Seated as a member of or in attendance at a court or board Sentinels guarding prisoners do not uncover

b) Entering places of divine worship

c) Indoors when not in duty

d) In attendance at an official reception

DISPLAY AND SALUTE TO THE FLAG

a The Philippine flag represents our nation and should always be given a place of runner

b The National Flag is never dipped for salute nor is it permitted to touch the ground It is not used as a costume dress or a drapery No lettering or object should be placed on it

c The flag is played in the following manners1 When hoisted at a flag pole it should be hoisted fully at the top of the pole blue part

up or above During mornings the flag is hoisted to the top of the pole first then hauled down until the flag is about midway of the length of the pole

2 When the national flag is displayed with another flag whether they are standing sideby side or with their staff crossed the National Flag is at the right side blue part up

3 When placed in the vertical manner the triangle is up the blue color at the right4 When displayed in the horizontal position the triangle is at the right side with the blue

part up5 When displayed over the casket the triangle is in the direction of the head of the cadaver with

the blue part on the right side

During the ceremonies wherein the holstering or lowering of the flag is done or when it passes by during parades or reviews all persons present except those detailed in holstering lowering and carrying the flag should face it at attention and salute while those in uniform remove their headdress with their right hand and place them over their left breast Women should salute by placing their right hand on their left breastMILITARY DISCIPLINE

Military discipline is the mental attitude and state of training which renders obedience and proper conduct instinctive under all conditions It is founded upon respect for loyalty to properly constituted authority While it is primarily developed by military drills every feature in military life has its effect upon military discipline It is generally indicated in an individual or unit by smartness of appearance and action cleanliness of dress equipment or quarters respect for senior and by the prompt and cheerful obedience by the subordinates of both the latter and spirit of the legal orders

RELATION OF COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

The relation of military discipline to courtesy is clearly explained by the fact that discipline is founded upon by respect and loyalty to superiors and lawfully constituted authorities In other words discipline originates and develops mutual respect and goodwill among members of an organization Without courtesy and respect among members of an organization discipline disappears there will be no peace and order in the organization hence it will disintegrate

IMPORTANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Mass discipline and morale are essential factors for securing cohesive action and for ensuring that singleness or purpose which alone can triumph over the most difficult conditions of war The successful leader will teach his men to recognize and face fear because fear is the enemy of discipline and morale Fear unchecked will lead to panic and a unit that is panicky is no longer a disciplined one but a mob There is no same person who is without fear but with good discipline and morale all will face danger if not willingly at least resignedly because of their inborn sentiment of duty or courage of loyalty and because of their sense of pride in their country in their unit and in themselves in other words because of their esprit de corps

The need for discipline is recognized in many places outside the Armed Forces It reaches at highest form in teams wherein individual desires are subordinated to the interests of the entire team The Armed Forces are more in need of discipline for several reasons First the task of making war is not doing it because we as individuals have to do it in the interest of our country Because of that we cannot be allowed as individual to decide which part of the job each of us will do or how each part to be done Second the organization must be prepared for situations wherein leaders may be lost Personal loyalty for the commandment is not enough If a leader is killed his men must accept orders from his successor immediately and without question to carry on the battle Finally the tremendous size of all Armed Forces demands that there be uniform ways of doing things Discipline subordinates personal and self considerations to the interest of the group

MAINTENANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Discipline is installed in men through instructions pride and traditions and regulations You will develop appreciation of the other factors which build discipline as time passes One must know and understand the different laws and regulations immediately

Discipline is maintained in much the same manner as it is attained The article of war punishes military individualsrsquo fairness and justice high moral pride and responsibility contribute to maintain discipline as to developing it

CHAPTER IVARMED FORCES OF THE PHILIPPINESrsquo HISTORY

Brief History of the AFPCommonwealth Act no 1 otherwise known as the National Defense Act was approved on 21

December 1935 which gave the basic organization of the AFP General Douglas McArthur served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon Major General Dwight D Eisenhower and Major General James Ord members of the McArthurrsquos Staff helped in the planting of the Philippine Military Establishment as well as organizing it

As President Quezon issued Executive Order no 11 on January 1936 which formally established the Army of the Philippines he recalled Colonel Jose Delos Reyes of the Philippine Constabulary to active duty and later promoted him to Brigadier General and designated him as Acting Chief of Staff of the Army Brigadier General Basilio J Valdez and Colonel Guillermo B Francisco were named 1 st and 2nd Asst Chief of Staff respectively

In the same order the Philippine Constabulary became the nucleus of the regular forces of the Philippine Army Filipino citizens were required to go training under the National Defense Act since 1936 that would compose reserve force By the end of the ten year Commonwealth period in 1946 there would have been a trained Philippine Army Reserve pool of 400000 officers and men including the graduates of the ROTC Basic and Advance Course in accredited colleges and universities

When the Philippine Constabulary became part of the Philippine Army the PC Air Corps which was activated on 2 January 1955 was re designated Philippine Air Force on 3 July 1947

On February 1939 an Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was organized as a unit of the Philippine Army Initially equipped with three Q-boats (torpedo boats) and a handful of officers and men hurriedly trained in the rudiments of Sea-Warfare the OSP squadron provided coastal support to the beleaguered Filipino-American forces in the battles of Bataan and Corregidor In October 1947 the OSP was renamed Philippine Naval Patrol and on 5 January 1951 it became the Philippine Navy The OSP was often referred to as Mosquito Fleet

When President Franklin D Roosevelt of the USA declared the state of National Emergency on 26 July 1941 and ordered the induction of the Philippine Army units into the US Armed Forces in the Far East under the command of General Douglas Mc Arthur the Philippine Army had a reserve force of about 100000 officers and men at the time of the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked the Pearl Harbor Clark Field and other targets on 8 December 1941 The Philippine Army Reserve Force totaled around 200000 officers and men

The Philippine Army retained its own organization while serving with the USAFFE After the fall of Bataan on 9 April 1942 many officers and men of the Philippine Army continued resistance against the Japanese by forming guerilla forces all over the country These USAFFE guerilla forces along with other units organized by civilians in various parts of the country fought the Japanese Forces from 1942 to 1945 When the US Liberation Forces landed in Leyte on 20 October 1944 all the guerilla forces participated actively on the liberation on their respective sectors of operations

On October 1947 President Manual A Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 which organized all government agencies The Military establishment was not spared from its official designation as Army of the Philippines and it became the Armed Forces of the Philippines The ten pre-war military districts were deactivated but 4 Military Areas were also activated to enhance the efficiency of the Constabulary personnel all over the country

The post-war Philippine Army eventually got its forces fighting another battle ndash the battle against the armed elements of the Communist Party of the Philippines the HUKBALAHAP later renamed HMB For the anti0dissident campaign Army Sector Command and Battalion Combat Teams were formed During the Korean war the 10th 20th 11th 19th and 2nd BCTrsquos were sent as Philippine Expeditionary Force as the member of the United Nations PEFTOK served in Korea from 1950-1955 On 25 December 1950 President Quirino issued Executive Order No 389 renaming headquarters AFP to General Headquarters AFP and activating the 4 major services The Philippine Army Philippine Constabulary Philippine Air Force and Philippine Navy

From the time the Philippines joined the Southeast Asia Treaty Organization (SEATO) in September 1954 the AFP cooperated actively with the other member nations in the enhancing of military preparedness in the area

As a member of the UN the Philippines also sent a Philippine Air Force Contingent of 77 officers and men on a pacification campaign to the Congo Republic on 11 February 1963

In 1966 the Philippine Civic Action Group (PHICAG) was activated to implement the provisions of RA 4644 Composed of engineers medical and rural community development teams and security personnel the PHILCAG was sent to the Republic of South Vietnam and engaged in socio-economic projects mutually agreed upon by the governments of the Republic of the Philippines and Republic of South Vietnam

The AFP has shown an increasing awareness of its arrival in the country and its vital role in the political and economic development of the country by engaging are actively in civic action programs

Pursuant to the Socio-economic Military Program under RA 2056 the Chief of Staff AFP ordered the assignment of military personnel for public works construction food production land settlement and rural development Several civic centers of the AFP

To give greater impetus on the civic action the 51st Engineer Brigade consisting of 10 Engineer Construction Battalion was activated on 10 March 1962 This unit had constructed several much needed highways roads and bridges in various parts of the country The 52nd Engineer Brigade which was organized on 1 July 1969 also performed similar functions to holster the national program for social and economical developments

Today the AFP is employing all its resources in assisting the socio-economic development programs of the government without prejudice to its primary missions of improving and maintaining the effectiveness of the countryrsquos defense posture

SIGNIFICANT FACTS TO REMEMBER

MACTAN ndash place where the first revolt against Spain took place on April 26 1951 The firstrebellion Spain flared up in Bohol and Leyte

ANDRES MALONG ndash led the first major revolt in Luzon in 1660 He proclaimed himself as aKing of PangasinanLAPU ndash LAPU ndash was the first Filipino hero

MIGUEL VICOS ndash the Spanish Meztiso who assassinated Diego Silang on May 28 1863

RED WITH A FIGURE OF A SUN ndash color of the first flag of the Philippines in 1897

ANDRES BONIFACIO ndash was the founder of the Revolutionary Society called Katipunan

GEN GREGORIO DEL PILAR ndash led the Filipino forces in the Battle of Tirad Pass

AUGUST 29 1896 ndash the date designated as the start of the revolution which was also known as

Cry of BalintawakDECEMBER 14 1897 ndashdate when the Treaty of Paris and Fact of Biak-na-bato was signed

FACT OF BIAK-NA-BATO ndash an agreement between the Filipino and the Spanish authoritieson December 14 1897 to stop all hostilities

MARCELA AGONCILLO ndash designed and made the first flag of the first Philippine Republic

JULIAN FELIPE ndash was the composer of the Philippine National AnthemEMILIO AGUINALDO ndash was the first president of the Philippines

BALANAN ISABELA ndash the place where Gen Emilio Aguinaldo was captured In 1922 the US War Dept authorized the establishment of the Dept of Military Science andTactics under the supervision of the US Army This was established in theUniversity of the Philippines

MANUEL LUIS QUEZON ndash the first president of the Philippine Commonwealth

COMMONWEALTH ACT NO1 ndash is otherwise known as the National Defense Act issued by President Quezon and approved on December 21 1935 and gave the basicorganization of the AFP

GENERAL DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon during the Commonwealth period that helped in the planning andorganization of the Philippine Military EstablishmentGENDOUGLAS MCARTHURrsquoS STAFF

1 MAJ GEN DWIGHT D EISENHOWER2 MAJ GEN JAMES ORD

JANUARY 11 1936 ndash the date President Manuel L Quezon issued Executive Order No 11 onthe establishment of the PA

BRIG GEN BASILIO J VALDEZ ndash first assistant Chief of staff

BRIG GEN JOSE DELOS REYES ndash designated as the first Chief of Staff of the PhilippineArmy

COL GUILLERMO B FRANCISCO ndash 2nd assistant Chief of Staff The PHILLIPINE CONSTABULARY became the nucleus of the Philippine Army and the Philippine Constabulary Air Corps (PCA) was activated on January 2 1937

FEBRUARY 9 1939 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was activated and organized as a unit of thePhilippine Army The Off-Shore Patrol was equipped with Q-Boats (Torpedo Boat)and referred to as the ldquoMosquito Fleetrdquo

PRESIDENT FRANKLIN DELANO ROOSEVELT ndash President of the USA who set July 26 1941 as the date for the declaration of State of National Emergency and at the sametime the induction of the Philippine Army to United States Armed Forces to the Far East (USAFFE) with a total force of 160000 officers and men

GEN DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash was designated as the USAFFE COMMANDER

DECEMBER 8 1941 ndash the date the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked Pearl Harbor Clark Fieldand other targets

APRIL 9 1942 ndash fall of Bataan

MAY 6 1942 ndash fall of Corregidor

MAJOR FERDINAND EDRALIN MARCOS ndash was the most decorated soldier during the World War II and was a recipient of 27 medals

OCTOBER 20 1944 ndash the date the US Liberation Forces landed in Red Beach in Palo Leyte

JULY 3 1947 ndash the date the PC Air Corps was re-designated as the Philippine Air Force

OCTOBER 1947 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol was renamed Phil Naval Patrol ndash the date President Manuel Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 remainingthe Army of the Philippines as Armed Forces of the Philippines andactivating the 4 military areas

ARAW NG KAGITINGAN ndash a day set to commemorate the Fall of Bataan Fall of Corregidorand Fall of Bessang Pass Based on the historical records the independenceof the Republic of the Philippines was on June 12 1898

JULY 4 1946 ndash declaration of the Independence by the USA celebrated today as PhilippineAmerican Friendship Day

JULY 1950 ndash the Philippine Army was separated from the Gen Headquarters Philippine Army

DECEMBER 23 1950 ndash President ElpidioQuirino issued Executive Order No 389 renamingthe Headquarters AFP to Gen Headquarters AFP (GHQ AFP)

JANUARY 5 1951 ndash the Phil Naval Patrol was renamed the Philippine Naval of thePHILIPPINE NAVY

1959 ndash 1955 ndash the Battalion Combat Teams were sent to Korea to comply with the commitmentsof the Philippines as member of the UN The BCT was known as the PHILIPPINE EXPEDITIONARY FORCE TO KOREA (PEFTOK)

SEPTEMBER 1954 ndash The Philippines joined the Southeast Asian Treaty Org (SEATO)

APRIL 11 1963 ndash the PAF contingent of 77 officers and men were sent to Congo Republic of South VietnamPHIL CIVIC ACTION GROUP (PHILCAG) ndash the group of engineers medical and ruralcommunity development team and security personnel were sent by thePhilippines to the representative of South Vietnam

FEBRUARY 22-25 1986 ndash the bloodless peoples revolution which deposed Ferdinand Marcosfrom the presidency and as Commander in elected President of thePhilippines commonly referred to as the EDSA Revolution

ACRONYMSBCT ndash Battalion Combat TeamGHQ ndash General HeadquartersHMB ndash HukbongMapagpalayang Bayan (HUKBALAHAP)PHILCAG-V ndash Philippine Civic Action Group to VietnamSEATO ndash Southeast Asian Treaty OrganizationOSP ndash Off-Shore PatrolPEFTOK ndash Philippine Expeditionary Force to Korea

ENLISTED PERSONNELrsquoS RANKS

MarinesArmy Navy Constabulary Air Force

C ndash CadetCadette M- MidshipmanMidshipwoman

CHAPTER V

MILITARY LEADERSHIP AND COMMAND

A Leadership ndash is the art of influencing and directing men to an assigned goal is such a way toobtain their obedience respect and loyal cooperation Leadership can beexercised by anyone at anytime respective of the frame work of the command

Command ndash is the authority which an individual in the military service lawfully exercisedover subordinates by virtue of his rank and assignment Command andleadership are inseparable whether the function of the command is complex orsimple the commander should always be the controlling head

B TWO TYPES OF LEADER

1 Authoritarian ndash a leader who leads his men by means of rank and position

2 Persuasive ndash a leader who leads his men by always setting examples

C BASIC ELEMENTS OF LEADERSHIP

1 Character ndash to be a leader a person must be of good character Some indications arehonesty good manners industrious self-control and bravery

2 Intelligence ndash is the ability to grasp knowledge easily It includes native ability goodcommon sense and judgment

3 Alertness ndash is mental and physical watchfulness vigilance and observance to his planned and future activity

D LEADERSHIP RESPONSIBILITIES

1 Accomplishment of the assigned mission or task

2 Work for the welfare of his men

E LEADERSHIP TRAITS

1 Knowledge ndash professional knowledge of the job Understands the characteristics of his men2 Bearing ndash dignified appearance and behavior

3 Courage ndash physical and moral ability to act in spite of danger or hardship

4 Decisiveness ndash ability to decide promptly and correctly the proper time and to announce his decision clearly and briefly with authority

5 Dependability ndash performance of duty with or without supervision

6 Endurance ndash physical and mental strength to continue or complete a task

7 Enthusiasm ndash interest in his work or task at hand

8 Force ndash the ability to compel obedience

9 Humility ndash state of being reasonable and proud but not arrogant and boastful

10 Humor ndash ability to appreciate and narrate amusing incidents of everyday life

11 Initiative ndash ability to start or originate an idea or work even when others are absent

12 Judgment ndash power of mind to weight factors affecting a problem and to decide properly

13 Integrity ndash good moral character

14 Justice ndash impartiality in dealing with others giving credit when due and punishment when so demanded

15 Loyalty - sincerity and faithfulness to superiors for the good of the unit

16 Sympathy ndash mutual feelings to others

17 Tact ndash ability to deal with people without hurting their feelings

18 Unselfishness - avoidance of personal consideration that gives a disadvantage

to others

F PRINCIPLES IN LEADERSHIP

1 Know your job - must have thorough professional knowledge of his duties and responsibilities to

command and gain respect from his men

2Know yourself and seek self-improvement - a leader should analyze himself to determine his

good qualities and learn to recognize and correct his weakness

3 Know your men and look after their welfare - understand each of your men personally

psychologically in order to effectively lead them

4 Keep your men informed - keep your men knowledgeable background in all aspects its

organization and mission in order to function effectively

5 Set an example -set a good example as a model in loyalty in superiors and subordinates good

bearing and attitudes pride and faithfulness to the organization

6 Insure the task is understood supervised and accomplished - a leader should give a clear and

concise order that can be understood He supervises his men to accomplish the

assigned mission

7 Train your men as a team - teamwork is a must within and among units from the

smallest to the largest Each men should understand that he has a job to perform

and must cooperate with others in achieving the common objective

8 Make sound and timely decisions - the ability to make raid estimate of the situation Arrive at the

sound decision and announce his decision in the correct form of the proper is

essential to a leader For any situation that may arise the leader should be able to

act logically

9 Develop a sense of responsibility among your subordinates - the leader should train his

subordinates to act in the absence of orders when the situation so demands He

develops responsibility among his subordinates byproper delegation of his

authority and holding them responsible for theaccomplishment of their mission

10 Employ your commands in accordance with its capability - the leader must have thorough knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of his command He must assign objectives that is responsible to be attained However when the situation so demands then men must be forced to action beyond their normal endurance so as to avoid a harder or more costly consequence on their part

11 See responsibility and take responsibility for your action - learn the seniors job for youmay assume his position later on Take advantage of the responsibility delegated toyou and do not back out in case of failure

ROLES OF A LEADER

1 The leader is a model soldier2 The leader is a commander3 The leader is an instructor4 The leader is a personal manager5 The leader is a councilor6 The leader is a custodian of his mens welfare

OBJECTIVES OF A LEADER

1 MORALE - the mental and emotional state of an individual 2 DISCIPLINE - the prompt and willing obedience to orders Complying to regulations and initiating appropriate action even in theabsence of orders 3 PROFICIENCY - the technical tactical and physical ability of an individual to perform their mission 4 ESPRIT DE CORPS - More than the aggregate personality it is how the individuals feel about their unit Jealous of enthusiasticfor pride in and devotion for

MAP READING

MAP - is a graphical representation of the earths surface drawn to a scale on aplane When you look at the map you are actually looking at a picture ofthe ground from a high spot in the air MAP COLOR - different colors are used on the printing of the maps to assist the use understanding it A GREEN - represents all types of vegetables B BLUE - signifies bodies of water such as rivers lakes swamps and streams C RED - indicates first class roads and prominent locations such as theProvincial or Municipal Capitals May be used to stress the significance ofimportant map locations

D BROWN - depicts contour lines which are representation of the relatives elevation and relief of the terrain

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

ENGLISH FILIPINO

Route StephelliphelliphelliphellipLayangHakbangMarch KAD

Rifle SalutehelliphelliphelliphellipPugaySandata

Unsling ArmshelliphelliphellipIbis Sandata

Fix BayonethelliphelliphellipIkabitangsundang

Raise pistolhelliphelliphelliphellipItaasang pistol

Open ChamberhelliphelliphellipBuksanang pistol

Sir the paradehelliphelliphellipHandanapoangis formed parangal

ReporthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMag-ulat

OfficershelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgapinuno puma-Center March gitna KAD

LoadhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPunluan

Simulate LeadhelliphelliphellipMagpungloKunwari

Stack armshelliphelliphelliphellipBangkoSandata

Sound thehelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIhudyatangpagbabaretreat ngwatawat

Sound OffhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIhudyatangPangal

Attention tohelliphelliphelliphellipMakinigsathe Orderhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipkautusan

Officer of thehelliphelliphelliphellipPunongTagakalingaDay

By Order OfhelliphelliphelliphellipSautosni

ENGLISH FILIPINO

By the helliphellipSabaysaNumber Bilang

Sling ArmshelliphelliphelliphellipSakbitSandata

Adjust SlinghelliphelliphelliphellipAyusinangSakbit

Unfix bayonethelliphelliphellipAlisinangsundang

Withdraw magazinehellipAlisinangpungluan

Insert magazinehelliphellipIsauliangpungluan

Take your helliphelliphelliphellipSumalunan kayopool

Attention to helliphelliphellipMakinigsakautusanOrders

ColorhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIharappabalikangReverse March watawat KAD

UnloadhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipAlisPungla

Cease FiringhelliphelliphelliphellipItigilangPutukan

Take ArmshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipDampotSandata

AdjutantrsquoshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPanawagansaCall Parangal

PublishhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIpahayag andthe Order kautusan

Details forhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgaNakatalagathe day Ngayon

CommanderhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPunongTanodof the Guard

OfficerrsquoshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgapinunoPost March Balik Kad

Staff Behind Me Change PosthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgaKagawadMagpalitngLunan

ENGLISH FILIPINO

In place HalthelliphelliphellipSa lunan Hinto

File from thehelliphelliphellipSunuranmulasaRightLeft kanankaliwa

Guide LefthelliphelliphelliphellipGabayasaKaliwaCenterRight GitnaKanan

Stand FasthelliphelliphelliphellipTatag manatiliWalangkikilos

Left oliquehelliphelliphelliphellipHiligkaliwaMarch KAD

Two Arms LengthhellipIbayongDalawangExtended to the Left Pakaliwa KAD

TroophelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTipon

One TwohelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIsa DalawaThree Four Tatlo Apat

Assemble to thehelliphelliphellipMagtiponsakananRight left march Kaliwa

MounthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSakay

Close onhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipLumapitsaunangLeading Platoon pulutong

Gaiden on LeadinghellipGabaysaunangPlatoons on Line pulutongnghanay

PostshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSaLunan

Dismiss yourhelliphelliphellipTiwalaginanginyongCompany balangay

ENGLISH FILIPINO

Resume marchhelliphellipMagpatuloy KAD

Columns of twoshellipDalawangTatluhangThreesfours Apatangtudling

All present arehelliphelliphellipNaritopolahatAccounted for napagalaman

Right obliquehelliphelliphellipHilispakananMarch Kad

InspectionhelliphelliphelliphellipPagsisiyasat

DetailhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipNakatalaga

PatrolhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTaliba

Take intervalhelliphelliphelliphellipIbayongpatlang March KAD

Unsling equipmenthelliphellipIbabasagamit

Company MasshelliphelliphellipPulo-pulotongsaRightLeft March kanan

Garden on the LinehelliphellipMgagabaysahanay

Guide PosthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgagabaysalunan

Sir the BattalionhelliphelliphellipAngTalupadpo ayis informed handana

Persons to be decoratedhellipMgaparangalan atand all colors Center lahatngwatawatMarch pumagitna KAD

Form the shelter tentshellipMagsisayosngpagtatayongtolda

AT NORMAL INTERVAL

Dress righthelliphelliphelliphellipTuntonkananDress NA

Dress lefthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTuntonkaliwaDress NA

CoverhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPanakip

At Close IntervalhelliphellipMasinsinPagitanDress right Tunton callow NA

At Close IntervalhellipMasinsinPagitanDress left Tuntonkaliwa NA

At Close IntervalhellipMasinsinPagitanFall In Humanay

Close MarchhelliphelliphelliphellipLakadpasinsin KAD

Extended MarchhelliphellipLakadPadalang KAD

Column RighthelliphelliphellipLikoKananLeft March Kaliwa KAD

Column RighthelliphelliphellipLikoHulingKananLeft March (Half) Kaliwa KAD

Incline to thehelliphelliphelliphellipPagawingkananRightLeft Kaliwa KAD

Change StephelliphelliphelliphellipPalitHakbangMarch KAD

Left ShoulderhelliphelliphellipKaliwangBalikatArms Ta

Trail ArmshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipBitbit TA

Port armshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipAgap TA

Inspection ArmshelliphellipSiyasat TA

RightLefthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipKanangKaliwangFlank March Panig KAD

Count offhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSabayangbilang NA

Call offhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTuluyangbilang NA

Center facehelliphelliphelliphellipHumarapsaGitna RAP

Prepare forhelliphelliphelliphellipHumandasa

Inspection Pagsisiyasat

Open RankhelliphelliphelliphellipPabukangTaludtodMarch KAD

Close RankhelliphelliphelliphellipPasinsinTaludtodMarch KAD

Right TurnhelliphelliphelliphellipPihitsaKananMarch KAD

Pass In ReviewhelliphelliphellipPasa Masid

BackwardhelliphelliphelliphellipLakadPaurongMarch KAD

To the RearhelliphelliphelliphellipPabalikMarch KAD

Right shoulderhelliphelliphellipKanangbalikatArms TA

Order armshelliphelliphelliphellipBaba TA

Present ArmshelliphelliphelliphellipTangha TA

Ready EyeshelliphelliphellipHandaKananRightLeft Kaliwa Tingin

Ready FronthelliphelliphelliphellipHanda Harap

ENGLISH FILIPINO

Sir I present the commandhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Ihahandogkopoangpamunuan

Sir the Troop is ready forhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Handanapoangpangkatsa

Trooping for the linehelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip LibutinangHanay

To the LeftRight Marchhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip PakaliwaPakanan KAD

Column of the Platoon Leading Platoonhelliphelliphelliphellip TudlingngpulutongUnangpulutongby the LeftRight Flank March KaliwaKanangpanig KAD

Donrsquot anticipate the commandhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Huwagpangunahanangutos

Sir the Honod Guard is formedhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Handan a poangTanodPandangal

D The Salute ( Pagpugay )

1 Hand Salute - PugayKamay2 Ready Eyes Right - HandaTinginKanan3 Ready Front - Handa RAP

E Steps and Marching ( Hakbang at Lakad )

1 Count Cadence Count - BilangHakbang NA 2 Forward March - Pasulong KAD 3 Platoon Halt - Pulutong Hinto 4 Mark Time March - LakadPatakda KAD 5 Half Step March - Hating Hakbang KAD 6 Double Time March - TakbongHakbang KAD NA 7 Quick Time March - SiglangHakbang KADNA 8 Route March - LayangHakbang NA 9 In place Double Time March - Sa Lunan TakbongHakbang KADNA10 Right Step March - HakbangPakanan NAKAD11 Left Step March - HakbangPakaliwa NAKAD12 Backward March - LakadPaurong KAD13 To the Rear March - Pabalik NA14 Change Step March - PalitHakbang NA15 One Two Three Four - Isa Dalawa Tatlo Apat

2 SCHOOL OF SOLDIERS WITH ARMS ( PagsasanayngKawalna may sandata )

A Manual of Arms ( PagsanaysapaghawakngSandata )

1 Right Shoulder Arms - SaKanangBalikat TA2 Left Shoulder Arms - SaKaliwangBalikat TA3 Order Arms - Baba TA4 Present Arms - Tanghal TA5 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA6 Trail Arms - Bitbit TA7 Sling Arms - Sakbit Sandata8 Unsling Arms - AlisSakbit Sandata9 Fix Bayonet - IkabitBayoneta10 Unfix Bayonet - AlisBayoneta

B Manual of Gidon( ParaanngPagsasanaysaPaghawakngSagisag )

1 Order Guidon - IbabaSagisag2 Carry Guidon - BitbitSagisag3 Raise Guidon - ItaasSagisagC Manual of Arms for the Pistol ( PagsasanaysaPaghawakngPistola )

1 Raise Pistol - ItaasangPistola2 Withdraw Magazine - AlisinangPistola3 Open Chamber - BuksanangPistola4 Close Chamber - IsaraangPistola5 Insert Magazine - IsuksukangPistola6 Return Pistol - IsauliangPungluan

3 Close Order Drill ( MalapitangPagsasanay )

a At Close Interval Fall In - Sa MasinsinPagitan Humanayb Inspection Arms - Siyasat TAc Port Arms - Agap TAd Order Arms - Baba TA

A To Dismiss the Platoon (PagtiwalagngPulutong )

1 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA2 Port Arms - Agap TA3 Dismiss - Lumansag

B To Form the Platoons ( PaghahanayngPulutong )

1 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA2 Port Arms - Agap TA3 Order Arms - Baba TA4 Call Off - TuluyangBilang5 Report - Mag-ulat

C To Align the Squad ( PaghahanayngTilap )

1 Dress Right Dress - TuntonKanan NA2 Dress Left Dress -TuntonKaliwa NA3 At Close Interval Dress RightDress Left -MasinsinPagitan TuntonKananKaliwa NA4 Ready Fort - Handa RAP5 Cover - Tumakip

D To Change Interval while in Line ( PagpalitngpagitanSamantalangNakahanay )

1 Close March - LakadPasinsin KAD2 Extended March - LakadPadalang KAD3 Extended to the Left - IbayongLakadPakaliwa KADE Marching the Squad from a line ( PaglakadsaPangkatmulasaHanay ) 1 Right Face - HarapsaKanan RAP 2 Left Face - HarapsaKaliwa RAP 3 Forward March - Pasulong KAD 4 Column Right March - LikosaKanan KADNA 5 Column Left March - LikosaKaliwa KADNA 6 Column Half Right March - Liko Hating Kanan KADNA 7 Column Half Left March - Liko Hating Kaliwa KADNA 8 Incline to the Left - PagawingKanan 9 Incline to the Right - PagawingKaliwa 10 Right Left March - KaliwaKanangpanig NA

F Counting of Men ( PagbilangngKawal )

1 Count Off - SabayangBilang NA 2 Call Off - TuluyangBilang NA

G To Change Interval While in Column ( PagpalitngPagitanSamantalangNakatudling )

1 Close March - LakadPasinsin KAD 2 Extend March - LakadPadalang KAD

MILITARY DRILLS AND CEREMONIES

MILITARY CEREMONIES - The movement of the larger unit or troops in a prescribed manner from one place to another

1 REVIEW - A military ceremony held in honor of a visiting commander official or dignitary It is also a fittingaffair to present decorations and awards to deserving members or units of the command

A REVIEW IS NORMALLY CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING ELEMENTSa Formation of troopsb Presentation of troopsc Inspection of troopsd Presentation of awards and decorations

2 PARADE - A more formal ceremony than a review In this ceremony the appearance and movement of thetroops in the formation are the primary consideration The preparation and organization of troops forparades are similar to those of a review The line on which the troops are to be formed and the route ofmarch of the participating units are marked or designated The distance between the troops and thecommander for the parade formation is greater than that of a reviewTWO DISTINCT TYPES OF PARADES1 Evening Parade2 Moonlight Parade

DRILL COMMANDS - An oral of a commander

TWO PARTS 1 PREPARATORY COMMAND - States the movement or formation to be carried out and mentally prepares theindividual for its execution It is a command which indicates the movement

2 COMMAND OF EXECUTION - Tells when the movement is to be carried out It is a command which indicates when amovement is to be executed

EXAMPLE FORWARD MARCHForwardPreparatory Command MarchCommand of Execution

PREPARATORY COMMAND AND COMMAND OF EXECUTION

1 Fall in Fall out - Humanay Tumiwalag

2 Rest - Pahinga3 As you were - Manumbalik4 At ease - TindigPaluwag5 Change step - PalikHakbang

SUPPLEMENTARY COMMAND - The subordinate commander gives a supplementary command He turns his head towards themajority of his elements and gives command over his shoulder He does not face about

MASS COMMAND - May be used to develop confidence and enthusiasm All of the members of the unit being trained speak in unison and execute them

THINGS TO OBSERVE IN GIVING COMMANDS

Inflection - The rise and fall of pitch and the tone changes of the voice

Cadence In Command - The uniform and rhythmic flow of words

Snap - The extra quality in command that demands immediate responseREMEMBER

1 Correct commands have a tone cadence and snap that demands willingness correct and immediateresponse 2 The loudness of the command is adjusted to the number of men in the unit 3 The best posture for giving command is at the position of attention 4 The most desirable pitch when beginning a preparatory command is near the level of your natural speaking voice

MILITARY COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

MILITARY COURTESY - Is the expression or manifestation of consideration for others It is a virtue that is expected of all individuals from all walks of life In the Armed Forces courtesy is a great requirement because it is thebasic upon which military discipline stands With courtesy and respect among members of the organizationwould lose its orderliness and later disintegrate Furthermore courtesy promotes good relationship closer coordination and teamwork among members of the organization It makes theorganization dignified and insures good relations with the public

SALUTES- Is the most important form of military courtesy It is executed by raising the right man smartlyUntil the tip of the forefinger touches the eyebrow or the front brim of the head gear when coveredForefingers are extended and joined palm facing the left forearm inclined at an angle of about 45 degrees

and the right upper arm horizontal to the ground A person saluting looks at the person beingsaluted When the salute is returned he drops the right hand smartly to the side

RULES IN RENDERING HAND SALUTEa The salute is required on and off military installations during outside office hoursb Persons entitled to the saluted 1 All commissioned officers of the AFP both male and female 2 Commissioned officers of friendly nations when they are recognized as such 3 Officers of the Coast and Geodetic Survey and the Public Health Service when they are serving with the AFP 4 All civilian who are entitled by custom to salutec The salute is rendered at a distance of about 6 paces from the person saluted of at the recognizable distances about 30 pacesd The salute must be rendered to those entitled to it It is not rendered when running but at halt or walk Never salute with a cigarette cigar or pipe in the mouth The salute should not be executed in a haphazardway or perfunctory manner Salutes are exchange whether individuals are cover or uncoverede The salute is rendered at once if the senior remains in the immediate vicinity and no conversation takesplace the junior again salutes the senior when they are path from each otherf In making reports the person reporting salutes first regardless of rank An example of this case is whenthe unit commander is reporting to the adjutant during ceremoniesg) Whom not to salute

1 Standing to a horse or leading a horse2 While at work In case the officer calls the soldier stops working approaches and salutes him

and again when they are part to each other3 Indoors except when reporting to an officer or when the soldier is on duty sentry or guard4 When carrying articles with both hands or being so occupied as to make saluting practical5 When riding in a fast moving vehicle and the other is dismounted the salute is not rendered

Exception are when the vehicle is clearly marked to indicate a General Officer and when saluting is a part of the ceremony

6 When meeting a prisoner of war Soldier serving as military prisoner are not entitled to salute7 In case of doubt due to absence of specific instruction the salute is rendered

The term ldquooutdoorrdquo is constructed to include such buildings as drill halls gymnasiums and other roofed enclosures used for drill or exercise of troops Theaters covered walks and other shelters open on the side are also considered as outdoor

ldquoIndoorsrdquo include offices hallways kitchen orderly rooms recreation halls washroom and quarters

ldquoUnder armsrdquo means carrying arms having them attached to the person by sling holster or other means In the absence of arms the wearing of cartridge bells pistol holsters and automatic rifle belts also mean ldquounder armsrdquo

TYPES OF SALUTES

a Hand saluteb The Rifle Salute at Order Armsc The Rifle Salute at Trail Armsd The Rifle Salute at Present Armse The Rifle Salute at Shoulder Arms (Right Shoulder)f The Rifle Salute at Left Shoulder Armsg The Gun Saluteh Eyes Right by men in ranks when Pass in Review

REPORTING TO AN OFFICER

The salute is rendered by a junior when reporting to a senior He also salutes before leaving

a REPORTING INDOORS WITHOUT ARMS

A soldier removes his headgear knocks at the door of the office of the officer and enters when told to do so Upon entering he halts at about two paces from the officer and salutes and says Sir Cadet Airman Dela Cruz reporting to the squadron commander Sir The salute will be retained until he completes his report and the officer had returned his salute execute about face and leaves the office

b REPORTING INDOORS UNDER ARMS

The procedure for reporting is the same as discussed above except that the soldier remain covered If carrying a rifle the soldier carries it and salute at trail arms Otherwise the hand salute is given

c REPORTING OUTDOORS

The procedure for reporting to an officer the head gear is not removed Rifles should be carried at trail arms or at the right shoulder The hand salute or rifle salute is given as the case may be

d REPORTING FOR PAY

The soldier reporting for pay answers ldquoHererdquo when his name is called approaches and salutes the officer He picks up and count his money and leaves without saluting The officer does not return his salute

OTHER COURTESY TO INDIVIDUALS

a) When an officer enters the room or tent officersrsquo junior to him and enlisted men present with uncover (if unarmed and stand at attention until the officer directs otherwise or leaves the room) When more than one individual are present the first one who perceive the officer will command ldquoAttentionrdquo loud enough to be heard by everybody present

b) When an officer enters a room or tent used as an office working shop or recreation room those at work or at play are not required to come to attention unless addressed by the officer A transaction of routine business between individuals at work

c) When an officer enters an enlisted menus hall the group is called to ldquoAt Easerdquo by the person noticing him first Men remain seated at ease and continue eating unless the officer directs otherwise A soldiers addresses stop eating and sits at attention until the conversation has ended

d) When accompanying a senior a junior walks or ride on his left except when accompanying senior during inspection

e) When entering a car or a small boat the senior goes in first and others follow in the order of rank In getting off he junior goes out first and others follow in the inverse order of rank

HONORS TO THE NATIONAL ANTHEM OR TO THE COLORS

I OUTDOOR

- Wheneverwherever the National Anthem or the colors is played military personnel not in the formation must observe the following

1 At the first note of the music stand at attention and render the prescribed salute except atthe escort of the color or at retreat when they will face toward the color or flag and salute The salute is retained until the last note of the music

2 The mounted on animals will halt and render the salute mounted Individuals loadinganimals or standing to a horse will stand at attention having the salute

3 Vehicles in motion will be brought to a halt Persons riding on a passenger car or amotorcycle will dismount and salute as described above Occupants of combat vehicles such a tanks half trucks scout cars and armored cars will remain in their vehicles but stand at attention and salute

4 The above respect to the National Color is rendered to the National Anthem or colors offriendly nations

II INDOORS

- When the national anthem is played officer and men will stand at attention and face the music or the flag but do not salute

UNCOVERING- Officer and enlisted men under arms uncover when

a) Seated as a member of or in attendance at a court or board Sentinels guarding prisoners do not uncover

b) Entering places of divine worship

c) Indoors when not in duty

d) In attendance at an official reception

DISPLAY AND SALUTE TO THE FLAG

a The Philippine flag represents our nation and should always be given a place of runner

b The National Flag is never dipped for salute nor is it permitted to touch the ground It is not used as a costume dress or a drapery No lettering or object should be placed on it

c The flag is played in the following manners1 When hoisted at a flag pole it should be hoisted fully at the top of the pole blue part

up or above During mornings the flag is hoisted to the top of the pole first then hauled down until the flag is about midway of the length of the pole

2 When the national flag is displayed with another flag whether they are standing sideby side or with their staff crossed the National Flag is at the right side blue part up

3 When placed in the vertical manner the triangle is up the blue color at the right4 When displayed in the horizontal position the triangle is at the right side with the blue

part up5 When displayed over the casket the triangle is in the direction of the head of the cadaver with

the blue part on the right side

During the ceremonies wherein the holstering or lowering of the flag is done or when it passes by during parades or reviews all persons present except those detailed in holstering lowering and carrying the flag should face it at attention and salute while those in uniform remove their headdress with their right hand and place them over their left breast Women should salute by placing their right hand on their left breastMILITARY DISCIPLINE

Military discipline is the mental attitude and state of training which renders obedience and proper conduct instinctive under all conditions It is founded upon respect for loyalty to properly constituted authority While it is primarily developed by military drills every feature in military life has its effect upon military discipline It is generally indicated in an individual or unit by smartness of appearance and action cleanliness of dress equipment or quarters respect for senior and by the prompt and cheerful obedience by the subordinates of both the latter and spirit of the legal orders

RELATION OF COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

The relation of military discipline to courtesy is clearly explained by the fact that discipline is founded upon by respect and loyalty to superiors and lawfully constituted authorities In other words discipline originates and develops mutual respect and goodwill among members of an organization Without courtesy and respect among members of an organization discipline disappears there will be no peace and order in the organization hence it will disintegrate

IMPORTANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Mass discipline and morale are essential factors for securing cohesive action and for ensuring that singleness or purpose which alone can triumph over the most difficult conditions of war The successful leader will teach his men to recognize and face fear because fear is the enemy of discipline and morale Fear unchecked will lead to panic and a unit that is panicky is no longer a disciplined one but a mob There is no same person who is without fear but with good discipline and morale all will face danger if not willingly at least resignedly because of their inborn sentiment of duty or courage of loyalty and because of their sense of pride in their country in their unit and in themselves in other words because of their esprit de corps

The need for discipline is recognized in many places outside the Armed Forces It reaches at highest form in teams wherein individual desires are subordinated to the interests of the entire team The Armed Forces are more in need of discipline for several reasons First the task of making war is not doing it because we as individuals have to do it in the interest of our country Because of that we cannot be allowed as individual to decide which part of the job each of us will do or how each part to be done Second the organization must be prepared for situations wherein leaders may be lost Personal loyalty for the commandment is not enough If a leader is killed his men must accept orders from his successor immediately and without question to carry on the battle Finally the tremendous size of all Armed Forces demands that there be uniform ways of doing things Discipline subordinates personal and self considerations to the interest of the group

MAINTENANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Discipline is installed in men through instructions pride and traditions and regulations You will develop appreciation of the other factors which build discipline as time passes One must know and understand the different laws and regulations immediately

Discipline is maintained in much the same manner as it is attained The article of war punishes military individualsrsquo fairness and justice high moral pride and responsibility contribute to maintain discipline as to developing it

CHAPTER IVARMED FORCES OF THE PHILIPPINESrsquo HISTORY

Brief History of the AFPCommonwealth Act no 1 otherwise known as the National Defense Act was approved on 21

December 1935 which gave the basic organization of the AFP General Douglas McArthur served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon Major General Dwight D Eisenhower and Major General James Ord members of the McArthurrsquos Staff helped in the planting of the Philippine Military Establishment as well as organizing it

As President Quezon issued Executive Order no 11 on January 1936 which formally established the Army of the Philippines he recalled Colonel Jose Delos Reyes of the Philippine Constabulary to active duty and later promoted him to Brigadier General and designated him as Acting Chief of Staff of the Army Brigadier General Basilio J Valdez and Colonel Guillermo B Francisco were named 1 st and 2nd Asst Chief of Staff respectively

In the same order the Philippine Constabulary became the nucleus of the regular forces of the Philippine Army Filipino citizens were required to go training under the National Defense Act since 1936 that would compose reserve force By the end of the ten year Commonwealth period in 1946 there would have been a trained Philippine Army Reserve pool of 400000 officers and men including the graduates of the ROTC Basic and Advance Course in accredited colleges and universities

When the Philippine Constabulary became part of the Philippine Army the PC Air Corps which was activated on 2 January 1955 was re designated Philippine Air Force on 3 July 1947

On February 1939 an Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was organized as a unit of the Philippine Army Initially equipped with three Q-boats (torpedo boats) and a handful of officers and men hurriedly trained in the rudiments of Sea-Warfare the OSP squadron provided coastal support to the beleaguered Filipino-American forces in the battles of Bataan and Corregidor In October 1947 the OSP was renamed Philippine Naval Patrol and on 5 January 1951 it became the Philippine Navy The OSP was often referred to as Mosquito Fleet

When President Franklin D Roosevelt of the USA declared the state of National Emergency on 26 July 1941 and ordered the induction of the Philippine Army units into the US Armed Forces in the Far East under the command of General Douglas Mc Arthur the Philippine Army had a reserve force of about 100000 officers and men at the time of the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked the Pearl Harbor Clark Field and other targets on 8 December 1941 The Philippine Army Reserve Force totaled around 200000 officers and men

The Philippine Army retained its own organization while serving with the USAFFE After the fall of Bataan on 9 April 1942 many officers and men of the Philippine Army continued resistance against the Japanese by forming guerilla forces all over the country These USAFFE guerilla forces along with other units organized by civilians in various parts of the country fought the Japanese Forces from 1942 to 1945 When the US Liberation Forces landed in Leyte on 20 October 1944 all the guerilla forces participated actively on the liberation on their respective sectors of operations

On October 1947 President Manual A Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 which organized all government agencies The Military establishment was not spared from its official designation as Army of the Philippines and it became the Armed Forces of the Philippines The ten pre-war military districts were deactivated but 4 Military Areas were also activated to enhance the efficiency of the Constabulary personnel all over the country

The post-war Philippine Army eventually got its forces fighting another battle ndash the battle against the armed elements of the Communist Party of the Philippines the HUKBALAHAP later renamed HMB For the anti0dissident campaign Army Sector Command and Battalion Combat Teams were formed During the Korean war the 10th 20th 11th 19th and 2nd BCTrsquos were sent as Philippine Expeditionary Force as the member of the United Nations PEFTOK served in Korea from 1950-1955 On 25 December 1950 President Quirino issued Executive Order No 389 renaming headquarters AFP to General Headquarters AFP and activating the 4 major services The Philippine Army Philippine Constabulary Philippine Air Force and Philippine Navy

From the time the Philippines joined the Southeast Asia Treaty Organization (SEATO) in September 1954 the AFP cooperated actively with the other member nations in the enhancing of military preparedness in the area

As a member of the UN the Philippines also sent a Philippine Air Force Contingent of 77 officers and men on a pacification campaign to the Congo Republic on 11 February 1963

In 1966 the Philippine Civic Action Group (PHICAG) was activated to implement the provisions of RA 4644 Composed of engineers medical and rural community development teams and security personnel the PHILCAG was sent to the Republic of South Vietnam and engaged in socio-economic projects mutually agreed upon by the governments of the Republic of the Philippines and Republic of South Vietnam

The AFP has shown an increasing awareness of its arrival in the country and its vital role in the political and economic development of the country by engaging are actively in civic action programs

Pursuant to the Socio-economic Military Program under RA 2056 the Chief of Staff AFP ordered the assignment of military personnel for public works construction food production land settlement and rural development Several civic centers of the AFP

To give greater impetus on the civic action the 51st Engineer Brigade consisting of 10 Engineer Construction Battalion was activated on 10 March 1962 This unit had constructed several much needed highways roads and bridges in various parts of the country The 52nd Engineer Brigade which was organized on 1 July 1969 also performed similar functions to holster the national program for social and economical developments

Today the AFP is employing all its resources in assisting the socio-economic development programs of the government without prejudice to its primary missions of improving and maintaining the effectiveness of the countryrsquos defense posture

SIGNIFICANT FACTS TO REMEMBER

MACTAN ndash place where the first revolt against Spain took place on April 26 1951 The firstrebellion Spain flared up in Bohol and Leyte

ANDRES MALONG ndash led the first major revolt in Luzon in 1660 He proclaimed himself as aKing of PangasinanLAPU ndash LAPU ndash was the first Filipino hero

MIGUEL VICOS ndash the Spanish Meztiso who assassinated Diego Silang on May 28 1863

RED WITH A FIGURE OF A SUN ndash color of the first flag of the Philippines in 1897

ANDRES BONIFACIO ndash was the founder of the Revolutionary Society called Katipunan

GEN GREGORIO DEL PILAR ndash led the Filipino forces in the Battle of Tirad Pass

AUGUST 29 1896 ndash the date designated as the start of the revolution which was also known as

Cry of BalintawakDECEMBER 14 1897 ndashdate when the Treaty of Paris and Fact of Biak-na-bato was signed

FACT OF BIAK-NA-BATO ndash an agreement between the Filipino and the Spanish authoritieson December 14 1897 to stop all hostilities

MARCELA AGONCILLO ndash designed and made the first flag of the first Philippine Republic

JULIAN FELIPE ndash was the composer of the Philippine National AnthemEMILIO AGUINALDO ndash was the first president of the Philippines

BALANAN ISABELA ndash the place where Gen Emilio Aguinaldo was captured In 1922 the US War Dept authorized the establishment of the Dept of Military Science andTactics under the supervision of the US Army This was established in theUniversity of the Philippines

MANUEL LUIS QUEZON ndash the first president of the Philippine Commonwealth

COMMONWEALTH ACT NO1 ndash is otherwise known as the National Defense Act issued by President Quezon and approved on December 21 1935 and gave the basicorganization of the AFP

GENERAL DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon during the Commonwealth period that helped in the planning andorganization of the Philippine Military EstablishmentGENDOUGLAS MCARTHURrsquoS STAFF

1 MAJ GEN DWIGHT D EISENHOWER2 MAJ GEN JAMES ORD

JANUARY 11 1936 ndash the date President Manuel L Quezon issued Executive Order No 11 onthe establishment of the PA

BRIG GEN BASILIO J VALDEZ ndash first assistant Chief of staff

BRIG GEN JOSE DELOS REYES ndash designated as the first Chief of Staff of the PhilippineArmy

COL GUILLERMO B FRANCISCO ndash 2nd assistant Chief of Staff The PHILLIPINE CONSTABULARY became the nucleus of the Philippine Army and the Philippine Constabulary Air Corps (PCA) was activated on January 2 1937

FEBRUARY 9 1939 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was activated and organized as a unit of thePhilippine Army The Off-Shore Patrol was equipped with Q-Boats (Torpedo Boat)and referred to as the ldquoMosquito Fleetrdquo

PRESIDENT FRANKLIN DELANO ROOSEVELT ndash President of the USA who set July 26 1941 as the date for the declaration of State of National Emergency and at the sametime the induction of the Philippine Army to United States Armed Forces to the Far East (USAFFE) with a total force of 160000 officers and men

GEN DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash was designated as the USAFFE COMMANDER

DECEMBER 8 1941 ndash the date the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked Pearl Harbor Clark Fieldand other targets

APRIL 9 1942 ndash fall of Bataan

MAY 6 1942 ndash fall of Corregidor

MAJOR FERDINAND EDRALIN MARCOS ndash was the most decorated soldier during the World War II and was a recipient of 27 medals

OCTOBER 20 1944 ndash the date the US Liberation Forces landed in Red Beach in Palo Leyte

JULY 3 1947 ndash the date the PC Air Corps was re-designated as the Philippine Air Force

OCTOBER 1947 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol was renamed Phil Naval Patrol ndash the date President Manuel Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 remainingthe Army of the Philippines as Armed Forces of the Philippines andactivating the 4 military areas

ARAW NG KAGITINGAN ndash a day set to commemorate the Fall of Bataan Fall of Corregidorand Fall of Bessang Pass Based on the historical records the independenceof the Republic of the Philippines was on June 12 1898

JULY 4 1946 ndash declaration of the Independence by the USA celebrated today as PhilippineAmerican Friendship Day

JULY 1950 ndash the Philippine Army was separated from the Gen Headquarters Philippine Army

DECEMBER 23 1950 ndash President ElpidioQuirino issued Executive Order No 389 renamingthe Headquarters AFP to Gen Headquarters AFP (GHQ AFP)

JANUARY 5 1951 ndash the Phil Naval Patrol was renamed the Philippine Naval of thePHILIPPINE NAVY

1959 ndash 1955 ndash the Battalion Combat Teams were sent to Korea to comply with the commitmentsof the Philippines as member of the UN The BCT was known as the PHILIPPINE EXPEDITIONARY FORCE TO KOREA (PEFTOK)

SEPTEMBER 1954 ndash The Philippines joined the Southeast Asian Treaty Org (SEATO)

APRIL 11 1963 ndash the PAF contingent of 77 officers and men were sent to Congo Republic of South VietnamPHIL CIVIC ACTION GROUP (PHILCAG) ndash the group of engineers medical and ruralcommunity development team and security personnel were sent by thePhilippines to the representative of South Vietnam

FEBRUARY 22-25 1986 ndash the bloodless peoples revolution which deposed Ferdinand Marcosfrom the presidency and as Commander in elected President of thePhilippines commonly referred to as the EDSA Revolution

ACRONYMSBCT ndash Battalion Combat TeamGHQ ndash General HeadquartersHMB ndash HukbongMapagpalayang Bayan (HUKBALAHAP)PHILCAG-V ndash Philippine Civic Action Group to VietnamSEATO ndash Southeast Asian Treaty OrganizationOSP ndash Off-Shore PatrolPEFTOK ndash Philippine Expeditionary Force to Korea

ENLISTED PERSONNELrsquoS RANKS

MarinesArmy Navy Constabulary Air Force

C ndash CadetCadette M- MidshipmanMidshipwoman

CHAPTER V

MILITARY LEADERSHIP AND COMMAND

A Leadership ndash is the art of influencing and directing men to an assigned goal is such a way toobtain their obedience respect and loyal cooperation Leadership can beexercised by anyone at anytime respective of the frame work of the command

Command ndash is the authority which an individual in the military service lawfully exercisedover subordinates by virtue of his rank and assignment Command andleadership are inseparable whether the function of the command is complex orsimple the commander should always be the controlling head

B TWO TYPES OF LEADER

1 Authoritarian ndash a leader who leads his men by means of rank and position

2 Persuasive ndash a leader who leads his men by always setting examples

C BASIC ELEMENTS OF LEADERSHIP

1 Character ndash to be a leader a person must be of good character Some indications arehonesty good manners industrious self-control and bravery

2 Intelligence ndash is the ability to grasp knowledge easily It includes native ability goodcommon sense and judgment

3 Alertness ndash is mental and physical watchfulness vigilance and observance to his planned and future activity

D LEADERSHIP RESPONSIBILITIES

1 Accomplishment of the assigned mission or task

2 Work for the welfare of his men

E LEADERSHIP TRAITS

1 Knowledge ndash professional knowledge of the job Understands the characteristics of his men2 Bearing ndash dignified appearance and behavior

3 Courage ndash physical and moral ability to act in spite of danger or hardship

4 Decisiveness ndash ability to decide promptly and correctly the proper time and to announce his decision clearly and briefly with authority

5 Dependability ndash performance of duty with or without supervision

6 Endurance ndash physical and mental strength to continue or complete a task

7 Enthusiasm ndash interest in his work or task at hand

8 Force ndash the ability to compel obedience

9 Humility ndash state of being reasonable and proud but not arrogant and boastful

10 Humor ndash ability to appreciate and narrate amusing incidents of everyday life

11 Initiative ndash ability to start or originate an idea or work even when others are absent

12 Judgment ndash power of mind to weight factors affecting a problem and to decide properly

13 Integrity ndash good moral character

14 Justice ndash impartiality in dealing with others giving credit when due and punishment when so demanded

15 Loyalty - sincerity and faithfulness to superiors for the good of the unit

16 Sympathy ndash mutual feelings to others

17 Tact ndash ability to deal with people without hurting their feelings

18 Unselfishness - avoidance of personal consideration that gives a disadvantage

to others

F PRINCIPLES IN LEADERSHIP

1 Know your job - must have thorough professional knowledge of his duties and responsibilities to

command and gain respect from his men

2Know yourself and seek self-improvement - a leader should analyze himself to determine his

good qualities and learn to recognize and correct his weakness

3 Know your men and look after their welfare - understand each of your men personally

psychologically in order to effectively lead them

4 Keep your men informed - keep your men knowledgeable background in all aspects its

organization and mission in order to function effectively

5 Set an example -set a good example as a model in loyalty in superiors and subordinates good

bearing and attitudes pride and faithfulness to the organization

6 Insure the task is understood supervised and accomplished - a leader should give a clear and

concise order that can be understood He supervises his men to accomplish the

assigned mission

7 Train your men as a team - teamwork is a must within and among units from the

smallest to the largest Each men should understand that he has a job to perform

and must cooperate with others in achieving the common objective

8 Make sound and timely decisions - the ability to make raid estimate of the situation Arrive at the

sound decision and announce his decision in the correct form of the proper is

essential to a leader For any situation that may arise the leader should be able to

act logically

9 Develop a sense of responsibility among your subordinates - the leader should train his

subordinates to act in the absence of orders when the situation so demands He

develops responsibility among his subordinates byproper delegation of his

authority and holding them responsible for theaccomplishment of their mission

10 Employ your commands in accordance with its capability - the leader must have thorough knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of his command He must assign objectives that is responsible to be attained However when the situation so demands then men must be forced to action beyond their normal endurance so as to avoid a harder or more costly consequence on their part

11 See responsibility and take responsibility for your action - learn the seniors job for youmay assume his position later on Take advantage of the responsibility delegated toyou and do not back out in case of failure

ROLES OF A LEADER

1 The leader is a model soldier2 The leader is a commander3 The leader is an instructor4 The leader is a personal manager5 The leader is a councilor6 The leader is a custodian of his mens welfare

OBJECTIVES OF A LEADER

1 MORALE - the mental and emotional state of an individual 2 DISCIPLINE - the prompt and willing obedience to orders Complying to regulations and initiating appropriate action even in theabsence of orders 3 PROFICIENCY - the technical tactical and physical ability of an individual to perform their mission 4 ESPRIT DE CORPS - More than the aggregate personality it is how the individuals feel about their unit Jealous of enthusiasticfor pride in and devotion for

MAP READING

MAP - is a graphical representation of the earths surface drawn to a scale on aplane When you look at the map you are actually looking at a picture ofthe ground from a high spot in the air MAP COLOR - different colors are used on the printing of the maps to assist the use understanding it A GREEN - represents all types of vegetables B BLUE - signifies bodies of water such as rivers lakes swamps and streams C RED - indicates first class roads and prominent locations such as theProvincial or Municipal Capitals May be used to stress the significance ofimportant map locations

D BROWN - depicts contour lines which are representation of the relatives elevation and relief of the terrain

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

ENGLISH FILIPINO

In place HalthelliphelliphellipSa lunan Hinto

File from thehelliphelliphellipSunuranmulasaRightLeft kanankaliwa

Guide LefthelliphelliphelliphellipGabayasaKaliwaCenterRight GitnaKanan

Stand FasthelliphelliphelliphellipTatag manatiliWalangkikilos

Left oliquehelliphelliphelliphellipHiligkaliwaMarch KAD

Two Arms LengthhellipIbayongDalawangExtended to the Left Pakaliwa KAD

TroophelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTipon

One TwohelliphelliphelliphelliphellipIsa DalawaThree Four Tatlo Apat

Assemble to thehelliphelliphellipMagtiponsakananRight left march Kaliwa

MounthelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSakay

Close onhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipLumapitsaunangLeading Platoon pulutong

Gaiden on LeadinghellipGabaysaunangPlatoons on Line pulutongnghanay

PostshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSaLunan

Dismiss yourhelliphelliphellipTiwalaginanginyongCompany balangay

ENGLISH FILIPINO

Resume marchhelliphellipMagpatuloy KAD

Columns of twoshellipDalawangTatluhangThreesfours Apatangtudling

All present arehelliphelliphellipNaritopolahatAccounted for napagalaman

Right obliquehelliphelliphellipHilispakananMarch Kad

InspectionhelliphelliphelliphellipPagsisiyasat

DetailhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipNakatalaga

PatrolhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTaliba

Take intervalhelliphelliphelliphellipIbayongpatlang March KAD

Unsling equipmenthelliphellipIbabasagamit

Company MasshelliphelliphellipPulo-pulotongsaRightLeft March kanan

Garden on the LinehelliphellipMgagabaysahanay

Guide PosthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipMgagabaysalunan

Sir the BattalionhelliphelliphellipAngTalupadpo ayis informed handana

Persons to be decoratedhellipMgaparangalan atand all colors Center lahatngwatawatMarch pumagitna KAD

Form the shelter tentshellipMagsisayosngpagtatayongtolda

AT NORMAL INTERVAL

Dress righthelliphelliphelliphellipTuntonkananDress NA

Dress lefthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTuntonkaliwaDress NA

CoverhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPanakip

At Close IntervalhelliphellipMasinsinPagitanDress right Tunton callow NA

At Close IntervalhellipMasinsinPagitanDress left Tuntonkaliwa NA

At Close IntervalhellipMasinsinPagitanFall In Humanay

Close MarchhelliphelliphelliphellipLakadpasinsin KAD

Extended MarchhelliphellipLakadPadalang KAD

Column RighthelliphelliphellipLikoKananLeft March Kaliwa KAD

Column RighthelliphelliphellipLikoHulingKananLeft March (Half) Kaliwa KAD

Incline to thehelliphelliphelliphellipPagawingkananRightLeft Kaliwa KAD

Change StephelliphelliphelliphellipPalitHakbangMarch KAD

Left ShoulderhelliphelliphellipKaliwangBalikatArms Ta

Trail ArmshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipBitbit TA

Port armshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipAgap TA

Inspection ArmshelliphellipSiyasat TA

RightLefthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipKanangKaliwangFlank March Panig KAD

Count offhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSabayangbilang NA

Call offhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTuluyangbilang NA

Center facehelliphelliphelliphellipHumarapsaGitna RAP

Prepare forhelliphelliphelliphellipHumandasa

Inspection Pagsisiyasat

Open RankhelliphelliphelliphellipPabukangTaludtodMarch KAD

Close RankhelliphelliphelliphellipPasinsinTaludtodMarch KAD

Right TurnhelliphelliphelliphellipPihitsaKananMarch KAD

Pass In ReviewhelliphelliphellipPasa Masid

BackwardhelliphelliphelliphellipLakadPaurongMarch KAD

To the RearhelliphelliphelliphellipPabalikMarch KAD

Right shoulderhelliphelliphellipKanangbalikatArms TA

Order armshelliphelliphelliphellipBaba TA

Present ArmshelliphelliphelliphellipTangha TA

Ready EyeshelliphelliphellipHandaKananRightLeft Kaliwa Tingin

Ready FronthelliphelliphelliphellipHanda Harap

ENGLISH FILIPINO

Sir I present the commandhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Ihahandogkopoangpamunuan

Sir the Troop is ready forhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Handanapoangpangkatsa

Trooping for the linehelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip LibutinangHanay

To the LeftRight Marchhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip PakaliwaPakanan KAD

Column of the Platoon Leading Platoonhelliphelliphelliphellip TudlingngpulutongUnangpulutongby the LeftRight Flank March KaliwaKanangpanig KAD

Donrsquot anticipate the commandhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Huwagpangunahanangutos

Sir the Honod Guard is formedhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Handan a poangTanodPandangal

D The Salute ( Pagpugay )

1 Hand Salute - PugayKamay2 Ready Eyes Right - HandaTinginKanan3 Ready Front - Handa RAP

E Steps and Marching ( Hakbang at Lakad )

1 Count Cadence Count - BilangHakbang NA 2 Forward March - Pasulong KAD 3 Platoon Halt - Pulutong Hinto 4 Mark Time March - LakadPatakda KAD 5 Half Step March - Hating Hakbang KAD 6 Double Time March - TakbongHakbang KAD NA 7 Quick Time March - SiglangHakbang KADNA 8 Route March - LayangHakbang NA 9 In place Double Time March - Sa Lunan TakbongHakbang KADNA10 Right Step March - HakbangPakanan NAKAD11 Left Step March - HakbangPakaliwa NAKAD12 Backward March - LakadPaurong KAD13 To the Rear March - Pabalik NA14 Change Step March - PalitHakbang NA15 One Two Three Four - Isa Dalawa Tatlo Apat

2 SCHOOL OF SOLDIERS WITH ARMS ( PagsasanayngKawalna may sandata )

A Manual of Arms ( PagsanaysapaghawakngSandata )

1 Right Shoulder Arms - SaKanangBalikat TA2 Left Shoulder Arms - SaKaliwangBalikat TA3 Order Arms - Baba TA4 Present Arms - Tanghal TA5 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA6 Trail Arms - Bitbit TA7 Sling Arms - Sakbit Sandata8 Unsling Arms - AlisSakbit Sandata9 Fix Bayonet - IkabitBayoneta10 Unfix Bayonet - AlisBayoneta

B Manual of Gidon( ParaanngPagsasanaysaPaghawakngSagisag )

1 Order Guidon - IbabaSagisag2 Carry Guidon - BitbitSagisag3 Raise Guidon - ItaasSagisagC Manual of Arms for the Pistol ( PagsasanaysaPaghawakngPistola )

1 Raise Pistol - ItaasangPistola2 Withdraw Magazine - AlisinangPistola3 Open Chamber - BuksanangPistola4 Close Chamber - IsaraangPistola5 Insert Magazine - IsuksukangPistola6 Return Pistol - IsauliangPungluan

3 Close Order Drill ( MalapitangPagsasanay )

a At Close Interval Fall In - Sa MasinsinPagitan Humanayb Inspection Arms - Siyasat TAc Port Arms - Agap TAd Order Arms - Baba TA

A To Dismiss the Platoon (PagtiwalagngPulutong )

1 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA2 Port Arms - Agap TA3 Dismiss - Lumansag

B To Form the Platoons ( PaghahanayngPulutong )

1 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA2 Port Arms - Agap TA3 Order Arms - Baba TA4 Call Off - TuluyangBilang5 Report - Mag-ulat

C To Align the Squad ( PaghahanayngTilap )

1 Dress Right Dress - TuntonKanan NA2 Dress Left Dress -TuntonKaliwa NA3 At Close Interval Dress RightDress Left -MasinsinPagitan TuntonKananKaliwa NA4 Ready Fort - Handa RAP5 Cover - Tumakip

D To Change Interval while in Line ( PagpalitngpagitanSamantalangNakahanay )

1 Close March - LakadPasinsin KAD2 Extended March - LakadPadalang KAD3 Extended to the Left - IbayongLakadPakaliwa KADE Marching the Squad from a line ( PaglakadsaPangkatmulasaHanay ) 1 Right Face - HarapsaKanan RAP 2 Left Face - HarapsaKaliwa RAP 3 Forward March - Pasulong KAD 4 Column Right March - LikosaKanan KADNA 5 Column Left March - LikosaKaliwa KADNA 6 Column Half Right March - Liko Hating Kanan KADNA 7 Column Half Left March - Liko Hating Kaliwa KADNA 8 Incline to the Left - PagawingKanan 9 Incline to the Right - PagawingKaliwa 10 Right Left March - KaliwaKanangpanig NA

F Counting of Men ( PagbilangngKawal )

1 Count Off - SabayangBilang NA 2 Call Off - TuluyangBilang NA

G To Change Interval While in Column ( PagpalitngPagitanSamantalangNakatudling )

1 Close March - LakadPasinsin KAD 2 Extend March - LakadPadalang KAD

MILITARY DRILLS AND CEREMONIES

MILITARY CEREMONIES - The movement of the larger unit or troops in a prescribed manner from one place to another

1 REVIEW - A military ceremony held in honor of a visiting commander official or dignitary It is also a fittingaffair to present decorations and awards to deserving members or units of the command

A REVIEW IS NORMALLY CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING ELEMENTSa Formation of troopsb Presentation of troopsc Inspection of troopsd Presentation of awards and decorations

2 PARADE - A more formal ceremony than a review In this ceremony the appearance and movement of thetroops in the formation are the primary consideration The preparation and organization of troops forparades are similar to those of a review The line on which the troops are to be formed and the route ofmarch of the participating units are marked or designated The distance between the troops and thecommander for the parade formation is greater than that of a reviewTWO DISTINCT TYPES OF PARADES1 Evening Parade2 Moonlight Parade

DRILL COMMANDS - An oral of a commander

TWO PARTS 1 PREPARATORY COMMAND - States the movement or formation to be carried out and mentally prepares theindividual for its execution It is a command which indicates the movement

2 COMMAND OF EXECUTION - Tells when the movement is to be carried out It is a command which indicates when amovement is to be executed

EXAMPLE FORWARD MARCHForwardPreparatory Command MarchCommand of Execution

PREPARATORY COMMAND AND COMMAND OF EXECUTION

1 Fall in Fall out - Humanay Tumiwalag

2 Rest - Pahinga3 As you were - Manumbalik4 At ease - TindigPaluwag5 Change step - PalikHakbang

SUPPLEMENTARY COMMAND - The subordinate commander gives a supplementary command He turns his head towards themajority of his elements and gives command over his shoulder He does not face about

MASS COMMAND - May be used to develop confidence and enthusiasm All of the members of the unit being trained speak in unison and execute them

THINGS TO OBSERVE IN GIVING COMMANDS

Inflection - The rise and fall of pitch and the tone changes of the voice

Cadence In Command - The uniform and rhythmic flow of words

Snap - The extra quality in command that demands immediate responseREMEMBER

1 Correct commands have a tone cadence and snap that demands willingness correct and immediateresponse 2 The loudness of the command is adjusted to the number of men in the unit 3 The best posture for giving command is at the position of attention 4 The most desirable pitch when beginning a preparatory command is near the level of your natural speaking voice

MILITARY COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

MILITARY COURTESY - Is the expression or manifestation of consideration for others It is a virtue that is expected of all individuals from all walks of life In the Armed Forces courtesy is a great requirement because it is thebasic upon which military discipline stands With courtesy and respect among members of the organizationwould lose its orderliness and later disintegrate Furthermore courtesy promotes good relationship closer coordination and teamwork among members of the organization It makes theorganization dignified and insures good relations with the public

SALUTES- Is the most important form of military courtesy It is executed by raising the right man smartlyUntil the tip of the forefinger touches the eyebrow or the front brim of the head gear when coveredForefingers are extended and joined palm facing the left forearm inclined at an angle of about 45 degrees

and the right upper arm horizontal to the ground A person saluting looks at the person beingsaluted When the salute is returned he drops the right hand smartly to the side

RULES IN RENDERING HAND SALUTEa The salute is required on and off military installations during outside office hoursb Persons entitled to the saluted 1 All commissioned officers of the AFP both male and female 2 Commissioned officers of friendly nations when they are recognized as such 3 Officers of the Coast and Geodetic Survey and the Public Health Service when they are serving with the AFP 4 All civilian who are entitled by custom to salutec The salute is rendered at a distance of about 6 paces from the person saluted of at the recognizable distances about 30 pacesd The salute must be rendered to those entitled to it It is not rendered when running but at halt or walk Never salute with a cigarette cigar or pipe in the mouth The salute should not be executed in a haphazardway or perfunctory manner Salutes are exchange whether individuals are cover or uncoverede The salute is rendered at once if the senior remains in the immediate vicinity and no conversation takesplace the junior again salutes the senior when they are path from each otherf In making reports the person reporting salutes first regardless of rank An example of this case is whenthe unit commander is reporting to the adjutant during ceremoniesg) Whom not to salute

1 Standing to a horse or leading a horse2 While at work In case the officer calls the soldier stops working approaches and salutes him

and again when they are part to each other3 Indoors except when reporting to an officer or when the soldier is on duty sentry or guard4 When carrying articles with both hands or being so occupied as to make saluting practical5 When riding in a fast moving vehicle and the other is dismounted the salute is not rendered

Exception are when the vehicle is clearly marked to indicate a General Officer and when saluting is a part of the ceremony

6 When meeting a prisoner of war Soldier serving as military prisoner are not entitled to salute7 In case of doubt due to absence of specific instruction the salute is rendered

The term ldquooutdoorrdquo is constructed to include such buildings as drill halls gymnasiums and other roofed enclosures used for drill or exercise of troops Theaters covered walks and other shelters open on the side are also considered as outdoor

ldquoIndoorsrdquo include offices hallways kitchen orderly rooms recreation halls washroom and quarters

ldquoUnder armsrdquo means carrying arms having them attached to the person by sling holster or other means In the absence of arms the wearing of cartridge bells pistol holsters and automatic rifle belts also mean ldquounder armsrdquo

TYPES OF SALUTES

a Hand saluteb The Rifle Salute at Order Armsc The Rifle Salute at Trail Armsd The Rifle Salute at Present Armse The Rifle Salute at Shoulder Arms (Right Shoulder)f The Rifle Salute at Left Shoulder Armsg The Gun Saluteh Eyes Right by men in ranks when Pass in Review

REPORTING TO AN OFFICER

The salute is rendered by a junior when reporting to a senior He also salutes before leaving

a REPORTING INDOORS WITHOUT ARMS

A soldier removes his headgear knocks at the door of the office of the officer and enters when told to do so Upon entering he halts at about two paces from the officer and salutes and says Sir Cadet Airman Dela Cruz reporting to the squadron commander Sir The salute will be retained until he completes his report and the officer had returned his salute execute about face and leaves the office

b REPORTING INDOORS UNDER ARMS

The procedure for reporting is the same as discussed above except that the soldier remain covered If carrying a rifle the soldier carries it and salute at trail arms Otherwise the hand salute is given

c REPORTING OUTDOORS

The procedure for reporting to an officer the head gear is not removed Rifles should be carried at trail arms or at the right shoulder The hand salute or rifle salute is given as the case may be

d REPORTING FOR PAY

The soldier reporting for pay answers ldquoHererdquo when his name is called approaches and salutes the officer He picks up and count his money and leaves without saluting The officer does not return his salute

OTHER COURTESY TO INDIVIDUALS

a) When an officer enters the room or tent officersrsquo junior to him and enlisted men present with uncover (if unarmed and stand at attention until the officer directs otherwise or leaves the room) When more than one individual are present the first one who perceive the officer will command ldquoAttentionrdquo loud enough to be heard by everybody present

b) When an officer enters a room or tent used as an office working shop or recreation room those at work or at play are not required to come to attention unless addressed by the officer A transaction of routine business between individuals at work

c) When an officer enters an enlisted menus hall the group is called to ldquoAt Easerdquo by the person noticing him first Men remain seated at ease and continue eating unless the officer directs otherwise A soldiers addresses stop eating and sits at attention until the conversation has ended

d) When accompanying a senior a junior walks or ride on his left except when accompanying senior during inspection

e) When entering a car or a small boat the senior goes in first and others follow in the order of rank In getting off he junior goes out first and others follow in the inverse order of rank

HONORS TO THE NATIONAL ANTHEM OR TO THE COLORS

I OUTDOOR

- Wheneverwherever the National Anthem or the colors is played military personnel not in the formation must observe the following

1 At the first note of the music stand at attention and render the prescribed salute except atthe escort of the color or at retreat when they will face toward the color or flag and salute The salute is retained until the last note of the music

2 The mounted on animals will halt and render the salute mounted Individuals loadinganimals or standing to a horse will stand at attention having the salute

3 Vehicles in motion will be brought to a halt Persons riding on a passenger car or amotorcycle will dismount and salute as described above Occupants of combat vehicles such a tanks half trucks scout cars and armored cars will remain in their vehicles but stand at attention and salute

4 The above respect to the National Color is rendered to the National Anthem or colors offriendly nations

II INDOORS

- When the national anthem is played officer and men will stand at attention and face the music or the flag but do not salute

UNCOVERING- Officer and enlisted men under arms uncover when

a) Seated as a member of or in attendance at a court or board Sentinels guarding prisoners do not uncover

b) Entering places of divine worship

c) Indoors when not in duty

d) In attendance at an official reception

DISPLAY AND SALUTE TO THE FLAG

a The Philippine flag represents our nation and should always be given a place of runner

b The National Flag is never dipped for salute nor is it permitted to touch the ground It is not used as a costume dress or a drapery No lettering or object should be placed on it

c The flag is played in the following manners1 When hoisted at a flag pole it should be hoisted fully at the top of the pole blue part

up or above During mornings the flag is hoisted to the top of the pole first then hauled down until the flag is about midway of the length of the pole

2 When the national flag is displayed with another flag whether they are standing sideby side or with their staff crossed the National Flag is at the right side blue part up

3 When placed in the vertical manner the triangle is up the blue color at the right4 When displayed in the horizontal position the triangle is at the right side with the blue

part up5 When displayed over the casket the triangle is in the direction of the head of the cadaver with

the blue part on the right side

During the ceremonies wherein the holstering or lowering of the flag is done or when it passes by during parades or reviews all persons present except those detailed in holstering lowering and carrying the flag should face it at attention and salute while those in uniform remove their headdress with their right hand and place them over their left breast Women should salute by placing their right hand on their left breastMILITARY DISCIPLINE

Military discipline is the mental attitude and state of training which renders obedience and proper conduct instinctive under all conditions It is founded upon respect for loyalty to properly constituted authority While it is primarily developed by military drills every feature in military life has its effect upon military discipline It is generally indicated in an individual or unit by smartness of appearance and action cleanliness of dress equipment or quarters respect for senior and by the prompt and cheerful obedience by the subordinates of both the latter and spirit of the legal orders

RELATION OF COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

The relation of military discipline to courtesy is clearly explained by the fact that discipline is founded upon by respect and loyalty to superiors and lawfully constituted authorities In other words discipline originates and develops mutual respect and goodwill among members of an organization Without courtesy and respect among members of an organization discipline disappears there will be no peace and order in the organization hence it will disintegrate

IMPORTANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Mass discipline and morale are essential factors for securing cohesive action and for ensuring that singleness or purpose which alone can triumph over the most difficult conditions of war The successful leader will teach his men to recognize and face fear because fear is the enemy of discipline and morale Fear unchecked will lead to panic and a unit that is panicky is no longer a disciplined one but a mob There is no same person who is without fear but with good discipline and morale all will face danger if not willingly at least resignedly because of their inborn sentiment of duty or courage of loyalty and because of their sense of pride in their country in their unit and in themselves in other words because of their esprit de corps

The need for discipline is recognized in many places outside the Armed Forces It reaches at highest form in teams wherein individual desires are subordinated to the interests of the entire team The Armed Forces are more in need of discipline for several reasons First the task of making war is not doing it because we as individuals have to do it in the interest of our country Because of that we cannot be allowed as individual to decide which part of the job each of us will do or how each part to be done Second the organization must be prepared for situations wherein leaders may be lost Personal loyalty for the commandment is not enough If a leader is killed his men must accept orders from his successor immediately and without question to carry on the battle Finally the tremendous size of all Armed Forces demands that there be uniform ways of doing things Discipline subordinates personal and self considerations to the interest of the group

MAINTENANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Discipline is installed in men through instructions pride and traditions and regulations You will develop appreciation of the other factors which build discipline as time passes One must know and understand the different laws and regulations immediately

Discipline is maintained in much the same manner as it is attained The article of war punishes military individualsrsquo fairness and justice high moral pride and responsibility contribute to maintain discipline as to developing it

CHAPTER IVARMED FORCES OF THE PHILIPPINESrsquo HISTORY

Brief History of the AFPCommonwealth Act no 1 otherwise known as the National Defense Act was approved on 21

December 1935 which gave the basic organization of the AFP General Douglas McArthur served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon Major General Dwight D Eisenhower and Major General James Ord members of the McArthurrsquos Staff helped in the planting of the Philippine Military Establishment as well as organizing it

As President Quezon issued Executive Order no 11 on January 1936 which formally established the Army of the Philippines he recalled Colonel Jose Delos Reyes of the Philippine Constabulary to active duty and later promoted him to Brigadier General and designated him as Acting Chief of Staff of the Army Brigadier General Basilio J Valdez and Colonel Guillermo B Francisco were named 1 st and 2nd Asst Chief of Staff respectively

In the same order the Philippine Constabulary became the nucleus of the regular forces of the Philippine Army Filipino citizens were required to go training under the National Defense Act since 1936 that would compose reserve force By the end of the ten year Commonwealth period in 1946 there would have been a trained Philippine Army Reserve pool of 400000 officers and men including the graduates of the ROTC Basic and Advance Course in accredited colleges and universities

When the Philippine Constabulary became part of the Philippine Army the PC Air Corps which was activated on 2 January 1955 was re designated Philippine Air Force on 3 July 1947

On February 1939 an Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was organized as a unit of the Philippine Army Initially equipped with three Q-boats (torpedo boats) and a handful of officers and men hurriedly trained in the rudiments of Sea-Warfare the OSP squadron provided coastal support to the beleaguered Filipino-American forces in the battles of Bataan and Corregidor In October 1947 the OSP was renamed Philippine Naval Patrol and on 5 January 1951 it became the Philippine Navy The OSP was often referred to as Mosquito Fleet

When President Franklin D Roosevelt of the USA declared the state of National Emergency on 26 July 1941 and ordered the induction of the Philippine Army units into the US Armed Forces in the Far East under the command of General Douglas Mc Arthur the Philippine Army had a reserve force of about 100000 officers and men at the time of the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked the Pearl Harbor Clark Field and other targets on 8 December 1941 The Philippine Army Reserve Force totaled around 200000 officers and men

The Philippine Army retained its own organization while serving with the USAFFE After the fall of Bataan on 9 April 1942 many officers and men of the Philippine Army continued resistance against the Japanese by forming guerilla forces all over the country These USAFFE guerilla forces along with other units organized by civilians in various parts of the country fought the Japanese Forces from 1942 to 1945 When the US Liberation Forces landed in Leyte on 20 October 1944 all the guerilla forces participated actively on the liberation on their respective sectors of operations

On October 1947 President Manual A Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 which organized all government agencies The Military establishment was not spared from its official designation as Army of the Philippines and it became the Armed Forces of the Philippines The ten pre-war military districts were deactivated but 4 Military Areas were also activated to enhance the efficiency of the Constabulary personnel all over the country

The post-war Philippine Army eventually got its forces fighting another battle ndash the battle against the armed elements of the Communist Party of the Philippines the HUKBALAHAP later renamed HMB For the anti0dissident campaign Army Sector Command and Battalion Combat Teams were formed During the Korean war the 10th 20th 11th 19th and 2nd BCTrsquos were sent as Philippine Expeditionary Force as the member of the United Nations PEFTOK served in Korea from 1950-1955 On 25 December 1950 President Quirino issued Executive Order No 389 renaming headquarters AFP to General Headquarters AFP and activating the 4 major services The Philippine Army Philippine Constabulary Philippine Air Force and Philippine Navy

From the time the Philippines joined the Southeast Asia Treaty Organization (SEATO) in September 1954 the AFP cooperated actively with the other member nations in the enhancing of military preparedness in the area

As a member of the UN the Philippines also sent a Philippine Air Force Contingent of 77 officers and men on a pacification campaign to the Congo Republic on 11 February 1963

In 1966 the Philippine Civic Action Group (PHICAG) was activated to implement the provisions of RA 4644 Composed of engineers medical and rural community development teams and security personnel the PHILCAG was sent to the Republic of South Vietnam and engaged in socio-economic projects mutually agreed upon by the governments of the Republic of the Philippines and Republic of South Vietnam

The AFP has shown an increasing awareness of its arrival in the country and its vital role in the political and economic development of the country by engaging are actively in civic action programs

Pursuant to the Socio-economic Military Program under RA 2056 the Chief of Staff AFP ordered the assignment of military personnel for public works construction food production land settlement and rural development Several civic centers of the AFP

To give greater impetus on the civic action the 51st Engineer Brigade consisting of 10 Engineer Construction Battalion was activated on 10 March 1962 This unit had constructed several much needed highways roads and bridges in various parts of the country The 52nd Engineer Brigade which was organized on 1 July 1969 also performed similar functions to holster the national program for social and economical developments

Today the AFP is employing all its resources in assisting the socio-economic development programs of the government without prejudice to its primary missions of improving and maintaining the effectiveness of the countryrsquos defense posture

SIGNIFICANT FACTS TO REMEMBER

MACTAN ndash place where the first revolt against Spain took place on April 26 1951 The firstrebellion Spain flared up in Bohol and Leyte

ANDRES MALONG ndash led the first major revolt in Luzon in 1660 He proclaimed himself as aKing of PangasinanLAPU ndash LAPU ndash was the first Filipino hero

MIGUEL VICOS ndash the Spanish Meztiso who assassinated Diego Silang on May 28 1863

RED WITH A FIGURE OF A SUN ndash color of the first flag of the Philippines in 1897

ANDRES BONIFACIO ndash was the founder of the Revolutionary Society called Katipunan

GEN GREGORIO DEL PILAR ndash led the Filipino forces in the Battle of Tirad Pass

AUGUST 29 1896 ndash the date designated as the start of the revolution which was also known as

Cry of BalintawakDECEMBER 14 1897 ndashdate when the Treaty of Paris and Fact of Biak-na-bato was signed

FACT OF BIAK-NA-BATO ndash an agreement between the Filipino and the Spanish authoritieson December 14 1897 to stop all hostilities

MARCELA AGONCILLO ndash designed and made the first flag of the first Philippine Republic

JULIAN FELIPE ndash was the composer of the Philippine National AnthemEMILIO AGUINALDO ndash was the first president of the Philippines

BALANAN ISABELA ndash the place where Gen Emilio Aguinaldo was captured In 1922 the US War Dept authorized the establishment of the Dept of Military Science andTactics under the supervision of the US Army This was established in theUniversity of the Philippines

MANUEL LUIS QUEZON ndash the first president of the Philippine Commonwealth

COMMONWEALTH ACT NO1 ndash is otherwise known as the National Defense Act issued by President Quezon and approved on December 21 1935 and gave the basicorganization of the AFP

GENERAL DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon during the Commonwealth period that helped in the planning andorganization of the Philippine Military EstablishmentGENDOUGLAS MCARTHURrsquoS STAFF

1 MAJ GEN DWIGHT D EISENHOWER2 MAJ GEN JAMES ORD

JANUARY 11 1936 ndash the date President Manuel L Quezon issued Executive Order No 11 onthe establishment of the PA

BRIG GEN BASILIO J VALDEZ ndash first assistant Chief of staff

BRIG GEN JOSE DELOS REYES ndash designated as the first Chief of Staff of the PhilippineArmy

COL GUILLERMO B FRANCISCO ndash 2nd assistant Chief of Staff The PHILLIPINE CONSTABULARY became the nucleus of the Philippine Army and the Philippine Constabulary Air Corps (PCA) was activated on January 2 1937

FEBRUARY 9 1939 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was activated and organized as a unit of thePhilippine Army The Off-Shore Patrol was equipped with Q-Boats (Torpedo Boat)and referred to as the ldquoMosquito Fleetrdquo

PRESIDENT FRANKLIN DELANO ROOSEVELT ndash President of the USA who set July 26 1941 as the date for the declaration of State of National Emergency and at the sametime the induction of the Philippine Army to United States Armed Forces to the Far East (USAFFE) with a total force of 160000 officers and men

GEN DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash was designated as the USAFFE COMMANDER

DECEMBER 8 1941 ndash the date the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked Pearl Harbor Clark Fieldand other targets

APRIL 9 1942 ndash fall of Bataan

MAY 6 1942 ndash fall of Corregidor

MAJOR FERDINAND EDRALIN MARCOS ndash was the most decorated soldier during the World War II and was a recipient of 27 medals

OCTOBER 20 1944 ndash the date the US Liberation Forces landed in Red Beach in Palo Leyte

JULY 3 1947 ndash the date the PC Air Corps was re-designated as the Philippine Air Force

OCTOBER 1947 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol was renamed Phil Naval Patrol ndash the date President Manuel Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 remainingthe Army of the Philippines as Armed Forces of the Philippines andactivating the 4 military areas

ARAW NG KAGITINGAN ndash a day set to commemorate the Fall of Bataan Fall of Corregidorand Fall of Bessang Pass Based on the historical records the independenceof the Republic of the Philippines was on June 12 1898

JULY 4 1946 ndash declaration of the Independence by the USA celebrated today as PhilippineAmerican Friendship Day

JULY 1950 ndash the Philippine Army was separated from the Gen Headquarters Philippine Army

DECEMBER 23 1950 ndash President ElpidioQuirino issued Executive Order No 389 renamingthe Headquarters AFP to Gen Headquarters AFP (GHQ AFP)

JANUARY 5 1951 ndash the Phil Naval Patrol was renamed the Philippine Naval of thePHILIPPINE NAVY

1959 ndash 1955 ndash the Battalion Combat Teams were sent to Korea to comply with the commitmentsof the Philippines as member of the UN The BCT was known as the PHILIPPINE EXPEDITIONARY FORCE TO KOREA (PEFTOK)

SEPTEMBER 1954 ndash The Philippines joined the Southeast Asian Treaty Org (SEATO)

APRIL 11 1963 ndash the PAF contingent of 77 officers and men were sent to Congo Republic of South VietnamPHIL CIVIC ACTION GROUP (PHILCAG) ndash the group of engineers medical and ruralcommunity development team and security personnel were sent by thePhilippines to the representative of South Vietnam

FEBRUARY 22-25 1986 ndash the bloodless peoples revolution which deposed Ferdinand Marcosfrom the presidency and as Commander in elected President of thePhilippines commonly referred to as the EDSA Revolution

ACRONYMSBCT ndash Battalion Combat TeamGHQ ndash General HeadquartersHMB ndash HukbongMapagpalayang Bayan (HUKBALAHAP)PHILCAG-V ndash Philippine Civic Action Group to VietnamSEATO ndash Southeast Asian Treaty OrganizationOSP ndash Off-Shore PatrolPEFTOK ndash Philippine Expeditionary Force to Korea

ENLISTED PERSONNELrsquoS RANKS

MarinesArmy Navy Constabulary Air Force

C ndash CadetCadette M- MidshipmanMidshipwoman

CHAPTER V

MILITARY LEADERSHIP AND COMMAND

A Leadership ndash is the art of influencing and directing men to an assigned goal is such a way toobtain their obedience respect and loyal cooperation Leadership can beexercised by anyone at anytime respective of the frame work of the command

Command ndash is the authority which an individual in the military service lawfully exercisedover subordinates by virtue of his rank and assignment Command andleadership are inseparable whether the function of the command is complex orsimple the commander should always be the controlling head

B TWO TYPES OF LEADER

1 Authoritarian ndash a leader who leads his men by means of rank and position

2 Persuasive ndash a leader who leads his men by always setting examples

C BASIC ELEMENTS OF LEADERSHIP

1 Character ndash to be a leader a person must be of good character Some indications arehonesty good manners industrious self-control and bravery

2 Intelligence ndash is the ability to grasp knowledge easily It includes native ability goodcommon sense and judgment

3 Alertness ndash is mental and physical watchfulness vigilance and observance to his planned and future activity

D LEADERSHIP RESPONSIBILITIES

1 Accomplishment of the assigned mission or task

2 Work for the welfare of his men

E LEADERSHIP TRAITS

1 Knowledge ndash professional knowledge of the job Understands the characteristics of his men2 Bearing ndash dignified appearance and behavior

3 Courage ndash physical and moral ability to act in spite of danger or hardship

4 Decisiveness ndash ability to decide promptly and correctly the proper time and to announce his decision clearly and briefly with authority

5 Dependability ndash performance of duty with or without supervision

6 Endurance ndash physical and mental strength to continue or complete a task

7 Enthusiasm ndash interest in his work or task at hand

8 Force ndash the ability to compel obedience

9 Humility ndash state of being reasonable and proud but not arrogant and boastful

10 Humor ndash ability to appreciate and narrate amusing incidents of everyday life

11 Initiative ndash ability to start or originate an idea or work even when others are absent

12 Judgment ndash power of mind to weight factors affecting a problem and to decide properly

13 Integrity ndash good moral character

14 Justice ndash impartiality in dealing with others giving credit when due and punishment when so demanded

15 Loyalty - sincerity and faithfulness to superiors for the good of the unit

16 Sympathy ndash mutual feelings to others

17 Tact ndash ability to deal with people without hurting their feelings

18 Unselfishness - avoidance of personal consideration that gives a disadvantage

to others

F PRINCIPLES IN LEADERSHIP

1 Know your job - must have thorough professional knowledge of his duties and responsibilities to

command and gain respect from his men

2Know yourself and seek self-improvement - a leader should analyze himself to determine his

good qualities and learn to recognize and correct his weakness

3 Know your men and look after their welfare - understand each of your men personally

psychologically in order to effectively lead them

4 Keep your men informed - keep your men knowledgeable background in all aspects its

organization and mission in order to function effectively

5 Set an example -set a good example as a model in loyalty in superiors and subordinates good

bearing and attitudes pride and faithfulness to the organization

6 Insure the task is understood supervised and accomplished - a leader should give a clear and

concise order that can be understood He supervises his men to accomplish the

assigned mission

7 Train your men as a team - teamwork is a must within and among units from the

smallest to the largest Each men should understand that he has a job to perform

and must cooperate with others in achieving the common objective

8 Make sound and timely decisions - the ability to make raid estimate of the situation Arrive at the

sound decision and announce his decision in the correct form of the proper is

essential to a leader For any situation that may arise the leader should be able to

act logically

9 Develop a sense of responsibility among your subordinates - the leader should train his

subordinates to act in the absence of orders when the situation so demands He

develops responsibility among his subordinates byproper delegation of his

authority and holding them responsible for theaccomplishment of their mission

10 Employ your commands in accordance with its capability - the leader must have thorough knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of his command He must assign objectives that is responsible to be attained However when the situation so demands then men must be forced to action beyond their normal endurance so as to avoid a harder or more costly consequence on their part

11 See responsibility and take responsibility for your action - learn the seniors job for youmay assume his position later on Take advantage of the responsibility delegated toyou and do not back out in case of failure

ROLES OF A LEADER

1 The leader is a model soldier2 The leader is a commander3 The leader is an instructor4 The leader is a personal manager5 The leader is a councilor6 The leader is a custodian of his mens welfare

OBJECTIVES OF A LEADER

1 MORALE - the mental and emotional state of an individual 2 DISCIPLINE - the prompt and willing obedience to orders Complying to regulations and initiating appropriate action even in theabsence of orders 3 PROFICIENCY - the technical tactical and physical ability of an individual to perform their mission 4 ESPRIT DE CORPS - More than the aggregate personality it is how the individuals feel about their unit Jealous of enthusiasticfor pride in and devotion for

MAP READING

MAP - is a graphical representation of the earths surface drawn to a scale on aplane When you look at the map you are actually looking at a picture ofthe ground from a high spot in the air MAP COLOR - different colors are used on the printing of the maps to assist the use understanding it A GREEN - represents all types of vegetables B BLUE - signifies bodies of water such as rivers lakes swamps and streams C RED - indicates first class roads and prominent locations such as theProvincial or Municipal Capitals May be used to stress the significance ofimportant map locations

D BROWN - depicts contour lines which are representation of the relatives elevation and relief of the terrain

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

AT NORMAL INTERVAL

Dress righthelliphelliphelliphellipTuntonkananDress NA

Dress lefthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTuntonkaliwaDress NA

CoverhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellipPanakip

At Close IntervalhelliphellipMasinsinPagitanDress right Tunton callow NA

At Close IntervalhellipMasinsinPagitanDress left Tuntonkaliwa NA

At Close IntervalhellipMasinsinPagitanFall In Humanay

Close MarchhelliphelliphelliphellipLakadpasinsin KAD

Extended MarchhelliphellipLakadPadalang KAD

Column RighthelliphelliphellipLikoKananLeft March Kaliwa KAD

Column RighthelliphelliphellipLikoHulingKananLeft March (Half) Kaliwa KAD

Incline to thehelliphelliphelliphellipPagawingkananRightLeft Kaliwa KAD

Change StephelliphelliphelliphellipPalitHakbangMarch KAD

Left ShoulderhelliphelliphellipKaliwangBalikatArms Ta

Trail ArmshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipBitbit TA

Port armshelliphelliphelliphelliphellipAgap TA

Inspection ArmshelliphellipSiyasat TA

RightLefthelliphelliphelliphelliphellipKanangKaliwangFlank March Panig KAD

Count offhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipSabayangbilang NA

Call offhelliphelliphelliphelliphellipTuluyangbilang NA

Center facehelliphelliphelliphellipHumarapsaGitna RAP

Prepare forhelliphelliphelliphellipHumandasa

Inspection Pagsisiyasat

Open RankhelliphelliphelliphellipPabukangTaludtodMarch KAD

Close RankhelliphelliphelliphellipPasinsinTaludtodMarch KAD

Right TurnhelliphelliphelliphellipPihitsaKananMarch KAD

Pass In ReviewhelliphelliphellipPasa Masid

BackwardhelliphelliphelliphellipLakadPaurongMarch KAD

To the RearhelliphelliphelliphellipPabalikMarch KAD

Right shoulderhelliphelliphellipKanangbalikatArms TA

Order armshelliphelliphelliphellipBaba TA

Present ArmshelliphelliphelliphellipTangha TA

Ready EyeshelliphelliphellipHandaKananRightLeft Kaliwa Tingin

Ready FronthelliphelliphelliphellipHanda Harap

ENGLISH FILIPINO

Sir I present the commandhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Ihahandogkopoangpamunuan

Sir the Troop is ready forhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Handanapoangpangkatsa

Trooping for the linehelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip LibutinangHanay

To the LeftRight Marchhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip PakaliwaPakanan KAD

Column of the Platoon Leading Platoonhelliphelliphelliphellip TudlingngpulutongUnangpulutongby the LeftRight Flank March KaliwaKanangpanig KAD

Donrsquot anticipate the commandhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Huwagpangunahanangutos

Sir the Honod Guard is formedhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Handan a poangTanodPandangal

D The Salute ( Pagpugay )

1 Hand Salute - PugayKamay2 Ready Eyes Right - HandaTinginKanan3 Ready Front - Handa RAP

E Steps and Marching ( Hakbang at Lakad )

1 Count Cadence Count - BilangHakbang NA 2 Forward March - Pasulong KAD 3 Platoon Halt - Pulutong Hinto 4 Mark Time March - LakadPatakda KAD 5 Half Step March - Hating Hakbang KAD 6 Double Time March - TakbongHakbang KAD NA 7 Quick Time March - SiglangHakbang KADNA 8 Route March - LayangHakbang NA 9 In place Double Time March - Sa Lunan TakbongHakbang KADNA10 Right Step March - HakbangPakanan NAKAD11 Left Step March - HakbangPakaliwa NAKAD12 Backward March - LakadPaurong KAD13 To the Rear March - Pabalik NA14 Change Step March - PalitHakbang NA15 One Two Three Four - Isa Dalawa Tatlo Apat

2 SCHOOL OF SOLDIERS WITH ARMS ( PagsasanayngKawalna may sandata )

A Manual of Arms ( PagsanaysapaghawakngSandata )

1 Right Shoulder Arms - SaKanangBalikat TA2 Left Shoulder Arms - SaKaliwangBalikat TA3 Order Arms - Baba TA4 Present Arms - Tanghal TA5 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA6 Trail Arms - Bitbit TA7 Sling Arms - Sakbit Sandata8 Unsling Arms - AlisSakbit Sandata9 Fix Bayonet - IkabitBayoneta10 Unfix Bayonet - AlisBayoneta

B Manual of Gidon( ParaanngPagsasanaysaPaghawakngSagisag )

1 Order Guidon - IbabaSagisag2 Carry Guidon - BitbitSagisag3 Raise Guidon - ItaasSagisagC Manual of Arms for the Pistol ( PagsasanaysaPaghawakngPistola )

1 Raise Pistol - ItaasangPistola2 Withdraw Magazine - AlisinangPistola3 Open Chamber - BuksanangPistola4 Close Chamber - IsaraangPistola5 Insert Magazine - IsuksukangPistola6 Return Pistol - IsauliangPungluan

3 Close Order Drill ( MalapitangPagsasanay )

a At Close Interval Fall In - Sa MasinsinPagitan Humanayb Inspection Arms - Siyasat TAc Port Arms - Agap TAd Order Arms - Baba TA

A To Dismiss the Platoon (PagtiwalagngPulutong )

1 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA2 Port Arms - Agap TA3 Dismiss - Lumansag

B To Form the Platoons ( PaghahanayngPulutong )

1 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA2 Port Arms - Agap TA3 Order Arms - Baba TA4 Call Off - TuluyangBilang5 Report - Mag-ulat

C To Align the Squad ( PaghahanayngTilap )

1 Dress Right Dress - TuntonKanan NA2 Dress Left Dress -TuntonKaliwa NA3 At Close Interval Dress RightDress Left -MasinsinPagitan TuntonKananKaliwa NA4 Ready Fort - Handa RAP5 Cover - Tumakip

D To Change Interval while in Line ( PagpalitngpagitanSamantalangNakahanay )

1 Close March - LakadPasinsin KAD2 Extended March - LakadPadalang KAD3 Extended to the Left - IbayongLakadPakaliwa KADE Marching the Squad from a line ( PaglakadsaPangkatmulasaHanay ) 1 Right Face - HarapsaKanan RAP 2 Left Face - HarapsaKaliwa RAP 3 Forward March - Pasulong KAD 4 Column Right March - LikosaKanan KADNA 5 Column Left March - LikosaKaliwa KADNA 6 Column Half Right March - Liko Hating Kanan KADNA 7 Column Half Left March - Liko Hating Kaliwa KADNA 8 Incline to the Left - PagawingKanan 9 Incline to the Right - PagawingKaliwa 10 Right Left March - KaliwaKanangpanig NA

F Counting of Men ( PagbilangngKawal )

1 Count Off - SabayangBilang NA 2 Call Off - TuluyangBilang NA

G To Change Interval While in Column ( PagpalitngPagitanSamantalangNakatudling )

1 Close March - LakadPasinsin KAD 2 Extend March - LakadPadalang KAD

MILITARY DRILLS AND CEREMONIES

MILITARY CEREMONIES - The movement of the larger unit or troops in a prescribed manner from one place to another

1 REVIEW - A military ceremony held in honor of a visiting commander official or dignitary It is also a fittingaffair to present decorations and awards to deserving members or units of the command

A REVIEW IS NORMALLY CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING ELEMENTSa Formation of troopsb Presentation of troopsc Inspection of troopsd Presentation of awards and decorations

2 PARADE - A more formal ceremony than a review In this ceremony the appearance and movement of thetroops in the formation are the primary consideration The preparation and organization of troops forparades are similar to those of a review The line on which the troops are to be formed and the route ofmarch of the participating units are marked or designated The distance between the troops and thecommander for the parade formation is greater than that of a reviewTWO DISTINCT TYPES OF PARADES1 Evening Parade2 Moonlight Parade

DRILL COMMANDS - An oral of a commander

TWO PARTS 1 PREPARATORY COMMAND - States the movement or formation to be carried out and mentally prepares theindividual for its execution It is a command which indicates the movement

2 COMMAND OF EXECUTION - Tells when the movement is to be carried out It is a command which indicates when amovement is to be executed

EXAMPLE FORWARD MARCHForwardPreparatory Command MarchCommand of Execution

PREPARATORY COMMAND AND COMMAND OF EXECUTION

1 Fall in Fall out - Humanay Tumiwalag

2 Rest - Pahinga3 As you were - Manumbalik4 At ease - TindigPaluwag5 Change step - PalikHakbang

SUPPLEMENTARY COMMAND - The subordinate commander gives a supplementary command He turns his head towards themajority of his elements and gives command over his shoulder He does not face about

MASS COMMAND - May be used to develop confidence and enthusiasm All of the members of the unit being trained speak in unison and execute them

THINGS TO OBSERVE IN GIVING COMMANDS

Inflection - The rise and fall of pitch and the tone changes of the voice

Cadence In Command - The uniform and rhythmic flow of words

Snap - The extra quality in command that demands immediate responseREMEMBER

1 Correct commands have a tone cadence and snap that demands willingness correct and immediateresponse 2 The loudness of the command is adjusted to the number of men in the unit 3 The best posture for giving command is at the position of attention 4 The most desirable pitch when beginning a preparatory command is near the level of your natural speaking voice

MILITARY COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

MILITARY COURTESY - Is the expression or manifestation of consideration for others It is a virtue that is expected of all individuals from all walks of life In the Armed Forces courtesy is a great requirement because it is thebasic upon which military discipline stands With courtesy and respect among members of the organizationwould lose its orderliness and later disintegrate Furthermore courtesy promotes good relationship closer coordination and teamwork among members of the organization It makes theorganization dignified and insures good relations with the public

SALUTES- Is the most important form of military courtesy It is executed by raising the right man smartlyUntil the tip of the forefinger touches the eyebrow or the front brim of the head gear when coveredForefingers are extended and joined palm facing the left forearm inclined at an angle of about 45 degrees

and the right upper arm horizontal to the ground A person saluting looks at the person beingsaluted When the salute is returned he drops the right hand smartly to the side

RULES IN RENDERING HAND SALUTEa The salute is required on and off military installations during outside office hoursb Persons entitled to the saluted 1 All commissioned officers of the AFP both male and female 2 Commissioned officers of friendly nations when they are recognized as such 3 Officers of the Coast and Geodetic Survey and the Public Health Service when they are serving with the AFP 4 All civilian who are entitled by custom to salutec The salute is rendered at a distance of about 6 paces from the person saluted of at the recognizable distances about 30 pacesd The salute must be rendered to those entitled to it It is not rendered when running but at halt or walk Never salute with a cigarette cigar or pipe in the mouth The salute should not be executed in a haphazardway or perfunctory manner Salutes are exchange whether individuals are cover or uncoverede The salute is rendered at once if the senior remains in the immediate vicinity and no conversation takesplace the junior again salutes the senior when they are path from each otherf In making reports the person reporting salutes first regardless of rank An example of this case is whenthe unit commander is reporting to the adjutant during ceremoniesg) Whom not to salute

1 Standing to a horse or leading a horse2 While at work In case the officer calls the soldier stops working approaches and salutes him

and again when they are part to each other3 Indoors except when reporting to an officer or when the soldier is on duty sentry or guard4 When carrying articles with both hands or being so occupied as to make saluting practical5 When riding in a fast moving vehicle and the other is dismounted the salute is not rendered

Exception are when the vehicle is clearly marked to indicate a General Officer and when saluting is a part of the ceremony

6 When meeting a prisoner of war Soldier serving as military prisoner are not entitled to salute7 In case of doubt due to absence of specific instruction the salute is rendered

The term ldquooutdoorrdquo is constructed to include such buildings as drill halls gymnasiums and other roofed enclosures used for drill or exercise of troops Theaters covered walks and other shelters open on the side are also considered as outdoor

ldquoIndoorsrdquo include offices hallways kitchen orderly rooms recreation halls washroom and quarters

ldquoUnder armsrdquo means carrying arms having them attached to the person by sling holster or other means In the absence of arms the wearing of cartridge bells pistol holsters and automatic rifle belts also mean ldquounder armsrdquo

TYPES OF SALUTES

a Hand saluteb The Rifle Salute at Order Armsc The Rifle Salute at Trail Armsd The Rifle Salute at Present Armse The Rifle Salute at Shoulder Arms (Right Shoulder)f The Rifle Salute at Left Shoulder Armsg The Gun Saluteh Eyes Right by men in ranks when Pass in Review

REPORTING TO AN OFFICER

The salute is rendered by a junior when reporting to a senior He also salutes before leaving

a REPORTING INDOORS WITHOUT ARMS

A soldier removes his headgear knocks at the door of the office of the officer and enters when told to do so Upon entering he halts at about two paces from the officer and salutes and says Sir Cadet Airman Dela Cruz reporting to the squadron commander Sir The salute will be retained until he completes his report and the officer had returned his salute execute about face and leaves the office

b REPORTING INDOORS UNDER ARMS

The procedure for reporting is the same as discussed above except that the soldier remain covered If carrying a rifle the soldier carries it and salute at trail arms Otherwise the hand salute is given

c REPORTING OUTDOORS

The procedure for reporting to an officer the head gear is not removed Rifles should be carried at trail arms or at the right shoulder The hand salute or rifle salute is given as the case may be

d REPORTING FOR PAY

The soldier reporting for pay answers ldquoHererdquo when his name is called approaches and salutes the officer He picks up and count his money and leaves without saluting The officer does not return his salute

OTHER COURTESY TO INDIVIDUALS

a) When an officer enters the room or tent officersrsquo junior to him and enlisted men present with uncover (if unarmed and stand at attention until the officer directs otherwise or leaves the room) When more than one individual are present the first one who perceive the officer will command ldquoAttentionrdquo loud enough to be heard by everybody present

b) When an officer enters a room or tent used as an office working shop or recreation room those at work or at play are not required to come to attention unless addressed by the officer A transaction of routine business between individuals at work

c) When an officer enters an enlisted menus hall the group is called to ldquoAt Easerdquo by the person noticing him first Men remain seated at ease and continue eating unless the officer directs otherwise A soldiers addresses stop eating and sits at attention until the conversation has ended

d) When accompanying a senior a junior walks or ride on his left except when accompanying senior during inspection

e) When entering a car or a small boat the senior goes in first and others follow in the order of rank In getting off he junior goes out first and others follow in the inverse order of rank

HONORS TO THE NATIONAL ANTHEM OR TO THE COLORS

I OUTDOOR

- Wheneverwherever the National Anthem or the colors is played military personnel not in the formation must observe the following

1 At the first note of the music stand at attention and render the prescribed salute except atthe escort of the color or at retreat when they will face toward the color or flag and salute The salute is retained until the last note of the music

2 The mounted on animals will halt and render the salute mounted Individuals loadinganimals or standing to a horse will stand at attention having the salute

3 Vehicles in motion will be brought to a halt Persons riding on a passenger car or amotorcycle will dismount and salute as described above Occupants of combat vehicles such a tanks half trucks scout cars and armored cars will remain in their vehicles but stand at attention and salute

4 The above respect to the National Color is rendered to the National Anthem or colors offriendly nations

II INDOORS

- When the national anthem is played officer and men will stand at attention and face the music or the flag but do not salute

UNCOVERING- Officer and enlisted men under arms uncover when

a) Seated as a member of or in attendance at a court or board Sentinels guarding prisoners do not uncover

b) Entering places of divine worship

c) Indoors when not in duty

d) In attendance at an official reception

DISPLAY AND SALUTE TO THE FLAG

a The Philippine flag represents our nation and should always be given a place of runner

b The National Flag is never dipped for salute nor is it permitted to touch the ground It is not used as a costume dress or a drapery No lettering or object should be placed on it

c The flag is played in the following manners1 When hoisted at a flag pole it should be hoisted fully at the top of the pole blue part

up or above During mornings the flag is hoisted to the top of the pole first then hauled down until the flag is about midway of the length of the pole

2 When the national flag is displayed with another flag whether they are standing sideby side or with their staff crossed the National Flag is at the right side blue part up

3 When placed in the vertical manner the triangle is up the blue color at the right4 When displayed in the horizontal position the triangle is at the right side with the blue

part up5 When displayed over the casket the triangle is in the direction of the head of the cadaver with

the blue part on the right side

During the ceremonies wherein the holstering or lowering of the flag is done or when it passes by during parades or reviews all persons present except those detailed in holstering lowering and carrying the flag should face it at attention and salute while those in uniform remove their headdress with their right hand and place them over their left breast Women should salute by placing their right hand on their left breastMILITARY DISCIPLINE

Military discipline is the mental attitude and state of training which renders obedience and proper conduct instinctive under all conditions It is founded upon respect for loyalty to properly constituted authority While it is primarily developed by military drills every feature in military life has its effect upon military discipline It is generally indicated in an individual or unit by smartness of appearance and action cleanliness of dress equipment or quarters respect for senior and by the prompt and cheerful obedience by the subordinates of both the latter and spirit of the legal orders

RELATION OF COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

The relation of military discipline to courtesy is clearly explained by the fact that discipline is founded upon by respect and loyalty to superiors and lawfully constituted authorities In other words discipline originates and develops mutual respect and goodwill among members of an organization Without courtesy and respect among members of an organization discipline disappears there will be no peace and order in the organization hence it will disintegrate

IMPORTANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Mass discipline and morale are essential factors for securing cohesive action and for ensuring that singleness or purpose which alone can triumph over the most difficult conditions of war The successful leader will teach his men to recognize and face fear because fear is the enemy of discipline and morale Fear unchecked will lead to panic and a unit that is panicky is no longer a disciplined one but a mob There is no same person who is without fear but with good discipline and morale all will face danger if not willingly at least resignedly because of their inborn sentiment of duty or courage of loyalty and because of their sense of pride in their country in their unit and in themselves in other words because of their esprit de corps

The need for discipline is recognized in many places outside the Armed Forces It reaches at highest form in teams wherein individual desires are subordinated to the interests of the entire team The Armed Forces are more in need of discipline for several reasons First the task of making war is not doing it because we as individuals have to do it in the interest of our country Because of that we cannot be allowed as individual to decide which part of the job each of us will do or how each part to be done Second the organization must be prepared for situations wherein leaders may be lost Personal loyalty for the commandment is not enough If a leader is killed his men must accept orders from his successor immediately and without question to carry on the battle Finally the tremendous size of all Armed Forces demands that there be uniform ways of doing things Discipline subordinates personal and self considerations to the interest of the group

MAINTENANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Discipline is installed in men through instructions pride and traditions and regulations You will develop appreciation of the other factors which build discipline as time passes One must know and understand the different laws and regulations immediately

Discipline is maintained in much the same manner as it is attained The article of war punishes military individualsrsquo fairness and justice high moral pride and responsibility contribute to maintain discipline as to developing it

CHAPTER IVARMED FORCES OF THE PHILIPPINESrsquo HISTORY

Brief History of the AFPCommonwealth Act no 1 otherwise known as the National Defense Act was approved on 21

December 1935 which gave the basic organization of the AFP General Douglas McArthur served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon Major General Dwight D Eisenhower and Major General James Ord members of the McArthurrsquos Staff helped in the planting of the Philippine Military Establishment as well as organizing it

As President Quezon issued Executive Order no 11 on January 1936 which formally established the Army of the Philippines he recalled Colonel Jose Delos Reyes of the Philippine Constabulary to active duty and later promoted him to Brigadier General and designated him as Acting Chief of Staff of the Army Brigadier General Basilio J Valdez and Colonel Guillermo B Francisco were named 1 st and 2nd Asst Chief of Staff respectively

In the same order the Philippine Constabulary became the nucleus of the regular forces of the Philippine Army Filipino citizens were required to go training under the National Defense Act since 1936 that would compose reserve force By the end of the ten year Commonwealth period in 1946 there would have been a trained Philippine Army Reserve pool of 400000 officers and men including the graduates of the ROTC Basic and Advance Course in accredited colleges and universities

When the Philippine Constabulary became part of the Philippine Army the PC Air Corps which was activated on 2 January 1955 was re designated Philippine Air Force on 3 July 1947

On February 1939 an Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was organized as a unit of the Philippine Army Initially equipped with three Q-boats (torpedo boats) and a handful of officers and men hurriedly trained in the rudiments of Sea-Warfare the OSP squadron provided coastal support to the beleaguered Filipino-American forces in the battles of Bataan and Corregidor In October 1947 the OSP was renamed Philippine Naval Patrol and on 5 January 1951 it became the Philippine Navy The OSP was often referred to as Mosquito Fleet

When President Franklin D Roosevelt of the USA declared the state of National Emergency on 26 July 1941 and ordered the induction of the Philippine Army units into the US Armed Forces in the Far East under the command of General Douglas Mc Arthur the Philippine Army had a reserve force of about 100000 officers and men at the time of the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked the Pearl Harbor Clark Field and other targets on 8 December 1941 The Philippine Army Reserve Force totaled around 200000 officers and men

The Philippine Army retained its own organization while serving with the USAFFE After the fall of Bataan on 9 April 1942 many officers and men of the Philippine Army continued resistance against the Japanese by forming guerilla forces all over the country These USAFFE guerilla forces along with other units organized by civilians in various parts of the country fought the Japanese Forces from 1942 to 1945 When the US Liberation Forces landed in Leyte on 20 October 1944 all the guerilla forces participated actively on the liberation on their respective sectors of operations

On October 1947 President Manual A Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 which organized all government agencies The Military establishment was not spared from its official designation as Army of the Philippines and it became the Armed Forces of the Philippines The ten pre-war military districts were deactivated but 4 Military Areas were also activated to enhance the efficiency of the Constabulary personnel all over the country

The post-war Philippine Army eventually got its forces fighting another battle ndash the battle against the armed elements of the Communist Party of the Philippines the HUKBALAHAP later renamed HMB For the anti0dissident campaign Army Sector Command and Battalion Combat Teams were formed During the Korean war the 10th 20th 11th 19th and 2nd BCTrsquos were sent as Philippine Expeditionary Force as the member of the United Nations PEFTOK served in Korea from 1950-1955 On 25 December 1950 President Quirino issued Executive Order No 389 renaming headquarters AFP to General Headquarters AFP and activating the 4 major services The Philippine Army Philippine Constabulary Philippine Air Force and Philippine Navy

From the time the Philippines joined the Southeast Asia Treaty Organization (SEATO) in September 1954 the AFP cooperated actively with the other member nations in the enhancing of military preparedness in the area

As a member of the UN the Philippines also sent a Philippine Air Force Contingent of 77 officers and men on a pacification campaign to the Congo Republic on 11 February 1963

In 1966 the Philippine Civic Action Group (PHICAG) was activated to implement the provisions of RA 4644 Composed of engineers medical and rural community development teams and security personnel the PHILCAG was sent to the Republic of South Vietnam and engaged in socio-economic projects mutually agreed upon by the governments of the Republic of the Philippines and Republic of South Vietnam

The AFP has shown an increasing awareness of its arrival in the country and its vital role in the political and economic development of the country by engaging are actively in civic action programs

Pursuant to the Socio-economic Military Program under RA 2056 the Chief of Staff AFP ordered the assignment of military personnel for public works construction food production land settlement and rural development Several civic centers of the AFP

To give greater impetus on the civic action the 51st Engineer Brigade consisting of 10 Engineer Construction Battalion was activated on 10 March 1962 This unit had constructed several much needed highways roads and bridges in various parts of the country The 52nd Engineer Brigade which was organized on 1 July 1969 also performed similar functions to holster the national program for social and economical developments

Today the AFP is employing all its resources in assisting the socio-economic development programs of the government without prejudice to its primary missions of improving and maintaining the effectiveness of the countryrsquos defense posture

SIGNIFICANT FACTS TO REMEMBER

MACTAN ndash place where the first revolt against Spain took place on April 26 1951 The firstrebellion Spain flared up in Bohol and Leyte

ANDRES MALONG ndash led the first major revolt in Luzon in 1660 He proclaimed himself as aKing of PangasinanLAPU ndash LAPU ndash was the first Filipino hero

MIGUEL VICOS ndash the Spanish Meztiso who assassinated Diego Silang on May 28 1863

RED WITH A FIGURE OF A SUN ndash color of the first flag of the Philippines in 1897

ANDRES BONIFACIO ndash was the founder of the Revolutionary Society called Katipunan

GEN GREGORIO DEL PILAR ndash led the Filipino forces in the Battle of Tirad Pass

AUGUST 29 1896 ndash the date designated as the start of the revolution which was also known as

Cry of BalintawakDECEMBER 14 1897 ndashdate when the Treaty of Paris and Fact of Biak-na-bato was signed

FACT OF BIAK-NA-BATO ndash an agreement between the Filipino and the Spanish authoritieson December 14 1897 to stop all hostilities

MARCELA AGONCILLO ndash designed and made the first flag of the first Philippine Republic

JULIAN FELIPE ndash was the composer of the Philippine National AnthemEMILIO AGUINALDO ndash was the first president of the Philippines

BALANAN ISABELA ndash the place where Gen Emilio Aguinaldo was captured In 1922 the US War Dept authorized the establishment of the Dept of Military Science andTactics under the supervision of the US Army This was established in theUniversity of the Philippines

MANUEL LUIS QUEZON ndash the first president of the Philippine Commonwealth

COMMONWEALTH ACT NO1 ndash is otherwise known as the National Defense Act issued by President Quezon and approved on December 21 1935 and gave the basicorganization of the AFP

GENERAL DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon during the Commonwealth period that helped in the planning andorganization of the Philippine Military EstablishmentGENDOUGLAS MCARTHURrsquoS STAFF

1 MAJ GEN DWIGHT D EISENHOWER2 MAJ GEN JAMES ORD

JANUARY 11 1936 ndash the date President Manuel L Quezon issued Executive Order No 11 onthe establishment of the PA

BRIG GEN BASILIO J VALDEZ ndash first assistant Chief of staff

BRIG GEN JOSE DELOS REYES ndash designated as the first Chief of Staff of the PhilippineArmy

COL GUILLERMO B FRANCISCO ndash 2nd assistant Chief of Staff The PHILLIPINE CONSTABULARY became the nucleus of the Philippine Army and the Philippine Constabulary Air Corps (PCA) was activated on January 2 1937

FEBRUARY 9 1939 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was activated and organized as a unit of thePhilippine Army The Off-Shore Patrol was equipped with Q-Boats (Torpedo Boat)and referred to as the ldquoMosquito Fleetrdquo

PRESIDENT FRANKLIN DELANO ROOSEVELT ndash President of the USA who set July 26 1941 as the date for the declaration of State of National Emergency and at the sametime the induction of the Philippine Army to United States Armed Forces to the Far East (USAFFE) with a total force of 160000 officers and men

GEN DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash was designated as the USAFFE COMMANDER

DECEMBER 8 1941 ndash the date the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked Pearl Harbor Clark Fieldand other targets

APRIL 9 1942 ndash fall of Bataan

MAY 6 1942 ndash fall of Corregidor

MAJOR FERDINAND EDRALIN MARCOS ndash was the most decorated soldier during the World War II and was a recipient of 27 medals

OCTOBER 20 1944 ndash the date the US Liberation Forces landed in Red Beach in Palo Leyte

JULY 3 1947 ndash the date the PC Air Corps was re-designated as the Philippine Air Force

OCTOBER 1947 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol was renamed Phil Naval Patrol ndash the date President Manuel Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 remainingthe Army of the Philippines as Armed Forces of the Philippines andactivating the 4 military areas

ARAW NG KAGITINGAN ndash a day set to commemorate the Fall of Bataan Fall of Corregidorand Fall of Bessang Pass Based on the historical records the independenceof the Republic of the Philippines was on June 12 1898

JULY 4 1946 ndash declaration of the Independence by the USA celebrated today as PhilippineAmerican Friendship Day

JULY 1950 ndash the Philippine Army was separated from the Gen Headquarters Philippine Army

DECEMBER 23 1950 ndash President ElpidioQuirino issued Executive Order No 389 renamingthe Headquarters AFP to Gen Headquarters AFP (GHQ AFP)

JANUARY 5 1951 ndash the Phil Naval Patrol was renamed the Philippine Naval of thePHILIPPINE NAVY

1959 ndash 1955 ndash the Battalion Combat Teams were sent to Korea to comply with the commitmentsof the Philippines as member of the UN The BCT was known as the PHILIPPINE EXPEDITIONARY FORCE TO KOREA (PEFTOK)

SEPTEMBER 1954 ndash The Philippines joined the Southeast Asian Treaty Org (SEATO)

APRIL 11 1963 ndash the PAF contingent of 77 officers and men were sent to Congo Republic of South VietnamPHIL CIVIC ACTION GROUP (PHILCAG) ndash the group of engineers medical and ruralcommunity development team and security personnel were sent by thePhilippines to the representative of South Vietnam

FEBRUARY 22-25 1986 ndash the bloodless peoples revolution which deposed Ferdinand Marcosfrom the presidency and as Commander in elected President of thePhilippines commonly referred to as the EDSA Revolution

ACRONYMSBCT ndash Battalion Combat TeamGHQ ndash General HeadquartersHMB ndash HukbongMapagpalayang Bayan (HUKBALAHAP)PHILCAG-V ndash Philippine Civic Action Group to VietnamSEATO ndash Southeast Asian Treaty OrganizationOSP ndash Off-Shore PatrolPEFTOK ndash Philippine Expeditionary Force to Korea

ENLISTED PERSONNELrsquoS RANKS

MarinesArmy Navy Constabulary Air Force

C ndash CadetCadette M- MidshipmanMidshipwoman

CHAPTER V

MILITARY LEADERSHIP AND COMMAND

A Leadership ndash is the art of influencing and directing men to an assigned goal is such a way toobtain their obedience respect and loyal cooperation Leadership can beexercised by anyone at anytime respective of the frame work of the command

Command ndash is the authority which an individual in the military service lawfully exercisedover subordinates by virtue of his rank and assignment Command andleadership are inseparable whether the function of the command is complex orsimple the commander should always be the controlling head

B TWO TYPES OF LEADER

1 Authoritarian ndash a leader who leads his men by means of rank and position

2 Persuasive ndash a leader who leads his men by always setting examples

C BASIC ELEMENTS OF LEADERSHIP

1 Character ndash to be a leader a person must be of good character Some indications arehonesty good manners industrious self-control and bravery

2 Intelligence ndash is the ability to grasp knowledge easily It includes native ability goodcommon sense and judgment

3 Alertness ndash is mental and physical watchfulness vigilance and observance to his planned and future activity

D LEADERSHIP RESPONSIBILITIES

1 Accomplishment of the assigned mission or task

2 Work for the welfare of his men

E LEADERSHIP TRAITS

1 Knowledge ndash professional knowledge of the job Understands the characteristics of his men2 Bearing ndash dignified appearance and behavior

3 Courage ndash physical and moral ability to act in spite of danger or hardship

4 Decisiveness ndash ability to decide promptly and correctly the proper time and to announce his decision clearly and briefly with authority

5 Dependability ndash performance of duty with or without supervision

6 Endurance ndash physical and mental strength to continue or complete a task

7 Enthusiasm ndash interest in his work or task at hand

8 Force ndash the ability to compel obedience

9 Humility ndash state of being reasonable and proud but not arrogant and boastful

10 Humor ndash ability to appreciate and narrate amusing incidents of everyday life

11 Initiative ndash ability to start or originate an idea or work even when others are absent

12 Judgment ndash power of mind to weight factors affecting a problem and to decide properly

13 Integrity ndash good moral character

14 Justice ndash impartiality in dealing with others giving credit when due and punishment when so demanded

15 Loyalty - sincerity and faithfulness to superiors for the good of the unit

16 Sympathy ndash mutual feelings to others

17 Tact ndash ability to deal with people without hurting their feelings

18 Unselfishness - avoidance of personal consideration that gives a disadvantage

to others

F PRINCIPLES IN LEADERSHIP

1 Know your job - must have thorough professional knowledge of his duties and responsibilities to

command and gain respect from his men

2Know yourself and seek self-improvement - a leader should analyze himself to determine his

good qualities and learn to recognize and correct his weakness

3 Know your men and look after their welfare - understand each of your men personally

psychologically in order to effectively lead them

4 Keep your men informed - keep your men knowledgeable background in all aspects its

organization and mission in order to function effectively

5 Set an example -set a good example as a model in loyalty in superiors and subordinates good

bearing and attitudes pride and faithfulness to the organization

6 Insure the task is understood supervised and accomplished - a leader should give a clear and

concise order that can be understood He supervises his men to accomplish the

assigned mission

7 Train your men as a team - teamwork is a must within and among units from the

smallest to the largest Each men should understand that he has a job to perform

and must cooperate with others in achieving the common objective

8 Make sound and timely decisions - the ability to make raid estimate of the situation Arrive at the

sound decision and announce his decision in the correct form of the proper is

essential to a leader For any situation that may arise the leader should be able to

act logically

9 Develop a sense of responsibility among your subordinates - the leader should train his

subordinates to act in the absence of orders when the situation so demands He

develops responsibility among his subordinates byproper delegation of his

authority and holding them responsible for theaccomplishment of their mission

10 Employ your commands in accordance with its capability - the leader must have thorough knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of his command He must assign objectives that is responsible to be attained However when the situation so demands then men must be forced to action beyond their normal endurance so as to avoid a harder or more costly consequence on their part

11 See responsibility and take responsibility for your action - learn the seniors job for youmay assume his position later on Take advantage of the responsibility delegated toyou and do not back out in case of failure

ROLES OF A LEADER

1 The leader is a model soldier2 The leader is a commander3 The leader is an instructor4 The leader is a personal manager5 The leader is a councilor6 The leader is a custodian of his mens welfare

OBJECTIVES OF A LEADER

1 MORALE - the mental and emotional state of an individual 2 DISCIPLINE - the prompt and willing obedience to orders Complying to regulations and initiating appropriate action even in theabsence of orders 3 PROFICIENCY - the technical tactical and physical ability of an individual to perform their mission 4 ESPRIT DE CORPS - More than the aggregate personality it is how the individuals feel about their unit Jealous of enthusiasticfor pride in and devotion for

MAP READING

MAP - is a graphical representation of the earths surface drawn to a scale on aplane When you look at the map you are actually looking at a picture ofthe ground from a high spot in the air MAP COLOR - different colors are used on the printing of the maps to assist the use understanding it A GREEN - represents all types of vegetables B BLUE - signifies bodies of water such as rivers lakes swamps and streams C RED - indicates first class roads and prominent locations such as theProvincial or Municipal Capitals May be used to stress the significance ofimportant map locations

D BROWN - depicts contour lines which are representation of the relatives elevation and relief of the terrain

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

ENGLISH FILIPINO

Sir I present the commandhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Ihahandogkopoangpamunuan

Sir the Troop is ready forhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Handanapoangpangkatsa

Trooping for the linehelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip LibutinangHanay

To the LeftRight Marchhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip PakaliwaPakanan KAD

Column of the Platoon Leading Platoonhelliphelliphelliphellip TudlingngpulutongUnangpulutongby the LeftRight Flank March KaliwaKanangpanig KAD

Donrsquot anticipate the commandhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Huwagpangunahanangutos

Sir the Honod Guard is formedhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip Handan a poangTanodPandangal

D The Salute ( Pagpugay )

1 Hand Salute - PugayKamay2 Ready Eyes Right - HandaTinginKanan3 Ready Front - Handa RAP

E Steps and Marching ( Hakbang at Lakad )

1 Count Cadence Count - BilangHakbang NA 2 Forward March - Pasulong KAD 3 Platoon Halt - Pulutong Hinto 4 Mark Time March - LakadPatakda KAD 5 Half Step March - Hating Hakbang KAD 6 Double Time March - TakbongHakbang KAD NA 7 Quick Time March - SiglangHakbang KADNA 8 Route March - LayangHakbang NA 9 In place Double Time March - Sa Lunan TakbongHakbang KADNA10 Right Step March - HakbangPakanan NAKAD11 Left Step March - HakbangPakaliwa NAKAD12 Backward March - LakadPaurong KAD13 To the Rear March - Pabalik NA14 Change Step March - PalitHakbang NA15 One Two Three Four - Isa Dalawa Tatlo Apat

2 SCHOOL OF SOLDIERS WITH ARMS ( PagsasanayngKawalna may sandata )

A Manual of Arms ( PagsanaysapaghawakngSandata )

1 Right Shoulder Arms - SaKanangBalikat TA2 Left Shoulder Arms - SaKaliwangBalikat TA3 Order Arms - Baba TA4 Present Arms - Tanghal TA5 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA6 Trail Arms - Bitbit TA7 Sling Arms - Sakbit Sandata8 Unsling Arms - AlisSakbit Sandata9 Fix Bayonet - IkabitBayoneta10 Unfix Bayonet - AlisBayoneta

B Manual of Gidon( ParaanngPagsasanaysaPaghawakngSagisag )

1 Order Guidon - IbabaSagisag2 Carry Guidon - BitbitSagisag3 Raise Guidon - ItaasSagisagC Manual of Arms for the Pistol ( PagsasanaysaPaghawakngPistola )

1 Raise Pistol - ItaasangPistola2 Withdraw Magazine - AlisinangPistola3 Open Chamber - BuksanangPistola4 Close Chamber - IsaraangPistola5 Insert Magazine - IsuksukangPistola6 Return Pistol - IsauliangPungluan

3 Close Order Drill ( MalapitangPagsasanay )

a At Close Interval Fall In - Sa MasinsinPagitan Humanayb Inspection Arms - Siyasat TAc Port Arms - Agap TAd Order Arms - Baba TA

A To Dismiss the Platoon (PagtiwalagngPulutong )

1 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA2 Port Arms - Agap TA3 Dismiss - Lumansag

B To Form the Platoons ( PaghahanayngPulutong )

1 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA2 Port Arms - Agap TA3 Order Arms - Baba TA4 Call Off - TuluyangBilang5 Report - Mag-ulat

C To Align the Squad ( PaghahanayngTilap )

1 Dress Right Dress - TuntonKanan NA2 Dress Left Dress -TuntonKaliwa NA3 At Close Interval Dress RightDress Left -MasinsinPagitan TuntonKananKaliwa NA4 Ready Fort - Handa RAP5 Cover - Tumakip

D To Change Interval while in Line ( PagpalitngpagitanSamantalangNakahanay )

1 Close March - LakadPasinsin KAD2 Extended March - LakadPadalang KAD3 Extended to the Left - IbayongLakadPakaliwa KADE Marching the Squad from a line ( PaglakadsaPangkatmulasaHanay ) 1 Right Face - HarapsaKanan RAP 2 Left Face - HarapsaKaliwa RAP 3 Forward March - Pasulong KAD 4 Column Right March - LikosaKanan KADNA 5 Column Left March - LikosaKaliwa KADNA 6 Column Half Right March - Liko Hating Kanan KADNA 7 Column Half Left March - Liko Hating Kaliwa KADNA 8 Incline to the Left - PagawingKanan 9 Incline to the Right - PagawingKaliwa 10 Right Left March - KaliwaKanangpanig NA

F Counting of Men ( PagbilangngKawal )

1 Count Off - SabayangBilang NA 2 Call Off - TuluyangBilang NA

G To Change Interval While in Column ( PagpalitngPagitanSamantalangNakatudling )

1 Close March - LakadPasinsin KAD 2 Extend March - LakadPadalang KAD

MILITARY DRILLS AND CEREMONIES

MILITARY CEREMONIES - The movement of the larger unit or troops in a prescribed manner from one place to another

1 REVIEW - A military ceremony held in honor of a visiting commander official or dignitary It is also a fittingaffair to present decorations and awards to deserving members or units of the command

A REVIEW IS NORMALLY CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING ELEMENTSa Formation of troopsb Presentation of troopsc Inspection of troopsd Presentation of awards and decorations

2 PARADE - A more formal ceremony than a review In this ceremony the appearance and movement of thetroops in the formation are the primary consideration The preparation and organization of troops forparades are similar to those of a review The line on which the troops are to be formed and the route ofmarch of the participating units are marked or designated The distance between the troops and thecommander for the parade formation is greater than that of a reviewTWO DISTINCT TYPES OF PARADES1 Evening Parade2 Moonlight Parade

DRILL COMMANDS - An oral of a commander

TWO PARTS 1 PREPARATORY COMMAND - States the movement or formation to be carried out and mentally prepares theindividual for its execution It is a command which indicates the movement

2 COMMAND OF EXECUTION - Tells when the movement is to be carried out It is a command which indicates when amovement is to be executed

EXAMPLE FORWARD MARCHForwardPreparatory Command MarchCommand of Execution

PREPARATORY COMMAND AND COMMAND OF EXECUTION

1 Fall in Fall out - Humanay Tumiwalag

2 Rest - Pahinga3 As you were - Manumbalik4 At ease - TindigPaluwag5 Change step - PalikHakbang

SUPPLEMENTARY COMMAND - The subordinate commander gives a supplementary command He turns his head towards themajority of his elements and gives command over his shoulder He does not face about

MASS COMMAND - May be used to develop confidence and enthusiasm All of the members of the unit being trained speak in unison and execute them

THINGS TO OBSERVE IN GIVING COMMANDS

Inflection - The rise and fall of pitch and the tone changes of the voice

Cadence In Command - The uniform and rhythmic flow of words

Snap - The extra quality in command that demands immediate responseREMEMBER

1 Correct commands have a tone cadence and snap that demands willingness correct and immediateresponse 2 The loudness of the command is adjusted to the number of men in the unit 3 The best posture for giving command is at the position of attention 4 The most desirable pitch when beginning a preparatory command is near the level of your natural speaking voice

MILITARY COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

MILITARY COURTESY - Is the expression or manifestation of consideration for others It is a virtue that is expected of all individuals from all walks of life In the Armed Forces courtesy is a great requirement because it is thebasic upon which military discipline stands With courtesy and respect among members of the organizationwould lose its orderliness and later disintegrate Furthermore courtesy promotes good relationship closer coordination and teamwork among members of the organization It makes theorganization dignified and insures good relations with the public

SALUTES- Is the most important form of military courtesy It is executed by raising the right man smartlyUntil the tip of the forefinger touches the eyebrow or the front brim of the head gear when coveredForefingers are extended and joined palm facing the left forearm inclined at an angle of about 45 degrees

and the right upper arm horizontal to the ground A person saluting looks at the person beingsaluted When the salute is returned he drops the right hand smartly to the side

RULES IN RENDERING HAND SALUTEa The salute is required on and off military installations during outside office hoursb Persons entitled to the saluted 1 All commissioned officers of the AFP both male and female 2 Commissioned officers of friendly nations when they are recognized as such 3 Officers of the Coast and Geodetic Survey and the Public Health Service when they are serving with the AFP 4 All civilian who are entitled by custom to salutec The salute is rendered at a distance of about 6 paces from the person saluted of at the recognizable distances about 30 pacesd The salute must be rendered to those entitled to it It is not rendered when running but at halt or walk Never salute with a cigarette cigar or pipe in the mouth The salute should not be executed in a haphazardway or perfunctory manner Salutes are exchange whether individuals are cover or uncoverede The salute is rendered at once if the senior remains in the immediate vicinity and no conversation takesplace the junior again salutes the senior when they are path from each otherf In making reports the person reporting salutes first regardless of rank An example of this case is whenthe unit commander is reporting to the adjutant during ceremoniesg) Whom not to salute

1 Standing to a horse or leading a horse2 While at work In case the officer calls the soldier stops working approaches and salutes him

and again when they are part to each other3 Indoors except when reporting to an officer or when the soldier is on duty sentry or guard4 When carrying articles with both hands or being so occupied as to make saluting practical5 When riding in a fast moving vehicle and the other is dismounted the salute is not rendered

Exception are when the vehicle is clearly marked to indicate a General Officer and when saluting is a part of the ceremony

6 When meeting a prisoner of war Soldier serving as military prisoner are not entitled to salute7 In case of doubt due to absence of specific instruction the salute is rendered

The term ldquooutdoorrdquo is constructed to include such buildings as drill halls gymnasiums and other roofed enclosures used for drill or exercise of troops Theaters covered walks and other shelters open on the side are also considered as outdoor

ldquoIndoorsrdquo include offices hallways kitchen orderly rooms recreation halls washroom and quarters

ldquoUnder armsrdquo means carrying arms having them attached to the person by sling holster or other means In the absence of arms the wearing of cartridge bells pistol holsters and automatic rifle belts also mean ldquounder armsrdquo

TYPES OF SALUTES

a Hand saluteb The Rifle Salute at Order Armsc The Rifle Salute at Trail Armsd The Rifle Salute at Present Armse The Rifle Salute at Shoulder Arms (Right Shoulder)f The Rifle Salute at Left Shoulder Armsg The Gun Saluteh Eyes Right by men in ranks when Pass in Review

REPORTING TO AN OFFICER

The salute is rendered by a junior when reporting to a senior He also salutes before leaving

a REPORTING INDOORS WITHOUT ARMS

A soldier removes his headgear knocks at the door of the office of the officer and enters when told to do so Upon entering he halts at about two paces from the officer and salutes and says Sir Cadet Airman Dela Cruz reporting to the squadron commander Sir The salute will be retained until he completes his report and the officer had returned his salute execute about face and leaves the office

b REPORTING INDOORS UNDER ARMS

The procedure for reporting is the same as discussed above except that the soldier remain covered If carrying a rifle the soldier carries it and salute at trail arms Otherwise the hand salute is given

c REPORTING OUTDOORS

The procedure for reporting to an officer the head gear is not removed Rifles should be carried at trail arms or at the right shoulder The hand salute or rifle salute is given as the case may be

d REPORTING FOR PAY

The soldier reporting for pay answers ldquoHererdquo when his name is called approaches and salutes the officer He picks up and count his money and leaves without saluting The officer does not return his salute

OTHER COURTESY TO INDIVIDUALS

a) When an officer enters the room or tent officersrsquo junior to him and enlisted men present with uncover (if unarmed and stand at attention until the officer directs otherwise or leaves the room) When more than one individual are present the first one who perceive the officer will command ldquoAttentionrdquo loud enough to be heard by everybody present

b) When an officer enters a room or tent used as an office working shop or recreation room those at work or at play are not required to come to attention unless addressed by the officer A transaction of routine business between individuals at work

c) When an officer enters an enlisted menus hall the group is called to ldquoAt Easerdquo by the person noticing him first Men remain seated at ease and continue eating unless the officer directs otherwise A soldiers addresses stop eating and sits at attention until the conversation has ended

d) When accompanying a senior a junior walks or ride on his left except when accompanying senior during inspection

e) When entering a car or a small boat the senior goes in first and others follow in the order of rank In getting off he junior goes out first and others follow in the inverse order of rank

HONORS TO THE NATIONAL ANTHEM OR TO THE COLORS

I OUTDOOR

- Wheneverwherever the National Anthem or the colors is played military personnel not in the formation must observe the following

1 At the first note of the music stand at attention and render the prescribed salute except atthe escort of the color or at retreat when they will face toward the color or flag and salute The salute is retained until the last note of the music

2 The mounted on animals will halt and render the salute mounted Individuals loadinganimals or standing to a horse will stand at attention having the salute

3 Vehicles in motion will be brought to a halt Persons riding on a passenger car or amotorcycle will dismount and salute as described above Occupants of combat vehicles such a tanks half trucks scout cars and armored cars will remain in their vehicles but stand at attention and salute

4 The above respect to the National Color is rendered to the National Anthem or colors offriendly nations

II INDOORS

- When the national anthem is played officer and men will stand at attention and face the music or the flag but do not salute

UNCOVERING- Officer and enlisted men under arms uncover when

a) Seated as a member of or in attendance at a court or board Sentinels guarding prisoners do not uncover

b) Entering places of divine worship

c) Indoors when not in duty

d) In attendance at an official reception

DISPLAY AND SALUTE TO THE FLAG

a The Philippine flag represents our nation and should always be given a place of runner

b The National Flag is never dipped for salute nor is it permitted to touch the ground It is not used as a costume dress or a drapery No lettering or object should be placed on it

c The flag is played in the following manners1 When hoisted at a flag pole it should be hoisted fully at the top of the pole blue part

up or above During mornings the flag is hoisted to the top of the pole first then hauled down until the flag is about midway of the length of the pole

2 When the national flag is displayed with another flag whether they are standing sideby side or with their staff crossed the National Flag is at the right side blue part up

3 When placed in the vertical manner the triangle is up the blue color at the right4 When displayed in the horizontal position the triangle is at the right side with the blue

part up5 When displayed over the casket the triangle is in the direction of the head of the cadaver with

the blue part on the right side

During the ceremonies wherein the holstering or lowering of the flag is done or when it passes by during parades or reviews all persons present except those detailed in holstering lowering and carrying the flag should face it at attention and salute while those in uniform remove their headdress with their right hand and place them over their left breast Women should salute by placing their right hand on their left breastMILITARY DISCIPLINE

Military discipline is the mental attitude and state of training which renders obedience and proper conduct instinctive under all conditions It is founded upon respect for loyalty to properly constituted authority While it is primarily developed by military drills every feature in military life has its effect upon military discipline It is generally indicated in an individual or unit by smartness of appearance and action cleanliness of dress equipment or quarters respect for senior and by the prompt and cheerful obedience by the subordinates of both the latter and spirit of the legal orders

RELATION OF COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

The relation of military discipline to courtesy is clearly explained by the fact that discipline is founded upon by respect and loyalty to superiors and lawfully constituted authorities In other words discipline originates and develops mutual respect and goodwill among members of an organization Without courtesy and respect among members of an organization discipline disappears there will be no peace and order in the organization hence it will disintegrate

IMPORTANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Mass discipline and morale are essential factors for securing cohesive action and for ensuring that singleness or purpose which alone can triumph over the most difficult conditions of war The successful leader will teach his men to recognize and face fear because fear is the enemy of discipline and morale Fear unchecked will lead to panic and a unit that is panicky is no longer a disciplined one but a mob There is no same person who is without fear but with good discipline and morale all will face danger if not willingly at least resignedly because of their inborn sentiment of duty or courage of loyalty and because of their sense of pride in their country in their unit and in themselves in other words because of their esprit de corps

The need for discipline is recognized in many places outside the Armed Forces It reaches at highest form in teams wherein individual desires are subordinated to the interests of the entire team The Armed Forces are more in need of discipline for several reasons First the task of making war is not doing it because we as individuals have to do it in the interest of our country Because of that we cannot be allowed as individual to decide which part of the job each of us will do or how each part to be done Second the organization must be prepared for situations wherein leaders may be lost Personal loyalty for the commandment is not enough If a leader is killed his men must accept orders from his successor immediately and without question to carry on the battle Finally the tremendous size of all Armed Forces demands that there be uniform ways of doing things Discipline subordinates personal and self considerations to the interest of the group

MAINTENANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Discipline is installed in men through instructions pride and traditions and regulations You will develop appreciation of the other factors which build discipline as time passes One must know and understand the different laws and regulations immediately

Discipline is maintained in much the same manner as it is attained The article of war punishes military individualsrsquo fairness and justice high moral pride and responsibility contribute to maintain discipline as to developing it

CHAPTER IVARMED FORCES OF THE PHILIPPINESrsquo HISTORY

Brief History of the AFPCommonwealth Act no 1 otherwise known as the National Defense Act was approved on 21

December 1935 which gave the basic organization of the AFP General Douglas McArthur served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon Major General Dwight D Eisenhower and Major General James Ord members of the McArthurrsquos Staff helped in the planting of the Philippine Military Establishment as well as organizing it

As President Quezon issued Executive Order no 11 on January 1936 which formally established the Army of the Philippines he recalled Colonel Jose Delos Reyes of the Philippine Constabulary to active duty and later promoted him to Brigadier General and designated him as Acting Chief of Staff of the Army Brigadier General Basilio J Valdez and Colonel Guillermo B Francisco were named 1 st and 2nd Asst Chief of Staff respectively

In the same order the Philippine Constabulary became the nucleus of the regular forces of the Philippine Army Filipino citizens were required to go training under the National Defense Act since 1936 that would compose reserve force By the end of the ten year Commonwealth period in 1946 there would have been a trained Philippine Army Reserve pool of 400000 officers and men including the graduates of the ROTC Basic and Advance Course in accredited colleges and universities

When the Philippine Constabulary became part of the Philippine Army the PC Air Corps which was activated on 2 January 1955 was re designated Philippine Air Force on 3 July 1947

On February 1939 an Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was organized as a unit of the Philippine Army Initially equipped with three Q-boats (torpedo boats) and a handful of officers and men hurriedly trained in the rudiments of Sea-Warfare the OSP squadron provided coastal support to the beleaguered Filipino-American forces in the battles of Bataan and Corregidor In October 1947 the OSP was renamed Philippine Naval Patrol and on 5 January 1951 it became the Philippine Navy The OSP was often referred to as Mosquito Fleet

When President Franklin D Roosevelt of the USA declared the state of National Emergency on 26 July 1941 and ordered the induction of the Philippine Army units into the US Armed Forces in the Far East under the command of General Douglas Mc Arthur the Philippine Army had a reserve force of about 100000 officers and men at the time of the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked the Pearl Harbor Clark Field and other targets on 8 December 1941 The Philippine Army Reserve Force totaled around 200000 officers and men

The Philippine Army retained its own organization while serving with the USAFFE After the fall of Bataan on 9 April 1942 many officers and men of the Philippine Army continued resistance against the Japanese by forming guerilla forces all over the country These USAFFE guerilla forces along with other units organized by civilians in various parts of the country fought the Japanese Forces from 1942 to 1945 When the US Liberation Forces landed in Leyte on 20 October 1944 all the guerilla forces participated actively on the liberation on their respective sectors of operations

On October 1947 President Manual A Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 which organized all government agencies The Military establishment was not spared from its official designation as Army of the Philippines and it became the Armed Forces of the Philippines The ten pre-war military districts were deactivated but 4 Military Areas were also activated to enhance the efficiency of the Constabulary personnel all over the country

The post-war Philippine Army eventually got its forces fighting another battle ndash the battle against the armed elements of the Communist Party of the Philippines the HUKBALAHAP later renamed HMB For the anti0dissident campaign Army Sector Command and Battalion Combat Teams were formed During the Korean war the 10th 20th 11th 19th and 2nd BCTrsquos were sent as Philippine Expeditionary Force as the member of the United Nations PEFTOK served in Korea from 1950-1955 On 25 December 1950 President Quirino issued Executive Order No 389 renaming headquarters AFP to General Headquarters AFP and activating the 4 major services The Philippine Army Philippine Constabulary Philippine Air Force and Philippine Navy

From the time the Philippines joined the Southeast Asia Treaty Organization (SEATO) in September 1954 the AFP cooperated actively with the other member nations in the enhancing of military preparedness in the area

As a member of the UN the Philippines also sent a Philippine Air Force Contingent of 77 officers and men on a pacification campaign to the Congo Republic on 11 February 1963

In 1966 the Philippine Civic Action Group (PHICAG) was activated to implement the provisions of RA 4644 Composed of engineers medical and rural community development teams and security personnel the PHILCAG was sent to the Republic of South Vietnam and engaged in socio-economic projects mutually agreed upon by the governments of the Republic of the Philippines and Republic of South Vietnam

The AFP has shown an increasing awareness of its arrival in the country and its vital role in the political and economic development of the country by engaging are actively in civic action programs

Pursuant to the Socio-economic Military Program under RA 2056 the Chief of Staff AFP ordered the assignment of military personnel for public works construction food production land settlement and rural development Several civic centers of the AFP

To give greater impetus on the civic action the 51st Engineer Brigade consisting of 10 Engineer Construction Battalion was activated on 10 March 1962 This unit had constructed several much needed highways roads and bridges in various parts of the country The 52nd Engineer Brigade which was organized on 1 July 1969 also performed similar functions to holster the national program for social and economical developments

Today the AFP is employing all its resources in assisting the socio-economic development programs of the government without prejudice to its primary missions of improving and maintaining the effectiveness of the countryrsquos defense posture

SIGNIFICANT FACTS TO REMEMBER

MACTAN ndash place where the first revolt against Spain took place on April 26 1951 The firstrebellion Spain flared up in Bohol and Leyte

ANDRES MALONG ndash led the first major revolt in Luzon in 1660 He proclaimed himself as aKing of PangasinanLAPU ndash LAPU ndash was the first Filipino hero

MIGUEL VICOS ndash the Spanish Meztiso who assassinated Diego Silang on May 28 1863

RED WITH A FIGURE OF A SUN ndash color of the first flag of the Philippines in 1897

ANDRES BONIFACIO ndash was the founder of the Revolutionary Society called Katipunan

GEN GREGORIO DEL PILAR ndash led the Filipino forces in the Battle of Tirad Pass

AUGUST 29 1896 ndash the date designated as the start of the revolution which was also known as

Cry of BalintawakDECEMBER 14 1897 ndashdate when the Treaty of Paris and Fact of Biak-na-bato was signed

FACT OF BIAK-NA-BATO ndash an agreement between the Filipino and the Spanish authoritieson December 14 1897 to stop all hostilities

MARCELA AGONCILLO ndash designed and made the first flag of the first Philippine Republic

JULIAN FELIPE ndash was the composer of the Philippine National AnthemEMILIO AGUINALDO ndash was the first president of the Philippines

BALANAN ISABELA ndash the place where Gen Emilio Aguinaldo was captured In 1922 the US War Dept authorized the establishment of the Dept of Military Science andTactics under the supervision of the US Army This was established in theUniversity of the Philippines

MANUEL LUIS QUEZON ndash the first president of the Philippine Commonwealth

COMMONWEALTH ACT NO1 ndash is otherwise known as the National Defense Act issued by President Quezon and approved on December 21 1935 and gave the basicorganization of the AFP

GENERAL DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon during the Commonwealth period that helped in the planning andorganization of the Philippine Military EstablishmentGENDOUGLAS MCARTHURrsquoS STAFF

1 MAJ GEN DWIGHT D EISENHOWER2 MAJ GEN JAMES ORD

JANUARY 11 1936 ndash the date President Manuel L Quezon issued Executive Order No 11 onthe establishment of the PA

BRIG GEN BASILIO J VALDEZ ndash first assistant Chief of staff

BRIG GEN JOSE DELOS REYES ndash designated as the first Chief of Staff of the PhilippineArmy

COL GUILLERMO B FRANCISCO ndash 2nd assistant Chief of Staff The PHILLIPINE CONSTABULARY became the nucleus of the Philippine Army and the Philippine Constabulary Air Corps (PCA) was activated on January 2 1937

FEBRUARY 9 1939 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was activated and organized as a unit of thePhilippine Army The Off-Shore Patrol was equipped with Q-Boats (Torpedo Boat)and referred to as the ldquoMosquito Fleetrdquo

PRESIDENT FRANKLIN DELANO ROOSEVELT ndash President of the USA who set July 26 1941 as the date for the declaration of State of National Emergency and at the sametime the induction of the Philippine Army to United States Armed Forces to the Far East (USAFFE) with a total force of 160000 officers and men

GEN DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash was designated as the USAFFE COMMANDER

DECEMBER 8 1941 ndash the date the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked Pearl Harbor Clark Fieldand other targets

APRIL 9 1942 ndash fall of Bataan

MAY 6 1942 ndash fall of Corregidor

MAJOR FERDINAND EDRALIN MARCOS ndash was the most decorated soldier during the World War II and was a recipient of 27 medals

OCTOBER 20 1944 ndash the date the US Liberation Forces landed in Red Beach in Palo Leyte

JULY 3 1947 ndash the date the PC Air Corps was re-designated as the Philippine Air Force

OCTOBER 1947 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol was renamed Phil Naval Patrol ndash the date President Manuel Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 remainingthe Army of the Philippines as Armed Forces of the Philippines andactivating the 4 military areas

ARAW NG KAGITINGAN ndash a day set to commemorate the Fall of Bataan Fall of Corregidorand Fall of Bessang Pass Based on the historical records the independenceof the Republic of the Philippines was on June 12 1898

JULY 4 1946 ndash declaration of the Independence by the USA celebrated today as PhilippineAmerican Friendship Day

JULY 1950 ndash the Philippine Army was separated from the Gen Headquarters Philippine Army

DECEMBER 23 1950 ndash President ElpidioQuirino issued Executive Order No 389 renamingthe Headquarters AFP to Gen Headquarters AFP (GHQ AFP)

JANUARY 5 1951 ndash the Phil Naval Patrol was renamed the Philippine Naval of thePHILIPPINE NAVY

1959 ndash 1955 ndash the Battalion Combat Teams were sent to Korea to comply with the commitmentsof the Philippines as member of the UN The BCT was known as the PHILIPPINE EXPEDITIONARY FORCE TO KOREA (PEFTOK)

SEPTEMBER 1954 ndash The Philippines joined the Southeast Asian Treaty Org (SEATO)

APRIL 11 1963 ndash the PAF contingent of 77 officers and men were sent to Congo Republic of South VietnamPHIL CIVIC ACTION GROUP (PHILCAG) ndash the group of engineers medical and ruralcommunity development team and security personnel were sent by thePhilippines to the representative of South Vietnam

FEBRUARY 22-25 1986 ndash the bloodless peoples revolution which deposed Ferdinand Marcosfrom the presidency and as Commander in elected President of thePhilippines commonly referred to as the EDSA Revolution

ACRONYMSBCT ndash Battalion Combat TeamGHQ ndash General HeadquartersHMB ndash HukbongMapagpalayang Bayan (HUKBALAHAP)PHILCAG-V ndash Philippine Civic Action Group to VietnamSEATO ndash Southeast Asian Treaty OrganizationOSP ndash Off-Shore PatrolPEFTOK ndash Philippine Expeditionary Force to Korea

ENLISTED PERSONNELrsquoS RANKS

MarinesArmy Navy Constabulary Air Force

C ndash CadetCadette M- MidshipmanMidshipwoman

CHAPTER V

MILITARY LEADERSHIP AND COMMAND

A Leadership ndash is the art of influencing and directing men to an assigned goal is such a way toobtain their obedience respect and loyal cooperation Leadership can beexercised by anyone at anytime respective of the frame work of the command

Command ndash is the authority which an individual in the military service lawfully exercisedover subordinates by virtue of his rank and assignment Command andleadership are inseparable whether the function of the command is complex orsimple the commander should always be the controlling head

B TWO TYPES OF LEADER

1 Authoritarian ndash a leader who leads his men by means of rank and position

2 Persuasive ndash a leader who leads his men by always setting examples

C BASIC ELEMENTS OF LEADERSHIP

1 Character ndash to be a leader a person must be of good character Some indications arehonesty good manners industrious self-control and bravery

2 Intelligence ndash is the ability to grasp knowledge easily It includes native ability goodcommon sense and judgment

3 Alertness ndash is mental and physical watchfulness vigilance and observance to his planned and future activity

D LEADERSHIP RESPONSIBILITIES

1 Accomplishment of the assigned mission or task

2 Work for the welfare of his men

E LEADERSHIP TRAITS

1 Knowledge ndash professional knowledge of the job Understands the characteristics of his men2 Bearing ndash dignified appearance and behavior

3 Courage ndash physical and moral ability to act in spite of danger or hardship

4 Decisiveness ndash ability to decide promptly and correctly the proper time and to announce his decision clearly and briefly with authority

5 Dependability ndash performance of duty with or without supervision

6 Endurance ndash physical and mental strength to continue or complete a task

7 Enthusiasm ndash interest in his work or task at hand

8 Force ndash the ability to compel obedience

9 Humility ndash state of being reasonable and proud but not arrogant and boastful

10 Humor ndash ability to appreciate and narrate amusing incidents of everyday life

11 Initiative ndash ability to start or originate an idea or work even when others are absent

12 Judgment ndash power of mind to weight factors affecting a problem and to decide properly

13 Integrity ndash good moral character

14 Justice ndash impartiality in dealing with others giving credit when due and punishment when so demanded

15 Loyalty - sincerity and faithfulness to superiors for the good of the unit

16 Sympathy ndash mutual feelings to others

17 Tact ndash ability to deal with people without hurting their feelings

18 Unselfishness - avoidance of personal consideration that gives a disadvantage

to others

F PRINCIPLES IN LEADERSHIP

1 Know your job - must have thorough professional knowledge of his duties and responsibilities to

command and gain respect from his men

2Know yourself and seek self-improvement - a leader should analyze himself to determine his

good qualities and learn to recognize and correct his weakness

3 Know your men and look after their welfare - understand each of your men personally

psychologically in order to effectively lead them

4 Keep your men informed - keep your men knowledgeable background in all aspects its

organization and mission in order to function effectively

5 Set an example -set a good example as a model in loyalty in superiors and subordinates good

bearing and attitudes pride and faithfulness to the organization

6 Insure the task is understood supervised and accomplished - a leader should give a clear and

concise order that can be understood He supervises his men to accomplish the

assigned mission

7 Train your men as a team - teamwork is a must within and among units from the

smallest to the largest Each men should understand that he has a job to perform

and must cooperate with others in achieving the common objective

8 Make sound and timely decisions - the ability to make raid estimate of the situation Arrive at the

sound decision and announce his decision in the correct form of the proper is

essential to a leader For any situation that may arise the leader should be able to

act logically

9 Develop a sense of responsibility among your subordinates - the leader should train his

subordinates to act in the absence of orders when the situation so demands He

develops responsibility among his subordinates byproper delegation of his

authority and holding them responsible for theaccomplishment of their mission

10 Employ your commands in accordance with its capability - the leader must have thorough knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of his command He must assign objectives that is responsible to be attained However when the situation so demands then men must be forced to action beyond their normal endurance so as to avoid a harder or more costly consequence on their part

11 See responsibility and take responsibility for your action - learn the seniors job for youmay assume his position later on Take advantage of the responsibility delegated toyou and do not back out in case of failure

ROLES OF A LEADER

1 The leader is a model soldier2 The leader is a commander3 The leader is an instructor4 The leader is a personal manager5 The leader is a councilor6 The leader is a custodian of his mens welfare

OBJECTIVES OF A LEADER

1 MORALE - the mental and emotional state of an individual 2 DISCIPLINE - the prompt and willing obedience to orders Complying to regulations and initiating appropriate action even in theabsence of orders 3 PROFICIENCY - the technical tactical and physical ability of an individual to perform their mission 4 ESPRIT DE CORPS - More than the aggregate personality it is how the individuals feel about their unit Jealous of enthusiasticfor pride in and devotion for

MAP READING

MAP - is a graphical representation of the earths surface drawn to a scale on aplane When you look at the map you are actually looking at a picture ofthe ground from a high spot in the air MAP COLOR - different colors are used on the printing of the maps to assist the use understanding it A GREEN - represents all types of vegetables B BLUE - signifies bodies of water such as rivers lakes swamps and streams C RED - indicates first class roads and prominent locations such as theProvincial or Municipal Capitals May be used to stress the significance ofimportant map locations

D BROWN - depicts contour lines which are representation of the relatives elevation and relief of the terrain

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

2 SCHOOL OF SOLDIERS WITH ARMS ( PagsasanayngKawalna may sandata )

A Manual of Arms ( PagsanaysapaghawakngSandata )

1 Right Shoulder Arms - SaKanangBalikat TA2 Left Shoulder Arms - SaKaliwangBalikat TA3 Order Arms - Baba TA4 Present Arms - Tanghal TA5 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA6 Trail Arms - Bitbit TA7 Sling Arms - Sakbit Sandata8 Unsling Arms - AlisSakbit Sandata9 Fix Bayonet - IkabitBayoneta10 Unfix Bayonet - AlisBayoneta

B Manual of Gidon( ParaanngPagsasanaysaPaghawakngSagisag )

1 Order Guidon - IbabaSagisag2 Carry Guidon - BitbitSagisag3 Raise Guidon - ItaasSagisagC Manual of Arms for the Pistol ( PagsasanaysaPaghawakngPistola )

1 Raise Pistol - ItaasangPistola2 Withdraw Magazine - AlisinangPistola3 Open Chamber - BuksanangPistola4 Close Chamber - IsaraangPistola5 Insert Magazine - IsuksukangPistola6 Return Pistol - IsauliangPungluan

3 Close Order Drill ( MalapitangPagsasanay )

a At Close Interval Fall In - Sa MasinsinPagitan Humanayb Inspection Arms - Siyasat TAc Port Arms - Agap TAd Order Arms - Baba TA

A To Dismiss the Platoon (PagtiwalagngPulutong )

1 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA2 Port Arms - Agap TA3 Dismiss - Lumansag

B To Form the Platoons ( PaghahanayngPulutong )

1 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA2 Port Arms - Agap TA3 Order Arms - Baba TA4 Call Off - TuluyangBilang5 Report - Mag-ulat

C To Align the Squad ( PaghahanayngTilap )

1 Dress Right Dress - TuntonKanan NA2 Dress Left Dress -TuntonKaliwa NA3 At Close Interval Dress RightDress Left -MasinsinPagitan TuntonKananKaliwa NA4 Ready Fort - Handa RAP5 Cover - Tumakip

D To Change Interval while in Line ( PagpalitngpagitanSamantalangNakahanay )

1 Close March - LakadPasinsin KAD2 Extended March - LakadPadalang KAD3 Extended to the Left - IbayongLakadPakaliwa KADE Marching the Squad from a line ( PaglakadsaPangkatmulasaHanay ) 1 Right Face - HarapsaKanan RAP 2 Left Face - HarapsaKaliwa RAP 3 Forward March - Pasulong KAD 4 Column Right March - LikosaKanan KADNA 5 Column Left March - LikosaKaliwa KADNA 6 Column Half Right March - Liko Hating Kanan KADNA 7 Column Half Left March - Liko Hating Kaliwa KADNA 8 Incline to the Left - PagawingKanan 9 Incline to the Right - PagawingKaliwa 10 Right Left March - KaliwaKanangpanig NA

F Counting of Men ( PagbilangngKawal )

1 Count Off - SabayangBilang NA 2 Call Off - TuluyangBilang NA

G To Change Interval While in Column ( PagpalitngPagitanSamantalangNakatudling )

1 Close March - LakadPasinsin KAD 2 Extend March - LakadPadalang KAD

MILITARY DRILLS AND CEREMONIES

MILITARY CEREMONIES - The movement of the larger unit or troops in a prescribed manner from one place to another

1 REVIEW - A military ceremony held in honor of a visiting commander official or dignitary It is also a fittingaffair to present decorations and awards to deserving members or units of the command

A REVIEW IS NORMALLY CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING ELEMENTSa Formation of troopsb Presentation of troopsc Inspection of troopsd Presentation of awards and decorations

2 PARADE - A more formal ceremony than a review In this ceremony the appearance and movement of thetroops in the formation are the primary consideration The preparation and organization of troops forparades are similar to those of a review The line on which the troops are to be formed and the route ofmarch of the participating units are marked or designated The distance between the troops and thecommander for the parade formation is greater than that of a reviewTWO DISTINCT TYPES OF PARADES1 Evening Parade2 Moonlight Parade

DRILL COMMANDS - An oral of a commander

TWO PARTS 1 PREPARATORY COMMAND - States the movement or formation to be carried out and mentally prepares theindividual for its execution It is a command which indicates the movement

2 COMMAND OF EXECUTION - Tells when the movement is to be carried out It is a command which indicates when amovement is to be executed

EXAMPLE FORWARD MARCHForwardPreparatory Command MarchCommand of Execution

PREPARATORY COMMAND AND COMMAND OF EXECUTION

1 Fall in Fall out - Humanay Tumiwalag

2 Rest - Pahinga3 As you were - Manumbalik4 At ease - TindigPaluwag5 Change step - PalikHakbang

SUPPLEMENTARY COMMAND - The subordinate commander gives a supplementary command He turns his head towards themajority of his elements and gives command over his shoulder He does not face about

MASS COMMAND - May be used to develop confidence and enthusiasm All of the members of the unit being trained speak in unison and execute them

THINGS TO OBSERVE IN GIVING COMMANDS

Inflection - The rise and fall of pitch and the tone changes of the voice

Cadence In Command - The uniform and rhythmic flow of words

Snap - The extra quality in command that demands immediate responseREMEMBER

1 Correct commands have a tone cadence and snap that demands willingness correct and immediateresponse 2 The loudness of the command is adjusted to the number of men in the unit 3 The best posture for giving command is at the position of attention 4 The most desirable pitch when beginning a preparatory command is near the level of your natural speaking voice

MILITARY COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

MILITARY COURTESY - Is the expression or manifestation of consideration for others It is a virtue that is expected of all individuals from all walks of life In the Armed Forces courtesy is a great requirement because it is thebasic upon which military discipline stands With courtesy and respect among members of the organizationwould lose its orderliness and later disintegrate Furthermore courtesy promotes good relationship closer coordination and teamwork among members of the organization It makes theorganization dignified and insures good relations with the public

SALUTES- Is the most important form of military courtesy It is executed by raising the right man smartlyUntil the tip of the forefinger touches the eyebrow or the front brim of the head gear when coveredForefingers are extended and joined palm facing the left forearm inclined at an angle of about 45 degrees

and the right upper arm horizontal to the ground A person saluting looks at the person beingsaluted When the salute is returned he drops the right hand smartly to the side

RULES IN RENDERING HAND SALUTEa The salute is required on and off military installations during outside office hoursb Persons entitled to the saluted 1 All commissioned officers of the AFP both male and female 2 Commissioned officers of friendly nations when they are recognized as such 3 Officers of the Coast and Geodetic Survey and the Public Health Service when they are serving with the AFP 4 All civilian who are entitled by custom to salutec The salute is rendered at a distance of about 6 paces from the person saluted of at the recognizable distances about 30 pacesd The salute must be rendered to those entitled to it It is not rendered when running but at halt or walk Never salute with a cigarette cigar or pipe in the mouth The salute should not be executed in a haphazardway or perfunctory manner Salutes are exchange whether individuals are cover or uncoverede The salute is rendered at once if the senior remains in the immediate vicinity and no conversation takesplace the junior again salutes the senior when they are path from each otherf In making reports the person reporting salutes first regardless of rank An example of this case is whenthe unit commander is reporting to the adjutant during ceremoniesg) Whom not to salute

1 Standing to a horse or leading a horse2 While at work In case the officer calls the soldier stops working approaches and salutes him

and again when they are part to each other3 Indoors except when reporting to an officer or when the soldier is on duty sentry or guard4 When carrying articles with both hands or being so occupied as to make saluting practical5 When riding in a fast moving vehicle and the other is dismounted the salute is not rendered

Exception are when the vehicle is clearly marked to indicate a General Officer and when saluting is a part of the ceremony

6 When meeting a prisoner of war Soldier serving as military prisoner are not entitled to salute7 In case of doubt due to absence of specific instruction the salute is rendered

The term ldquooutdoorrdquo is constructed to include such buildings as drill halls gymnasiums and other roofed enclosures used for drill or exercise of troops Theaters covered walks and other shelters open on the side are also considered as outdoor

ldquoIndoorsrdquo include offices hallways kitchen orderly rooms recreation halls washroom and quarters

ldquoUnder armsrdquo means carrying arms having them attached to the person by sling holster or other means In the absence of arms the wearing of cartridge bells pistol holsters and automatic rifle belts also mean ldquounder armsrdquo

TYPES OF SALUTES

a Hand saluteb The Rifle Salute at Order Armsc The Rifle Salute at Trail Armsd The Rifle Salute at Present Armse The Rifle Salute at Shoulder Arms (Right Shoulder)f The Rifle Salute at Left Shoulder Armsg The Gun Saluteh Eyes Right by men in ranks when Pass in Review

REPORTING TO AN OFFICER

The salute is rendered by a junior when reporting to a senior He also salutes before leaving

a REPORTING INDOORS WITHOUT ARMS

A soldier removes his headgear knocks at the door of the office of the officer and enters when told to do so Upon entering he halts at about two paces from the officer and salutes and says Sir Cadet Airman Dela Cruz reporting to the squadron commander Sir The salute will be retained until he completes his report and the officer had returned his salute execute about face and leaves the office

b REPORTING INDOORS UNDER ARMS

The procedure for reporting is the same as discussed above except that the soldier remain covered If carrying a rifle the soldier carries it and salute at trail arms Otherwise the hand salute is given

c REPORTING OUTDOORS

The procedure for reporting to an officer the head gear is not removed Rifles should be carried at trail arms or at the right shoulder The hand salute or rifle salute is given as the case may be

d REPORTING FOR PAY

The soldier reporting for pay answers ldquoHererdquo when his name is called approaches and salutes the officer He picks up and count his money and leaves without saluting The officer does not return his salute

OTHER COURTESY TO INDIVIDUALS

a) When an officer enters the room or tent officersrsquo junior to him and enlisted men present with uncover (if unarmed and stand at attention until the officer directs otherwise or leaves the room) When more than one individual are present the first one who perceive the officer will command ldquoAttentionrdquo loud enough to be heard by everybody present

b) When an officer enters a room or tent used as an office working shop or recreation room those at work or at play are not required to come to attention unless addressed by the officer A transaction of routine business between individuals at work

c) When an officer enters an enlisted menus hall the group is called to ldquoAt Easerdquo by the person noticing him first Men remain seated at ease and continue eating unless the officer directs otherwise A soldiers addresses stop eating and sits at attention until the conversation has ended

d) When accompanying a senior a junior walks or ride on his left except when accompanying senior during inspection

e) When entering a car or a small boat the senior goes in first and others follow in the order of rank In getting off he junior goes out first and others follow in the inverse order of rank

HONORS TO THE NATIONAL ANTHEM OR TO THE COLORS

I OUTDOOR

- Wheneverwherever the National Anthem or the colors is played military personnel not in the formation must observe the following

1 At the first note of the music stand at attention and render the prescribed salute except atthe escort of the color or at retreat when they will face toward the color or flag and salute The salute is retained until the last note of the music

2 The mounted on animals will halt and render the salute mounted Individuals loadinganimals or standing to a horse will stand at attention having the salute

3 Vehicles in motion will be brought to a halt Persons riding on a passenger car or amotorcycle will dismount and salute as described above Occupants of combat vehicles such a tanks half trucks scout cars and armored cars will remain in their vehicles but stand at attention and salute

4 The above respect to the National Color is rendered to the National Anthem or colors offriendly nations

II INDOORS

- When the national anthem is played officer and men will stand at attention and face the music or the flag but do not salute

UNCOVERING- Officer and enlisted men under arms uncover when

a) Seated as a member of or in attendance at a court or board Sentinels guarding prisoners do not uncover

b) Entering places of divine worship

c) Indoors when not in duty

d) In attendance at an official reception

DISPLAY AND SALUTE TO THE FLAG

a The Philippine flag represents our nation and should always be given a place of runner

b The National Flag is never dipped for salute nor is it permitted to touch the ground It is not used as a costume dress or a drapery No lettering or object should be placed on it

c The flag is played in the following manners1 When hoisted at a flag pole it should be hoisted fully at the top of the pole blue part

up or above During mornings the flag is hoisted to the top of the pole first then hauled down until the flag is about midway of the length of the pole

2 When the national flag is displayed with another flag whether they are standing sideby side or with their staff crossed the National Flag is at the right side blue part up

3 When placed in the vertical manner the triangle is up the blue color at the right4 When displayed in the horizontal position the triangle is at the right side with the blue

part up5 When displayed over the casket the triangle is in the direction of the head of the cadaver with

the blue part on the right side

During the ceremonies wherein the holstering or lowering of the flag is done or when it passes by during parades or reviews all persons present except those detailed in holstering lowering and carrying the flag should face it at attention and salute while those in uniform remove their headdress with their right hand and place them over their left breast Women should salute by placing their right hand on their left breastMILITARY DISCIPLINE

Military discipline is the mental attitude and state of training which renders obedience and proper conduct instinctive under all conditions It is founded upon respect for loyalty to properly constituted authority While it is primarily developed by military drills every feature in military life has its effect upon military discipline It is generally indicated in an individual or unit by smartness of appearance and action cleanliness of dress equipment or quarters respect for senior and by the prompt and cheerful obedience by the subordinates of both the latter and spirit of the legal orders

RELATION OF COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

The relation of military discipline to courtesy is clearly explained by the fact that discipline is founded upon by respect and loyalty to superiors and lawfully constituted authorities In other words discipline originates and develops mutual respect and goodwill among members of an organization Without courtesy and respect among members of an organization discipline disappears there will be no peace and order in the organization hence it will disintegrate

IMPORTANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Mass discipline and morale are essential factors for securing cohesive action and for ensuring that singleness or purpose which alone can triumph over the most difficult conditions of war The successful leader will teach his men to recognize and face fear because fear is the enemy of discipline and morale Fear unchecked will lead to panic and a unit that is panicky is no longer a disciplined one but a mob There is no same person who is without fear but with good discipline and morale all will face danger if not willingly at least resignedly because of their inborn sentiment of duty or courage of loyalty and because of their sense of pride in their country in their unit and in themselves in other words because of their esprit de corps

The need for discipline is recognized in many places outside the Armed Forces It reaches at highest form in teams wherein individual desires are subordinated to the interests of the entire team The Armed Forces are more in need of discipline for several reasons First the task of making war is not doing it because we as individuals have to do it in the interest of our country Because of that we cannot be allowed as individual to decide which part of the job each of us will do or how each part to be done Second the organization must be prepared for situations wherein leaders may be lost Personal loyalty for the commandment is not enough If a leader is killed his men must accept orders from his successor immediately and without question to carry on the battle Finally the tremendous size of all Armed Forces demands that there be uniform ways of doing things Discipline subordinates personal and self considerations to the interest of the group

MAINTENANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Discipline is installed in men through instructions pride and traditions and regulations You will develop appreciation of the other factors which build discipline as time passes One must know and understand the different laws and regulations immediately

Discipline is maintained in much the same manner as it is attained The article of war punishes military individualsrsquo fairness and justice high moral pride and responsibility contribute to maintain discipline as to developing it

CHAPTER IVARMED FORCES OF THE PHILIPPINESrsquo HISTORY

Brief History of the AFPCommonwealth Act no 1 otherwise known as the National Defense Act was approved on 21

December 1935 which gave the basic organization of the AFP General Douglas McArthur served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon Major General Dwight D Eisenhower and Major General James Ord members of the McArthurrsquos Staff helped in the planting of the Philippine Military Establishment as well as organizing it

As President Quezon issued Executive Order no 11 on January 1936 which formally established the Army of the Philippines he recalled Colonel Jose Delos Reyes of the Philippine Constabulary to active duty and later promoted him to Brigadier General and designated him as Acting Chief of Staff of the Army Brigadier General Basilio J Valdez and Colonel Guillermo B Francisco were named 1 st and 2nd Asst Chief of Staff respectively

In the same order the Philippine Constabulary became the nucleus of the regular forces of the Philippine Army Filipino citizens were required to go training under the National Defense Act since 1936 that would compose reserve force By the end of the ten year Commonwealth period in 1946 there would have been a trained Philippine Army Reserve pool of 400000 officers and men including the graduates of the ROTC Basic and Advance Course in accredited colleges and universities

When the Philippine Constabulary became part of the Philippine Army the PC Air Corps which was activated on 2 January 1955 was re designated Philippine Air Force on 3 July 1947

On February 1939 an Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was organized as a unit of the Philippine Army Initially equipped with three Q-boats (torpedo boats) and a handful of officers and men hurriedly trained in the rudiments of Sea-Warfare the OSP squadron provided coastal support to the beleaguered Filipino-American forces in the battles of Bataan and Corregidor In October 1947 the OSP was renamed Philippine Naval Patrol and on 5 January 1951 it became the Philippine Navy The OSP was often referred to as Mosquito Fleet

When President Franklin D Roosevelt of the USA declared the state of National Emergency on 26 July 1941 and ordered the induction of the Philippine Army units into the US Armed Forces in the Far East under the command of General Douglas Mc Arthur the Philippine Army had a reserve force of about 100000 officers and men at the time of the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked the Pearl Harbor Clark Field and other targets on 8 December 1941 The Philippine Army Reserve Force totaled around 200000 officers and men

The Philippine Army retained its own organization while serving with the USAFFE After the fall of Bataan on 9 April 1942 many officers and men of the Philippine Army continued resistance against the Japanese by forming guerilla forces all over the country These USAFFE guerilla forces along with other units organized by civilians in various parts of the country fought the Japanese Forces from 1942 to 1945 When the US Liberation Forces landed in Leyte on 20 October 1944 all the guerilla forces participated actively on the liberation on their respective sectors of operations

On October 1947 President Manual A Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 which organized all government agencies The Military establishment was not spared from its official designation as Army of the Philippines and it became the Armed Forces of the Philippines The ten pre-war military districts were deactivated but 4 Military Areas were also activated to enhance the efficiency of the Constabulary personnel all over the country

The post-war Philippine Army eventually got its forces fighting another battle ndash the battle against the armed elements of the Communist Party of the Philippines the HUKBALAHAP later renamed HMB For the anti0dissident campaign Army Sector Command and Battalion Combat Teams were formed During the Korean war the 10th 20th 11th 19th and 2nd BCTrsquos were sent as Philippine Expeditionary Force as the member of the United Nations PEFTOK served in Korea from 1950-1955 On 25 December 1950 President Quirino issued Executive Order No 389 renaming headquarters AFP to General Headquarters AFP and activating the 4 major services The Philippine Army Philippine Constabulary Philippine Air Force and Philippine Navy

From the time the Philippines joined the Southeast Asia Treaty Organization (SEATO) in September 1954 the AFP cooperated actively with the other member nations in the enhancing of military preparedness in the area

As a member of the UN the Philippines also sent a Philippine Air Force Contingent of 77 officers and men on a pacification campaign to the Congo Republic on 11 February 1963

In 1966 the Philippine Civic Action Group (PHICAG) was activated to implement the provisions of RA 4644 Composed of engineers medical and rural community development teams and security personnel the PHILCAG was sent to the Republic of South Vietnam and engaged in socio-economic projects mutually agreed upon by the governments of the Republic of the Philippines and Republic of South Vietnam

The AFP has shown an increasing awareness of its arrival in the country and its vital role in the political and economic development of the country by engaging are actively in civic action programs

Pursuant to the Socio-economic Military Program under RA 2056 the Chief of Staff AFP ordered the assignment of military personnel for public works construction food production land settlement and rural development Several civic centers of the AFP

To give greater impetus on the civic action the 51st Engineer Brigade consisting of 10 Engineer Construction Battalion was activated on 10 March 1962 This unit had constructed several much needed highways roads and bridges in various parts of the country The 52nd Engineer Brigade which was organized on 1 July 1969 also performed similar functions to holster the national program for social and economical developments

Today the AFP is employing all its resources in assisting the socio-economic development programs of the government without prejudice to its primary missions of improving and maintaining the effectiveness of the countryrsquos defense posture

SIGNIFICANT FACTS TO REMEMBER

MACTAN ndash place where the first revolt against Spain took place on April 26 1951 The firstrebellion Spain flared up in Bohol and Leyte

ANDRES MALONG ndash led the first major revolt in Luzon in 1660 He proclaimed himself as aKing of PangasinanLAPU ndash LAPU ndash was the first Filipino hero

MIGUEL VICOS ndash the Spanish Meztiso who assassinated Diego Silang on May 28 1863

RED WITH A FIGURE OF A SUN ndash color of the first flag of the Philippines in 1897

ANDRES BONIFACIO ndash was the founder of the Revolutionary Society called Katipunan

GEN GREGORIO DEL PILAR ndash led the Filipino forces in the Battle of Tirad Pass

AUGUST 29 1896 ndash the date designated as the start of the revolution which was also known as

Cry of BalintawakDECEMBER 14 1897 ndashdate when the Treaty of Paris and Fact of Biak-na-bato was signed

FACT OF BIAK-NA-BATO ndash an agreement between the Filipino and the Spanish authoritieson December 14 1897 to stop all hostilities

MARCELA AGONCILLO ndash designed and made the first flag of the first Philippine Republic

JULIAN FELIPE ndash was the composer of the Philippine National AnthemEMILIO AGUINALDO ndash was the first president of the Philippines

BALANAN ISABELA ndash the place where Gen Emilio Aguinaldo was captured In 1922 the US War Dept authorized the establishment of the Dept of Military Science andTactics under the supervision of the US Army This was established in theUniversity of the Philippines

MANUEL LUIS QUEZON ndash the first president of the Philippine Commonwealth

COMMONWEALTH ACT NO1 ndash is otherwise known as the National Defense Act issued by President Quezon and approved on December 21 1935 and gave the basicorganization of the AFP

GENERAL DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon during the Commonwealth period that helped in the planning andorganization of the Philippine Military EstablishmentGENDOUGLAS MCARTHURrsquoS STAFF

1 MAJ GEN DWIGHT D EISENHOWER2 MAJ GEN JAMES ORD

JANUARY 11 1936 ndash the date President Manuel L Quezon issued Executive Order No 11 onthe establishment of the PA

BRIG GEN BASILIO J VALDEZ ndash first assistant Chief of staff

BRIG GEN JOSE DELOS REYES ndash designated as the first Chief of Staff of the PhilippineArmy

COL GUILLERMO B FRANCISCO ndash 2nd assistant Chief of Staff The PHILLIPINE CONSTABULARY became the nucleus of the Philippine Army and the Philippine Constabulary Air Corps (PCA) was activated on January 2 1937

FEBRUARY 9 1939 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was activated and organized as a unit of thePhilippine Army The Off-Shore Patrol was equipped with Q-Boats (Torpedo Boat)and referred to as the ldquoMosquito Fleetrdquo

PRESIDENT FRANKLIN DELANO ROOSEVELT ndash President of the USA who set July 26 1941 as the date for the declaration of State of National Emergency and at the sametime the induction of the Philippine Army to United States Armed Forces to the Far East (USAFFE) with a total force of 160000 officers and men

GEN DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash was designated as the USAFFE COMMANDER

DECEMBER 8 1941 ndash the date the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked Pearl Harbor Clark Fieldand other targets

APRIL 9 1942 ndash fall of Bataan

MAY 6 1942 ndash fall of Corregidor

MAJOR FERDINAND EDRALIN MARCOS ndash was the most decorated soldier during the World War II and was a recipient of 27 medals

OCTOBER 20 1944 ndash the date the US Liberation Forces landed in Red Beach in Palo Leyte

JULY 3 1947 ndash the date the PC Air Corps was re-designated as the Philippine Air Force

OCTOBER 1947 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol was renamed Phil Naval Patrol ndash the date President Manuel Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 remainingthe Army of the Philippines as Armed Forces of the Philippines andactivating the 4 military areas

ARAW NG KAGITINGAN ndash a day set to commemorate the Fall of Bataan Fall of Corregidorand Fall of Bessang Pass Based on the historical records the independenceof the Republic of the Philippines was on June 12 1898

JULY 4 1946 ndash declaration of the Independence by the USA celebrated today as PhilippineAmerican Friendship Day

JULY 1950 ndash the Philippine Army was separated from the Gen Headquarters Philippine Army

DECEMBER 23 1950 ndash President ElpidioQuirino issued Executive Order No 389 renamingthe Headquarters AFP to Gen Headquarters AFP (GHQ AFP)

JANUARY 5 1951 ndash the Phil Naval Patrol was renamed the Philippine Naval of thePHILIPPINE NAVY

1959 ndash 1955 ndash the Battalion Combat Teams were sent to Korea to comply with the commitmentsof the Philippines as member of the UN The BCT was known as the PHILIPPINE EXPEDITIONARY FORCE TO KOREA (PEFTOK)

SEPTEMBER 1954 ndash The Philippines joined the Southeast Asian Treaty Org (SEATO)

APRIL 11 1963 ndash the PAF contingent of 77 officers and men were sent to Congo Republic of South VietnamPHIL CIVIC ACTION GROUP (PHILCAG) ndash the group of engineers medical and ruralcommunity development team and security personnel were sent by thePhilippines to the representative of South Vietnam

FEBRUARY 22-25 1986 ndash the bloodless peoples revolution which deposed Ferdinand Marcosfrom the presidency and as Commander in elected President of thePhilippines commonly referred to as the EDSA Revolution

ACRONYMSBCT ndash Battalion Combat TeamGHQ ndash General HeadquartersHMB ndash HukbongMapagpalayang Bayan (HUKBALAHAP)PHILCAG-V ndash Philippine Civic Action Group to VietnamSEATO ndash Southeast Asian Treaty OrganizationOSP ndash Off-Shore PatrolPEFTOK ndash Philippine Expeditionary Force to Korea

ENLISTED PERSONNELrsquoS RANKS

MarinesArmy Navy Constabulary Air Force

C ndash CadetCadette M- MidshipmanMidshipwoman

CHAPTER V

MILITARY LEADERSHIP AND COMMAND

A Leadership ndash is the art of influencing and directing men to an assigned goal is such a way toobtain their obedience respect and loyal cooperation Leadership can beexercised by anyone at anytime respective of the frame work of the command

Command ndash is the authority which an individual in the military service lawfully exercisedover subordinates by virtue of his rank and assignment Command andleadership are inseparable whether the function of the command is complex orsimple the commander should always be the controlling head

B TWO TYPES OF LEADER

1 Authoritarian ndash a leader who leads his men by means of rank and position

2 Persuasive ndash a leader who leads his men by always setting examples

C BASIC ELEMENTS OF LEADERSHIP

1 Character ndash to be a leader a person must be of good character Some indications arehonesty good manners industrious self-control and bravery

2 Intelligence ndash is the ability to grasp knowledge easily It includes native ability goodcommon sense and judgment

3 Alertness ndash is mental and physical watchfulness vigilance and observance to his planned and future activity

D LEADERSHIP RESPONSIBILITIES

1 Accomplishment of the assigned mission or task

2 Work for the welfare of his men

E LEADERSHIP TRAITS

1 Knowledge ndash professional knowledge of the job Understands the characteristics of his men2 Bearing ndash dignified appearance and behavior

3 Courage ndash physical and moral ability to act in spite of danger or hardship

4 Decisiveness ndash ability to decide promptly and correctly the proper time and to announce his decision clearly and briefly with authority

5 Dependability ndash performance of duty with or without supervision

6 Endurance ndash physical and mental strength to continue or complete a task

7 Enthusiasm ndash interest in his work or task at hand

8 Force ndash the ability to compel obedience

9 Humility ndash state of being reasonable and proud but not arrogant and boastful

10 Humor ndash ability to appreciate and narrate amusing incidents of everyday life

11 Initiative ndash ability to start or originate an idea or work even when others are absent

12 Judgment ndash power of mind to weight factors affecting a problem and to decide properly

13 Integrity ndash good moral character

14 Justice ndash impartiality in dealing with others giving credit when due and punishment when so demanded

15 Loyalty - sincerity and faithfulness to superiors for the good of the unit

16 Sympathy ndash mutual feelings to others

17 Tact ndash ability to deal with people without hurting their feelings

18 Unselfishness - avoidance of personal consideration that gives a disadvantage

to others

F PRINCIPLES IN LEADERSHIP

1 Know your job - must have thorough professional knowledge of his duties and responsibilities to

command and gain respect from his men

2Know yourself and seek self-improvement - a leader should analyze himself to determine his

good qualities and learn to recognize and correct his weakness

3 Know your men and look after their welfare - understand each of your men personally

psychologically in order to effectively lead them

4 Keep your men informed - keep your men knowledgeable background in all aspects its

organization and mission in order to function effectively

5 Set an example -set a good example as a model in loyalty in superiors and subordinates good

bearing and attitudes pride and faithfulness to the organization

6 Insure the task is understood supervised and accomplished - a leader should give a clear and

concise order that can be understood He supervises his men to accomplish the

assigned mission

7 Train your men as a team - teamwork is a must within and among units from the

smallest to the largest Each men should understand that he has a job to perform

and must cooperate with others in achieving the common objective

8 Make sound and timely decisions - the ability to make raid estimate of the situation Arrive at the

sound decision and announce his decision in the correct form of the proper is

essential to a leader For any situation that may arise the leader should be able to

act logically

9 Develop a sense of responsibility among your subordinates - the leader should train his

subordinates to act in the absence of orders when the situation so demands He

develops responsibility among his subordinates byproper delegation of his

authority and holding them responsible for theaccomplishment of their mission

10 Employ your commands in accordance with its capability - the leader must have thorough knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of his command He must assign objectives that is responsible to be attained However when the situation so demands then men must be forced to action beyond their normal endurance so as to avoid a harder or more costly consequence on their part

11 See responsibility and take responsibility for your action - learn the seniors job for youmay assume his position later on Take advantage of the responsibility delegated toyou and do not back out in case of failure

ROLES OF A LEADER

1 The leader is a model soldier2 The leader is a commander3 The leader is an instructor4 The leader is a personal manager5 The leader is a councilor6 The leader is a custodian of his mens welfare

OBJECTIVES OF A LEADER

1 MORALE - the mental and emotional state of an individual 2 DISCIPLINE - the prompt and willing obedience to orders Complying to regulations and initiating appropriate action even in theabsence of orders 3 PROFICIENCY - the technical tactical and physical ability of an individual to perform their mission 4 ESPRIT DE CORPS - More than the aggregate personality it is how the individuals feel about their unit Jealous of enthusiasticfor pride in and devotion for

MAP READING

MAP - is a graphical representation of the earths surface drawn to a scale on aplane When you look at the map you are actually looking at a picture ofthe ground from a high spot in the air MAP COLOR - different colors are used on the printing of the maps to assist the use understanding it A GREEN - represents all types of vegetables B BLUE - signifies bodies of water such as rivers lakes swamps and streams C RED - indicates first class roads and prominent locations such as theProvincial or Municipal Capitals May be used to stress the significance ofimportant map locations

D BROWN - depicts contour lines which are representation of the relatives elevation and relief of the terrain

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

1 Inspection Arms - Siyasat TA2 Port Arms - Agap TA3 Order Arms - Baba TA4 Call Off - TuluyangBilang5 Report - Mag-ulat

C To Align the Squad ( PaghahanayngTilap )

1 Dress Right Dress - TuntonKanan NA2 Dress Left Dress -TuntonKaliwa NA3 At Close Interval Dress RightDress Left -MasinsinPagitan TuntonKananKaliwa NA4 Ready Fort - Handa RAP5 Cover - Tumakip

D To Change Interval while in Line ( PagpalitngpagitanSamantalangNakahanay )

1 Close March - LakadPasinsin KAD2 Extended March - LakadPadalang KAD3 Extended to the Left - IbayongLakadPakaliwa KADE Marching the Squad from a line ( PaglakadsaPangkatmulasaHanay ) 1 Right Face - HarapsaKanan RAP 2 Left Face - HarapsaKaliwa RAP 3 Forward March - Pasulong KAD 4 Column Right March - LikosaKanan KADNA 5 Column Left March - LikosaKaliwa KADNA 6 Column Half Right March - Liko Hating Kanan KADNA 7 Column Half Left March - Liko Hating Kaliwa KADNA 8 Incline to the Left - PagawingKanan 9 Incline to the Right - PagawingKaliwa 10 Right Left March - KaliwaKanangpanig NA

F Counting of Men ( PagbilangngKawal )

1 Count Off - SabayangBilang NA 2 Call Off - TuluyangBilang NA

G To Change Interval While in Column ( PagpalitngPagitanSamantalangNakatudling )

1 Close March - LakadPasinsin KAD 2 Extend March - LakadPadalang KAD

MILITARY DRILLS AND CEREMONIES

MILITARY CEREMONIES - The movement of the larger unit or troops in a prescribed manner from one place to another

1 REVIEW - A military ceremony held in honor of a visiting commander official or dignitary It is also a fittingaffair to present decorations and awards to deserving members or units of the command

A REVIEW IS NORMALLY CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING ELEMENTSa Formation of troopsb Presentation of troopsc Inspection of troopsd Presentation of awards and decorations

2 PARADE - A more formal ceremony than a review In this ceremony the appearance and movement of thetroops in the formation are the primary consideration The preparation and organization of troops forparades are similar to those of a review The line on which the troops are to be formed and the route ofmarch of the participating units are marked or designated The distance between the troops and thecommander for the parade formation is greater than that of a reviewTWO DISTINCT TYPES OF PARADES1 Evening Parade2 Moonlight Parade

DRILL COMMANDS - An oral of a commander

TWO PARTS 1 PREPARATORY COMMAND - States the movement or formation to be carried out and mentally prepares theindividual for its execution It is a command which indicates the movement

2 COMMAND OF EXECUTION - Tells when the movement is to be carried out It is a command which indicates when amovement is to be executed

EXAMPLE FORWARD MARCHForwardPreparatory Command MarchCommand of Execution

PREPARATORY COMMAND AND COMMAND OF EXECUTION

1 Fall in Fall out - Humanay Tumiwalag

2 Rest - Pahinga3 As you were - Manumbalik4 At ease - TindigPaluwag5 Change step - PalikHakbang

SUPPLEMENTARY COMMAND - The subordinate commander gives a supplementary command He turns his head towards themajority of his elements and gives command over his shoulder He does not face about

MASS COMMAND - May be used to develop confidence and enthusiasm All of the members of the unit being trained speak in unison and execute them

THINGS TO OBSERVE IN GIVING COMMANDS

Inflection - The rise and fall of pitch and the tone changes of the voice

Cadence In Command - The uniform and rhythmic flow of words

Snap - The extra quality in command that demands immediate responseREMEMBER

1 Correct commands have a tone cadence and snap that demands willingness correct and immediateresponse 2 The loudness of the command is adjusted to the number of men in the unit 3 The best posture for giving command is at the position of attention 4 The most desirable pitch when beginning a preparatory command is near the level of your natural speaking voice

MILITARY COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

MILITARY COURTESY - Is the expression or manifestation of consideration for others It is a virtue that is expected of all individuals from all walks of life In the Armed Forces courtesy is a great requirement because it is thebasic upon which military discipline stands With courtesy and respect among members of the organizationwould lose its orderliness and later disintegrate Furthermore courtesy promotes good relationship closer coordination and teamwork among members of the organization It makes theorganization dignified and insures good relations with the public

SALUTES- Is the most important form of military courtesy It is executed by raising the right man smartlyUntil the tip of the forefinger touches the eyebrow or the front brim of the head gear when coveredForefingers are extended and joined palm facing the left forearm inclined at an angle of about 45 degrees

and the right upper arm horizontal to the ground A person saluting looks at the person beingsaluted When the salute is returned he drops the right hand smartly to the side

RULES IN RENDERING HAND SALUTEa The salute is required on and off military installations during outside office hoursb Persons entitled to the saluted 1 All commissioned officers of the AFP both male and female 2 Commissioned officers of friendly nations when they are recognized as such 3 Officers of the Coast and Geodetic Survey and the Public Health Service when they are serving with the AFP 4 All civilian who are entitled by custom to salutec The salute is rendered at a distance of about 6 paces from the person saluted of at the recognizable distances about 30 pacesd The salute must be rendered to those entitled to it It is not rendered when running but at halt or walk Never salute with a cigarette cigar or pipe in the mouth The salute should not be executed in a haphazardway or perfunctory manner Salutes are exchange whether individuals are cover or uncoverede The salute is rendered at once if the senior remains in the immediate vicinity and no conversation takesplace the junior again salutes the senior when they are path from each otherf In making reports the person reporting salutes first regardless of rank An example of this case is whenthe unit commander is reporting to the adjutant during ceremoniesg) Whom not to salute

1 Standing to a horse or leading a horse2 While at work In case the officer calls the soldier stops working approaches and salutes him

and again when they are part to each other3 Indoors except when reporting to an officer or when the soldier is on duty sentry or guard4 When carrying articles with both hands or being so occupied as to make saluting practical5 When riding in a fast moving vehicle and the other is dismounted the salute is not rendered

Exception are when the vehicle is clearly marked to indicate a General Officer and when saluting is a part of the ceremony

6 When meeting a prisoner of war Soldier serving as military prisoner are not entitled to salute7 In case of doubt due to absence of specific instruction the salute is rendered

The term ldquooutdoorrdquo is constructed to include such buildings as drill halls gymnasiums and other roofed enclosures used for drill or exercise of troops Theaters covered walks and other shelters open on the side are also considered as outdoor

ldquoIndoorsrdquo include offices hallways kitchen orderly rooms recreation halls washroom and quarters

ldquoUnder armsrdquo means carrying arms having them attached to the person by sling holster or other means In the absence of arms the wearing of cartridge bells pistol holsters and automatic rifle belts also mean ldquounder armsrdquo

TYPES OF SALUTES

a Hand saluteb The Rifle Salute at Order Armsc The Rifle Salute at Trail Armsd The Rifle Salute at Present Armse The Rifle Salute at Shoulder Arms (Right Shoulder)f The Rifle Salute at Left Shoulder Armsg The Gun Saluteh Eyes Right by men in ranks when Pass in Review

REPORTING TO AN OFFICER

The salute is rendered by a junior when reporting to a senior He also salutes before leaving

a REPORTING INDOORS WITHOUT ARMS

A soldier removes his headgear knocks at the door of the office of the officer and enters when told to do so Upon entering he halts at about two paces from the officer and salutes and says Sir Cadet Airman Dela Cruz reporting to the squadron commander Sir The salute will be retained until he completes his report and the officer had returned his salute execute about face and leaves the office

b REPORTING INDOORS UNDER ARMS

The procedure for reporting is the same as discussed above except that the soldier remain covered If carrying a rifle the soldier carries it and salute at trail arms Otherwise the hand salute is given

c REPORTING OUTDOORS

The procedure for reporting to an officer the head gear is not removed Rifles should be carried at trail arms or at the right shoulder The hand salute or rifle salute is given as the case may be

d REPORTING FOR PAY

The soldier reporting for pay answers ldquoHererdquo when his name is called approaches and salutes the officer He picks up and count his money and leaves without saluting The officer does not return his salute

OTHER COURTESY TO INDIVIDUALS

a) When an officer enters the room or tent officersrsquo junior to him and enlisted men present with uncover (if unarmed and stand at attention until the officer directs otherwise or leaves the room) When more than one individual are present the first one who perceive the officer will command ldquoAttentionrdquo loud enough to be heard by everybody present

b) When an officer enters a room or tent used as an office working shop or recreation room those at work or at play are not required to come to attention unless addressed by the officer A transaction of routine business between individuals at work

c) When an officer enters an enlisted menus hall the group is called to ldquoAt Easerdquo by the person noticing him first Men remain seated at ease and continue eating unless the officer directs otherwise A soldiers addresses stop eating and sits at attention until the conversation has ended

d) When accompanying a senior a junior walks or ride on his left except when accompanying senior during inspection

e) When entering a car or a small boat the senior goes in first and others follow in the order of rank In getting off he junior goes out first and others follow in the inverse order of rank

HONORS TO THE NATIONAL ANTHEM OR TO THE COLORS

I OUTDOOR

- Wheneverwherever the National Anthem or the colors is played military personnel not in the formation must observe the following

1 At the first note of the music stand at attention and render the prescribed salute except atthe escort of the color or at retreat when they will face toward the color or flag and salute The salute is retained until the last note of the music

2 The mounted on animals will halt and render the salute mounted Individuals loadinganimals or standing to a horse will stand at attention having the salute

3 Vehicles in motion will be brought to a halt Persons riding on a passenger car or amotorcycle will dismount and salute as described above Occupants of combat vehicles such a tanks half trucks scout cars and armored cars will remain in their vehicles but stand at attention and salute

4 The above respect to the National Color is rendered to the National Anthem or colors offriendly nations

II INDOORS

- When the national anthem is played officer and men will stand at attention and face the music or the flag but do not salute

UNCOVERING- Officer and enlisted men under arms uncover when

a) Seated as a member of or in attendance at a court or board Sentinels guarding prisoners do not uncover

b) Entering places of divine worship

c) Indoors when not in duty

d) In attendance at an official reception

DISPLAY AND SALUTE TO THE FLAG

a The Philippine flag represents our nation and should always be given a place of runner

b The National Flag is never dipped for salute nor is it permitted to touch the ground It is not used as a costume dress or a drapery No lettering or object should be placed on it

c The flag is played in the following manners1 When hoisted at a flag pole it should be hoisted fully at the top of the pole blue part

up or above During mornings the flag is hoisted to the top of the pole first then hauled down until the flag is about midway of the length of the pole

2 When the national flag is displayed with another flag whether they are standing sideby side or with their staff crossed the National Flag is at the right side blue part up

3 When placed in the vertical manner the triangle is up the blue color at the right4 When displayed in the horizontal position the triangle is at the right side with the blue

part up5 When displayed over the casket the triangle is in the direction of the head of the cadaver with

the blue part on the right side

During the ceremonies wherein the holstering or lowering of the flag is done or when it passes by during parades or reviews all persons present except those detailed in holstering lowering and carrying the flag should face it at attention and salute while those in uniform remove their headdress with their right hand and place them over their left breast Women should salute by placing their right hand on their left breastMILITARY DISCIPLINE

Military discipline is the mental attitude and state of training which renders obedience and proper conduct instinctive under all conditions It is founded upon respect for loyalty to properly constituted authority While it is primarily developed by military drills every feature in military life has its effect upon military discipline It is generally indicated in an individual or unit by smartness of appearance and action cleanliness of dress equipment or quarters respect for senior and by the prompt and cheerful obedience by the subordinates of both the latter and spirit of the legal orders

RELATION OF COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

The relation of military discipline to courtesy is clearly explained by the fact that discipline is founded upon by respect and loyalty to superiors and lawfully constituted authorities In other words discipline originates and develops mutual respect and goodwill among members of an organization Without courtesy and respect among members of an organization discipline disappears there will be no peace and order in the organization hence it will disintegrate

IMPORTANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Mass discipline and morale are essential factors for securing cohesive action and for ensuring that singleness or purpose which alone can triumph over the most difficult conditions of war The successful leader will teach his men to recognize and face fear because fear is the enemy of discipline and morale Fear unchecked will lead to panic and a unit that is panicky is no longer a disciplined one but a mob There is no same person who is without fear but with good discipline and morale all will face danger if not willingly at least resignedly because of their inborn sentiment of duty or courage of loyalty and because of their sense of pride in their country in their unit and in themselves in other words because of their esprit de corps

The need for discipline is recognized in many places outside the Armed Forces It reaches at highest form in teams wherein individual desires are subordinated to the interests of the entire team The Armed Forces are more in need of discipline for several reasons First the task of making war is not doing it because we as individuals have to do it in the interest of our country Because of that we cannot be allowed as individual to decide which part of the job each of us will do or how each part to be done Second the organization must be prepared for situations wherein leaders may be lost Personal loyalty for the commandment is not enough If a leader is killed his men must accept orders from his successor immediately and without question to carry on the battle Finally the tremendous size of all Armed Forces demands that there be uniform ways of doing things Discipline subordinates personal and self considerations to the interest of the group

MAINTENANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Discipline is installed in men through instructions pride and traditions and regulations You will develop appreciation of the other factors which build discipline as time passes One must know and understand the different laws and regulations immediately

Discipline is maintained in much the same manner as it is attained The article of war punishes military individualsrsquo fairness and justice high moral pride and responsibility contribute to maintain discipline as to developing it

CHAPTER IVARMED FORCES OF THE PHILIPPINESrsquo HISTORY

Brief History of the AFPCommonwealth Act no 1 otherwise known as the National Defense Act was approved on 21

December 1935 which gave the basic organization of the AFP General Douglas McArthur served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon Major General Dwight D Eisenhower and Major General James Ord members of the McArthurrsquos Staff helped in the planting of the Philippine Military Establishment as well as organizing it

As President Quezon issued Executive Order no 11 on January 1936 which formally established the Army of the Philippines he recalled Colonel Jose Delos Reyes of the Philippine Constabulary to active duty and later promoted him to Brigadier General and designated him as Acting Chief of Staff of the Army Brigadier General Basilio J Valdez and Colonel Guillermo B Francisco were named 1 st and 2nd Asst Chief of Staff respectively

In the same order the Philippine Constabulary became the nucleus of the regular forces of the Philippine Army Filipino citizens were required to go training under the National Defense Act since 1936 that would compose reserve force By the end of the ten year Commonwealth period in 1946 there would have been a trained Philippine Army Reserve pool of 400000 officers and men including the graduates of the ROTC Basic and Advance Course in accredited colleges and universities

When the Philippine Constabulary became part of the Philippine Army the PC Air Corps which was activated on 2 January 1955 was re designated Philippine Air Force on 3 July 1947

On February 1939 an Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was organized as a unit of the Philippine Army Initially equipped with three Q-boats (torpedo boats) and a handful of officers and men hurriedly trained in the rudiments of Sea-Warfare the OSP squadron provided coastal support to the beleaguered Filipino-American forces in the battles of Bataan and Corregidor In October 1947 the OSP was renamed Philippine Naval Patrol and on 5 January 1951 it became the Philippine Navy The OSP was often referred to as Mosquito Fleet

When President Franklin D Roosevelt of the USA declared the state of National Emergency on 26 July 1941 and ordered the induction of the Philippine Army units into the US Armed Forces in the Far East under the command of General Douglas Mc Arthur the Philippine Army had a reserve force of about 100000 officers and men at the time of the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked the Pearl Harbor Clark Field and other targets on 8 December 1941 The Philippine Army Reserve Force totaled around 200000 officers and men

The Philippine Army retained its own organization while serving with the USAFFE After the fall of Bataan on 9 April 1942 many officers and men of the Philippine Army continued resistance against the Japanese by forming guerilla forces all over the country These USAFFE guerilla forces along with other units organized by civilians in various parts of the country fought the Japanese Forces from 1942 to 1945 When the US Liberation Forces landed in Leyte on 20 October 1944 all the guerilla forces participated actively on the liberation on their respective sectors of operations

On October 1947 President Manual A Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 which organized all government agencies The Military establishment was not spared from its official designation as Army of the Philippines and it became the Armed Forces of the Philippines The ten pre-war military districts were deactivated but 4 Military Areas were also activated to enhance the efficiency of the Constabulary personnel all over the country

The post-war Philippine Army eventually got its forces fighting another battle ndash the battle against the armed elements of the Communist Party of the Philippines the HUKBALAHAP later renamed HMB For the anti0dissident campaign Army Sector Command and Battalion Combat Teams were formed During the Korean war the 10th 20th 11th 19th and 2nd BCTrsquos were sent as Philippine Expeditionary Force as the member of the United Nations PEFTOK served in Korea from 1950-1955 On 25 December 1950 President Quirino issued Executive Order No 389 renaming headquarters AFP to General Headquarters AFP and activating the 4 major services The Philippine Army Philippine Constabulary Philippine Air Force and Philippine Navy

From the time the Philippines joined the Southeast Asia Treaty Organization (SEATO) in September 1954 the AFP cooperated actively with the other member nations in the enhancing of military preparedness in the area

As a member of the UN the Philippines also sent a Philippine Air Force Contingent of 77 officers and men on a pacification campaign to the Congo Republic on 11 February 1963

In 1966 the Philippine Civic Action Group (PHICAG) was activated to implement the provisions of RA 4644 Composed of engineers medical and rural community development teams and security personnel the PHILCAG was sent to the Republic of South Vietnam and engaged in socio-economic projects mutually agreed upon by the governments of the Republic of the Philippines and Republic of South Vietnam

The AFP has shown an increasing awareness of its arrival in the country and its vital role in the political and economic development of the country by engaging are actively in civic action programs

Pursuant to the Socio-economic Military Program under RA 2056 the Chief of Staff AFP ordered the assignment of military personnel for public works construction food production land settlement and rural development Several civic centers of the AFP

To give greater impetus on the civic action the 51st Engineer Brigade consisting of 10 Engineer Construction Battalion was activated on 10 March 1962 This unit had constructed several much needed highways roads and bridges in various parts of the country The 52nd Engineer Brigade which was organized on 1 July 1969 also performed similar functions to holster the national program for social and economical developments

Today the AFP is employing all its resources in assisting the socio-economic development programs of the government without prejudice to its primary missions of improving and maintaining the effectiveness of the countryrsquos defense posture

SIGNIFICANT FACTS TO REMEMBER

MACTAN ndash place where the first revolt against Spain took place on April 26 1951 The firstrebellion Spain flared up in Bohol and Leyte

ANDRES MALONG ndash led the first major revolt in Luzon in 1660 He proclaimed himself as aKing of PangasinanLAPU ndash LAPU ndash was the first Filipino hero

MIGUEL VICOS ndash the Spanish Meztiso who assassinated Diego Silang on May 28 1863

RED WITH A FIGURE OF A SUN ndash color of the first flag of the Philippines in 1897

ANDRES BONIFACIO ndash was the founder of the Revolutionary Society called Katipunan

GEN GREGORIO DEL PILAR ndash led the Filipino forces in the Battle of Tirad Pass

AUGUST 29 1896 ndash the date designated as the start of the revolution which was also known as

Cry of BalintawakDECEMBER 14 1897 ndashdate when the Treaty of Paris and Fact of Biak-na-bato was signed

FACT OF BIAK-NA-BATO ndash an agreement between the Filipino and the Spanish authoritieson December 14 1897 to stop all hostilities

MARCELA AGONCILLO ndash designed and made the first flag of the first Philippine Republic

JULIAN FELIPE ndash was the composer of the Philippine National AnthemEMILIO AGUINALDO ndash was the first president of the Philippines

BALANAN ISABELA ndash the place where Gen Emilio Aguinaldo was captured In 1922 the US War Dept authorized the establishment of the Dept of Military Science andTactics under the supervision of the US Army This was established in theUniversity of the Philippines

MANUEL LUIS QUEZON ndash the first president of the Philippine Commonwealth

COMMONWEALTH ACT NO1 ndash is otherwise known as the National Defense Act issued by President Quezon and approved on December 21 1935 and gave the basicorganization of the AFP

GENERAL DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon during the Commonwealth period that helped in the planning andorganization of the Philippine Military EstablishmentGENDOUGLAS MCARTHURrsquoS STAFF

1 MAJ GEN DWIGHT D EISENHOWER2 MAJ GEN JAMES ORD

JANUARY 11 1936 ndash the date President Manuel L Quezon issued Executive Order No 11 onthe establishment of the PA

BRIG GEN BASILIO J VALDEZ ndash first assistant Chief of staff

BRIG GEN JOSE DELOS REYES ndash designated as the first Chief of Staff of the PhilippineArmy

COL GUILLERMO B FRANCISCO ndash 2nd assistant Chief of Staff The PHILLIPINE CONSTABULARY became the nucleus of the Philippine Army and the Philippine Constabulary Air Corps (PCA) was activated on January 2 1937

FEBRUARY 9 1939 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was activated and organized as a unit of thePhilippine Army The Off-Shore Patrol was equipped with Q-Boats (Torpedo Boat)and referred to as the ldquoMosquito Fleetrdquo

PRESIDENT FRANKLIN DELANO ROOSEVELT ndash President of the USA who set July 26 1941 as the date for the declaration of State of National Emergency and at the sametime the induction of the Philippine Army to United States Armed Forces to the Far East (USAFFE) with a total force of 160000 officers and men

GEN DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash was designated as the USAFFE COMMANDER

DECEMBER 8 1941 ndash the date the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked Pearl Harbor Clark Fieldand other targets

APRIL 9 1942 ndash fall of Bataan

MAY 6 1942 ndash fall of Corregidor

MAJOR FERDINAND EDRALIN MARCOS ndash was the most decorated soldier during the World War II and was a recipient of 27 medals

OCTOBER 20 1944 ndash the date the US Liberation Forces landed in Red Beach in Palo Leyte

JULY 3 1947 ndash the date the PC Air Corps was re-designated as the Philippine Air Force

OCTOBER 1947 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol was renamed Phil Naval Patrol ndash the date President Manuel Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 remainingthe Army of the Philippines as Armed Forces of the Philippines andactivating the 4 military areas

ARAW NG KAGITINGAN ndash a day set to commemorate the Fall of Bataan Fall of Corregidorand Fall of Bessang Pass Based on the historical records the independenceof the Republic of the Philippines was on June 12 1898

JULY 4 1946 ndash declaration of the Independence by the USA celebrated today as PhilippineAmerican Friendship Day

JULY 1950 ndash the Philippine Army was separated from the Gen Headquarters Philippine Army

DECEMBER 23 1950 ndash President ElpidioQuirino issued Executive Order No 389 renamingthe Headquarters AFP to Gen Headquarters AFP (GHQ AFP)

JANUARY 5 1951 ndash the Phil Naval Patrol was renamed the Philippine Naval of thePHILIPPINE NAVY

1959 ndash 1955 ndash the Battalion Combat Teams were sent to Korea to comply with the commitmentsof the Philippines as member of the UN The BCT was known as the PHILIPPINE EXPEDITIONARY FORCE TO KOREA (PEFTOK)

SEPTEMBER 1954 ndash The Philippines joined the Southeast Asian Treaty Org (SEATO)

APRIL 11 1963 ndash the PAF contingent of 77 officers and men were sent to Congo Republic of South VietnamPHIL CIVIC ACTION GROUP (PHILCAG) ndash the group of engineers medical and ruralcommunity development team and security personnel were sent by thePhilippines to the representative of South Vietnam

FEBRUARY 22-25 1986 ndash the bloodless peoples revolution which deposed Ferdinand Marcosfrom the presidency and as Commander in elected President of thePhilippines commonly referred to as the EDSA Revolution

ACRONYMSBCT ndash Battalion Combat TeamGHQ ndash General HeadquartersHMB ndash HukbongMapagpalayang Bayan (HUKBALAHAP)PHILCAG-V ndash Philippine Civic Action Group to VietnamSEATO ndash Southeast Asian Treaty OrganizationOSP ndash Off-Shore PatrolPEFTOK ndash Philippine Expeditionary Force to Korea

ENLISTED PERSONNELrsquoS RANKS

MarinesArmy Navy Constabulary Air Force

C ndash CadetCadette M- MidshipmanMidshipwoman

CHAPTER V

MILITARY LEADERSHIP AND COMMAND

A Leadership ndash is the art of influencing and directing men to an assigned goal is such a way toobtain their obedience respect and loyal cooperation Leadership can beexercised by anyone at anytime respective of the frame work of the command

Command ndash is the authority which an individual in the military service lawfully exercisedover subordinates by virtue of his rank and assignment Command andleadership are inseparable whether the function of the command is complex orsimple the commander should always be the controlling head

B TWO TYPES OF LEADER

1 Authoritarian ndash a leader who leads his men by means of rank and position

2 Persuasive ndash a leader who leads his men by always setting examples

C BASIC ELEMENTS OF LEADERSHIP

1 Character ndash to be a leader a person must be of good character Some indications arehonesty good manners industrious self-control and bravery

2 Intelligence ndash is the ability to grasp knowledge easily It includes native ability goodcommon sense and judgment

3 Alertness ndash is mental and physical watchfulness vigilance and observance to his planned and future activity

D LEADERSHIP RESPONSIBILITIES

1 Accomplishment of the assigned mission or task

2 Work for the welfare of his men

E LEADERSHIP TRAITS

1 Knowledge ndash professional knowledge of the job Understands the characteristics of his men2 Bearing ndash dignified appearance and behavior

3 Courage ndash physical and moral ability to act in spite of danger or hardship

4 Decisiveness ndash ability to decide promptly and correctly the proper time and to announce his decision clearly and briefly with authority

5 Dependability ndash performance of duty with or without supervision

6 Endurance ndash physical and mental strength to continue or complete a task

7 Enthusiasm ndash interest in his work or task at hand

8 Force ndash the ability to compel obedience

9 Humility ndash state of being reasonable and proud but not arrogant and boastful

10 Humor ndash ability to appreciate and narrate amusing incidents of everyday life

11 Initiative ndash ability to start or originate an idea or work even when others are absent

12 Judgment ndash power of mind to weight factors affecting a problem and to decide properly

13 Integrity ndash good moral character

14 Justice ndash impartiality in dealing with others giving credit when due and punishment when so demanded

15 Loyalty - sincerity and faithfulness to superiors for the good of the unit

16 Sympathy ndash mutual feelings to others

17 Tact ndash ability to deal with people without hurting their feelings

18 Unselfishness - avoidance of personal consideration that gives a disadvantage

to others

F PRINCIPLES IN LEADERSHIP

1 Know your job - must have thorough professional knowledge of his duties and responsibilities to

command and gain respect from his men

2Know yourself and seek self-improvement - a leader should analyze himself to determine his

good qualities and learn to recognize and correct his weakness

3 Know your men and look after their welfare - understand each of your men personally

psychologically in order to effectively lead them

4 Keep your men informed - keep your men knowledgeable background in all aspects its

organization and mission in order to function effectively

5 Set an example -set a good example as a model in loyalty in superiors and subordinates good

bearing and attitudes pride and faithfulness to the organization

6 Insure the task is understood supervised and accomplished - a leader should give a clear and

concise order that can be understood He supervises his men to accomplish the

assigned mission

7 Train your men as a team - teamwork is a must within and among units from the

smallest to the largest Each men should understand that he has a job to perform

and must cooperate with others in achieving the common objective

8 Make sound and timely decisions - the ability to make raid estimate of the situation Arrive at the

sound decision and announce his decision in the correct form of the proper is

essential to a leader For any situation that may arise the leader should be able to

act logically

9 Develop a sense of responsibility among your subordinates - the leader should train his

subordinates to act in the absence of orders when the situation so demands He

develops responsibility among his subordinates byproper delegation of his

authority and holding them responsible for theaccomplishment of their mission

10 Employ your commands in accordance with its capability - the leader must have thorough knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of his command He must assign objectives that is responsible to be attained However when the situation so demands then men must be forced to action beyond their normal endurance so as to avoid a harder or more costly consequence on their part

11 See responsibility and take responsibility for your action - learn the seniors job for youmay assume his position later on Take advantage of the responsibility delegated toyou and do not back out in case of failure

ROLES OF A LEADER

1 The leader is a model soldier2 The leader is a commander3 The leader is an instructor4 The leader is a personal manager5 The leader is a councilor6 The leader is a custodian of his mens welfare

OBJECTIVES OF A LEADER

1 MORALE - the mental and emotional state of an individual 2 DISCIPLINE - the prompt and willing obedience to orders Complying to regulations and initiating appropriate action even in theabsence of orders 3 PROFICIENCY - the technical tactical and physical ability of an individual to perform their mission 4 ESPRIT DE CORPS - More than the aggregate personality it is how the individuals feel about their unit Jealous of enthusiasticfor pride in and devotion for

MAP READING

MAP - is a graphical representation of the earths surface drawn to a scale on aplane When you look at the map you are actually looking at a picture ofthe ground from a high spot in the air MAP COLOR - different colors are used on the printing of the maps to assist the use understanding it A GREEN - represents all types of vegetables B BLUE - signifies bodies of water such as rivers lakes swamps and streams C RED - indicates first class roads and prominent locations such as theProvincial or Municipal Capitals May be used to stress the significance ofimportant map locations

D BROWN - depicts contour lines which are representation of the relatives elevation and relief of the terrain

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

MILITARY CEREMONIES - The movement of the larger unit or troops in a prescribed manner from one place to another

1 REVIEW - A military ceremony held in honor of a visiting commander official or dignitary It is also a fittingaffair to present decorations and awards to deserving members or units of the command

A REVIEW IS NORMALLY CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING ELEMENTSa Formation of troopsb Presentation of troopsc Inspection of troopsd Presentation of awards and decorations

2 PARADE - A more formal ceremony than a review In this ceremony the appearance and movement of thetroops in the formation are the primary consideration The preparation and organization of troops forparades are similar to those of a review The line on which the troops are to be formed and the route ofmarch of the participating units are marked or designated The distance between the troops and thecommander for the parade formation is greater than that of a reviewTWO DISTINCT TYPES OF PARADES1 Evening Parade2 Moonlight Parade

DRILL COMMANDS - An oral of a commander

TWO PARTS 1 PREPARATORY COMMAND - States the movement or formation to be carried out and mentally prepares theindividual for its execution It is a command which indicates the movement

2 COMMAND OF EXECUTION - Tells when the movement is to be carried out It is a command which indicates when amovement is to be executed

EXAMPLE FORWARD MARCHForwardPreparatory Command MarchCommand of Execution

PREPARATORY COMMAND AND COMMAND OF EXECUTION

1 Fall in Fall out - Humanay Tumiwalag

2 Rest - Pahinga3 As you were - Manumbalik4 At ease - TindigPaluwag5 Change step - PalikHakbang

SUPPLEMENTARY COMMAND - The subordinate commander gives a supplementary command He turns his head towards themajority of his elements and gives command over his shoulder He does not face about

MASS COMMAND - May be used to develop confidence and enthusiasm All of the members of the unit being trained speak in unison and execute them

THINGS TO OBSERVE IN GIVING COMMANDS

Inflection - The rise and fall of pitch and the tone changes of the voice

Cadence In Command - The uniform and rhythmic flow of words

Snap - The extra quality in command that demands immediate responseREMEMBER

1 Correct commands have a tone cadence and snap that demands willingness correct and immediateresponse 2 The loudness of the command is adjusted to the number of men in the unit 3 The best posture for giving command is at the position of attention 4 The most desirable pitch when beginning a preparatory command is near the level of your natural speaking voice

MILITARY COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

MILITARY COURTESY - Is the expression or manifestation of consideration for others It is a virtue that is expected of all individuals from all walks of life In the Armed Forces courtesy is a great requirement because it is thebasic upon which military discipline stands With courtesy and respect among members of the organizationwould lose its orderliness and later disintegrate Furthermore courtesy promotes good relationship closer coordination and teamwork among members of the organization It makes theorganization dignified and insures good relations with the public

SALUTES- Is the most important form of military courtesy It is executed by raising the right man smartlyUntil the tip of the forefinger touches the eyebrow or the front brim of the head gear when coveredForefingers are extended and joined palm facing the left forearm inclined at an angle of about 45 degrees

and the right upper arm horizontal to the ground A person saluting looks at the person beingsaluted When the salute is returned he drops the right hand smartly to the side

RULES IN RENDERING HAND SALUTEa The salute is required on and off military installations during outside office hoursb Persons entitled to the saluted 1 All commissioned officers of the AFP both male and female 2 Commissioned officers of friendly nations when they are recognized as such 3 Officers of the Coast and Geodetic Survey and the Public Health Service when they are serving with the AFP 4 All civilian who are entitled by custom to salutec The salute is rendered at a distance of about 6 paces from the person saluted of at the recognizable distances about 30 pacesd The salute must be rendered to those entitled to it It is not rendered when running but at halt or walk Never salute with a cigarette cigar or pipe in the mouth The salute should not be executed in a haphazardway or perfunctory manner Salutes are exchange whether individuals are cover or uncoverede The salute is rendered at once if the senior remains in the immediate vicinity and no conversation takesplace the junior again salutes the senior when they are path from each otherf In making reports the person reporting salutes first regardless of rank An example of this case is whenthe unit commander is reporting to the adjutant during ceremoniesg) Whom not to salute

1 Standing to a horse or leading a horse2 While at work In case the officer calls the soldier stops working approaches and salutes him

and again when they are part to each other3 Indoors except when reporting to an officer or when the soldier is on duty sentry or guard4 When carrying articles with both hands or being so occupied as to make saluting practical5 When riding in a fast moving vehicle and the other is dismounted the salute is not rendered

Exception are when the vehicle is clearly marked to indicate a General Officer and when saluting is a part of the ceremony

6 When meeting a prisoner of war Soldier serving as military prisoner are not entitled to salute7 In case of doubt due to absence of specific instruction the salute is rendered

The term ldquooutdoorrdquo is constructed to include such buildings as drill halls gymnasiums and other roofed enclosures used for drill or exercise of troops Theaters covered walks and other shelters open on the side are also considered as outdoor

ldquoIndoorsrdquo include offices hallways kitchen orderly rooms recreation halls washroom and quarters

ldquoUnder armsrdquo means carrying arms having them attached to the person by sling holster or other means In the absence of arms the wearing of cartridge bells pistol holsters and automatic rifle belts also mean ldquounder armsrdquo

TYPES OF SALUTES

a Hand saluteb The Rifle Salute at Order Armsc The Rifle Salute at Trail Armsd The Rifle Salute at Present Armse The Rifle Salute at Shoulder Arms (Right Shoulder)f The Rifle Salute at Left Shoulder Armsg The Gun Saluteh Eyes Right by men in ranks when Pass in Review

REPORTING TO AN OFFICER

The salute is rendered by a junior when reporting to a senior He also salutes before leaving

a REPORTING INDOORS WITHOUT ARMS

A soldier removes his headgear knocks at the door of the office of the officer and enters when told to do so Upon entering he halts at about two paces from the officer and salutes and says Sir Cadet Airman Dela Cruz reporting to the squadron commander Sir The salute will be retained until he completes his report and the officer had returned his salute execute about face and leaves the office

b REPORTING INDOORS UNDER ARMS

The procedure for reporting is the same as discussed above except that the soldier remain covered If carrying a rifle the soldier carries it and salute at trail arms Otherwise the hand salute is given

c REPORTING OUTDOORS

The procedure for reporting to an officer the head gear is not removed Rifles should be carried at trail arms or at the right shoulder The hand salute or rifle salute is given as the case may be

d REPORTING FOR PAY

The soldier reporting for pay answers ldquoHererdquo when his name is called approaches and salutes the officer He picks up and count his money and leaves without saluting The officer does not return his salute

OTHER COURTESY TO INDIVIDUALS

a) When an officer enters the room or tent officersrsquo junior to him and enlisted men present with uncover (if unarmed and stand at attention until the officer directs otherwise or leaves the room) When more than one individual are present the first one who perceive the officer will command ldquoAttentionrdquo loud enough to be heard by everybody present

b) When an officer enters a room or tent used as an office working shop or recreation room those at work or at play are not required to come to attention unless addressed by the officer A transaction of routine business between individuals at work

c) When an officer enters an enlisted menus hall the group is called to ldquoAt Easerdquo by the person noticing him first Men remain seated at ease and continue eating unless the officer directs otherwise A soldiers addresses stop eating and sits at attention until the conversation has ended

d) When accompanying a senior a junior walks or ride on his left except when accompanying senior during inspection

e) When entering a car or a small boat the senior goes in first and others follow in the order of rank In getting off he junior goes out first and others follow in the inverse order of rank

HONORS TO THE NATIONAL ANTHEM OR TO THE COLORS

I OUTDOOR

- Wheneverwherever the National Anthem or the colors is played military personnel not in the formation must observe the following

1 At the first note of the music stand at attention and render the prescribed salute except atthe escort of the color or at retreat when they will face toward the color or flag and salute The salute is retained until the last note of the music

2 The mounted on animals will halt and render the salute mounted Individuals loadinganimals or standing to a horse will stand at attention having the salute

3 Vehicles in motion will be brought to a halt Persons riding on a passenger car or amotorcycle will dismount and salute as described above Occupants of combat vehicles such a tanks half trucks scout cars and armored cars will remain in their vehicles but stand at attention and salute

4 The above respect to the National Color is rendered to the National Anthem or colors offriendly nations

II INDOORS

- When the national anthem is played officer and men will stand at attention and face the music or the flag but do not salute

UNCOVERING- Officer and enlisted men under arms uncover when

a) Seated as a member of or in attendance at a court or board Sentinels guarding prisoners do not uncover

b) Entering places of divine worship

c) Indoors when not in duty

d) In attendance at an official reception

DISPLAY AND SALUTE TO THE FLAG

a The Philippine flag represents our nation and should always be given a place of runner

b The National Flag is never dipped for salute nor is it permitted to touch the ground It is not used as a costume dress or a drapery No lettering or object should be placed on it

c The flag is played in the following manners1 When hoisted at a flag pole it should be hoisted fully at the top of the pole blue part

up or above During mornings the flag is hoisted to the top of the pole first then hauled down until the flag is about midway of the length of the pole

2 When the national flag is displayed with another flag whether they are standing sideby side or with their staff crossed the National Flag is at the right side blue part up

3 When placed in the vertical manner the triangle is up the blue color at the right4 When displayed in the horizontal position the triangle is at the right side with the blue

part up5 When displayed over the casket the triangle is in the direction of the head of the cadaver with

the blue part on the right side

During the ceremonies wherein the holstering or lowering of the flag is done or when it passes by during parades or reviews all persons present except those detailed in holstering lowering and carrying the flag should face it at attention and salute while those in uniform remove their headdress with their right hand and place them over their left breast Women should salute by placing their right hand on their left breastMILITARY DISCIPLINE

Military discipline is the mental attitude and state of training which renders obedience and proper conduct instinctive under all conditions It is founded upon respect for loyalty to properly constituted authority While it is primarily developed by military drills every feature in military life has its effect upon military discipline It is generally indicated in an individual or unit by smartness of appearance and action cleanliness of dress equipment or quarters respect for senior and by the prompt and cheerful obedience by the subordinates of both the latter and spirit of the legal orders

RELATION OF COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

The relation of military discipline to courtesy is clearly explained by the fact that discipline is founded upon by respect and loyalty to superiors and lawfully constituted authorities In other words discipline originates and develops mutual respect and goodwill among members of an organization Without courtesy and respect among members of an organization discipline disappears there will be no peace and order in the organization hence it will disintegrate

IMPORTANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Mass discipline and morale are essential factors for securing cohesive action and for ensuring that singleness or purpose which alone can triumph over the most difficult conditions of war The successful leader will teach his men to recognize and face fear because fear is the enemy of discipline and morale Fear unchecked will lead to panic and a unit that is panicky is no longer a disciplined one but a mob There is no same person who is without fear but with good discipline and morale all will face danger if not willingly at least resignedly because of their inborn sentiment of duty or courage of loyalty and because of their sense of pride in their country in their unit and in themselves in other words because of their esprit de corps

The need for discipline is recognized in many places outside the Armed Forces It reaches at highest form in teams wherein individual desires are subordinated to the interests of the entire team The Armed Forces are more in need of discipline for several reasons First the task of making war is not doing it because we as individuals have to do it in the interest of our country Because of that we cannot be allowed as individual to decide which part of the job each of us will do or how each part to be done Second the organization must be prepared for situations wherein leaders may be lost Personal loyalty for the commandment is not enough If a leader is killed his men must accept orders from his successor immediately and without question to carry on the battle Finally the tremendous size of all Armed Forces demands that there be uniform ways of doing things Discipline subordinates personal and self considerations to the interest of the group

MAINTENANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Discipline is installed in men through instructions pride and traditions and regulations You will develop appreciation of the other factors which build discipline as time passes One must know and understand the different laws and regulations immediately

Discipline is maintained in much the same manner as it is attained The article of war punishes military individualsrsquo fairness and justice high moral pride and responsibility contribute to maintain discipline as to developing it

CHAPTER IVARMED FORCES OF THE PHILIPPINESrsquo HISTORY

Brief History of the AFPCommonwealth Act no 1 otherwise known as the National Defense Act was approved on 21

December 1935 which gave the basic organization of the AFP General Douglas McArthur served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon Major General Dwight D Eisenhower and Major General James Ord members of the McArthurrsquos Staff helped in the planting of the Philippine Military Establishment as well as organizing it

As President Quezon issued Executive Order no 11 on January 1936 which formally established the Army of the Philippines he recalled Colonel Jose Delos Reyes of the Philippine Constabulary to active duty and later promoted him to Brigadier General and designated him as Acting Chief of Staff of the Army Brigadier General Basilio J Valdez and Colonel Guillermo B Francisco were named 1 st and 2nd Asst Chief of Staff respectively

In the same order the Philippine Constabulary became the nucleus of the regular forces of the Philippine Army Filipino citizens were required to go training under the National Defense Act since 1936 that would compose reserve force By the end of the ten year Commonwealth period in 1946 there would have been a trained Philippine Army Reserve pool of 400000 officers and men including the graduates of the ROTC Basic and Advance Course in accredited colleges and universities

When the Philippine Constabulary became part of the Philippine Army the PC Air Corps which was activated on 2 January 1955 was re designated Philippine Air Force on 3 July 1947

On February 1939 an Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was organized as a unit of the Philippine Army Initially equipped with three Q-boats (torpedo boats) and a handful of officers and men hurriedly trained in the rudiments of Sea-Warfare the OSP squadron provided coastal support to the beleaguered Filipino-American forces in the battles of Bataan and Corregidor In October 1947 the OSP was renamed Philippine Naval Patrol and on 5 January 1951 it became the Philippine Navy The OSP was often referred to as Mosquito Fleet

When President Franklin D Roosevelt of the USA declared the state of National Emergency on 26 July 1941 and ordered the induction of the Philippine Army units into the US Armed Forces in the Far East under the command of General Douglas Mc Arthur the Philippine Army had a reserve force of about 100000 officers and men at the time of the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked the Pearl Harbor Clark Field and other targets on 8 December 1941 The Philippine Army Reserve Force totaled around 200000 officers and men

The Philippine Army retained its own organization while serving with the USAFFE After the fall of Bataan on 9 April 1942 many officers and men of the Philippine Army continued resistance against the Japanese by forming guerilla forces all over the country These USAFFE guerilla forces along with other units organized by civilians in various parts of the country fought the Japanese Forces from 1942 to 1945 When the US Liberation Forces landed in Leyte on 20 October 1944 all the guerilla forces participated actively on the liberation on their respective sectors of operations

On October 1947 President Manual A Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 which organized all government agencies The Military establishment was not spared from its official designation as Army of the Philippines and it became the Armed Forces of the Philippines The ten pre-war military districts were deactivated but 4 Military Areas were also activated to enhance the efficiency of the Constabulary personnel all over the country

The post-war Philippine Army eventually got its forces fighting another battle ndash the battle against the armed elements of the Communist Party of the Philippines the HUKBALAHAP later renamed HMB For the anti0dissident campaign Army Sector Command and Battalion Combat Teams were formed During the Korean war the 10th 20th 11th 19th and 2nd BCTrsquos were sent as Philippine Expeditionary Force as the member of the United Nations PEFTOK served in Korea from 1950-1955 On 25 December 1950 President Quirino issued Executive Order No 389 renaming headquarters AFP to General Headquarters AFP and activating the 4 major services The Philippine Army Philippine Constabulary Philippine Air Force and Philippine Navy

From the time the Philippines joined the Southeast Asia Treaty Organization (SEATO) in September 1954 the AFP cooperated actively with the other member nations in the enhancing of military preparedness in the area

As a member of the UN the Philippines also sent a Philippine Air Force Contingent of 77 officers and men on a pacification campaign to the Congo Republic on 11 February 1963

In 1966 the Philippine Civic Action Group (PHICAG) was activated to implement the provisions of RA 4644 Composed of engineers medical and rural community development teams and security personnel the PHILCAG was sent to the Republic of South Vietnam and engaged in socio-economic projects mutually agreed upon by the governments of the Republic of the Philippines and Republic of South Vietnam

The AFP has shown an increasing awareness of its arrival in the country and its vital role in the political and economic development of the country by engaging are actively in civic action programs

Pursuant to the Socio-economic Military Program under RA 2056 the Chief of Staff AFP ordered the assignment of military personnel for public works construction food production land settlement and rural development Several civic centers of the AFP

To give greater impetus on the civic action the 51st Engineer Brigade consisting of 10 Engineer Construction Battalion was activated on 10 March 1962 This unit had constructed several much needed highways roads and bridges in various parts of the country The 52nd Engineer Brigade which was organized on 1 July 1969 also performed similar functions to holster the national program for social and economical developments

Today the AFP is employing all its resources in assisting the socio-economic development programs of the government without prejudice to its primary missions of improving and maintaining the effectiveness of the countryrsquos defense posture

SIGNIFICANT FACTS TO REMEMBER

MACTAN ndash place where the first revolt against Spain took place on April 26 1951 The firstrebellion Spain flared up in Bohol and Leyte

ANDRES MALONG ndash led the first major revolt in Luzon in 1660 He proclaimed himself as aKing of PangasinanLAPU ndash LAPU ndash was the first Filipino hero

MIGUEL VICOS ndash the Spanish Meztiso who assassinated Diego Silang on May 28 1863

RED WITH A FIGURE OF A SUN ndash color of the first flag of the Philippines in 1897

ANDRES BONIFACIO ndash was the founder of the Revolutionary Society called Katipunan

GEN GREGORIO DEL PILAR ndash led the Filipino forces in the Battle of Tirad Pass

AUGUST 29 1896 ndash the date designated as the start of the revolution which was also known as

Cry of BalintawakDECEMBER 14 1897 ndashdate when the Treaty of Paris and Fact of Biak-na-bato was signed

FACT OF BIAK-NA-BATO ndash an agreement between the Filipino and the Spanish authoritieson December 14 1897 to stop all hostilities

MARCELA AGONCILLO ndash designed and made the first flag of the first Philippine Republic

JULIAN FELIPE ndash was the composer of the Philippine National AnthemEMILIO AGUINALDO ndash was the first president of the Philippines

BALANAN ISABELA ndash the place where Gen Emilio Aguinaldo was captured In 1922 the US War Dept authorized the establishment of the Dept of Military Science andTactics under the supervision of the US Army This was established in theUniversity of the Philippines

MANUEL LUIS QUEZON ndash the first president of the Philippine Commonwealth

COMMONWEALTH ACT NO1 ndash is otherwise known as the National Defense Act issued by President Quezon and approved on December 21 1935 and gave the basicorganization of the AFP

GENERAL DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon during the Commonwealth period that helped in the planning andorganization of the Philippine Military EstablishmentGENDOUGLAS MCARTHURrsquoS STAFF

1 MAJ GEN DWIGHT D EISENHOWER2 MAJ GEN JAMES ORD

JANUARY 11 1936 ndash the date President Manuel L Quezon issued Executive Order No 11 onthe establishment of the PA

BRIG GEN BASILIO J VALDEZ ndash first assistant Chief of staff

BRIG GEN JOSE DELOS REYES ndash designated as the first Chief of Staff of the PhilippineArmy

COL GUILLERMO B FRANCISCO ndash 2nd assistant Chief of Staff The PHILLIPINE CONSTABULARY became the nucleus of the Philippine Army and the Philippine Constabulary Air Corps (PCA) was activated on January 2 1937

FEBRUARY 9 1939 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was activated and organized as a unit of thePhilippine Army The Off-Shore Patrol was equipped with Q-Boats (Torpedo Boat)and referred to as the ldquoMosquito Fleetrdquo

PRESIDENT FRANKLIN DELANO ROOSEVELT ndash President of the USA who set July 26 1941 as the date for the declaration of State of National Emergency and at the sametime the induction of the Philippine Army to United States Armed Forces to the Far East (USAFFE) with a total force of 160000 officers and men

GEN DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash was designated as the USAFFE COMMANDER

DECEMBER 8 1941 ndash the date the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked Pearl Harbor Clark Fieldand other targets

APRIL 9 1942 ndash fall of Bataan

MAY 6 1942 ndash fall of Corregidor

MAJOR FERDINAND EDRALIN MARCOS ndash was the most decorated soldier during the World War II and was a recipient of 27 medals

OCTOBER 20 1944 ndash the date the US Liberation Forces landed in Red Beach in Palo Leyte

JULY 3 1947 ndash the date the PC Air Corps was re-designated as the Philippine Air Force

OCTOBER 1947 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol was renamed Phil Naval Patrol ndash the date President Manuel Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 remainingthe Army of the Philippines as Armed Forces of the Philippines andactivating the 4 military areas

ARAW NG KAGITINGAN ndash a day set to commemorate the Fall of Bataan Fall of Corregidorand Fall of Bessang Pass Based on the historical records the independenceof the Republic of the Philippines was on June 12 1898

JULY 4 1946 ndash declaration of the Independence by the USA celebrated today as PhilippineAmerican Friendship Day

JULY 1950 ndash the Philippine Army was separated from the Gen Headquarters Philippine Army

DECEMBER 23 1950 ndash President ElpidioQuirino issued Executive Order No 389 renamingthe Headquarters AFP to Gen Headquarters AFP (GHQ AFP)

JANUARY 5 1951 ndash the Phil Naval Patrol was renamed the Philippine Naval of thePHILIPPINE NAVY

1959 ndash 1955 ndash the Battalion Combat Teams were sent to Korea to comply with the commitmentsof the Philippines as member of the UN The BCT was known as the PHILIPPINE EXPEDITIONARY FORCE TO KOREA (PEFTOK)

SEPTEMBER 1954 ndash The Philippines joined the Southeast Asian Treaty Org (SEATO)

APRIL 11 1963 ndash the PAF contingent of 77 officers and men were sent to Congo Republic of South VietnamPHIL CIVIC ACTION GROUP (PHILCAG) ndash the group of engineers medical and ruralcommunity development team and security personnel were sent by thePhilippines to the representative of South Vietnam

FEBRUARY 22-25 1986 ndash the bloodless peoples revolution which deposed Ferdinand Marcosfrom the presidency and as Commander in elected President of thePhilippines commonly referred to as the EDSA Revolution

ACRONYMSBCT ndash Battalion Combat TeamGHQ ndash General HeadquartersHMB ndash HukbongMapagpalayang Bayan (HUKBALAHAP)PHILCAG-V ndash Philippine Civic Action Group to VietnamSEATO ndash Southeast Asian Treaty OrganizationOSP ndash Off-Shore PatrolPEFTOK ndash Philippine Expeditionary Force to Korea

ENLISTED PERSONNELrsquoS RANKS

MarinesArmy Navy Constabulary Air Force

C ndash CadetCadette M- MidshipmanMidshipwoman

CHAPTER V

MILITARY LEADERSHIP AND COMMAND

A Leadership ndash is the art of influencing and directing men to an assigned goal is such a way toobtain their obedience respect and loyal cooperation Leadership can beexercised by anyone at anytime respective of the frame work of the command

Command ndash is the authority which an individual in the military service lawfully exercisedover subordinates by virtue of his rank and assignment Command andleadership are inseparable whether the function of the command is complex orsimple the commander should always be the controlling head

B TWO TYPES OF LEADER

1 Authoritarian ndash a leader who leads his men by means of rank and position

2 Persuasive ndash a leader who leads his men by always setting examples

C BASIC ELEMENTS OF LEADERSHIP

1 Character ndash to be a leader a person must be of good character Some indications arehonesty good manners industrious self-control and bravery

2 Intelligence ndash is the ability to grasp knowledge easily It includes native ability goodcommon sense and judgment

3 Alertness ndash is mental and physical watchfulness vigilance and observance to his planned and future activity

D LEADERSHIP RESPONSIBILITIES

1 Accomplishment of the assigned mission or task

2 Work for the welfare of his men

E LEADERSHIP TRAITS

1 Knowledge ndash professional knowledge of the job Understands the characteristics of his men2 Bearing ndash dignified appearance and behavior

3 Courage ndash physical and moral ability to act in spite of danger or hardship

4 Decisiveness ndash ability to decide promptly and correctly the proper time and to announce his decision clearly and briefly with authority

5 Dependability ndash performance of duty with or without supervision

6 Endurance ndash physical and mental strength to continue or complete a task

7 Enthusiasm ndash interest in his work or task at hand

8 Force ndash the ability to compel obedience

9 Humility ndash state of being reasonable and proud but not arrogant and boastful

10 Humor ndash ability to appreciate and narrate amusing incidents of everyday life

11 Initiative ndash ability to start or originate an idea or work even when others are absent

12 Judgment ndash power of mind to weight factors affecting a problem and to decide properly

13 Integrity ndash good moral character

14 Justice ndash impartiality in dealing with others giving credit when due and punishment when so demanded

15 Loyalty - sincerity and faithfulness to superiors for the good of the unit

16 Sympathy ndash mutual feelings to others

17 Tact ndash ability to deal with people without hurting their feelings

18 Unselfishness - avoidance of personal consideration that gives a disadvantage

to others

F PRINCIPLES IN LEADERSHIP

1 Know your job - must have thorough professional knowledge of his duties and responsibilities to

command and gain respect from his men

2Know yourself and seek self-improvement - a leader should analyze himself to determine his

good qualities and learn to recognize and correct his weakness

3 Know your men and look after their welfare - understand each of your men personally

psychologically in order to effectively lead them

4 Keep your men informed - keep your men knowledgeable background in all aspects its

organization and mission in order to function effectively

5 Set an example -set a good example as a model in loyalty in superiors and subordinates good

bearing and attitudes pride and faithfulness to the organization

6 Insure the task is understood supervised and accomplished - a leader should give a clear and

concise order that can be understood He supervises his men to accomplish the

assigned mission

7 Train your men as a team - teamwork is a must within and among units from the

smallest to the largest Each men should understand that he has a job to perform

and must cooperate with others in achieving the common objective

8 Make sound and timely decisions - the ability to make raid estimate of the situation Arrive at the

sound decision and announce his decision in the correct form of the proper is

essential to a leader For any situation that may arise the leader should be able to

act logically

9 Develop a sense of responsibility among your subordinates - the leader should train his

subordinates to act in the absence of orders when the situation so demands He

develops responsibility among his subordinates byproper delegation of his

authority and holding them responsible for theaccomplishment of their mission

10 Employ your commands in accordance with its capability - the leader must have thorough knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of his command He must assign objectives that is responsible to be attained However when the situation so demands then men must be forced to action beyond their normal endurance so as to avoid a harder or more costly consequence on their part

11 See responsibility and take responsibility for your action - learn the seniors job for youmay assume his position later on Take advantage of the responsibility delegated toyou and do not back out in case of failure

ROLES OF A LEADER

1 The leader is a model soldier2 The leader is a commander3 The leader is an instructor4 The leader is a personal manager5 The leader is a councilor6 The leader is a custodian of his mens welfare

OBJECTIVES OF A LEADER

1 MORALE - the mental and emotional state of an individual 2 DISCIPLINE - the prompt and willing obedience to orders Complying to regulations and initiating appropriate action even in theabsence of orders 3 PROFICIENCY - the technical tactical and physical ability of an individual to perform their mission 4 ESPRIT DE CORPS - More than the aggregate personality it is how the individuals feel about their unit Jealous of enthusiasticfor pride in and devotion for

MAP READING

MAP - is a graphical representation of the earths surface drawn to a scale on aplane When you look at the map you are actually looking at a picture ofthe ground from a high spot in the air MAP COLOR - different colors are used on the printing of the maps to assist the use understanding it A GREEN - represents all types of vegetables B BLUE - signifies bodies of water such as rivers lakes swamps and streams C RED - indicates first class roads and prominent locations such as theProvincial or Municipal Capitals May be used to stress the significance ofimportant map locations

D BROWN - depicts contour lines which are representation of the relatives elevation and relief of the terrain

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

2 Rest - Pahinga3 As you were - Manumbalik4 At ease - TindigPaluwag5 Change step - PalikHakbang

SUPPLEMENTARY COMMAND - The subordinate commander gives a supplementary command He turns his head towards themajority of his elements and gives command over his shoulder He does not face about

MASS COMMAND - May be used to develop confidence and enthusiasm All of the members of the unit being trained speak in unison and execute them

THINGS TO OBSERVE IN GIVING COMMANDS

Inflection - The rise and fall of pitch and the tone changes of the voice

Cadence In Command - The uniform and rhythmic flow of words

Snap - The extra quality in command that demands immediate responseREMEMBER

1 Correct commands have a tone cadence and snap that demands willingness correct and immediateresponse 2 The loudness of the command is adjusted to the number of men in the unit 3 The best posture for giving command is at the position of attention 4 The most desirable pitch when beginning a preparatory command is near the level of your natural speaking voice

MILITARY COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

MILITARY COURTESY - Is the expression or manifestation of consideration for others It is a virtue that is expected of all individuals from all walks of life In the Armed Forces courtesy is a great requirement because it is thebasic upon which military discipline stands With courtesy and respect among members of the organizationwould lose its orderliness and later disintegrate Furthermore courtesy promotes good relationship closer coordination and teamwork among members of the organization It makes theorganization dignified and insures good relations with the public

SALUTES- Is the most important form of military courtesy It is executed by raising the right man smartlyUntil the tip of the forefinger touches the eyebrow or the front brim of the head gear when coveredForefingers are extended and joined palm facing the left forearm inclined at an angle of about 45 degrees

and the right upper arm horizontal to the ground A person saluting looks at the person beingsaluted When the salute is returned he drops the right hand smartly to the side

RULES IN RENDERING HAND SALUTEa The salute is required on and off military installations during outside office hoursb Persons entitled to the saluted 1 All commissioned officers of the AFP both male and female 2 Commissioned officers of friendly nations when they are recognized as such 3 Officers of the Coast and Geodetic Survey and the Public Health Service when they are serving with the AFP 4 All civilian who are entitled by custom to salutec The salute is rendered at a distance of about 6 paces from the person saluted of at the recognizable distances about 30 pacesd The salute must be rendered to those entitled to it It is not rendered when running but at halt or walk Never salute with a cigarette cigar or pipe in the mouth The salute should not be executed in a haphazardway or perfunctory manner Salutes are exchange whether individuals are cover or uncoverede The salute is rendered at once if the senior remains in the immediate vicinity and no conversation takesplace the junior again salutes the senior when they are path from each otherf In making reports the person reporting salutes first regardless of rank An example of this case is whenthe unit commander is reporting to the adjutant during ceremoniesg) Whom not to salute

1 Standing to a horse or leading a horse2 While at work In case the officer calls the soldier stops working approaches and salutes him

and again when they are part to each other3 Indoors except when reporting to an officer or when the soldier is on duty sentry or guard4 When carrying articles with both hands or being so occupied as to make saluting practical5 When riding in a fast moving vehicle and the other is dismounted the salute is not rendered

Exception are when the vehicle is clearly marked to indicate a General Officer and when saluting is a part of the ceremony

6 When meeting a prisoner of war Soldier serving as military prisoner are not entitled to salute7 In case of doubt due to absence of specific instruction the salute is rendered

The term ldquooutdoorrdquo is constructed to include such buildings as drill halls gymnasiums and other roofed enclosures used for drill or exercise of troops Theaters covered walks and other shelters open on the side are also considered as outdoor

ldquoIndoorsrdquo include offices hallways kitchen orderly rooms recreation halls washroom and quarters

ldquoUnder armsrdquo means carrying arms having them attached to the person by sling holster or other means In the absence of arms the wearing of cartridge bells pistol holsters and automatic rifle belts also mean ldquounder armsrdquo

TYPES OF SALUTES

a Hand saluteb The Rifle Salute at Order Armsc The Rifle Salute at Trail Armsd The Rifle Salute at Present Armse The Rifle Salute at Shoulder Arms (Right Shoulder)f The Rifle Salute at Left Shoulder Armsg The Gun Saluteh Eyes Right by men in ranks when Pass in Review

REPORTING TO AN OFFICER

The salute is rendered by a junior when reporting to a senior He also salutes before leaving

a REPORTING INDOORS WITHOUT ARMS

A soldier removes his headgear knocks at the door of the office of the officer and enters when told to do so Upon entering he halts at about two paces from the officer and salutes and says Sir Cadet Airman Dela Cruz reporting to the squadron commander Sir The salute will be retained until he completes his report and the officer had returned his salute execute about face and leaves the office

b REPORTING INDOORS UNDER ARMS

The procedure for reporting is the same as discussed above except that the soldier remain covered If carrying a rifle the soldier carries it and salute at trail arms Otherwise the hand salute is given

c REPORTING OUTDOORS

The procedure for reporting to an officer the head gear is not removed Rifles should be carried at trail arms or at the right shoulder The hand salute or rifle salute is given as the case may be

d REPORTING FOR PAY

The soldier reporting for pay answers ldquoHererdquo when his name is called approaches and salutes the officer He picks up and count his money and leaves without saluting The officer does not return his salute

OTHER COURTESY TO INDIVIDUALS

a) When an officer enters the room or tent officersrsquo junior to him and enlisted men present with uncover (if unarmed and stand at attention until the officer directs otherwise or leaves the room) When more than one individual are present the first one who perceive the officer will command ldquoAttentionrdquo loud enough to be heard by everybody present

b) When an officer enters a room or tent used as an office working shop or recreation room those at work or at play are not required to come to attention unless addressed by the officer A transaction of routine business between individuals at work

c) When an officer enters an enlisted menus hall the group is called to ldquoAt Easerdquo by the person noticing him first Men remain seated at ease and continue eating unless the officer directs otherwise A soldiers addresses stop eating and sits at attention until the conversation has ended

d) When accompanying a senior a junior walks or ride on his left except when accompanying senior during inspection

e) When entering a car or a small boat the senior goes in first and others follow in the order of rank In getting off he junior goes out first and others follow in the inverse order of rank

HONORS TO THE NATIONAL ANTHEM OR TO THE COLORS

I OUTDOOR

- Wheneverwherever the National Anthem or the colors is played military personnel not in the formation must observe the following

1 At the first note of the music stand at attention and render the prescribed salute except atthe escort of the color or at retreat when they will face toward the color or flag and salute The salute is retained until the last note of the music

2 The mounted on animals will halt and render the salute mounted Individuals loadinganimals or standing to a horse will stand at attention having the salute

3 Vehicles in motion will be brought to a halt Persons riding on a passenger car or amotorcycle will dismount and salute as described above Occupants of combat vehicles such a tanks half trucks scout cars and armored cars will remain in their vehicles but stand at attention and salute

4 The above respect to the National Color is rendered to the National Anthem or colors offriendly nations

II INDOORS

- When the national anthem is played officer and men will stand at attention and face the music or the flag but do not salute

UNCOVERING- Officer and enlisted men under arms uncover when

a) Seated as a member of or in attendance at a court or board Sentinels guarding prisoners do not uncover

b) Entering places of divine worship

c) Indoors when not in duty

d) In attendance at an official reception

DISPLAY AND SALUTE TO THE FLAG

a The Philippine flag represents our nation and should always be given a place of runner

b The National Flag is never dipped for salute nor is it permitted to touch the ground It is not used as a costume dress or a drapery No lettering or object should be placed on it

c The flag is played in the following manners1 When hoisted at a flag pole it should be hoisted fully at the top of the pole blue part

up or above During mornings the flag is hoisted to the top of the pole first then hauled down until the flag is about midway of the length of the pole

2 When the national flag is displayed with another flag whether they are standing sideby side or with their staff crossed the National Flag is at the right side blue part up

3 When placed in the vertical manner the triangle is up the blue color at the right4 When displayed in the horizontal position the triangle is at the right side with the blue

part up5 When displayed over the casket the triangle is in the direction of the head of the cadaver with

the blue part on the right side

During the ceremonies wherein the holstering or lowering of the flag is done or when it passes by during parades or reviews all persons present except those detailed in holstering lowering and carrying the flag should face it at attention and salute while those in uniform remove their headdress with their right hand and place them over their left breast Women should salute by placing their right hand on their left breastMILITARY DISCIPLINE

Military discipline is the mental attitude and state of training which renders obedience and proper conduct instinctive under all conditions It is founded upon respect for loyalty to properly constituted authority While it is primarily developed by military drills every feature in military life has its effect upon military discipline It is generally indicated in an individual or unit by smartness of appearance and action cleanliness of dress equipment or quarters respect for senior and by the prompt and cheerful obedience by the subordinates of both the latter and spirit of the legal orders

RELATION OF COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

The relation of military discipline to courtesy is clearly explained by the fact that discipline is founded upon by respect and loyalty to superiors and lawfully constituted authorities In other words discipline originates and develops mutual respect and goodwill among members of an organization Without courtesy and respect among members of an organization discipline disappears there will be no peace and order in the organization hence it will disintegrate

IMPORTANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Mass discipline and morale are essential factors for securing cohesive action and for ensuring that singleness or purpose which alone can triumph over the most difficult conditions of war The successful leader will teach his men to recognize and face fear because fear is the enemy of discipline and morale Fear unchecked will lead to panic and a unit that is panicky is no longer a disciplined one but a mob There is no same person who is without fear but with good discipline and morale all will face danger if not willingly at least resignedly because of their inborn sentiment of duty or courage of loyalty and because of their sense of pride in their country in their unit and in themselves in other words because of their esprit de corps

The need for discipline is recognized in many places outside the Armed Forces It reaches at highest form in teams wherein individual desires are subordinated to the interests of the entire team The Armed Forces are more in need of discipline for several reasons First the task of making war is not doing it because we as individuals have to do it in the interest of our country Because of that we cannot be allowed as individual to decide which part of the job each of us will do or how each part to be done Second the organization must be prepared for situations wherein leaders may be lost Personal loyalty for the commandment is not enough If a leader is killed his men must accept orders from his successor immediately and without question to carry on the battle Finally the tremendous size of all Armed Forces demands that there be uniform ways of doing things Discipline subordinates personal and self considerations to the interest of the group

MAINTENANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Discipline is installed in men through instructions pride and traditions and regulations You will develop appreciation of the other factors which build discipline as time passes One must know and understand the different laws and regulations immediately

Discipline is maintained in much the same manner as it is attained The article of war punishes military individualsrsquo fairness and justice high moral pride and responsibility contribute to maintain discipline as to developing it

CHAPTER IVARMED FORCES OF THE PHILIPPINESrsquo HISTORY

Brief History of the AFPCommonwealth Act no 1 otherwise known as the National Defense Act was approved on 21

December 1935 which gave the basic organization of the AFP General Douglas McArthur served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon Major General Dwight D Eisenhower and Major General James Ord members of the McArthurrsquos Staff helped in the planting of the Philippine Military Establishment as well as organizing it

As President Quezon issued Executive Order no 11 on January 1936 which formally established the Army of the Philippines he recalled Colonel Jose Delos Reyes of the Philippine Constabulary to active duty and later promoted him to Brigadier General and designated him as Acting Chief of Staff of the Army Brigadier General Basilio J Valdez and Colonel Guillermo B Francisco were named 1 st and 2nd Asst Chief of Staff respectively

In the same order the Philippine Constabulary became the nucleus of the regular forces of the Philippine Army Filipino citizens were required to go training under the National Defense Act since 1936 that would compose reserve force By the end of the ten year Commonwealth period in 1946 there would have been a trained Philippine Army Reserve pool of 400000 officers and men including the graduates of the ROTC Basic and Advance Course in accredited colleges and universities

When the Philippine Constabulary became part of the Philippine Army the PC Air Corps which was activated on 2 January 1955 was re designated Philippine Air Force on 3 July 1947

On February 1939 an Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was organized as a unit of the Philippine Army Initially equipped with three Q-boats (torpedo boats) and a handful of officers and men hurriedly trained in the rudiments of Sea-Warfare the OSP squadron provided coastal support to the beleaguered Filipino-American forces in the battles of Bataan and Corregidor In October 1947 the OSP was renamed Philippine Naval Patrol and on 5 January 1951 it became the Philippine Navy The OSP was often referred to as Mosquito Fleet

When President Franklin D Roosevelt of the USA declared the state of National Emergency on 26 July 1941 and ordered the induction of the Philippine Army units into the US Armed Forces in the Far East under the command of General Douglas Mc Arthur the Philippine Army had a reserve force of about 100000 officers and men at the time of the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked the Pearl Harbor Clark Field and other targets on 8 December 1941 The Philippine Army Reserve Force totaled around 200000 officers and men

The Philippine Army retained its own organization while serving with the USAFFE After the fall of Bataan on 9 April 1942 many officers and men of the Philippine Army continued resistance against the Japanese by forming guerilla forces all over the country These USAFFE guerilla forces along with other units organized by civilians in various parts of the country fought the Japanese Forces from 1942 to 1945 When the US Liberation Forces landed in Leyte on 20 October 1944 all the guerilla forces participated actively on the liberation on their respective sectors of operations

On October 1947 President Manual A Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 which organized all government agencies The Military establishment was not spared from its official designation as Army of the Philippines and it became the Armed Forces of the Philippines The ten pre-war military districts were deactivated but 4 Military Areas were also activated to enhance the efficiency of the Constabulary personnel all over the country

The post-war Philippine Army eventually got its forces fighting another battle ndash the battle against the armed elements of the Communist Party of the Philippines the HUKBALAHAP later renamed HMB For the anti0dissident campaign Army Sector Command and Battalion Combat Teams were formed During the Korean war the 10th 20th 11th 19th and 2nd BCTrsquos were sent as Philippine Expeditionary Force as the member of the United Nations PEFTOK served in Korea from 1950-1955 On 25 December 1950 President Quirino issued Executive Order No 389 renaming headquarters AFP to General Headquarters AFP and activating the 4 major services The Philippine Army Philippine Constabulary Philippine Air Force and Philippine Navy

From the time the Philippines joined the Southeast Asia Treaty Organization (SEATO) in September 1954 the AFP cooperated actively with the other member nations in the enhancing of military preparedness in the area

As a member of the UN the Philippines also sent a Philippine Air Force Contingent of 77 officers and men on a pacification campaign to the Congo Republic on 11 February 1963

In 1966 the Philippine Civic Action Group (PHICAG) was activated to implement the provisions of RA 4644 Composed of engineers medical and rural community development teams and security personnel the PHILCAG was sent to the Republic of South Vietnam and engaged in socio-economic projects mutually agreed upon by the governments of the Republic of the Philippines and Republic of South Vietnam

The AFP has shown an increasing awareness of its arrival in the country and its vital role in the political and economic development of the country by engaging are actively in civic action programs

Pursuant to the Socio-economic Military Program under RA 2056 the Chief of Staff AFP ordered the assignment of military personnel for public works construction food production land settlement and rural development Several civic centers of the AFP

To give greater impetus on the civic action the 51st Engineer Brigade consisting of 10 Engineer Construction Battalion was activated on 10 March 1962 This unit had constructed several much needed highways roads and bridges in various parts of the country The 52nd Engineer Brigade which was organized on 1 July 1969 also performed similar functions to holster the national program for social and economical developments

Today the AFP is employing all its resources in assisting the socio-economic development programs of the government without prejudice to its primary missions of improving and maintaining the effectiveness of the countryrsquos defense posture

SIGNIFICANT FACTS TO REMEMBER

MACTAN ndash place where the first revolt against Spain took place on April 26 1951 The firstrebellion Spain flared up in Bohol and Leyte

ANDRES MALONG ndash led the first major revolt in Luzon in 1660 He proclaimed himself as aKing of PangasinanLAPU ndash LAPU ndash was the first Filipino hero

MIGUEL VICOS ndash the Spanish Meztiso who assassinated Diego Silang on May 28 1863

RED WITH A FIGURE OF A SUN ndash color of the first flag of the Philippines in 1897

ANDRES BONIFACIO ndash was the founder of the Revolutionary Society called Katipunan

GEN GREGORIO DEL PILAR ndash led the Filipino forces in the Battle of Tirad Pass

AUGUST 29 1896 ndash the date designated as the start of the revolution which was also known as

Cry of BalintawakDECEMBER 14 1897 ndashdate when the Treaty of Paris and Fact of Biak-na-bato was signed

FACT OF BIAK-NA-BATO ndash an agreement between the Filipino and the Spanish authoritieson December 14 1897 to stop all hostilities

MARCELA AGONCILLO ndash designed and made the first flag of the first Philippine Republic

JULIAN FELIPE ndash was the composer of the Philippine National AnthemEMILIO AGUINALDO ndash was the first president of the Philippines

BALANAN ISABELA ndash the place where Gen Emilio Aguinaldo was captured In 1922 the US War Dept authorized the establishment of the Dept of Military Science andTactics under the supervision of the US Army This was established in theUniversity of the Philippines

MANUEL LUIS QUEZON ndash the first president of the Philippine Commonwealth

COMMONWEALTH ACT NO1 ndash is otherwise known as the National Defense Act issued by President Quezon and approved on December 21 1935 and gave the basicorganization of the AFP

GENERAL DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon during the Commonwealth period that helped in the planning andorganization of the Philippine Military EstablishmentGENDOUGLAS MCARTHURrsquoS STAFF

1 MAJ GEN DWIGHT D EISENHOWER2 MAJ GEN JAMES ORD

JANUARY 11 1936 ndash the date President Manuel L Quezon issued Executive Order No 11 onthe establishment of the PA

BRIG GEN BASILIO J VALDEZ ndash first assistant Chief of staff

BRIG GEN JOSE DELOS REYES ndash designated as the first Chief of Staff of the PhilippineArmy

COL GUILLERMO B FRANCISCO ndash 2nd assistant Chief of Staff The PHILLIPINE CONSTABULARY became the nucleus of the Philippine Army and the Philippine Constabulary Air Corps (PCA) was activated on January 2 1937

FEBRUARY 9 1939 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was activated and organized as a unit of thePhilippine Army The Off-Shore Patrol was equipped with Q-Boats (Torpedo Boat)and referred to as the ldquoMosquito Fleetrdquo

PRESIDENT FRANKLIN DELANO ROOSEVELT ndash President of the USA who set July 26 1941 as the date for the declaration of State of National Emergency and at the sametime the induction of the Philippine Army to United States Armed Forces to the Far East (USAFFE) with a total force of 160000 officers and men

GEN DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash was designated as the USAFFE COMMANDER

DECEMBER 8 1941 ndash the date the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked Pearl Harbor Clark Fieldand other targets

APRIL 9 1942 ndash fall of Bataan

MAY 6 1942 ndash fall of Corregidor

MAJOR FERDINAND EDRALIN MARCOS ndash was the most decorated soldier during the World War II and was a recipient of 27 medals

OCTOBER 20 1944 ndash the date the US Liberation Forces landed in Red Beach in Palo Leyte

JULY 3 1947 ndash the date the PC Air Corps was re-designated as the Philippine Air Force

OCTOBER 1947 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol was renamed Phil Naval Patrol ndash the date President Manuel Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 remainingthe Army of the Philippines as Armed Forces of the Philippines andactivating the 4 military areas

ARAW NG KAGITINGAN ndash a day set to commemorate the Fall of Bataan Fall of Corregidorand Fall of Bessang Pass Based on the historical records the independenceof the Republic of the Philippines was on June 12 1898

JULY 4 1946 ndash declaration of the Independence by the USA celebrated today as PhilippineAmerican Friendship Day

JULY 1950 ndash the Philippine Army was separated from the Gen Headquarters Philippine Army

DECEMBER 23 1950 ndash President ElpidioQuirino issued Executive Order No 389 renamingthe Headquarters AFP to Gen Headquarters AFP (GHQ AFP)

JANUARY 5 1951 ndash the Phil Naval Patrol was renamed the Philippine Naval of thePHILIPPINE NAVY

1959 ndash 1955 ndash the Battalion Combat Teams were sent to Korea to comply with the commitmentsof the Philippines as member of the UN The BCT was known as the PHILIPPINE EXPEDITIONARY FORCE TO KOREA (PEFTOK)

SEPTEMBER 1954 ndash The Philippines joined the Southeast Asian Treaty Org (SEATO)

APRIL 11 1963 ndash the PAF contingent of 77 officers and men were sent to Congo Republic of South VietnamPHIL CIVIC ACTION GROUP (PHILCAG) ndash the group of engineers medical and ruralcommunity development team and security personnel were sent by thePhilippines to the representative of South Vietnam

FEBRUARY 22-25 1986 ndash the bloodless peoples revolution which deposed Ferdinand Marcosfrom the presidency and as Commander in elected President of thePhilippines commonly referred to as the EDSA Revolution

ACRONYMSBCT ndash Battalion Combat TeamGHQ ndash General HeadquartersHMB ndash HukbongMapagpalayang Bayan (HUKBALAHAP)PHILCAG-V ndash Philippine Civic Action Group to VietnamSEATO ndash Southeast Asian Treaty OrganizationOSP ndash Off-Shore PatrolPEFTOK ndash Philippine Expeditionary Force to Korea

ENLISTED PERSONNELrsquoS RANKS

MarinesArmy Navy Constabulary Air Force

C ndash CadetCadette M- MidshipmanMidshipwoman

CHAPTER V

MILITARY LEADERSHIP AND COMMAND

A Leadership ndash is the art of influencing and directing men to an assigned goal is such a way toobtain their obedience respect and loyal cooperation Leadership can beexercised by anyone at anytime respective of the frame work of the command

Command ndash is the authority which an individual in the military service lawfully exercisedover subordinates by virtue of his rank and assignment Command andleadership are inseparable whether the function of the command is complex orsimple the commander should always be the controlling head

B TWO TYPES OF LEADER

1 Authoritarian ndash a leader who leads his men by means of rank and position

2 Persuasive ndash a leader who leads his men by always setting examples

C BASIC ELEMENTS OF LEADERSHIP

1 Character ndash to be a leader a person must be of good character Some indications arehonesty good manners industrious self-control and bravery

2 Intelligence ndash is the ability to grasp knowledge easily It includes native ability goodcommon sense and judgment

3 Alertness ndash is mental and physical watchfulness vigilance and observance to his planned and future activity

D LEADERSHIP RESPONSIBILITIES

1 Accomplishment of the assigned mission or task

2 Work for the welfare of his men

E LEADERSHIP TRAITS

1 Knowledge ndash professional knowledge of the job Understands the characteristics of his men2 Bearing ndash dignified appearance and behavior

3 Courage ndash physical and moral ability to act in spite of danger or hardship

4 Decisiveness ndash ability to decide promptly and correctly the proper time and to announce his decision clearly and briefly with authority

5 Dependability ndash performance of duty with or without supervision

6 Endurance ndash physical and mental strength to continue or complete a task

7 Enthusiasm ndash interest in his work or task at hand

8 Force ndash the ability to compel obedience

9 Humility ndash state of being reasonable and proud but not arrogant and boastful

10 Humor ndash ability to appreciate and narrate amusing incidents of everyday life

11 Initiative ndash ability to start or originate an idea or work even when others are absent

12 Judgment ndash power of mind to weight factors affecting a problem and to decide properly

13 Integrity ndash good moral character

14 Justice ndash impartiality in dealing with others giving credit when due and punishment when so demanded

15 Loyalty - sincerity and faithfulness to superiors for the good of the unit

16 Sympathy ndash mutual feelings to others

17 Tact ndash ability to deal with people without hurting their feelings

18 Unselfishness - avoidance of personal consideration that gives a disadvantage

to others

F PRINCIPLES IN LEADERSHIP

1 Know your job - must have thorough professional knowledge of his duties and responsibilities to

command and gain respect from his men

2Know yourself and seek self-improvement - a leader should analyze himself to determine his

good qualities and learn to recognize and correct his weakness

3 Know your men and look after their welfare - understand each of your men personally

psychologically in order to effectively lead them

4 Keep your men informed - keep your men knowledgeable background in all aspects its

organization and mission in order to function effectively

5 Set an example -set a good example as a model in loyalty in superiors and subordinates good

bearing and attitudes pride and faithfulness to the organization

6 Insure the task is understood supervised and accomplished - a leader should give a clear and

concise order that can be understood He supervises his men to accomplish the

assigned mission

7 Train your men as a team - teamwork is a must within and among units from the

smallest to the largest Each men should understand that he has a job to perform

and must cooperate with others in achieving the common objective

8 Make sound and timely decisions - the ability to make raid estimate of the situation Arrive at the

sound decision and announce his decision in the correct form of the proper is

essential to a leader For any situation that may arise the leader should be able to

act logically

9 Develop a sense of responsibility among your subordinates - the leader should train his

subordinates to act in the absence of orders when the situation so demands He

develops responsibility among his subordinates byproper delegation of his

authority and holding them responsible for theaccomplishment of their mission

10 Employ your commands in accordance with its capability - the leader must have thorough knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of his command He must assign objectives that is responsible to be attained However when the situation so demands then men must be forced to action beyond their normal endurance so as to avoid a harder or more costly consequence on their part

11 See responsibility and take responsibility for your action - learn the seniors job for youmay assume his position later on Take advantage of the responsibility delegated toyou and do not back out in case of failure

ROLES OF A LEADER

1 The leader is a model soldier2 The leader is a commander3 The leader is an instructor4 The leader is a personal manager5 The leader is a councilor6 The leader is a custodian of his mens welfare

OBJECTIVES OF A LEADER

1 MORALE - the mental and emotional state of an individual 2 DISCIPLINE - the prompt and willing obedience to orders Complying to regulations and initiating appropriate action even in theabsence of orders 3 PROFICIENCY - the technical tactical and physical ability of an individual to perform their mission 4 ESPRIT DE CORPS - More than the aggregate personality it is how the individuals feel about their unit Jealous of enthusiasticfor pride in and devotion for

MAP READING

MAP - is a graphical representation of the earths surface drawn to a scale on aplane When you look at the map you are actually looking at a picture ofthe ground from a high spot in the air MAP COLOR - different colors are used on the printing of the maps to assist the use understanding it A GREEN - represents all types of vegetables B BLUE - signifies bodies of water such as rivers lakes swamps and streams C RED - indicates first class roads and prominent locations such as theProvincial or Municipal Capitals May be used to stress the significance ofimportant map locations

D BROWN - depicts contour lines which are representation of the relatives elevation and relief of the terrain

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

and the right upper arm horizontal to the ground A person saluting looks at the person beingsaluted When the salute is returned he drops the right hand smartly to the side

RULES IN RENDERING HAND SALUTEa The salute is required on and off military installations during outside office hoursb Persons entitled to the saluted 1 All commissioned officers of the AFP both male and female 2 Commissioned officers of friendly nations when they are recognized as such 3 Officers of the Coast and Geodetic Survey and the Public Health Service when they are serving with the AFP 4 All civilian who are entitled by custom to salutec The salute is rendered at a distance of about 6 paces from the person saluted of at the recognizable distances about 30 pacesd The salute must be rendered to those entitled to it It is not rendered when running but at halt or walk Never salute with a cigarette cigar or pipe in the mouth The salute should not be executed in a haphazardway or perfunctory manner Salutes are exchange whether individuals are cover or uncoverede The salute is rendered at once if the senior remains in the immediate vicinity and no conversation takesplace the junior again salutes the senior when they are path from each otherf In making reports the person reporting salutes first regardless of rank An example of this case is whenthe unit commander is reporting to the adjutant during ceremoniesg) Whom not to salute

1 Standing to a horse or leading a horse2 While at work In case the officer calls the soldier stops working approaches and salutes him

and again when they are part to each other3 Indoors except when reporting to an officer or when the soldier is on duty sentry or guard4 When carrying articles with both hands or being so occupied as to make saluting practical5 When riding in a fast moving vehicle and the other is dismounted the salute is not rendered

Exception are when the vehicle is clearly marked to indicate a General Officer and when saluting is a part of the ceremony

6 When meeting a prisoner of war Soldier serving as military prisoner are not entitled to salute7 In case of doubt due to absence of specific instruction the salute is rendered

The term ldquooutdoorrdquo is constructed to include such buildings as drill halls gymnasiums and other roofed enclosures used for drill or exercise of troops Theaters covered walks and other shelters open on the side are also considered as outdoor

ldquoIndoorsrdquo include offices hallways kitchen orderly rooms recreation halls washroom and quarters

ldquoUnder armsrdquo means carrying arms having them attached to the person by sling holster or other means In the absence of arms the wearing of cartridge bells pistol holsters and automatic rifle belts also mean ldquounder armsrdquo

TYPES OF SALUTES

a Hand saluteb The Rifle Salute at Order Armsc The Rifle Salute at Trail Armsd The Rifle Salute at Present Armse The Rifle Salute at Shoulder Arms (Right Shoulder)f The Rifle Salute at Left Shoulder Armsg The Gun Saluteh Eyes Right by men in ranks when Pass in Review

REPORTING TO AN OFFICER

The salute is rendered by a junior when reporting to a senior He also salutes before leaving

a REPORTING INDOORS WITHOUT ARMS

A soldier removes his headgear knocks at the door of the office of the officer and enters when told to do so Upon entering he halts at about two paces from the officer and salutes and says Sir Cadet Airman Dela Cruz reporting to the squadron commander Sir The salute will be retained until he completes his report and the officer had returned his salute execute about face and leaves the office

b REPORTING INDOORS UNDER ARMS

The procedure for reporting is the same as discussed above except that the soldier remain covered If carrying a rifle the soldier carries it and salute at trail arms Otherwise the hand salute is given

c REPORTING OUTDOORS

The procedure for reporting to an officer the head gear is not removed Rifles should be carried at trail arms or at the right shoulder The hand salute or rifle salute is given as the case may be

d REPORTING FOR PAY

The soldier reporting for pay answers ldquoHererdquo when his name is called approaches and salutes the officer He picks up and count his money and leaves without saluting The officer does not return his salute

OTHER COURTESY TO INDIVIDUALS

a) When an officer enters the room or tent officersrsquo junior to him and enlisted men present with uncover (if unarmed and stand at attention until the officer directs otherwise or leaves the room) When more than one individual are present the first one who perceive the officer will command ldquoAttentionrdquo loud enough to be heard by everybody present

b) When an officer enters a room or tent used as an office working shop or recreation room those at work or at play are not required to come to attention unless addressed by the officer A transaction of routine business between individuals at work

c) When an officer enters an enlisted menus hall the group is called to ldquoAt Easerdquo by the person noticing him first Men remain seated at ease and continue eating unless the officer directs otherwise A soldiers addresses stop eating and sits at attention until the conversation has ended

d) When accompanying a senior a junior walks or ride on his left except when accompanying senior during inspection

e) When entering a car or a small boat the senior goes in first and others follow in the order of rank In getting off he junior goes out first and others follow in the inverse order of rank

HONORS TO THE NATIONAL ANTHEM OR TO THE COLORS

I OUTDOOR

- Wheneverwherever the National Anthem or the colors is played military personnel not in the formation must observe the following

1 At the first note of the music stand at attention and render the prescribed salute except atthe escort of the color or at retreat when they will face toward the color or flag and salute The salute is retained until the last note of the music

2 The mounted on animals will halt and render the salute mounted Individuals loadinganimals or standing to a horse will stand at attention having the salute

3 Vehicles in motion will be brought to a halt Persons riding on a passenger car or amotorcycle will dismount and salute as described above Occupants of combat vehicles such a tanks half trucks scout cars and armored cars will remain in their vehicles but stand at attention and salute

4 The above respect to the National Color is rendered to the National Anthem or colors offriendly nations

II INDOORS

- When the national anthem is played officer and men will stand at attention and face the music or the flag but do not salute

UNCOVERING- Officer and enlisted men under arms uncover when

a) Seated as a member of or in attendance at a court or board Sentinels guarding prisoners do not uncover

b) Entering places of divine worship

c) Indoors when not in duty

d) In attendance at an official reception

DISPLAY AND SALUTE TO THE FLAG

a The Philippine flag represents our nation and should always be given a place of runner

b The National Flag is never dipped for salute nor is it permitted to touch the ground It is not used as a costume dress or a drapery No lettering or object should be placed on it

c The flag is played in the following manners1 When hoisted at a flag pole it should be hoisted fully at the top of the pole blue part

up or above During mornings the flag is hoisted to the top of the pole first then hauled down until the flag is about midway of the length of the pole

2 When the national flag is displayed with another flag whether they are standing sideby side or with their staff crossed the National Flag is at the right side blue part up

3 When placed in the vertical manner the triangle is up the blue color at the right4 When displayed in the horizontal position the triangle is at the right side with the blue

part up5 When displayed over the casket the triangle is in the direction of the head of the cadaver with

the blue part on the right side

During the ceremonies wherein the holstering or lowering of the flag is done or when it passes by during parades or reviews all persons present except those detailed in holstering lowering and carrying the flag should face it at attention and salute while those in uniform remove their headdress with their right hand and place them over their left breast Women should salute by placing their right hand on their left breastMILITARY DISCIPLINE

Military discipline is the mental attitude and state of training which renders obedience and proper conduct instinctive under all conditions It is founded upon respect for loyalty to properly constituted authority While it is primarily developed by military drills every feature in military life has its effect upon military discipline It is generally indicated in an individual or unit by smartness of appearance and action cleanliness of dress equipment or quarters respect for senior and by the prompt and cheerful obedience by the subordinates of both the latter and spirit of the legal orders

RELATION OF COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

The relation of military discipline to courtesy is clearly explained by the fact that discipline is founded upon by respect and loyalty to superiors and lawfully constituted authorities In other words discipline originates and develops mutual respect and goodwill among members of an organization Without courtesy and respect among members of an organization discipline disappears there will be no peace and order in the organization hence it will disintegrate

IMPORTANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Mass discipline and morale are essential factors for securing cohesive action and for ensuring that singleness or purpose which alone can triumph over the most difficult conditions of war The successful leader will teach his men to recognize and face fear because fear is the enemy of discipline and morale Fear unchecked will lead to panic and a unit that is panicky is no longer a disciplined one but a mob There is no same person who is without fear but with good discipline and morale all will face danger if not willingly at least resignedly because of their inborn sentiment of duty or courage of loyalty and because of their sense of pride in their country in their unit and in themselves in other words because of their esprit de corps

The need for discipline is recognized in many places outside the Armed Forces It reaches at highest form in teams wherein individual desires are subordinated to the interests of the entire team The Armed Forces are more in need of discipline for several reasons First the task of making war is not doing it because we as individuals have to do it in the interest of our country Because of that we cannot be allowed as individual to decide which part of the job each of us will do or how each part to be done Second the organization must be prepared for situations wherein leaders may be lost Personal loyalty for the commandment is not enough If a leader is killed his men must accept orders from his successor immediately and without question to carry on the battle Finally the tremendous size of all Armed Forces demands that there be uniform ways of doing things Discipline subordinates personal and self considerations to the interest of the group

MAINTENANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Discipline is installed in men through instructions pride and traditions and regulations You will develop appreciation of the other factors which build discipline as time passes One must know and understand the different laws and regulations immediately

Discipline is maintained in much the same manner as it is attained The article of war punishes military individualsrsquo fairness and justice high moral pride and responsibility contribute to maintain discipline as to developing it

CHAPTER IVARMED FORCES OF THE PHILIPPINESrsquo HISTORY

Brief History of the AFPCommonwealth Act no 1 otherwise known as the National Defense Act was approved on 21

December 1935 which gave the basic organization of the AFP General Douglas McArthur served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon Major General Dwight D Eisenhower and Major General James Ord members of the McArthurrsquos Staff helped in the planting of the Philippine Military Establishment as well as organizing it

As President Quezon issued Executive Order no 11 on January 1936 which formally established the Army of the Philippines he recalled Colonel Jose Delos Reyes of the Philippine Constabulary to active duty and later promoted him to Brigadier General and designated him as Acting Chief of Staff of the Army Brigadier General Basilio J Valdez and Colonel Guillermo B Francisco were named 1 st and 2nd Asst Chief of Staff respectively

In the same order the Philippine Constabulary became the nucleus of the regular forces of the Philippine Army Filipino citizens were required to go training under the National Defense Act since 1936 that would compose reserve force By the end of the ten year Commonwealth period in 1946 there would have been a trained Philippine Army Reserve pool of 400000 officers and men including the graduates of the ROTC Basic and Advance Course in accredited colleges and universities

When the Philippine Constabulary became part of the Philippine Army the PC Air Corps which was activated on 2 January 1955 was re designated Philippine Air Force on 3 July 1947

On February 1939 an Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was organized as a unit of the Philippine Army Initially equipped with three Q-boats (torpedo boats) and a handful of officers and men hurriedly trained in the rudiments of Sea-Warfare the OSP squadron provided coastal support to the beleaguered Filipino-American forces in the battles of Bataan and Corregidor In October 1947 the OSP was renamed Philippine Naval Patrol and on 5 January 1951 it became the Philippine Navy The OSP was often referred to as Mosquito Fleet

When President Franklin D Roosevelt of the USA declared the state of National Emergency on 26 July 1941 and ordered the induction of the Philippine Army units into the US Armed Forces in the Far East under the command of General Douglas Mc Arthur the Philippine Army had a reserve force of about 100000 officers and men at the time of the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked the Pearl Harbor Clark Field and other targets on 8 December 1941 The Philippine Army Reserve Force totaled around 200000 officers and men

The Philippine Army retained its own organization while serving with the USAFFE After the fall of Bataan on 9 April 1942 many officers and men of the Philippine Army continued resistance against the Japanese by forming guerilla forces all over the country These USAFFE guerilla forces along with other units organized by civilians in various parts of the country fought the Japanese Forces from 1942 to 1945 When the US Liberation Forces landed in Leyte on 20 October 1944 all the guerilla forces participated actively on the liberation on their respective sectors of operations

On October 1947 President Manual A Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 which organized all government agencies The Military establishment was not spared from its official designation as Army of the Philippines and it became the Armed Forces of the Philippines The ten pre-war military districts were deactivated but 4 Military Areas were also activated to enhance the efficiency of the Constabulary personnel all over the country

The post-war Philippine Army eventually got its forces fighting another battle ndash the battle against the armed elements of the Communist Party of the Philippines the HUKBALAHAP later renamed HMB For the anti0dissident campaign Army Sector Command and Battalion Combat Teams were formed During the Korean war the 10th 20th 11th 19th and 2nd BCTrsquos were sent as Philippine Expeditionary Force as the member of the United Nations PEFTOK served in Korea from 1950-1955 On 25 December 1950 President Quirino issued Executive Order No 389 renaming headquarters AFP to General Headquarters AFP and activating the 4 major services The Philippine Army Philippine Constabulary Philippine Air Force and Philippine Navy

From the time the Philippines joined the Southeast Asia Treaty Organization (SEATO) in September 1954 the AFP cooperated actively with the other member nations in the enhancing of military preparedness in the area

As a member of the UN the Philippines also sent a Philippine Air Force Contingent of 77 officers and men on a pacification campaign to the Congo Republic on 11 February 1963

In 1966 the Philippine Civic Action Group (PHICAG) was activated to implement the provisions of RA 4644 Composed of engineers medical and rural community development teams and security personnel the PHILCAG was sent to the Republic of South Vietnam and engaged in socio-economic projects mutually agreed upon by the governments of the Republic of the Philippines and Republic of South Vietnam

The AFP has shown an increasing awareness of its arrival in the country and its vital role in the political and economic development of the country by engaging are actively in civic action programs

Pursuant to the Socio-economic Military Program under RA 2056 the Chief of Staff AFP ordered the assignment of military personnel for public works construction food production land settlement and rural development Several civic centers of the AFP

To give greater impetus on the civic action the 51st Engineer Brigade consisting of 10 Engineer Construction Battalion was activated on 10 March 1962 This unit had constructed several much needed highways roads and bridges in various parts of the country The 52nd Engineer Brigade which was organized on 1 July 1969 also performed similar functions to holster the national program for social and economical developments

Today the AFP is employing all its resources in assisting the socio-economic development programs of the government without prejudice to its primary missions of improving and maintaining the effectiveness of the countryrsquos defense posture

SIGNIFICANT FACTS TO REMEMBER

MACTAN ndash place where the first revolt against Spain took place on April 26 1951 The firstrebellion Spain flared up in Bohol and Leyte

ANDRES MALONG ndash led the first major revolt in Luzon in 1660 He proclaimed himself as aKing of PangasinanLAPU ndash LAPU ndash was the first Filipino hero

MIGUEL VICOS ndash the Spanish Meztiso who assassinated Diego Silang on May 28 1863

RED WITH A FIGURE OF A SUN ndash color of the first flag of the Philippines in 1897

ANDRES BONIFACIO ndash was the founder of the Revolutionary Society called Katipunan

GEN GREGORIO DEL PILAR ndash led the Filipino forces in the Battle of Tirad Pass

AUGUST 29 1896 ndash the date designated as the start of the revolution which was also known as

Cry of BalintawakDECEMBER 14 1897 ndashdate when the Treaty of Paris and Fact of Biak-na-bato was signed

FACT OF BIAK-NA-BATO ndash an agreement between the Filipino and the Spanish authoritieson December 14 1897 to stop all hostilities

MARCELA AGONCILLO ndash designed and made the first flag of the first Philippine Republic

JULIAN FELIPE ndash was the composer of the Philippine National AnthemEMILIO AGUINALDO ndash was the first president of the Philippines

BALANAN ISABELA ndash the place where Gen Emilio Aguinaldo was captured In 1922 the US War Dept authorized the establishment of the Dept of Military Science andTactics under the supervision of the US Army This was established in theUniversity of the Philippines

MANUEL LUIS QUEZON ndash the first president of the Philippine Commonwealth

COMMONWEALTH ACT NO1 ndash is otherwise known as the National Defense Act issued by President Quezon and approved on December 21 1935 and gave the basicorganization of the AFP

GENERAL DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon during the Commonwealth period that helped in the planning andorganization of the Philippine Military EstablishmentGENDOUGLAS MCARTHURrsquoS STAFF

1 MAJ GEN DWIGHT D EISENHOWER2 MAJ GEN JAMES ORD

JANUARY 11 1936 ndash the date President Manuel L Quezon issued Executive Order No 11 onthe establishment of the PA

BRIG GEN BASILIO J VALDEZ ndash first assistant Chief of staff

BRIG GEN JOSE DELOS REYES ndash designated as the first Chief of Staff of the PhilippineArmy

COL GUILLERMO B FRANCISCO ndash 2nd assistant Chief of Staff The PHILLIPINE CONSTABULARY became the nucleus of the Philippine Army and the Philippine Constabulary Air Corps (PCA) was activated on January 2 1937

FEBRUARY 9 1939 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was activated and organized as a unit of thePhilippine Army The Off-Shore Patrol was equipped with Q-Boats (Torpedo Boat)and referred to as the ldquoMosquito Fleetrdquo

PRESIDENT FRANKLIN DELANO ROOSEVELT ndash President of the USA who set July 26 1941 as the date for the declaration of State of National Emergency and at the sametime the induction of the Philippine Army to United States Armed Forces to the Far East (USAFFE) with a total force of 160000 officers and men

GEN DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash was designated as the USAFFE COMMANDER

DECEMBER 8 1941 ndash the date the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked Pearl Harbor Clark Fieldand other targets

APRIL 9 1942 ndash fall of Bataan

MAY 6 1942 ndash fall of Corregidor

MAJOR FERDINAND EDRALIN MARCOS ndash was the most decorated soldier during the World War II and was a recipient of 27 medals

OCTOBER 20 1944 ndash the date the US Liberation Forces landed in Red Beach in Palo Leyte

JULY 3 1947 ndash the date the PC Air Corps was re-designated as the Philippine Air Force

OCTOBER 1947 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol was renamed Phil Naval Patrol ndash the date President Manuel Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 remainingthe Army of the Philippines as Armed Forces of the Philippines andactivating the 4 military areas

ARAW NG KAGITINGAN ndash a day set to commemorate the Fall of Bataan Fall of Corregidorand Fall of Bessang Pass Based on the historical records the independenceof the Republic of the Philippines was on June 12 1898

JULY 4 1946 ndash declaration of the Independence by the USA celebrated today as PhilippineAmerican Friendship Day

JULY 1950 ndash the Philippine Army was separated from the Gen Headquarters Philippine Army

DECEMBER 23 1950 ndash President ElpidioQuirino issued Executive Order No 389 renamingthe Headquarters AFP to Gen Headquarters AFP (GHQ AFP)

JANUARY 5 1951 ndash the Phil Naval Patrol was renamed the Philippine Naval of thePHILIPPINE NAVY

1959 ndash 1955 ndash the Battalion Combat Teams were sent to Korea to comply with the commitmentsof the Philippines as member of the UN The BCT was known as the PHILIPPINE EXPEDITIONARY FORCE TO KOREA (PEFTOK)

SEPTEMBER 1954 ndash The Philippines joined the Southeast Asian Treaty Org (SEATO)

APRIL 11 1963 ndash the PAF contingent of 77 officers and men were sent to Congo Republic of South VietnamPHIL CIVIC ACTION GROUP (PHILCAG) ndash the group of engineers medical and ruralcommunity development team and security personnel were sent by thePhilippines to the representative of South Vietnam

FEBRUARY 22-25 1986 ndash the bloodless peoples revolution which deposed Ferdinand Marcosfrom the presidency and as Commander in elected President of thePhilippines commonly referred to as the EDSA Revolution

ACRONYMSBCT ndash Battalion Combat TeamGHQ ndash General HeadquartersHMB ndash HukbongMapagpalayang Bayan (HUKBALAHAP)PHILCAG-V ndash Philippine Civic Action Group to VietnamSEATO ndash Southeast Asian Treaty OrganizationOSP ndash Off-Shore PatrolPEFTOK ndash Philippine Expeditionary Force to Korea

ENLISTED PERSONNELrsquoS RANKS

MarinesArmy Navy Constabulary Air Force

C ndash CadetCadette M- MidshipmanMidshipwoman

CHAPTER V

MILITARY LEADERSHIP AND COMMAND

A Leadership ndash is the art of influencing and directing men to an assigned goal is such a way toobtain their obedience respect and loyal cooperation Leadership can beexercised by anyone at anytime respective of the frame work of the command

Command ndash is the authority which an individual in the military service lawfully exercisedover subordinates by virtue of his rank and assignment Command andleadership are inseparable whether the function of the command is complex orsimple the commander should always be the controlling head

B TWO TYPES OF LEADER

1 Authoritarian ndash a leader who leads his men by means of rank and position

2 Persuasive ndash a leader who leads his men by always setting examples

C BASIC ELEMENTS OF LEADERSHIP

1 Character ndash to be a leader a person must be of good character Some indications arehonesty good manners industrious self-control and bravery

2 Intelligence ndash is the ability to grasp knowledge easily It includes native ability goodcommon sense and judgment

3 Alertness ndash is mental and physical watchfulness vigilance and observance to his planned and future activity

D LEADERSHIP RESPONSIBILITIES

1 Accomplishment of the assigned mission or task

2 Work for the welfare of his men

E LEADERSHIP TRAITS

1 Knowledge ndash professional knowledge of the job Understands the characteristics of his men2 Bearing ndash dignified appearance and behavior

3 Courage ndash physical and moral ability to act in spite of danger or hardship

4 Decisiveness ndash ability to decide promptly and correctly the proper time and to announce his decision clearly and briefly with authority

5 Dependability ndash performance of duty with or without supervision

6 Endurance ndash physical and mental strength to continue or complete a task

7 Enthusiasm ndash interest in his work or task at hand

8 Force ndash the ability to compel obedience

9 Humility ndash state of being reasonable and proud but not arrogant and boastful

10 Humor ndash ability to appreciate and narrate amusing incidents of everyday life

11 Initiative ndash ability to start or originate an idea or work even when others are absent

12 Judgment ndash power of mind to weight factors affecting a problem and to decide properly

13 Integrity ndash good moral character

14 Justice ndash impartiality in dealing with others giving credit when due and punishment when so demanded

15 Loyalty - sincerity and faithfulness to superiors for the good of the unit

16 Sympathy ndash mutual feelings to others

17 Tact ndash ability to deal with people without hurting their feelings

18 Unselfishness - avoidance of personal consideration that gives a disadvantage

to others

F PRINCIPLES IN LEADERSHIP

1 Know your job - must have thorough professional knowledge of his duties and responsibilities to

command and gain respect from his men

2Know yourself and seek self-improvement - a leader should analyze himself to determine his

good qualities and learn to recognize and correct his weakness

3 Know your men and look after their welfare - understand each of your men personally

psychologically in order to effectively lead them

4 Keep your men informed - keep your men knowledgeable background in all aspects its

organization and mission in order to function effectively

5 Set an example -set a good example as a model in loyalty in superiors and subordinates good

bearing and attitudes pride and faithfulness to the organization

6 Insure the task is understood supervised and accomplished - a leader should give a clear and

concise order that can be understood He supervises his men to accomplish the

assigned mission

7 Train your men as a team - teamwork is a must within and among units from the

smallest to the largest Each men should understand that he has a job to perform

and must cooperate with others in achieving the common objective

8 Make sound and timely decisions - the ability to make raid estimate of the situation Arrive at the

sound decision and announce his decision in the correct form of the proper is

essential to a leader For any situation that may arise the leader should be able to

act logically

9 Develop a sense of responsibility among your subordinates - the leader should train his

subordinates to act in the absence of orders when the situation so demands He

develops responsibility among his subordinates byproper delegation of his

authority and holding them responsible for theaccomplishment of their mission

10 Employ your commands in accordance with its capability - the leader must have thorough knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of his command He must assign objectives that is responsible to be attained However when the situation so demands then men must be forced to action beyond their normal endurance so as to avoid a harder or more costly consequence on their part

11 See responsibility and take responsibility for your action - learn the seniors job for youmay assume his position later on Take advantage of the responsibility delegated toyou and do not back out in case of failure

ROLES OF A LEADER

1 The leader is a model soldier2 The leader is a commander3 The leader is an instructor4 The leader is a personal manager5 The leader is a councilor6 The leader is a custodian of his mens welfare

OBJECTIVES OF A LEADER

1 MORALE - the mental and emotional state of an individual 2 DISCIPLINE - the prompt and willing obedience to orders Complying to regulations and initiating appropriate action even in theabsence of orders 3 PROFICIENCY - the technical tactical and physical ability of an individual to perform their mission 4 ESPRIT DE CORPS - More than the aggregate personality it is how the individuals feel about their unit Jealous of enthusiasticfor pride in and devotion for

MAP READING

MAP - is a graphical representation of the earths surface drawn to a scale on aplane When you look at the map you are actually looking at a picture ofthe ground from a high spot in the air MAP COLOR - different colors are used on the printing of the maps to assist the use understanding it A GREEN - represents all types of vegetables B BLUE - signifies bodies of water such as rivers lakes swamps and streams C RED - indicates first class roads and prominent locations such as theProvincial or Municipal Capitals May be used to stress the significance ofimportant map locations

D BROWN - depicts contour lines which are representation of the relatives elevation and relief of the terrain

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

a Hand saluteb The Rifle Salute at Order Armsc The Rifle Salute at Trail Armsd The Rifle Salute at Present Armse The Rifle Salute at Shoulder Arms (Right Shoulder)f The Rifle Salute at Left Shoulder Armsg The Gun Saluteh Eyes Right by men in ranks when Pass in Review

REPORTING TO AN OFFICER

The salute is rendered by a junior when reporting to a senior He also salutes before leaving

a REPORTING INDOORS WITHOUT ARMS

A soldier removes his headgear knocks at the door of the office of the officer and enters when told to do so Upon entering he halts at about two paces from the officer and salutes and says Sir Cadet Airman Dela Cruz reporting to the squadron commander Sir The salute will be retained until he completes his report and the officer had returned his salute execute about face and leaves the office

b REPORTING INDOORS UNDER ARMS

The procedure for reporting is the same as discussed above except that the soldier remain covered If carrying a rifle the soldier carries it and salute at trail arms Otherwise the hand salute is given

c REPORTING OUTDOORS

The procedure for reporting to an officer the head gear is not removed Rifles should be carried at trail arms or at the right shoulder The hand salute or rifle salute is given as the case may be

d REPORTING FOR PAY

The soldier reporting for pay answers ldquoHererdquo when his name is called approaches and salutes the officer He picks up and count his money and leaves without saluting The officer does not return his salute

OTHER COURTESY TO INDIVIDUALS

a) When an officer enters the room or tent officersrsquo junior to him and enlisted men present with uncover (if unarmed and stand at attention until the officer directs otherwise or leaves the room) When more than one individual are present the first one who perceive the officer will command ldquoAttentionrdquo loud enough to be heard by everybody present

b) When an officer enters a room or tent used as an office working shop or recreation room those at work or at play are not required to come to attention unless addressed by the officer A transaction of routine business between individuals at work

c) When an officer enters an enlisted menus hall the group is called to ldquoAt Easerdquo by the person noticing him first Men remain seated at ease and continue eating unless the officer directs otherwise A soldiers addresses stop eating and sits at attention until the conversation has ended

d) When accompanying a senior a junior walks or ride on his left except when accompanying senior during inspection

e) When entering a car or a small boat the senior goes in first and others follow in the order of rank In getting off he junior goes out first and others follow in the inverse order of rank

HONORS TO THE NATIONAL ANTHEM OR TO THE COLORS

I OUTDOOR

- Wheneverwherever the National Anthem or the colors is played military personnel not in the formation must observe the following

1 At the first note of the music stand at attention and render the prescribed salute except atthe escort of the color or at retreat when they will face toward the color or flag and salute The salute is retained until the last note of the music

2 The mounted on animals will halt and render the salute mounted Individuals loadinganimals or standing to a horse will stand at attention having the salute

3 Vehicles in motion will be brought to a halt Persons riding on a passenger car or amotorcycle will dismount and salute as described above Occupants of combat vehicles such a tanks half trucks scout cars and armored cars will remain in their vehicles but stand at attention and salute

4 The above respect to the National Color is rendered to the National Anthem or colors offriendly nations

II INDOORS

- When the national anthem is played officer and men will stand at attention and face the music or the flag but do not salute

UNCOVERING- Officer and enlisted men under arms uncover when

a) Seated as a member of or in attendance at a court or board Sentinels guarding prisoners do not uncover

b) Entering places of divine worship

c) Indoors when not in duty

d) In attendance at an official reception

DISPLAY AND SALUTE TO THE FLAG

a The Philippine flag represents our nation and should always be given a place of runner

b The National Flag is never dipped for salute nor is it permitted to touch the ground It is not used as a costume dress or a drapery No lettering or object should be placed on it

c The flag is played in the following manners1 When hoisted at a flag pole it should be hoisted fully at the top of the pole blue part

up or above During mornings the flag is hoisted to the top of the pole first then hauled down until the flag is about midway of the length of the pole

2 When the national flag is displayed with another flag whether they are standing sideby side or with their staff crossed the National Flag is at the right side blue part up

3 When placed in the vertical manner the triangle is up the blue color at the right4 When displayed in the horizontal position the triangle is at the right side with the blue

part up5 When displayed over the casket the triangle is in the direction of the head of the cadaver with

the blue part on the right side

During the ceremonies wherein the holstering or lowering of the flag is done or when it passes by during parades or reviews all persons present except those detailed in holstering lowering and carrying the flag should face it at attention and salute while those in uniform remove their headdress with their right hand and place them over their left breast Women should salute by placing their right hand on their left breastMILITARY DISCIPLINE

Military discipline is the mental attitude and state of training which renders obedience and proper conduct instinctive under all conditions It is founded upon respect for loyalty to properly constituted authority While it is primarily developed by military drills every feature in military life has its effect upon military discipline It is generally indicated in an individual or unit by smartness of appearance and action cleanliness of dress equipment or quarters respect for senior and by the prompt and cheerful obedience by the subordinates of both the latter and spirit of the legal orders

RELATION OF COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

The relation of military discipline to courtesy is clearly explained by the fact that discipline is founded upon by respect and loyalty to superiors and lawfully constituted authorities In other words discipline originates and develops mutual respect and goodwill among members of an organization Without courtesy and respect among members of an organization discipline disappears there will be no peace and order in the organization hence it will disintegrate

IMPORTANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Mass discipline and morale are essential factors for securing cohesive action and for ensuring that singleness or purpose which alone can triumph over the most difficult conditions of war The successful leader will teach his men to recognize and face fear because fear is the enemy of discipline and morale Fear unchecked will lead to panic and a unit that is panicky is no longer a disciplined one but a mob There is no same person who is without fear but with good discipline and morale all will face danger if not willingly at least resignedly because of their inborn sentiment of duty or courage of loyalty and because of their sense of pride in their country in their unit and in themselves in other words because of their esprit de corps

The need for discipline is recognized in many places outside the Armed Forces It reaches at highest form in teams wherein individual desires are subordinated to the interests of the entire team The Armed Forces are more in need of discipline for several reasons First the task of making war is not doing it because we as individuals have to do it in the interest of our country Because of that we cannot be allowed as individual to decide which part of the job each of us will do or how each part to be done Second the organization must be prepared for situations wherein leaders may be lost Personal loyalty for the commandment is not enough If a leader is killed his men must accept orders from his successor immediately and without question to carry on the battle Finally the tremendous size of all Armed Forces demands that there be uniform ways of doing things Discipline subordinates personal and self considerations to the interest of the group

MAINTENANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Discipline is installed in men through instructions pride and traditions and regulations You will develop appreciation of the other factors which build discipline as time passes One must know and understand the different laws and regulations immediately

Discipline is maintained in much the same manner as it is attained The article of war punishes military individualsrsquo fairness and justice high moral pride and responsibility contribute to maintain discipline as to developing it

CHAPTER IVARMED FORCES OF THE PHILIPPINESrsquo HISTORY

Brief History of the AFPCommonwealth Act no 1 otherwise known as the National Defense Act was approved on 21

December 1935 which gave the basic organization of the AFP General Douglas McArthur served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon Major General Dwight D Eisenhower and Major General James Ord members of the McArthurrsquos Staff helped in the planting of the Philippine Military Establishment as well as organizing it

As President Quezon issued Executive Order no 11 on January 1936 which formally established the Army of the Philippines he recalled Colonel Jose Delos Reyes of the Philippine Constabulary to active duty and later promoted him to Brigadier General and designated him as Acting Chief of Staff of the Army Brigadier General Basilio J Valdez and Colonel Guillermo B Francisco were named 1 st and 2nd Asst Chief of Staff respectively

In the same order the Philippine Constabulary became the nucleus of the regular forces of the Philippine Army Filipino citizens were required to go training under the National Defense Act since 1936 that would compose reserve force By the end of the ten year Commonwealth period in 1946 there would have been a trained Philippine Army Reserve pool of 400000 officers and men including the graduates of the ROTC Basic and Advance Course in accredited colleges and universities

When the Philippine Constabulary became part of the Philippine Army the PC Air Corps which was activated on 2 January 1955 was re designated Philippine Air Force on 3 July 1947

On February 1939 an Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was organized as a unit of the Philippine Army Initially equipped with three Q-boats (torpedo boats) and a handful of officers and men hurriedly trained in the rudiments of Sea-Warfare the OSP squadron provided coastal support to the beleaguered Filipino-American forces in the battles of Bataan and Corregidor In October 1947 the OSP was renamed Philippine Naval Patrol and on 5 January 1951 it became the Philippine Navy The OSP was often referred to as Mosquito Fleet

When President Franklin D Roosevelt of the USA declared the state of National Emergency on 26 July 1941 and ordered the induction of the Philippine Army units into the US Armed Forces in the Far East under the command of General Douglas Mc Arthur the Philippine Army had a reserve force of about 100000 officers and men at the time of the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked the Pearl Harbor Clark Field and other targets on 8 December 1941 The Philippine Army Reserve Force totaled around 200000 officers and men

The Philippine Army retained its own organization while serving with the USAFFE After the fall of Bataan on 9 April 1942 many officers and men of the Philippine Army continued resistance against the Japanese by forming guerilla forces all over the country These USAFFE guerilla forces along with other units organized by civilians in various parts of the country fought the Japanese Forces from 1942 to 1945 When the US Liberation Forces landed in Leyte on 20 October 1944 all the guerilla forces participated actively on the liberation on their respective sectors of operations

On October 1947 President Manual A Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 which organized all government agencies The Military establishment was not spared from its official designation as Army of the Philippines and it became the Armed Forces of the Philippines The ten pre-war military districts were deactivated but 4 Military Areas were also activated to enhance the efficiency of the Constabulary personnel all over the country

The post-war Philippine Army eventually got its forces fighting another battle ndash the battle against the armed elements of the Communist Party of the Philippines the HUKBALAHAP later renamed HMB For the anti0dissident campaign Army Sector Command and Battalion Combat Teams were formed During the Korean war the 10th 20th 11th 19th and 2nd BCTrsquos were sent as Philippine Expeditionary Force as the member of the United Nations PEFTOK served in Korea from 1950-1955 On 25 December 1950 President Quirino issued Executive Order No 389 renaming headquarters AFP to General Headquarters AFP and activating the 4 major services The Philippine Army Philippine Constabulary Philippine Air Force and Philippine Navy

From the time the Philippines joined the Southeast Asia Treaty Organization (SEATO) in September 1954 the AFP cooperated actively with the other member nations in the enhancing of military preparedness in the area

As a member of the UN the Philippines also sent a Philippine Air Force Contingent of 77 officers and men on a pacification campaign to the Congo Republic on 11 February 1963

In 1966 the Philippine Civic Action Group (PHICAG) was activated to implement the provisions of RA 4644 Composed of engineers medical and rural community development teams and security personnel the PHILCAG was sent to the Republic of South Vietnam and engaged in socio-economic projects mutually agreed upon by the governments of the Republic of the Philippines and Republic of South Vietnam

The AFP has shown an increasing awareness of its arrival in the country and its vital role in the political and economic development of the country by engaging are actively in civic action programs

Pursuant to the Socio-economic Military Program under RA 2056 the Chief of Staff AFP ordered the assignment of military personnel for public works construction food production land settlement and rural development Several civic centers of the AFP

To give greater impetus on the civic action the 51st Engineer Brigade consisting of 10 Engineer Construction Battalion was activated on 10 March 1962 This unit had constructed several much needed highways roads and bridges in various parts of the country The 52nd Engineer Brigade which was organized on 1 July 1969 also performed similar functions to holster the national program for social and economical developments

Today the AFP is employing all its resources in assisting the socio-economic development programs of the government without prejudice to its primary missions of improving and maintaining the effectiveness of the countryrsquos defense posture

SIGNIFICANT FACTS TO REMEMBER

MACTAN ndash place where the first revolt against Spain took place on April 26 1951 The firstrebellion Spain flared up in Bohol and Leyte

ANDRES MALONG ndash led the first major revolt in Luzon in 1660 He proclaimed himself as aKing of PangasinanLAPU ndash LAPU ndash was the first Filipino hero

MIGUEL VICOS ndash the Spanish Meztiso who assassinated Diego Silang on May 28 1863

RED WITH A FIGURE OF A SUN ndash color of the first flag of the Philippines in 1897

ANDRES BONIFACIO ndash was the founder of the Revolutionary Society called Katipunan

GEN GREGORIO DEL PILAR ndash led the Filipino forces in the Battle of Tirad Pass

AUGUST 29 1896 ndash the date designated as the start of the revolution which was also known as

Cry of BalintawakDECEMBER 14 1897 ndashdate when the Treaty of Paris and Fact of Biak-na-bato was signed

FACT OF BIAK-NA-BATO ndash an agreement between the Filipino and the Spanish authoritieson December 14 1897 to stop all hostilities

MARCELA AGONCILLO ndash designed and made the first flag of the first Philippine Republic

JULIAN FELIPE ndash was the composer of the Philippine National AnthemEMILIO AGUINALDO ndash was the first president of the Philippines

BALANAN ISABELA ndash the place where Gen Emilio Aguinaldo was captured In 1922 the US War Dept authorized the establishment of the Dept of Military Science andTactics under the supervision of the US Army This was established in theUniversity of the Philippines

MANUEL LUIS QUEZON ndash the first president of the Philippine Commonwealth

COMMONWEALTH ACT NO1 ndash is otherwise known as the National Defense Act issued by President Quezon and approved on December 21 1935 and gave the basicorganization of the AFP

GENERAL DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon during the Commonwealth period that helped in the planning andorganization of the Philippine Military EstablishmentGENDOUGLAS MCARTHURrsquoS STAFF

1 MAJ GEN DWIGHT D EISENHOWER2 MAJ GEN JAMES ORD

JANUARY 11 1936 ndash the date President Manuel L Quezon issued Executive Order No 11 onthe establishment of the PA

BRIG GEN BASILIO J VALDEZ ndash first assistant Chief of staff

BRIG GEN JOSE DELOS REYES ndash designated as the first Chief of Staff of the PhilippineArmy

COL GUILLERMO B FRANCISCO ndash 2nd assistant Chief of Staff The PHILLIPINE CONSTABULARY became the nucleus of the Philippine Army and the Philippine Constabulary Air Corps (PCA) was activated on January 2 1937

FEBRUARY 9 1939 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was activated and organized as a unit of thePhilippine Army The Off-Shore Patrol was equipped with Q-Boats (Torpedo Boat)and referred to as the ldquoMosquito Fleetrdquo

PRESIDENT FRANKLIN DELANO ROOSEVELT ndash President of the USA who set July 26 1941 as the date for the declaration of State of National Emergency and at the sametime the induction of the Philippine Army to United States Armed Forces to the Far East (USAFFE) with a total force of 160000 officers and men

GEN DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash was designated as the USAFFE COMMANDER

DECEMBER 8 1941 ndash the date the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked Pearl Harbor Clark Fieldand other targets

APRIL 9 1942 ndash fall of Bataan

MAY 6 1942 ndash fall of Corregidor

MAJOR FERDINAND EDRALIN MARCOS ndash was the most decorated soldier during the World War II and was a recipient of 27 medals

OCTOBER 20 1944 ndash the date the US Liberation Forces landed in Red Beach in Palo Leyte

JULY 3 1947 ndash the date the PC Air Corps was re-designated as the Philippine Air Force

OCTOBER 1947 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol was renamed Phil Naval Patrol ndash the date President Manuel Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 remainingthe Army of the Philippines as Armed Forces of the Philippines andactivating the 4 military areas

ARAW NG KAGITINGAN ndash a day set to commemorate the Fall of Bataan Fall of Corregidorand Fall of Bessang Pass Based on the historical records the independenceof the Republic of the Philippines was on June 12 1898

JULY 4 1946 ndash declaration of the Independence by the USA celebrated today as PhilippineAmerican Friendship Day

JULY 1950 ndash the Philippine Army was separated from the Gen Headquarters Philippine Army

DECEMBER 23 1950 ndash President ElpidioQuirino issued Executive Order No 389 renamingthe Headquarters AFP to Gen Headquarters AFP (GHQ AFP)

JANUARY 5 1951 ndash the Phil Naval Patrol was renamed the Philippine Naval of thePHILIPPINE NAVY

1959 ndash 1955 ndash the Battalion Combat Teams were sent to Korea to comply with the commitmentsof the Philippines as member of the UN The BCT was known as the PHILIPPINE EXPEDITIONARY FORCE TO KOREA (PEFTOK)

SEPTEMBER 1954 ndash The Philippines joined the Southeast Asian Treaty Org (SEATO)

APRIL 11 1963 ndash the PAF contingent of 77 officers and men were sent to Congo Republic of South VietnamPHIL CIVIC ACTION GROUP (PHILCAG) ndash the group of engineers medical and ruralcommunity development team and security personnel were sent by thePhilippines to the representative of South Vietnam

FEBRUARY 22-25 1986 ndash the bloodless peoples revolution which deposed Ferdinand Marcosfrom the presidency and as Commander in elected President of thePhilippines commonly referred to as the EDSA Revolution

ACRONYMSBCT ndash Battalion Combat TeamGHQ ndash General HeadquartersHMB ndash HukbongMapagpalayang Bayan (HUKBALAHAP)PHILCAG-V ndash Philippine Civic Action Group to VietnamSEATO ndash Southeast Asian Treaty OrganizationOSP ndash Off-Shore PatrolPEFTOK ndash Philippine Expeditionary Force to Korea

ENLISTED PERSONNELrsquoS RANKS

MarinesArmy Navy Constabulary Air Force

C ndash CadetCadette M- MidshipmanMidshipwoman

CHAPTER V

MILITARY LEADERSHIP AND COMMAND

A Leadership ndash is the art of influencing and directing men to an assigned goal is such a way toobtain their obedience respect and loyal cooperation Leadership can beexercised by anyone at anytime respective of the frame work of the command

Command ndash is the authority which an individual in the military service lawfully exercisedover subordinates by virtue of his rank and assignment Command andleadership are inseparable whether the function of the command is complex orsimple the commander should always be the controlling head

B TWO TYPES OF LEADER

1 Authoritarian ndash a leader who leads his men by means of rank and position

2 Persuasive ndash a leader who leads his men by always setting examples

C BASIC ELEMENTS OF LEADERSHIP

1 Character ndash to be a leader a person must be of good character Some indications arehonesty good manners industrious self-control and bravery

2 Intelligence ndash is the ability to grasp knowledge easily It includes native ability goodcommon sense and judgment

3 Alertness ndash is mental and physical watchfulness vigilance and observance to his planned and future activity

D LEADERSHIP RESPONSIBILITIES

1 Accomplishment of the assigned mission or task

2 Work for the welfare of his men

E LEADERSHIP TRAITS

1 Knowledge ndash professional knowledge of the job Understands the characteristics of his men2 Bearing ndash dignified appearance and behavior

3 Courage ndash physical and moral ability to act in spite of danger or hardship

4 Decisiveness ndash ability to decide promptly and correctly the proper time and to announce his decision clearly and briefly with authority

5 Dependability ndash performance of duty with or without supervision

6 Endurance ndash physical and mental strength to continue or complete a task

7 Enthusiasm ndash interest in his work or task at hand

8 Force ndash the ability to compel obedience

9 Humility ndash state of being reasonable and proud but not arrogant and boastful

10 Humor ndash ability to appreciate and narrate amusing incidents of everyday life

11 Initiative ndash ability to start or originate an idea or work even when others are absent

12 Judgment ndash power of mind to weight factors affecting a problem and to decide properly

13 Integrity ndash good moral character

14 Justice ndash impartiality in dealing with others giving credit when due and punishment when so demanded

15 Loyalty - sincerity and faithfulness to superiors for the good of the unit

16 Sympathy ndash mutual feelings to others

17 Tact ndash ability to deal with people without hurting their feelings

18 Unselfishness - avoidance of personal consideration that gives a disadvantage

to others

F PRINCIPLES IN LEADERSHIP

1 Know your job - must have thorough professional knowledge of his duties and responsibilities to

command and gain respect from his men

2Know yourself and seek self-improvement - a leader should analyze himself to determine his

good qualities and learn to recognize and correct his weakness

3 Know your men and look after their welfare - understand each of your men personally

psychologically in order to effectively lead them

4 Keep your men informed - keep your men knowledgeable background in all aspects its

organization and mission in order to function effectively

5 Set an example -set a good example as a model in loyalty in superiors and subordinates good

bearing and attitudes pride and faithfulness to the organization

6 Insure the task is understood supervised and accomplished - a leader should give a clear and

concise order that can be understood He supervises his men to accomplish the

assigned mission

7 Train your men as a team - teamwork is a must within and among units from the

smallest to the largest Each men should understand that he has a job to perform

and must cooperate with others in achieving the common objective

8 Make sound and timely decisions - the ability to make raid estimate of the situation Arrive at the

sound decision and announce his decision in the correct form of the proper is

essential to a leader For any situation that may arise the leader should be able to

act logically

9 Develop a sense of responsibility among your subordinates - the leader should train his

subordinates to act in the absence of orders when the situation so demands He

develops responsibility among his subordinates byproper delegation of his

authority and holding them responsible for theaccomplishment of their mission

10 Employ your commands in accordance with its capability - the leader must have thorough knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of his command He must assign objectives that is responsible to be attained However when the situation so demands then men must be forced to action beyond their normal endurance so as to avoid a harder or more costly consequence on their part

11 See responsibility and take responsibility for your action - learn the seniors job for youmay assume his position later on Take advantage of the responsibility delegated toyou and do not back out in case of failure

ROLES OF A LEADER

1 The leader is a model soldier2 The leader is a commander3 The leader is an instructor4 The leader is a personal manager5 The leader is a councilor6 The leader is a custodian of his mens welfare

OBJECTIVES OF A LEADER

1 MORALE - the mental and emotional state of an individual 2 DISCIPLINE - the prompt and willing obedience to orders Complying to regulations and initiating appropriate action even in theabsence of orders 3 PROFICIENCY - the technical tactical and physical ability of an individual to perform their mission 4 ESPRIT DE CORPS - More than the aggregate personality it is how the individuals feel about their unit Jealous of enthusiasticfor pride in and devotion for

MAP READING

MAP - is a graphical representation of the earths surface drawn to a scale on aplane When you look at the map you are actually looking at a picture ofthe ground from a high spot in the air MAP COLOR - different colors are used on the printing of the maps to assist the use understanding it A GREEN - represents all types of vegetables B BLUE - signifies bodies of water such as rivers lakes swamps and streams C RED - indicates first class roads and prominent locations such as theProvincial or Municipal Capitals May be used to stress the significance ofimportant map locations

D BROWN - depicts contour lines which are representation of the relatives elevation and relief of the terrain

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

c) When an officer enters an enlisted menus hall the group is called to ldquoAt Easerdquo by the person noticing him first Men remain seated at ease and continue eating unless the officer directs otherwise A soldiers addresses stop eating and sits at attention until the conversation has ended

d) When accompanying a senior a junior walks or ride on his left except when accompanying senior during inspection

e) When entering a car or a small boat the senior goes in first and others follow in the order of rank In getting off he junior goes out first and others follow in the inverse order of rank

HONORS TO THE NATIONAL ANTHEM OR TO THE COLORS

I OUTDOOR

- Wheneverwherever the National Anthem or the colors is played military personnel not in the formation must observe the following

1 At the first note of the music stand at attention and render the prescribed salute except atthe escort of the color or at retreat when they will face toward the color or flag and salute The salute is retained until the last note of the music

2 The mounted on animals will halt and render the salute mounted Individuals loadinganimals or standing to a horse will stand at attention having the salute

3 Vehicles in motion will be brought to a halt Persons riding on a passenger car or amotorcycle will dismount and salute as described above Occupants of combat vehicles such a tanks half trucks scout cars and armored cars will remain in their vehicles but stand at attention and salute

4 The above respect to the National Color is rendered to the National Anthem or colors offriendly nations

II INDOORS

- When the national anthem is played officer and men will stand at attention and face the music or the flag but do not salute

UNCOVERING- Officer and enlisted men under arms uncover when

a) Seated as a member of or in attendance at a court or board Sentinels guarding prisoners do not uncover

b) Entering places of divine worship

c) Indoors when not in duty

d) In attendance at an official reception

DISPLAY AND SALUTE TO THE FLAG

a The Philippine flag represents our nation and should always be given a place of runner

b The National Flag is never dipped for salute nor is it permitted to touch the ground It is not used as a costume dress or a drapery No lettering or object should be placed on it

c The flag is played in the following manners1 When hoisted at a flag pole it should be hoisted fully at the top of the pole blue part

up or above During mornings the flag is hoisted to the top of the pole first then hauled down until the flag is about midway of the length of the pole

2 When the national flag is displayed with another flag whether they are standing sideby side or with their staff crossed the National Flag is at the right side blue part up

3 When placed in the vertical manner the triangle is up the blue color at the right4 When displayed in the horizontal position the triangle is at the right side with the blue

part up5 When displayed over the casket the triangle is in the direction of the head of the cadaver with

the blue part on the right side

During the ceremonies wherein the holstering or lowering of the flag is done or when it passes by during parades or reviews all persons present except those detailed in holstering lowering and carrying the flag should face it at attention and salute while those in uniform remove their headdress with their right hand and place them over their left breast Women should salute by placing their right hand on their left breastMILITARY DISCIPLINE

Military discipline is the mental attitude and state of training which renders obedience and proper conduct instinctive under all conditions It is founded upon respect for loyalty to properly constituted authority While it is primarily developed by military drills every feature in military life has its effect upon military discipline It is generally indicated in an individual or unit by smartness of appearance and action cleanliness of dress equipment or quarters respect for senior and by the prompt and cheerful obedience by the subordinates of both the latter and spirit of the legal orders

RELATION OF COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

The relation of military discipline to courtesy is clearly explained by the fact that discipline is founded upon by respect and loyalty to superiors and lawfully constituted authorities In other words discipline originates and develops mutual respect and goodwill among members of an organization Without courtesy and respect among members of an organization discipline disappears there will be no peace and order in the organization hence it will disintegrate

IMPORTANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Mass discipline and morale are essential factors for securing cohesive action and for ensuring that singleness or purpose which alone can triumph over the most difficult conditions of war The successful leader will teach his men to recognize and face fear because fear is the enemy of discipline and morale Fear unchecked will lead to panic and a unit that is panicky is no longer a disciplined one but a mob There is no same person who is without fear but with good discipline and morale all will face danger if not willingly at least resignedly because of their inborn sentiment of duty or courage of loyalty and because of their sense of pride in their country in their unit and in themselves in other words because of their esprit de corps

The need for discipline is recognized in many places outside the Armed Forces It reaches at highest form in teams wherein individual desires are subordinated to the interests of the entire team The Armed Forces are more in need of discipline for several reasons First the task of making war is not doing it because we as individuals have to do it in the interest of our country Because of that we cannot be allowed as individual to decide which part of the job each of us will do or how each part to be done Second the organization must be prepared for situations wherein leaders may be lost Personal loyalty for the commandment is not enough If a leader is killed his men must accept orders from his successor immediately and without question to carry on the battle Finally the tremendous size of all Armed Forces demands that there be uniform ways of doing things Discipline subordinates personal and self considerations to the interest of the group

MAINTENANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Discipline is installed in men through instructions pride and traditions and regulations You will develop appreciation of the other factors which build discipline as time passes One must know and understand the different laws and regulations immediately

Discipline is maintained in much the same manner as it is attained The article of war punishes military individualsrsquo fairness and justice high moral pride and responsibility contribute to maintain discipline as to developing it

CHAPTER IVARMED FORCES OF THE PHILIPPINESrsquo HISTORY

Brief History of the AFPCommonwealth Act no 1 otherwise known as the National Defense Act was approved on 21

December 1935 which gave the basic organization of the AFP General Douglas McArthur served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon Major General Dwight D Eisenhower and Major General James Ord members of the McArthurrsquos Staff helped in the planting of the Philippine Military Establishment as well as organizing it

As President Quezon issued Executive Order no 11 on January 1936 which formally established the Army of the Philippines he recalled Colonel Jose Delos Reyes of the Philippine Constabulary to active duty and later promoted him to Brigadier General and designated him as Acting Chief of Staff of the Army Brigadier General Basilio J Valdez and Colonel Guillermo B Francisco were named 1 st and 2nd Asst Chief of Staff respectively

In the same order the Philippine Constabulary became the nucleus of the regular forces of the Philippine Army Filipino citizens were required to go training under the National Defense Act since 1936 that would compose reserve force By the end of the ten year Commonwealth period in 1946 there would have been a trained Philippine Army Reserve pool of 400000 officers and men including the graduates of the ROTC Basic and Advance Course in accredited colleges and universities

When the Philippine Constabulary became part of the Philippine Army the PC Air Corps which was activated on 2 January 1955 was re designated Philippine Air Force on 3 July 1947

On February 1939 an Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was organized as a unit of the Philippine Army Initially equipped with three Q-boats (torpedo boats) and a handful of officers and men hurriedly trained in the rudiments of Sea-Warfare the OSP squadron provided coastal support to the beleaguered Filipino-American forces in the battles of Bataan and Corregidor In October 1947 the OSP was renamed Philippine Naval Patrol and on 5 January 1951 it became the Philippine Navy The OSP was often referred to as Mosquito Fleet

When President Franklin D Roosevelt of the USA declared the state of National Emergency on 26 July 1941 and ordered the induction of the Philippine Army units into the US Armed Forces in the Far East under the command of General Douglas Mc Arthur the Philippine Army had a reserve force of about 100000 officers and men at the time of the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked the Pearl Harbor Clark Field and other targets on 8 December 1941 The Philippine Army Reserve Force totaled around 200000 officers and men

The Philippine Army retained its own organization while serving with the USAFFE After the fall of Bataan on 9 April 1942 many officers and men of the Philippine Army continued resistance against the Japanese by forming guerilla forces all over the country These USAFFE guerilla forces along with other units organized by civilians in various parts of the country fought the Japanese Forces from 1942 to 1945 When the US Liberation Forces landed in Leyte on 20 October 1944 all the guerilla forces participated actively on the liberation on their respective sectors of operations

On October 1947 President Manual A Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 which organized all government agencies The Military establishment was not spared from its official designation as Army of the Philippines and it became the Armed Forces of the Philippines The ten pre-war military districts were deactivated but 4 Military Areas were also activated to enhance the efficiency of the Constabulary personnel all over the country

The post-war Philippine Army eventually got its forces fighting another battle ndash the battle against the armed elements of the Communist Party of the Philippines the HUKBALAHAP later renamed HMB For the anti0dissident campaign Army Sector Command and Battalion Combat Teams were formed During the Korean war the 10th 20th 11th 19th and 2nd BCTrsquos were sent as Philippine Expeditionary Force as the member of the United Nations PEFTOK served in Korea from 1950-1955 On 25 December 1950 President Quirino issued Executive Order No 389 renaming headquarters AFP to General Headquarters AFP and activating the 4 major services The Philippine Army Philippine Constabulary Philippine Air Force and Philippine Navy

From the time the Philippines joined the Southeast Asia Treaty Organization (SEATO) in September 1954 the AFP cooperated actively with the other member nations in the enhancing of military preparedness in the area

As a member of the UN the Philippines also sent a Philippine Air Force Contingent of 77 officers and men on a pacification campaign to the Congo Republic on 11 February 1963

In 1966 the Philippine Civic Action Group (PHICAG) was activated to implement the provisions of RA 4644 Composed of engineers medical and rural community development teams and security personnel the PHILCAG was sent to the Republic of South Vietnam and engaged in socio-economic projects mutually agreed upon by the governments of the Republic of the Philippines and Republic of South Vietnam

The AFP has shown an increasing awareness of its arrival in the country and its vital role in the political and economic development of the country by engaging are actively in civic action programs

Pursuant to the Socio-economic Military Program under RA 2056 the Chief of Staff AFP ordered the assignment of military personnel for public works construction food production land settlement and rural development Several civic centers of the AFP

To give greater impetus on the civic action the 51st Engineer Brigade consisting of 10 Engineer Construction Battalion was activated on 10 March 1962 This unit had constructed several much needed highways roads and bridges in various parts of the country The 52nd Engineer Brigade which was organized on 1 July 1969 also performed similar functions to holster the national program for social and economical developments

Today the AFP is employing all its resources in assisting the socio-economic development programs of the government without prejudice to its primary missions of improving and maintaining the effectiveness of the countryrsquos defense posture

SIGNIFICANT FACTS TO REMEMBER

MACTAN ndash place where the first revolt against Spain took place on April 26 1951 The firstrebellion Spain flared up in Bohol and Leyte

ANDRES MALONG ndash led the first major revolt in Luzon in 1660 He proclaimed himself as aKing of PangasinanLAPU ndash LAPU ndash was the first Filipino hero

MIGUEL VICOS ndash the Spanish Meztiso who assassinated Diego Silang on May 28 1863

RED WITH A FIGURE OF A SUN ndash color of the first flag of the Philippines in 1897

ANDRES BONIFACIO ndash was the founder of the Revolutionary Society called Katipunan

GEN GREGORIO DEL PILAR ndash led the Filipino forces in the Battle of Tirad Pass

AUGUST 29 1896 ndash the date designated as the start of the revolution which was also known as

Cry of BalintawakDECEMBER 14 1897 ndashdate when the Treaty of Paris and Fact of Biak-na-bato was signed

FACT OF BIAK-NA-BATO ndash an agreement between the Filipino and the Spanish authoritieson December 14 1897 to stop all hostilities

MARCELA AGONCILLO ndash designed and made the first flag of the first Philippine Republic

JULIAN FELIPE ndash was the composer of the Philippine National AnthemEMILIO AGUINALDO ndash was the first president of the Philippines

BALANAN ISABELA ndash the place where Gen Emilio Aguinaldo was captured In 1922 the US War Dept authorized the establishment of the Dept of Military Science andTactics under the supervision of the US Army This was established in theUniversity of the Philippines

MANUEL LUIS QUEZON ndash the first president of the Philippine Commonwealth

COMMONWEALTH ACT NO1 ndash is otherwise known as the National Defense Act issued by President Quezon and approved on December 21 1935 and gave the basicorganization of the AFP

GENERAL DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon during the Commonwealth period that helped in the planning andorganization of the Philippine Military EstablishmentGENDOUGLAS MCARTHURrsquoS STAFF

1 MAJ GEN DWIGHT D EISENHOWER2 MAJ GEN JAMES ORD

JANUARY 11 1936 ndash the date President Manuel L Quezon issued Executive Order No 11 onthe establishment of the PA

BRIG GEN BASILIO J VALDEZ ndash first assistant Chief of staff

BRIG GEN JOSE DELOS REYES ndash designated as the first Chief of Staff of the PhilippineArmy

COL GUILLERMO B FRANCISCO ndash 2nd assistant Chief of Staff The PHILLIPINE CONSTABULARY became the nucleus of the Philippine Army and the Philippine Constabulary Air Corps (PCA) was activated on January 2 1937

FEBRUARY 9 1939 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was activated and organized as a unit of thePhilippine Army The Off-Shore Patrol was equipped with Q-Boats (Torpedo Boat)and referred to as the ldquoMosquito Fleetrdquo

PRESIDENT FRANKLIN DELANO ROOSEVELT ndash President of the USA who set July 26 1941 as the date for the declaration of State of National Emergency and at the sametime the induction of the Philippine Army to United States Armed Forces to the Far East (USAFFE) with a total force of 160000 officers and men

GEN DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash was designated as the USAFFE COMMANDER

DECEMBER 8 1941 ndash the date the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked Pearl Harbor Clark Fieldand other targets

APRIL 9 1942 ndash fall of Bataan

MAY 6 1942 ndash fall of Corregidor

MAJOR FERDINAND EDRALIN MARCOS ndash was the most decorated soldier during the World War II and was a recipient of 27 medals

OCTOBER 20 1944 ndash the date the US Liberation Forces landed in Red Beach in Palo Leyte

JULY 3 1947 ndash the date the PC Air Corps was re-designated as the Philippine Air Force

OCTOBER 1947 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol was renamed Phil Naval Patrol ndash the date President Manuel Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 remainingthe Army of the Philippines as Armed Forces of the Philippines andactivating the 4 military areas

ARAW NG KAGITINGAN ndash a day set to commemorate the Fall of Bataan Fall of Corregidorand Fall of Bessang Pass Based on the historical records the independenceof the Republic of the Philippines was on June 12 1898

JULY 4 1946 ndash declaration of the Independence by the USA celebrated today as PhilippineAmerican Friendship Day

JULY 1950 ndash the Philippine Army was separated from the Gen Headquarters Philippine Army

DECEMBER 23 1950 ndash President ElpidioQuirino issued Executive Order No 389 renamingthe Headquarters AFP to Gen Headquarters AFP (GHQ AFP)

JANUARY 5 1951 ndash the Phil Naval Patrol was renamed the Philippine Naval of thePHILIPPINE NAVY

1959 ndash 1955 ndash the Battalion Combat Teams were sent to Korea to comply with the commitmentsof the Philippines as member of the UN The BCT was known as the PHILIPPINE EXPEDITIONARY FORCE TO KOREA (PEFTOK)

SEPTEMBER 1954 ndash The Philippines joined the Southeast Asian Treaty Org (SEATO)

APRIL 11 1963 ndash the PAF contingent of 77 officers and men were sent to Congo Republic of South VietnamPHIL CIVIC ACTION GROUP (PHILCAG) ndash the group of engineers medical and ruralcommunity development team and security personnel were sent by thePhilippines to the representative of South Vietnam

FEBRUARY 22-25 1986 ndash the bloodless peoples revolution which deposed Ferdinand Marcosfrom the presidency and as Commander in elected President of thePhilippines commonly referred to as the EDSA Revolution

ACRONYMSBCT ndash Battalion Combat TeamGHQ ndash General HeadquartersHMB ndash HukbongMapagpalayang Bayan (HUKBALAHAP)PHILCAG-V ndash Philippine Civic Action Group to VietnamSEATO ndash Southeast Asian Treaty OrganizationOSP ndash Off-Shore PatrolPEFTOK ndash Philippine Expeditionary Force to Korea

ENLISTED PERSONNELrsquoS RANKS

MarinesArmy Navy Constabulary Air Force

C ndash CadetCadette M- MidshipmanMidshipwoman

CHAPTER V

MILITARY LEADERSHIP AND COMMAND

A Leadership ndash is the art of influencing and directing men to an assigned goal is such a way toobtain their obedience respect and loyal cooperation Leadership can beexercised by anyone at anytime respective of the frame work of the command

Command ndash is the authority which an individual in the military service lawfully exercisedover subordinates by virtue of his rank and assignment Command andleadership are inseparable whether the function of the command is complex orsimple the commander should always be the controlling head

B TWO TYPES OF LEADER

1 Authoritarian ndash a leader who leads his men by means of rank and position

2 Persuasive ndash a leader who leads his men by always setting examples

C BASIC ELEMENTS OF LEADERSHIP

1 Character ndash to be a leader a person must be of good character Some indications arehonesty good manners industrious self-control and bravery

2 Intelligence ndash is the ability to grasp knowledge easily It includes native ability goodcommon sense and judgment

3 Alertness ndash is mental and physical watchfulness vigilance and observance to his planned and future activity

D LEADERSHIP RESPONSIBILITIES

1 Accomplishment of the assigned mission or task

2 Work for the welfare of his men

E LEADERSHIP TRAITS

1 Knowledge ndash professional knowledge of the job Understands the characteristics of his men2 Bearing ndash dignified appearance and behavior

3 Courage ndash physical and moral ability to act in spite of danger or hardship

4 Decisiveness ndash ability to decide promptly and correctly the proper time and to announce his decision clearly and briefly with authority

5 Dependability ndash performance of duty with or without supervision

6 Endurance ndash physical and mental strength to continue or complete a task

7 Enthusiasm ndash interest in his work or task at hand

8 Force ndash the ability to compel obedience

9 Humility ndash state of being reasonable and proud but not arrogant and boastful

10 Humor ndash ability to appreciate and narrate amusing incidents of everyday life

11 Initiative ndash ability to start or originate an idea or work even when others are absent

12 Judgment ndash power of mind to weight factors affecting a problem and to decide properly

13 Integrity ndash good moral character

14 Justice ndash impartiality in dealing with others giving credit when due and punishment when so demanded

15 Loyalty - sincerity and faithfulness to superiors for the good of the unit

16 Sympathy ndash mutual feelings to others

17 Tact ndash ability to deal with people without hurting their feelings

18 Unselfishness - avoidance of personal consideration that gives a disadvantage

to others

F PRINCIPLES IN LEADERSHIP

1 Know your job - must have thorough professional knowledge of his duties and responsibilities to

command and gain respect from his men

2Know yourself and seek self-improvement - a leader should analyze himself to determine his

good qualities and learn to recognize and correct his weakness

3 Know your men and look after their welfare - understand each of your men personally

psychologically in order to effectively lead them

4 Keep your men informed - keep your men knowledgeable background in all aspects its

organization and mission in order to function effectively

5 Set an example -set a good example as a model in loyalty in superiors and subordinates good

bearing and attitudes pride and faithfulness to the organization

6 Insure the task is understood supervised and accomplished - a leader should give a clear and

concise order that can be understood He supervises his men to accomplish the

assigned mission

7 Train your men as a team - teamwork is a must within and among units from the

smallest to the largest Each men should understand that he has a job to perform

and must cooperate with others in achieving the common objective

8 Make sound and timely decisions - the ability to make raid estimate of the situation Arrive at the

sound decision and announce his decision in the correct form of the proper is

essential to a leader For any situation that may arise the leader should be able to

act logically

9 Develop a sense of responsibility among your subordinates - the leader should train his

subordinates to act in the absence of orders when the situation so demands He

develops responsibility among his subordinates byproper delegation of his

authority and holding them responsible for theaccomplishment of their mission

10 Employ your commands in accordance with its capability - the leader must have thorough knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of his command He must assign objectives that is responsible to be attained However when the situation so demands then men must be forced to action beyond their normal endurance so as to avoid a harder or more costly consequence on their part

11 See responsibility and take responsibility for your action - learn the seniors job for youmay assume his position later on Take advantage of the responsibility delegated toyou and do not back out in case of failure

ROLES OF A LEADER

1 The leader is a model soldier2 The leader is a commander3 The leader is an instructor4 The leader is a personal manager5 The leader is a councilor6 The leader is a custodian of his mens welfare

OBJECTIVES OF A LEADER

1 MORALE - the mental and emotional state of an individual 2 DISCIPLINE - the prompt and willing obedience to orders Complying to regulations and initiating appropriate action even in theabsence of orders 3 PROFICIENCY - the technical tactical and physical ability of an individual to perform their mission 4 ESPRIT DE CORPS - More than the aggregate personality it is how the individuals feel about their unit Jealous of enthusiasticfor pride in and devotion for

MAP READING

MAP - is a graphical representation of the earths surface drawn to a scale on aplane When you look at the map you are actually looking at a picture ofthe ground from a high spot in the air MAP COLOR - different colors are used on the printing of the maps to assist the use understanding it A GREEN - represents all types of vegetables B BLUE - signifies bodies of water such as rivers lakes swamps and streams C RED - indicates first class roads and prominent locations such as theProvincial or Municipal Capitals May be used to stress the significance ofimportant map locations

D BROWN - depicts contour lines which are representation of the relatives elevation and relief of the terrain

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

a The Philippine flag represents our nation and should always be given a place of runner

b The National Flag is never dipped for salute nor is it permitted to touch the ground It is not used as a costume dress or a drapery No lettering or object should be placed on it

c The flag is played in the following manners1 When hoisted at a flag pole it should be hoisted fully at the top of the pole blue part

up or above During mornings the flag is hoisted to the top of the pole first then hauled down until the flag is about midway of the length of the pole

2 When the national flag is displayed with another flag whether they are standing sideby side or with their staff crossed the National Flag is at the right side blue part up

3 When placed in the vertical manner the triangle is up the blue color at the right4 When displayed in the horizontal position the triangle is at the right side with the blue

part up5 When displayed over the casket the triangle is in the direction of the head of the cadaver with

the blue part on the right side

During the ceremonies wherein the holstering or lowering of the flag is done or when it passes by during parades or reviews all persons present except those detailed in holstering lowering and carrying the flag should face it at attention and salute while those in uniform remove their headdress with their right hand and place them over their left breast Women should salute by placing their right hand on their left breastMILITARY DISCIPLINE

Military discipline is the mental attitude and state of training which renders obedience and proper conduct instinctive under all conditions It is founded upon respect for loyalty to properly constituted authority While it is primarily developed by military drills every feature in military life has its effect upon military discipline It is generally indicated in an individual or unit by smartness of appearance and action cleanliness of dress equipment or quarters respect for senior and by the prompt and cheerful obedience by the subordinates of both the latter and spirit of the legal orders

RELATION OF COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE

The relation of military discipline to courtesy is clearly explained by the fact that discipline is founded upon by respect and loyalty to superiors and lawfully constituted authorities In other words discipline originates and develops mutual respect and goodwill among members of an organization Without courtesy and respect among members of an organization discipline disappears there will be no peace and order in the organization hence it will disintegrate

IMPORTANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Mass discipline and morale are essential factors for securing cohesive action and for ensuring that singleness or purpose which alone can triumph over the most difficult conditions of war The successful leader will teach his men to recognize and face fear because fear is the enemy of discipline and morale Fear unchecked will lead to panic and a unit that is panicky is no longer a disciplined one but a mob There is no same person who is without fear but with good discipline and morale all will face danger if not willingly at least resignedly because of their inborn sentiment of duty or courage of loyalty and because of their sense of pride in their country in their unit and in themselves in other words because of their esprit de corps

The need for discipline is recognized in many places outside the Armed Forces It reaches at highest form in teams wherein individual desires are subordinated to the interests of the entire team The Armed Forces are more in need of discipline for several reasons First the task of making war is not doing it because we as individuals have to do it in the interest of our country Because of that we cannot be allowed as individual to decide which part of the job each of us will do or how each part to be done Second the organization must be prepared for situations wherein leaders may be lost Personal loyalty for the commandment is not enough If a leader is killed his men must accept orders from his successor immediately and without question to carry on the battle Finally the tremendous size of all Armed Forces demands that there be uniform ways of doing things Discipline subordinates personal and self considerations to the interest of the group

MAINTENANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Discipline is installed in men through instructions pride and traditions and regulations You will develop appreciation of the other factors which build discipline as time passes One must know and understand the different laws and regulations immediately

Discipline is maintained in much the same manner as it is attained The article of war punishes military individualsrsquo fairness and justice high moral pride and responsibility contribute to maintain discipline as to developing it

CHAPTER IVARMED FORCES OF THE PHILIPPINESrsquo HISTORY

Brief History of the AFPCommonwealth Act no 1 otherwise known as the National Defense Act was approved on 21

December 1935 which gave the basic organization of the AFP General Douglas McArthur served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon Major General Dwight D Eisenhower and Major General James Ord members of the McArthurrsquos Staff helped in the planting of the Philippine Military Establishment as well as organizing it

As President Quezon issued Executive Order no 11 on January 1936 which formally established the Army of the Philippines he recalled Colonel Jose Delos Reyes of the Philippine Constabulary to active duty and later promoted him to Brigadier General and designated him as Acting Chief of Staff of the Army Brigadier General Basilio J Valdez and Colonel Guillermo B Francisco were named 1 st and 2nd Asst Chief of Staff respectively

In the same order the Philippine Constabulary became the nucleus of the regular forces of the Philippine Army Filipino citizens were required to go training under the National Defense Act since 1936 that would compose reserve force By the end of the ten year Commonwealth period in 1946 there would have been a trained Philippine Army Reserve pool of 400000 officers and men including the graduates of the ROTC Basic and Advance Course in accredited colleges and universities

When the Philippine Constabulary became part of the Philippine Army the PC Air Corps which was activated on 2 January 1955 was re designated Philippine Air Force on 3 July 1947

On February 1939 an Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was organized as a unit of the Philippine Army Initially equipped with three Q-boats (torpedo boats) and a handful of officers and men hurriedly trained in the rudiments of Sea-Warfare the OSP squadron provided coastal support to the beleaguered Filipino-American forces in the battles of Bataan and Corregidor In October 1947 the OSP was renamed Philippine Naval Patrol and on 5 January 1951 it became the Philippine Navy The OSP was often referred to as Mosquito Fleet

When President Franklin D Roosevelt of the USA declared the state of National Emergency on 26 July 1941 and ordered the induction of the Philippine Army units into the US Armed Forces in the Far East under the command of General Douglas Mc Arthur the Philippine Army had a reserve force of about 100000 officers and men at the time of the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked the Pearl Harbor Clark Field and other targets on 8 December 1941 The Philippine Army Reserve Force totaled around 200000 officers and men

The Philippine Army retained its own organization while serving with the USAFFE After the fall of Bataan on 9 April 1942 many officers and men of the Philippine Army continued resistance against the Japanese by forming guerilla forces all over the country These USAFFE guerilla forces along with other units organized by civilians in various parts of the country fought the Japanese Forces from 1942 to 1945 When the US Liberation Forces landed in Leyte on 20 October 1944 all the guerilla forces participated actively on the liberation on their respective sectors of operations

On October 1947 President Manual A Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 which organized all government agencies The Military establishment was not spared from its official designation as Army of the Philippines and it became the Armed Forces of the Philippines The ten pre-war military districts were deactivated but 4 Military Areas were also activated to enhance the efficiency of the Constabulary personnel all over the country

The post-war Philippine Army eventually got its forces fighting another battle ndash the battle against the armed elements of the Communist Party of the Philippines the HUKBALAHAP later renamed HMB For the anti0dissident campaign Army Sector Command and Battalion Combat Teams were formed During the Korean war the 10th 20th 11th 19th and 2nd BCTrsquos were sent as Philippine Expeditionary Force as the member of the United Nations PEFTOK served in Korea from 1950-1955 On 25 December 1950 President Quirino issued Executive Order No 389 renaming headquarters AFP to General Headquarters AFP and activating the 4 major services The Philippine Army Philippine Constabulary Philippine Air Force and Philippine Navy

From the time the Philippines joined the Southeast Asia Treaty Organization (SEATO) in September 1954 the AFP cooperated actively with the other member nations in the enhancing of military preparedness in the area

As a member of the UN the Philippines also sent a Philippine Air Force Contingent of 77 officers and men on a pacification campaign to the Congo Republic on 11 February 1963

In 1966 the Philippine Civic Action Group (PHICAG) was activated to implement the provisions of RA 4644 Composed of engineers medical and rural community development teams and security personnel the PHILCAG was sent to the Republic of South Vietnam and engaged in socio-economic projects mutually agreed upon by the governments of the Republic of the Philippines and Republic of South Vietnam

The AFP has shown an increasing awareness of its arrival in the country and its vital role in the political and economic development of the country by engaging are actively in civic action programs

Pursuant to the Socio-economic Military Program under RA 2056 the Chief of Staff AFP ordered the assignment of military personnel for public works construction food production land settlement and rural development Several civic centers of the AFP

To give greater impetus on the civic action the 51st Engineer Brigade consisting of 10 Engineer Construction Battalion was activated on 10 March 1962 This unit had constructed several much needed highways roads and bridges in various parts of the country The 52nd Engineer Brigade which was organized on 1 July 1969 also performed similar functions to holster the national program for social and economical developments

Today the AFP is employing all its resources in assisting the socio-economic development programs of the government without prejudice to its primary missions of improving and maintaining the effectiveness of the countryrsquos defense posture

SIGNIFICANT FACTS TO REMEMBER

MACTAN ndash place where the first revolt against Spain took place on April 26 1951 The firstrebellion Spain flared up in Bohol and Leyte

ANDRES MALONG ndash led the first major revolt in Luzon in 1660 He proclaimed himself as aKing of PangasinanLAPU ndash LAPU ndash was the first Filipino hero

MIGUEL VICOS ndash the Spanish Meztiso who assassinated Diego Silang on May 28 1863

RED WITH A FIGURE OF A SUN ndash color of the first flag of the Philippines in 1897

ANDRES BONIFACIO ndash was the founder of the Revolutionary Society called Katipunan

GEN GREGORIO DEL PILAR ndash led the Filipino forces in the Battle of Tirad Pass

AUGUST 29 1896 ndash the date designated as the start of the revolution which was also known as

Cry of BalintawakDECEMBER 14 1897 ndashdate when the Treaty of Paris and Fact of Biak-na-bato was signed

FACT OF BIAK-NA-BATO ndash an agreement between the Filipino and the Spanish authoritieson December 14 1897 to stop all hostilities

MARCELA AGONCILLO ndash designed and made the first flag of the first Philippine Republic

JULIAN FELIPE ndash was the composer of the Philippine National AnthemEMILIO AGUINALDO ndash was the first president of the Philippines

BALANAN ISABELA ndash the place where Gen Emilio Aguinaldo was captured In 1922 the US War Dept authorized the establishment of the Dept of Military Science andTactics under the supervision of the US Army This was established in theUniversity of the Philippines

MANUEL LUIS QUEZON ndash the first president of the Philippine Commonwealth

COMMONWEALTH ACT NO1 ndash is otherwise known as the National Defense Act issued by President Quezon and approved on December 21 1935 and gave the basicorganization of the AFP

GENERAL DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon during the Commonwealth period that helped in the planning andorganization of the Philippine Military EstablishmentGENDOUGLAS MCARTHURrsquoS STAFF

1 MAJ GEN DWIGHT D EISENHOWER2 MAJ GEN JAMES ORD

JANUARY 11 1936 ndash the date President Manuel L Quezon issued Executive Order No 11 onthe establishment of the PA

BRIG GEN BASILIO J VALDEZ ndash first assistant Chief of staff

BRIG GEN JOSE DELOS REYES ndash designated as the first Chief of Staff of the PhilippineArmy

COL GUILLERMO B FRANCISCO ndash 2nd assistant Chief of Staff The PHILLIPINE CONSTABULARY became the nucleus of the Philippine Army and the Philippine Constabulary Air Corps (PCA) was activated on January 2 1937

FEBRUARY 9 1939 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was activated and organized as a unit of thePhilippine Army The Off-Shore Patrol was equipped with Q-Boats (Torpedo Boat)and referred to as the ldquoMosquito Fleetrdquo

PRESIDENT FRANKLIN DELANO ROOSEVELT ndash President of the USA who set July 26 1941 as the date for the declaration of State of National Emergency and at the sametime the induction of the Philippine Army to United States Armed Forces to the Far East (USAFFE) with a total force of 160000 officers and men

GEN DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash was designated as the USAFFE COMMANDER

DECEMBER 8 1941 ndash the date the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked Pearl Harbor Clark Fieldand other targets

APRIL 9 1942 ndash fall of Bataan

MAY 6 1942 ndash fall of Corregidor

MAJOR FERDINAND EDRALIN MARCOS ndash was the most decorated soldier during the World War II and was a recipient of 27 medals

OCTOBER 20 1944 ndash the date the US Liberation Forces landed in Red Beach in Palo Leyte

JULY 3 1947 ndash the date the PC Air Corps was re-designated as the Philippine Air Force

OCTOBER 1947 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol was renamed Phil Naval Patrol ndash the date President Manuel Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 remainingthe Army of the Philippines as Armed Forces of the Philippines andactivating the 4 military areas

ARAW NG KAGITINGAN ndash a day set to commemorate the Fall of Bataan Fall of Corregidorand Fall of Bessang Pass Based on the historical records the independenceof the Republic of the Philippines was on June 12 1898

JULY 4 1946 ndash declaration of the Independence by the USA celebrated today as PhilippineAmerican Friendship Day

JULY 1950 ndash the Philippine Army was separated from the Gen Headquarters Philippine Army

DECEMBER 23 1950 ndash President ElpidioQuirino issued Executive Order No 389 renamingthe Headquarters AFP to Gen Headquarters AFP (GHQ AFP)

JANUARY 5 1951 ndash the Phil Naval Patrol was renamed the Philippine Naval of thePHILIPPINE NAVY

1959 ndash 1955 ndash the Battalion Combat Teams were sent to Korea to comply with the commitmentsof the Philippines as member of the UN The BCT was known as the PHILIPPINE EXPEDITIONARY FORCE TO KOREA (PEFTOK)

SEPTEMBER 1954 ndash The Philippines joined the Southeast Asian Treaty Org (SEATO)

APRIL 11 1963 ndash the PAF contingent of 77 officers and men were sent to Congo Republic of South VietnamPHIL CIVIC ACTION GROUP (PHILCAG) ndash the group of engineers medical and ruralcommunity development team and security personnel were sent by thePhilippines to the representative of South Vietnam

FEBRUARY 22-25 1986 ndash the bloodless peoples revolution which deposed Ferdinand Marcosfrom the presidency and as Commander in elected President of thePhilippines commonly referred to as the EDSA Revolution

ACRONYMSBCT ndash Battalion Combat TeamGHQ ndash General HeadquartersHMB ndash HukbongMapagpalayang Bayan (HUKBALAHAP)PHILCAG-V ndash Philippine Civic Action Group to VietnamSEATO ndash Southeast Asian Treaty OrganizationOSP ndash Off-Shore PatrolPEFTOK ndash Philippine Expeditionary Force to Korea

ENLISTED PERSONNELrsquoS RANKS

MarinesArmy Navy Constabulary Air Force

C ndash CadetCadette M- MidshipmanMidshipwoman

CHAPTER V

MILITARY LEADERSHIP AND COMMAND

A Leadership ndash is the art of influencing and directing men to an assigned goal is such a way toobtain their obedience respect and loyal cooperation Leadership can beexercised by anyone at anytime respective of the frame work of the command

Command ndash is the authority which an individual in the military service lawfully exercisedover subordinates by virtue of his rank and assignment Command andleadership are inseparable whether the function of the command is complex orsimple the commander should always be the controlling head

B TWO TYPES OF LEADER

1 Authoritarian ndash a leader who leads his men by means of rank and position

2 Persuasive ndash a leader who leads his men by always setting examples

C BASIC ELEMENTS OF LEADERSHIP

1 Character ndash to be a leader a person must be of good character Some indications arehonesty good manners industrious self-control and bravery

2 Intelligence ndash is the ability to grasp knowledge easily It includes native ability goodcommon sense and judgment

3 Alertness ndash is mental and physical watchfulness vigilance and observance to his planned and future activity

D LEADERSHIP RESPONSIBILITIES

1 Accomplishment of the assigned mission or task

2 Work for the welfare of his men

E LEADERSHIP TRAITS

1 Knowledge ndash professional knowledge of the job Understands the characteristics of his men2 Bearing ndash dignified appearance and behavior

3 Courage ndash physical and moral ability to act in spite of danger or hardship

4 Decisiveness ndash ability to decide promptly and correctly the proper time and to announce his decision clearly and briefly with authority

5 Dependability ndash performance of duty with or without supervision

6 Endurance ndash physical and mental strength to continue or complete a task

7 Enthusiasm ndash interest in his work or task at hand

8 Force ndash the ability to compel obedience

9 Humility ndash state of being reasonable and proud but not arrogant and boastful

10 Humor ndash ability to appreciate and narrate amusing incidents of everyday life

11 Initiative ndash ability to start or originate an idea or work even when others are absent

12 Judgment ndash power of mind to weight factors affecting a problem and to decide properly

13 Integrity ndash good moral character

14 Justice ndash impartiality in dealing with others giving credit when due and punishment when so demanded

15 Loyalty - sincerity and faithfulness to superiors for the good of the unit

16 Sympathy ndash mutual feelings to others

17 Tact ndash ability to deal with people without hurting their feelings

18 Unselfishness - avoidance of personal consideration that gives a disadvantage

to others

F PRINCIPLES IN LEADERSHIP

1 Know your job - must have thorough professional knowledge of his duties and responsibilities to

command and gain respect from his men

2Know yourself and seek self-improvement - a leader should analyze himself to determine his

good qualities and learn to recognize and correct his weakness

3 Know your men and look after their welfare - understand each of your men personally

psychologically in order to effectively lead them

4 Keep your men informed - keep your men knowledgeable background in all aspects its

organization and mission in order to function effectively

5 Set an example -set a good example as a model in loyalty in superiors and subordinates good

bearing and attitudes pride and faithfulness to the organization

6 Insure the task is understood supervised and accomplished - a leader should give a clear and

concise order that can be understood He supervises his men to accomplish the

assigned mission

7 Train your men as a team - teamwork is a must within and among units from the

smallest to the largest Each men should understand that he has a job to perform

and must cooperate with others in achieving the common objective

8 Make sound and timely decisions - the ability to make raid estimate of the situation Arrive at the

sound decision and announce his decision in the correct form of the proper is

essential to a leader For any situation that may arise the leader should be able to

act logically

9 Develop a sense of responsibility among your subordinates - the leader should train his

subordinates to act in the absence of orders when the situation so demands He

develops responsibility among his subordinates byproper delegation of his

authority and holding them responsible for theaccomplishment of their mission

10 Employ your commands in accordance with its capability - the leader must have thorough knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of his command He must assign objectives that is responsible to be attained However when the situation so demands then men must be forced to action beyond their normal endurance so as to avoid a harder or more costly consequence on their part

11 See responsibility and take responsibility for your action - learn the seniors job for youmay assume his position later on Take advantage of the responsibility delegated toyou and do not back out in case of failure

ROLES OF A LEADER

1 The leader is a model soldier2 The leader is a commander3 The leader is an instructor4 The leader is a personal manager5 The leader is a councilor6 The leader is a custodian of his mens welfare

OBJECTIVES OF A LEADER

1 MORALE - the mental and emotional state of an individual 2 DISCIPLINE - the prompt and willing obedience to orders Complying to regulations and initiating appropriate action even in theabsence of orders 3 PROFICIENCY - the technical tactical and physical ability of an individual to perform their mission 4 ESPRIT DE CORPS - More than the aggregate personality it is how the individuals feel about their unit Jealous of enthusiasticfor pride in and devotion for

MAP READING

MAP - is a graphical representation of the earths surface drawn to a scale on aplane When you look at the map you are actually looking at a picture ofthe ground from a high spot in the air MAP COLOR - different colors are used on the printing of the maps to assist the use understanding it A GREEN - represents all types of vegetables B BLUE - signifies bodies of water such as rivers lakes swamps and streams C RED - indicates first class roads and prominent locations such as theProvincial or Municipal Capitals May be used to stress the significance ofimportant map locations

D BROWN - depicts contour lines which are representation of the relatives elevation and relief of the terrain

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

The need for discipline is recognized in many places outside the Armed Forces It reaches at highest form in teams wherein individual desires are subordinated to the interests of the entire team The Armed Forces are more in need of discipline for several reasons First the task of making war is not doing it because we as individuals have to do it in the interest of our country Because of that we cannot be allowed as individual to decide which part of the job each of us will do or how each part to be done Second the organization must be prepared for situations wherein leaders may be lost Personal loyalty for the commandment is not enough If a leader is killed his men must accept orders from his successor immediately and without question to carry on the battle Finally the tremendous size of all Armed Forces demands that there be uniform ways of doing things Discipline subordinates personal and self considerations to the interest of the group

MAINTENANCE OF DISCIPLINE

Discipline is installed in men through instructions pride and traditions and regulations You will develop appreciation of the other factors which build discipline as time passes One must know and understand the different laws and regulations immediately

Discipline is maintained in much the same manner as it is attained The article of war punishes military individualsrsquo fairness and justice high moral pride and responsibility contribute to maintain discipline as to developing it

CHAPTER IVARMED FORCES OF THE PHILIPPINESrsquo HISTORY

Brief History of the AFPCommonwealth Act no 1 otherwise known as the National Defense Act was approved on 21

December 1935 which gave the basic organization of the AFP General Douglas McArthur served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon Major General Dwight D Eisenhower and Major General James Ord members of the McArthurrsquos Staff helped in the planting of the Philippine Military Establishment as well as organizing it

As President Quezon issued Executive Order no 11 on January 1936 which formally established the Army of the Philippines he recalled Colonel Jose Delos Reyes of the Philippine Constabulary to active duty and later promoted him to Brigadier General and designated him as Acting Chief of Staff of the Army Brigadier General Basilio J Valdez and Colonel Guillermo B Francisco were named 1 st and 2nd Asst Chief of Staff respectively

In the same order the Philippine Constabulary became the nucleus of the regular forces of the Philippine Army Filipino citizens were required to go training under the National Defense Act since 1936 that would compose reserve force By the end of the ten year Commonwealth period in 1946 there would have been a trained Philippine Army Reserve pool of 400000 officers and men including the graduates of the ROTC Basic and Advance Course in accredited colleges and universities

When the Philippine Constabulary became part of the Philippine Army the PC Air Corps which was activated on 2 January 1955 was re designated Philippine Air Force on 3 July 1947

On February 1939 an Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was organized as a unit of the Philippine Army Initially equipped with three Q-boats (torpedo boats) and a handful of officers and men hurriedly trained in the rudiments of Sea-Warfare the OSP squadron provided coastal support to the beleaguered Filipino-American forces in the battles of Bataan and Corregidor In October 1947 the OSP was renamed Philippine Naval Patrol and on 5 January 1951 it became the Philippine Navy The OSP was often referred to as Mosquito Fleet

When President Franklin D Roosevelt of the USA declared the state of National Emergency on 26 July 1941 and ordered the induction of the Philippine Army units into the US Armed Forces in the Far East under the command of General Douglas Mc Arthur the Philippine Army had a reserve force of about 100000 officers and men at the time of the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked the Pearl Harbor Clark Field and other targets on 8 December 1941 The Philippine Army Reserve Force totaled around 200000 officers and men

The Philippine Army retained its own organization while serving with the USAFFE After the fall of Bataan on 9 April 1942 many officers and men of the Philippine Army continued resistance against the Japanese by forming guerilla forces all over the country These USAFFE guerilla forces along with other units organized by civilians in various parts of the country fought the Japanese Forces from 1942 to 1945 When the US Liberation Forces landed in Leyte on 20 October 1944 all the guerilla forces participated actively on the liberation on their respective sectors of operations

On October 1947 President Manual A Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 which organized all government agencies The Military establishment was not spared from its official designation as Army of the Philippines and it became the Armed Forces of the Philippines The ten pre-war military districts were deactivated but 4 Military Areas were also activated to enhance the efficiency of the Constabulary personnel all over the country

The post-war Philippine Army eventually got its forces fighting another battle ndash the battle against the armed elements of the Communist Party of the Philippines the HUKBALAHAP later renamed HMB For the anti0dissident campaign Army Sector Command and Battalion Combat Teams were formed During the Korean war the 10th 20th 11th 19th and 2nd BCTrsquos were sent as Philippine Expeditionary Force as the member of the United Nations PEFTOK served in Korea from 1950-1955 On 25 December 1950 President Quirino issued Executive Order No 389 renaming headquarters AFP to General Headquarters AFP and activating the 4 major services The Philippine Army Philippine Constabulary Philippine Air Force and Philippine Navy

From the time the Philippines joined the Southeast Asia Treaty Organization (SEATO) in September 1954 the AFP cooperated actively with the other member nations in the enhancing of military preparedness in the area

As a member of the UN the Philippines also sent a Philippine Air Force Contingent of 77 officers and men on a pacification campaign to the Congo Republic on 11 February 1963

In 1966 the Philippine Civic Action Group (PHICAG) was activated to implement the provisions of RA 4644 Composed of engineers medical and rural community development teams and security personnel the PHILCAG was sent to the Republic of South Vietnam and engaged in socio-economic projects mutually agreed upon by the governments of the Republic of the Philippines and Republic of South Vietnam

The AFP has shown an increasing awareness of its arrival in the country and its vital role in the political and economic development of the country by engaging are actively in civic action programs

Pursuant to the Socio-economic Military Program under RA 2056 the Chief of Staff AFP ordered the assignment of military personnel for public works construction food production land settlement and rural development Several civic centers of the AFP

To give greater impetus on the civic action the 51st Engineer Brigade consisting of 10 Engineer Construction Battalion was activated on 10 March 1962 This unit had constructed several much needed highways roads and bridges in various parts of the country The 52nd Engineer Brigade which was organized on 1 July 1969 also performed similar functions to holster the national program for social and economical developments

Today the AFP is employing all its resources in assisting the socio-economic development programs of the government without prejudice to its primary missions of improving and maintaining the effectiveness of the countryrsquos defense posture

SIGNIFICANT FACTS TO REMEMBER

MACTAN ndash place where the first revolt against Spain took place on April 26 1951 The firstrebellion Spain flared up in Bohol and Leyte

ANDRES MALONG ndash led the first major revolt in Luzon in 1660 He proclaimed himself as aKing of PangasinanLAPU ndash LAPU ndash was the first Filipino hero

MIGUEL VICOS ndash the Spanish Meztiso who assassinated Diego Silang on May 28 1863

RED WITH A FIGURE OF A SUN ndash color of the first flag of the Philippines in 1897

ANDRES BONIFACIO ndash was the founder of the Revolutionary Society called Katipunan

GEN GREGORIO DEL PILAR ndash led the Filipino forces in the Battle of Tirad Pass

AUGUST 29 1896 ndash the date designated as the start of the revolution which was also known as

Cry of BalintawakDECEMBER 14 1897 ndashdate when the Treaty of Paris and Fact of Biak-na-bato was signed

FACT OF BIAK-NA-BATO ndash an agreement between the Filipino and the Spanish authoritieson December 14 1897 to stop all hostilities

MARCELA AGONCILLO ndash designed and made the first flag of the first Philippine Republic

JULIAN FELIPE ndash was the composer of the Philippine National AnthemEMILIO AGUINALDO ndash was the first president of the Philippines

BALANAN ISABELA ndash the place where Gen Emilio Aguinaldo was captured In 1922 the US War Dept authorized the establishment of the Dept of Military Science andTactics under the supervision of the US Army This was established in theUniversity of the Philippines

MANUEL LUIS QUEZON ndash the first president of the Philippine Commonwealth

COMMONWEALTH ACT NO1 ndash is otherwise known as the National Defense Act issued by President Quezon and approved on December 21 1935 and gave the basicorganization of the AFP

GENERAL DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon during the Commonwealth period that helped in the planning andorganization of the Philippine Military EstablishmentGENDOUGLAS MCARTHURrsquoS STAFF

1 MAJ GEN DWIGHT D EISENHOWER2 MAJ GEN JAMES ORD

JANUARY 11 1936 ndash the date President Manuel L Quezon issued Executive Order No 11 onthe establishment of the PA

BRIG GEN BASILIO J VALDEZ ndash first assistant Chief of staff

BRIG GEN JOSE DELOS REYES ndash designated as the first Chief of Staff of the PhilippineArmy

COL GUILLERMO B FRANCISCO ndash 2nd assistant Chief of Staff The PHILLIPINE CONSTABULARY became the nucleus of the Philippine Army and the Philippine Constabulary Air Corps (PCA) was activated on January 2 1937

FEBRUARY 9 1939 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was activated and organized as a unit of thePhilippine Army The Off-Shore Patrol was equipped with Q-Boats (Torpedo Boat)and referred to as the ldquoMosquito Fleetrdquo

PRESIDENT FRANKLIN DELANO ROOSEVELT ndash President of the USA who set July 26 1941 as the date for the declaration of State of National Emergency and at the sametime the induction of the Philippine Army to United States Armed Forces to the Far East (USAFFE) with a total force of 160000 officers and men

GEN DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash was designated as the USAFFE COMMANDER

DECEMBER 8 1941 ndash the date the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked Pearl Harbor Clark Fieldand other targets

APRIL 9 1942 ndash fall of Bataan

MAY 6 1942 ndash fall of Corregidor

MAJOR FERDINAND EDRALIN MARCOS ndash was the most decorated soldier during the World War II and was a recipient of 27 medals

OCTOBER 20 1944 ndash the date the US Liberation Forces landed in Red Beach in Palo Leyte

JULY 3 1947 ndash the date the PC Air Corps was re-designated as the Philippine Air Force

OCTOBER 1947 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol was renamed Phil Naval Patrol ndash the date President Manuel Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 remainingthe Army of the Philippines as Armed Forces of the Philippines andactivating the 4 military areas

ARAW NG KAGITINGAN ndash a day set to commemorate the Fall of Bataan Fall of Corregidorand Fall of Bessang Pass Based on the historical records the independenceof the Republic of the Philippines was on June 12 1898

JULY 4 1946 ndash declaration of the Independence by the USA celebrated today as PhilippineAmerican Friendship Day

JULY 1950 ndash the Philippine Army was separated from the Gen Headquarters Philippine Army

DECEMBER 23 1950 ndash President ElpidioQuirino issued Executive Order No 389 renamingthe Headquarters AFP to Gen Headquarters AFP (GHQ AFP)

JANUARY 5 1951 ndash the Phil Naval Patrol was renamed the Philippine Naval of thePHILIPPINE NAVY

1959 ndash 1955 ndash the Battalion Combat Teams were sent to Korea to comply with the commitmentsof the Philippines as member of the UN The BCT was known as the PHILIPPINE EXPEDITIONARY FORCE TO KOREA (PEFTOK)

SEPTEMBER 1954 ndash The Philippines joined the Southeast Asian Treaty Org (SEATO)

APRIL 11 1963 ndash the PAF contingent of 77 officers and men were sent to Congo Republic of South VietnamPHIL CIVIC ACTION GROUP (PHILCAG) ndash the group of engineers medical and ruralcommunity development team and security personnel were sent by thePhilippines to the representative of South Vietnam

FEBRUARY 22-25 1986 ndash the bloodless peoples revolution which deposed Ferdinand Marcosfrom the presidency and as Commander in elected President of thePhilippines commonly referred to as the EDSA Revolution

ACRONYMSBCT ndash Battalion Combat TeamGHQ ndash General HeadquartersHMB ndash HukbongMapagpalayang Bayan (HUKBALAHAP)PHILCAG-V ndash Philippine Civic Action Group to VietnamSEATO ndash Southeast Asian Treaty OrganizationOSP ndash Off-Shore PatrolPEFTOK ndash Philippine Expeditionary Force to Korea

ENLISTED PERSONNELrsquoS RANKS

MarinesArmy Navy Constabulary Air Force

C ndash CadetCadette M- MidshipmanMidshipwoman

CHAPTER V

MILITARY LEADERSHIP AND COMMAND

A Leadership ndash is the art of influencing and directing men to an assigned goal is such a way toobtain their obedience respect and loyal cooperation Leadership can beexercised by anyone at anytime respective of the frame work of the command

Command ndash is the authority which an individual in the military service lawfully exercisedover subordinates by virtue of his rank and assignment Command andleadership are inseparable whether the function of the command is complex orsimple the commander should always be the controlling head

B TWO TYPES OF LEADER

1 Authoritarian ndash a leader who leads his men by means of rank and position

2 Persuasive ndash a leader who leads his men by always setting examples

C BASIC ELEMENTS OF LEADERSHIP

1 Character ndash to be a leader a person must be of good character Some indications arehonesty good manners industrious self-control and bravery

2 Intelligence ndash is the ability to grasp knowledge easily It includes native ability goodcommon sense and judgment

3 Alertness ndash is mental and physical watchfulness vigilance and observance to his planned and future activity

D LEADERSHIP RESPONSIBILITIES

1 Accomplishment of the assigned mission or task

2 Work for the welfare of his men

E LEADERSHIP TRAITS

1 Knowledge ndash professional knowledge of the job Understands the characteristics of his men2 Bearing ndash dignified appearance and behavior

3 Courage ndash physical and moral ability to act in spite of danger or hardship

4 Decisiveness ndash ability to decide promptly and correctly the proper time and to announce his decision clearly and briefly with authority

5 Dependability ndash performance of duty with or without supervision

6 Endurance ndash physical and mental strength to continue or complete a task

7 Enthusiasm ndash interest in his work or task at hand

8 Force ndash the ability to compel obedience

9 Humility ndash state of being reasonable and proud but not arrogant and boastful

10 Humor ndash ability to appreciate and narrate amusing incidents of everyday life

11 Initiative ndash ability to start or originate an idea or work even when others are absent

12 Judgment ndash power of mind to weight factors affecting a problem and to decide properly

13 Integrity ndash good moral character

14 Justice ndash impartiality in dealing with others giving credit when due and punishment when so demanded

15 Loyalty - sincerity and faithfulness to superiors for the good of the unit

16 Sympathy ndash mutual feelings to others

17 Tact ndash ability to deal with people without hurting their feelings

18 Unselfishness - avoidance of personal consideration that gives a disadvantage

to others

F PRINCIPLES IN LEADERSHIP

1 Know your job - must have thorough professional knowledge of his duties and responsibilities to

command and gain respect from his men

2Know yourself and seek self-improvement - a leader should analyze himself to determine his

good qualities and learn to recognize and correct his weakness

3 Know your men and look after their welfare - understand each of your men personally

psychologically in order to effectively lead them

4 Keep your men informed - keep your men knowledgeable background in all aspects its

organization and mission in order to function effectively

5 Set an example -set a good example as a model in loyalty in superiors and subordinates good

bearing and attitudes pride and faithfulness to the organization

6 Insure the task is understood supervised and accomplished - a leader should give a clear and

concise order that can be understood He supervises his men to accomplish the

assigned mission

7 Train your men as a team - teamwork is a must within and among units from the

smallest to the largest Each men should understand that he has a job to perform

and must cooperate with others in achieving the common objective

8 Make sound and timely decisions - the ability to make raid estimate of the situation Arrive at the

sound decision and announce his decision in the correct form of the proper is

essential to a leader For any situation that may arise the leader should be able to

act logically

9 Develop a sense of responsibility among your subordinates - the leader should train his

subordinates to act in the absence of orders when the situation so demands He

develops responsibility among his subordinates byproper delegation of his

authority and holding them responsible for theaccomplishment of their mission

10 Employ your commands in accordance with its capability - the leader must have thorough knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of his command He must assign objectives that is responsible to be attained However when the situation so demands then men must be forced to action beyond their normal endurance so as to avoid a harder or more costly consequence on their part

11 See responsibility and take responsibility for your action - learn the seniors job for youmay assume his position later on Take advantage of the responsibility delegated toyou and do not back out in case of failure

ROLES OF A LEADER

1 The leader is a model soldier2 The leader is a commander3 The leader is an instructor4 The leader is a personal manager5 The leader is a councilor6 The leader is a custodian of his mens welfare

OBJECTIVES OF A LEADER

1 MORALE - the mental and emotional state of an individual 2 DISCIPLINE - the prompt and willing obedience to orders Complying to regulations and initiating appropriate action even in theabsence of orders 3 PROFICIENCY - the technical tactical and physical ability of an individual to perform their mission 4 ESPRIT DE CORPS - More than the aggregate personality it is how the individuals feel about their unit Jealous of enthusiasticfor pride in and devotion for

MAP READING

MAP - is a graphical representation of the earths surface drawn to a scale on aplane When you look at the map you are actually looking at a picture ofthe ground from a high spot in the air MAP COLOR - different colors are used on the printing of the maps to assist the use understanding it A GREEN - represents all types of vegetables B BLUE - signifies bodies of water such as rivers lakes swamps and streams C RED - indicates first class roads and prominent locations such as theProvincial or Municipal Capitals May be used to stress the significance ofimportant map locations

D BROWN - depicts contour lines which are representation of the relatives elevation and relief of the terrain

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

When the Philippine Constabulary became part of the Philippine Army the PC Air Corps which was activated on 2 January 1955 was re designated Philippine Air Force on 3 July 1947

On February 1939 an Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was organized as a unit of the Philippine Army Initially equipped with three Q-boats (torpedo boats) and a handful of officers and men hurriedly trained in the rudiments of Sea-Warfare the OSP squadron provided coastal support to the beleaguered Filipino-American forces in the battles of Bataan and Corregidor In October 1947 the OSP was renamed Philippine Naval Patrol and on 5 January 1951 it became the Philippine Navy The OSP was often referred to as Mosquito Fleet

When President Franklin D Roosevelt of the USA declared the state of National Emergency on 26 July 1941 and ordered the induction of the Philippine Army units into the US Armed Forces in the Far East under the command of General Douglas Mc Arthur the Philippine Army had a reserve force of about 100000 officers and men at the time of the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked the Pearl Harbor Clark Field and other targets on 8 December 1941 The Philippine Army Reserve Force totaled around 200000 officers and men

The Philippine Army retained its own organization while serving with the USAFFE After the fall of Bataan on 9 April 1942 many officers and men of the Philippine Army continued resistance against the Japanese by forming guerilla forces all over the country These USAFFE guerilla forces along with other units organized by civilians in various parts of the country fought the Japanese Forces from 1942 to 1945 When the US Liberation Forces landed in Leyte on 20 October 1944 all the guerilla forces participated actively on the liberation on their respective sectors of operations

On October 1947 President Manual A Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 which organized all government agencies The Military establishment was not spared from its official designation as Army of the Philippines and it became the Armed Forces of the Philippines The ten pre-war military districts were deactivated but 4 Military Areas were also activated to enhance the efficiency of the Constabulary personnel all over the country

The post-war Philippine Army eventually got its forces fighting another battle ndash the battle against the armed elements of the Communist Party of the Philippines the HUKBALAHAP later renamed HMB For the anti0dissident campaign Army Sector Command and Battalion Combat Teams were formed During the Korean war the 10th 20th 11th 19th and 2nd BCTrsquos were sent as Philippine Expeditionary Force as the member of the United Nations PEFTOK served in Korea from 1950-1955 On 25 December 1950 President Quirino issued Executive Order No 389 renaming headquarters AFP to General Headquarters AFP and activating the 4 major services The Philippine Army Philippine Constabulary Philippine Air Force and Philippine Navy

From the time the Philippines joined the Southeast Asia Treaty Organization (SEATO) in September 1954 the AFP cooperated actively with the other member nations in the enhancing of military preparedness in the area

As a member of the UN the Philippines also sent a Philippine Air Force Contingent of 77 officers and men on a pacification campaign to the Congo Republic on 11 February 1963

In 1966 the Philippine Civic Action Group (PHICAG) was activated to implement the provisions of RA 4644 Composed of engineers medical and rural community development teams and security personnel the PHILCAG was sent to the Republic of South Vietnam and engaged in socio-economic projects mutually agreed upon by the governments of the Republic of the Philippines and Republic of South Vietnam

The AFP has shown an increasing awareness of its arrival in the country and its vital role in the political and economic development of the country by engaging are actively in civic action programs

Pursuant to the Socio-economic Military Program under RA 2056 the Chief of Staff AFP ordered the assignment of military personnel for public works construction food production land settlement and rural development Several civic centers of the AFP

To give greater impetus on the civic action the 51st Engineer Brigade consisting of 10 Engineer Construction Battalion was activated on 10 March 1962 This unit had constructed several much needed highways roads and bridges in various parts of the country The 52nd Engineer Brigade which was organized on 1 July 1969 also performed similar functions to holster the national program for social and economical developments

Today the AFP is employing all its resources in assisting the socio-economic development programs of the government without prejudice to its primary missions of improving and maintaining the effectiveness of the countryrsquos defense posture

SIGNIFICANT FACTS TO REMEMBER

MACTAN ndash place where the first revolt against Spain took place on April 26 1951 The firstrebellion Spain flared up in Bohol and Leyte

ANDRES MALONG ndash led the first major revolt in Luzon in 1660 He proclaimed himself as aKing of PangasinanLAPU ndash LAPU ndash was the first Filipino hero

MIGUEL VICOS ndash the Spanish Meztiso who assassinated Diego Silang on May 28 1863

RED WITH A FIGURE OF A SUN ndash color of the first flag of the Philippines in 1897

ANDRES BONIFACIO ndash was the founder of the Revolutionary Society called Katipunan

GEN GREGORIO DEL PILAR ndash led the Filipino forces in the Battle of Tirad Pass

AUGUST 29 1896 ndash the date designated as the start of the revolution which was also known as

Cry of BalintawakDECEMBER 14 1897 ndashdate when the Treaty of Paris and Fact of Biak-na-bato was signed

FACT OF BIAK-NA-BATO ndash an agreement between the Filipino and the Spanish authoritieson December 14 1897 to stop all hostilities

MARCELA AGONCILLO ndash designed and made the first flag of the first Philippine Republic

JULIAN FELIPE ndash was the composer of the Philippine National AnthemEMILIO AGUINALDO ndash was the first president of the Philippines

BALANAN ISABELA ndash the place where Gen Emilio Aguinaldo was captured In 1922 the US War Dept authorized the establishment of the Dept of Military Science andTactics under the supervision of the US Army This was established in theUniversity of the Philippines

MANUEL LUIS QUEZON ndash the first president of the Philippine Commonwealth

COMMONWEALTH ACT NO1 ndash is otherwise known as the National Defense Act issued by President Quezon and approved on December 21 1935 and gave the basicorganization of the AFP

GENERAL DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon during the Commonwealth period that helped in the planning andorganization of the Philippine Military EstablishmentGENDOUGLAS MCARTHURrsquoS STAFF

1 MAJ GEN DWIGHT D EISENHOWER2 MAJ GEN JAMES ORD

JANUARY 11 1936 ndash the date President Manuel L Quezon issued Executive Order No 11 onthe establishment of the PA

BRIG GEN BASILIO J VALDEZ ndash first assistant Chief of staff

BRIG GEN JOSE DELOS REYES ndash designated as the first Chief of Staff of the PhilippineArmy

COL GUILLERMO B FRANCISCO ndash 2nd assistant Chief of Staff The PHILLIPINE CONSTABULARY became the nucleus of the Philippine Army and the Philippine Constabulary Air Corps (PCA) was activated on January 2 1937

FEBRUARY 9 1939 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was activated and organized as a unit of thePhilippine Army The Off-Shore Patrol was equipped with Q-Boats (Torpedo Boat)and referred to as the ldquoMosquito Fleetrdquo

PRESIDENT FRANKLIN DELANO ROOSEVELT ndash President of the USA who set July 26 1941 as the date for the declaration of State of National Emergency and at the sametime the induction of the Philippine Army to United States Armed Forces to the Far East (USAFFE) with a total force of 160000 officers and men

GEN DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash was designated as the USAFFE COMMANDER

DECEMBER 8 1941 ndash the date the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked Pearl Harbor Clark Fieldand other targets

APRIL 9 1942 ndash fall of Bataan

MAY 6 1942 ndash fall of Corregidor

MAJOR FERDINAND EDRALIN MARCOS ndash was the most decorated soldier during the World War II and was a recipient of 27 medals

OCTOBER 20 1944 ndash the date the US Liberation Forces landed in Red Beach in Palo Leyte

JULY 3 1947 ndash the date the PC Air Corps was re-designated as the Philippine Air Force

OCTOBER 1947 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol was renamed Phil Naval Patrol ndash the date President Manuel Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 remainingthe Army of the Philippines as Armed Forces of the Philippines andactivating the 4 military areas

ARAW NG KAGITINGAN ndash a day set to commemorate the Fall of Bataan Fall of Corregidorand Fall of Bessang Pass Based on the historical records the independenceof the Republic of the Philippines was on June 12 1898

JULY 4 1946 ndash declaration of the Independence by the USA celebrated today as PhilippineAmerican Friendship Day

JULY 1950 ndash the Philippine Army was separated from the Gen Headquarters Philippine Army

DECEMBER 23 1950 ndash President ElpidioQuirino issued Executive Order No 389 renamingthe Headquarters AFP to Gen Headquarters AFP (GHQ AFP)

JANUARY 5 1951 ndash the Phil Naval Patrol was renamed the Philippine Naval of thePHILIPPINE NAVY

1959 ndash 1955 ndash the Battalion Combat Teams were sent to Korea to comply with the commitmentsof the Philippines as member of the UN The BCT was known as the PHILIPPINE EXPEDITIONARY FORCE TO KOREA (PEFTOK)

SEPTEMBER 1954 ndash The Philippines joined the Southeast Asian Treaty Org (SEATO)

APRIL 11 1963 ndash the PAF contingent of 77 officers and men were sent to Congo Republic of South VietnamPHIL CIVIC ACTION GROUP (PHILCAG) ndash the group of engineers medical and ruralcommunity development team and security personnel were sent by thePhilippines to the representative of South Vietnam

FEBRUARY 22-25 1986 ndash the bloodless peoples revolution which deposed Ferdinand Marcosfrom the presidency and as Commander in elected President of thePhilippines commonly referred to as the EDSA Revolution

ACRONYMSBCT ndash Battalion Combat TeamGHQ ndash General HeadquartersHMB ndash HukbongMapagpalayang Bayan (HUKBALAHAP)PHILCAG-V ndash Philippine Civic Action Group to VietnamSEATO ndash Southeast Asian Treaty OrganizationOSP ndash Off-Shore PatrolPEFTOK ndash Philippine Expeditionary Force to Korea

ENLISTED PERSONNELrsquoS RANKS

MarinesArmy Navy Constabulary Air Force

C ndash CadetCadette M- MidshipmanMidshipwoman

CHAPTER V

MILITARY LEADERSHIP AND COMMAND

A Leadership ndash is the art of influencing and directing men to an assigned goal is such a way toobtain their obedience respect and loyal cooperation Leadership can beexercised by anyone at anytime respective of the frame work of the command

Command ndash is the authority which an individual in the military service lawfully exercisedover subordinates by virtue of his rank and assignment Command andleadership are inseparable whether the function of the command is complex orsimple the commander should always be the controlling head

B TWO TYPES OF LEADER

1 Authoritarian ndash a leader who leads his men by means of rank and position

2 Persuasive ndash a leader who leads his men by always setting examples

C BASIC ELEMENTS OF LEADERSHIP

1 Character ndash to be a leader a person must be of good character Some indications arehonesty good manners industrious self-control and bravery

2 Intelligence ndash is the ability to grasp knowledge easily It includes native ability goodcommon sense and judgment

3 Alertness ndash is mental and physical watchfulness vigilance and observance to his planned and future activity

D LEADERSHIP RESPONSIBILITIES

1 Accomplishment of the assigned mission or task

2 Work for the welfare of his men

E LEADERSHIP TRAITS

1 Knowledge ndash professional knowledge of the job Understands the characteristics of his men2 Bearing ndash dignified appearance and behavior

3 Courage ndash physical and moral ability to act in spite of danger or hardship

4 Decisiveness ndash ability to decide promptly and correctly the proper time and to announce his decision clearly and briefly with authority

5 Dependability ndash performance of duty with or without supervision

6 Endurance ndash physical and mental strength to continue or complete a task

7 Enthusiasm ndash interest in his work or task at hand

8 Force ndash the ability to compel obedience

9 Humility ndash state of being reasonable and proud but not arrogant and boastful

10 Humor ndash ability to appreciate and narrate amusing incidents of everyday life

11 Initiative ndash ability to start or originate an idea or work even when others are absent

12 Judgment ndash power of mind to weight factors affecting a problem and to decide properly

13 Integrity ndash good moral character

14 Justice ndash impartiality in dealing with others giving credit when due and punishment when so demanded

15 Loyalty - sincerity and faithfulness to superiors for the good of the unit

16 Sympathy ndash mutual feelings to others

17 Tact ndash ability to deal with people without hurting their feelings

18 Unselfishness - avoidance of personal consideration that gives a disadvantage

to others

F PRINCIPLES IN LEADERSHIP

1 Know your job - must have thorough professional knowledge of his duties and responsibilities to

command and gain respect from his men

2Know yourself and seek self-improvement - a leader should analyze himself to determine his

good qualities and learn to recognize and correct his weakness

3 Know your men and look after their welfare - understand each of your men personally

psychologically in order to effectively lead them

4 Keep your men informed - keep your men knowledgeable background in all aspects its

organization and mission in order to function effectively

5 Set an example -set a good example as a model in loyalty in superiors and subordinates good

bearing and attitudes pride and faithfulness to the organization

6 Insure the task is understood supervised and accomplished - a leader should give a clear and

concise order that can be understood He supervises his men to accomplish the

assigned mission

7 Train your men as a team - teamwork is a must within and among units from the

smallest to the largest Each men should understand that he has a job to perform

and must cooperate with others in achieving the common objective

8 Make sound and timely decisions - the ability to make raid estimate of the situation Arrive at the

sound decision and announce his decision in the correct form of the proper is

essential to a leader For any situation that may arise the leader should be able to

act logically

9 Develop a sense of responsibility among your subordinates - the leader should train his

subordinates to act in the absence of orders when the situation so demands He

develops responsibility among his subordinates byproper delegation of his

authority and holding them responsible for theaccomplishment of their mission

10 Employ your commands in accordance with its capability - the leader must have thorough knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of his command He must assign objectives that is responsible to be attained However when the situation so demands then men must be forced to action beyond their normal endurance so as to avoid a harder or more costly consequence on their part

11 See responsibility and take responsibility for your action - learn the seniors job for youmay assume his position later on Take advantage of the responsibility delegated toyou and do not back out in case of failure

ROLES OF A LEADER

1 The leader is a model soldier2 The leader is a commander3 The leader is an instructor4 The leader is a personal manager5 The leader is a councilor6 The leader is a custodian of his mens welfare

OBJECTIVES OF A LEADER

1 MORALE - the mental and emotional state of an individual 2 DISCIPLINE - the prompt and willing obedience to orders Complying to regulations and initiating appropriate action even in theabsence of orders 3 PROFICIENCY - the technical tactical and physical ability of an individual to perform their mission 4 ESPRIT DE CORPS - More than the aggregate personality it is how the individuals feel about their unit Jealous of enthusiasticfor pride in and devotion for

MAP READING

MAP - is a graphical representation of the earths surface drawn to a scale on aplane When you look at the map you are actually looking at a picture ofthe ground from a high spot in the air MAP COLOR - different colors are used on the printing of the maps to assist the use understanding it A GREEN - represents all types of vegetables B BLUE - signifies bodies of water such as rivers lakes swamps and streams C RED - indicates first class roads and prominent locations such as theProvincial or Municipal Capitals May be used to stress the significance ofimportant map locations

D BROWN - depicts contour lines which are representation of the relatives elevation and relief of the terrain

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

As a member of the UN the Philippines also sent a Philippine Air Force Contingent of 77 officers and men on a pacification campaign to the Congo Republic on 11 February 1963

In 1966 the Philippine Civic Action Group (PHICAG) was activated to implement the provisions of RA 4644 Composed of engineers medical and rural community development teams and security personnel the PHILCAG was sent to the Republic of South Vietnam and engaged in socio-economic projects mutually agreed upon by the governments of the Republic of the Philippines and Republic of South Vietnam

The AFP has shown an increasing awareness of its arrival in the country and its vital role in the political and economic development of the country by engaging are actively in civic action programs

Pursuant to the Socio-economic Military Program under RA 2056 the Chief of Staff AFP ordered the assignment of military personnel for public works construction food production land settlement and rural development Several civic centers of the AFP

To give greater impetus on the civic action the 51st Engineer Brigade consisting of 10 Engineer Construction Battalion was activated on 10 March 1962 This unit had constructed several much needed highways roads and bridges in various parts of the country The 52nd Engineer Brigade which was organized on 1 July 1969 also performed similar functions to holster the national program for social and economical developments

Today the AFP is employing all its resources in assisting the socio-economic development programs of the government without prejudice to its primary missions of improving and maintaining the effectiveness of the countryrsquos defense posture

SIGNIFICANT FACTS TO REMEMBER

MACTAN ndash place where the first revolt against Spain took place on April 26 1951 The firstrebellion Spain flared up in Bohol and Leyte

ANDRES MALONG ndash led the first major revolt in Luzon in 1660 He proclaimed himself as aKing of PangasinanLAPU ndash LAPU ndash was the first Filipino hero

MIGUEL VICOS ndash the Spanish Meztiso who assassinated Diego Silang on May 28 1863

RED WITH A FIGURE OF A SUN ndash color of the first flag of the Philippines in 1897

ANDRES BONIFACIO ndash was the founder of the Revolutionary Society called Katipunan

GEN GREGORIO DEL PILAR ndash led the Filipino forces in the Battle of Tirad Pass

AUGUST 29 1896 ndash the date designated as the start of the revolution which was also known as

Cry of BalintawakDECEMBER 14 1897 ndashdate when the Treaty of Paris and Fact of Biak-na-bato was signed

FACT OF BIAK-NA-BATO ndash an agreement between the Filipino and the Spanish authoritieson December 14 1897 to stop all hostilities

MARCELA AGONCILLO ndash designed and made the first flag of the first Philippine Republic

JULIAN FELIPE ndash was the composer of the Philippine National AnthemEMILIO AGUINALDO ndash was the first president of the Philippines

BALANAN ISABELA ndash the place where Gen Emilio Aguinaldo was captured In 1922 the US War Dept authorized the establishment of the Dept of Military Science andTactics under the supervision of the US Army This was established in theUniversity of the Philippines

MANUEL LUIS QUEZON ndash the first president of the Philippine Commonwealth

COMMONWEALTH ACT NO1 ndash is otherwise known as the National Defense Act issued by President Quezon and approved on December 21 1935 and gave the basicorganization of the AFP

GENERAL DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon during the Commonwealth period that helped in the planning andorganization of the Philippine Military EstablishmentGENDOUGLAS MCARTHURrsquoS STAFF

1 MAJ GEN DWIGHT D EISENHOWER2 MAJ GEN JAMES ORD

JANUARY 11 1936 ndash the date President Manuel L Quezon issued Executive Order No 11 onthe establishment of the PA

BRIG GEN BASILIO J VALDEZ ndash first assistant Chief of staff

BRIG GEN JOSE DELOS REYES ndash designated as the first Chief of Staff of the PhilippineArmy

COL GUILLERMO B FRANCISCO ndash 2nd assistant Chief of Staff The PHILLIPINE CONSTABULARY became the nucleus of the Philippine Army and the Philippine Constabulary Air Corps (PCA) was activated on January 2 1937

FEBRUARY 9 1939 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was activated and organized as a unit of thePhilippine Army The Off-Shore Patrol was equipped with Q-Boats (Torpedo Boat)and referred to as the ldquoMosquito Fleetrdquo

PRESIDENT FRANKLIN DELANO ROOSEVELT ndash President of the USA who set July 26 1941 as the date for the declaration of State of National Emergency and at the sametime the induction of the Philippine Army to United States Armed Forces to the Far East (USAFFE) with a total force of 160000 officers and men

GEN DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash was designated as the USAFFE COMMANDER

DECEMBER 8 1941 ndash the date the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked Pearl Harbor Clark Fieldand other targets

APRIL 9 1942 ndash fall of Bataan

MAY 6 1942 ndash fall of Corregidor

MAJOR FERDINAND EDRALIN MARCOS ndash was the most decorated soldier during the World War II and was a recipient of 27 medals

OCTOBER 20 1944 ndash the date the US Liberation Forces landed in Red Beach in Palo Leyte

JULY 3 1947 ndash the date the PC Air Corps was re-designated as the Philippine Air Force

OCTOBER 1947 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol was renamed Phil Naval Patrol ndash the date President Manuel Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 remainingthe Army of the Philippines as Armed Forces of the Philippines andactivating the 4 military areas

ARAW NG KAGITINGAN ndash a day set to commemorate the Fall of Bataan Fall of Corregidorand Fall of Bessang Pass Based on the historical records the independenceof the Republic of the Philippines was on June 12 1898

JULY 4 1946 ndash declaration of the Independence by the USA celebrated today as PhilippineAmerican Friendship Day

JULY 1950 ndash the Philippine Army was separated from the Gen Headquarters Philippine Army

DECEMBER 23 1950 ndash President ElpidioQuirino issued Executive Order No 389 renamingthe Headquarters AFP to Gen Headquarters AFP (GHQ AFP)

JANUARY 5 1951 ndash the Phil Naval Patrol was renamed the Philippine Naval of thePHILIPPINE NAVY

1959 ndash 1955 ndash the Battalion Combat Teams were sent to Korea to comply with the commitmentsof the Philippines as member of the UN The BCT was known as the PHILIPPINE EXPEDITIONARY FORCE TO KOREA (PEFTOK)

SEPTEMBER 1954 ndash The Philippines joined the Southeast Asian Treaty Org (SEATO)

APRIL 11 1963 ndash the PAF contingent of 77 officers and men were sent to Congo Republic of South VietnamPHIL CIVIC ACTION GROUP (PHILCAG) ndash the group of engineers medical and ruralcommunity development team and security personnel were sent by thePhilippines to the representative of South Vietnam

FEBRUARY 22-25 1986 ndash the bloodless peoples revolution which deposed Ferdinand Marcosfrom the presidency and as Commander in elected President of thePhilippines commonly referred to as the EDSA Revolution

ACRONYMSBCT ndash Battalion Combat TeamGHQ ndash General HeadquartersHMB ndash HukbongMapagpalayang Bayan (HUKBALAHAP)PHILCAG-V ndash Philippine Civic Action Group to VietnamSEATO ndash Southeast Asian Treaty OrganizationOSP ndash Off-Shore PatrolPEFTOK ndash Philippine Expeditionary Force to Korea

ENLISTED PERSONNELrsquoS RANKS

MarinesArmy Navy Constabulary Air Force

C ndash CadetCadette M- MidshipmanMidshipwoman

CHAPTER V

MILITARY LEADERSHIP AND COMMAND

A Leadership ndash is the art of influencing and directing men to an assigned goal is such a way toobtain their obedience respect and loyal cooperation Leadership can beexercised by anyone at anytime respective of the frame work of the command

Command ndash is the authority which an individual in the military service lawfully exercisedover subordinates by virtue of his rank and assignment Command andleadership are inseparable whether the function of the command is complex orsimple the commander should always be the controlling head

B TWO TYPES OF LEADER

1 Authoritarian ndash a leader who leads his men by means of rank and position

2 Persuasive ndash a leader who leads his men by always setting examples

C BASIC ELEMENTS OF LEADERSHIP

1 Character ndash to be a leader a person must be of good character Some indications arehonesty good manners industrious self-control and bravery

2 Intelligence ndash is the ability to grasp knowledge easily It includes native ability goodcommon sense and judgment

3 Alertness ndash is mental and physical watchfulness vigilance and observance to his planned and future activity

D LEADERSHIP RESPONSIBILITIES

1 Accomplishment of the assigned mission or task

2 Work for the welfare of his men

E LEADERSHIP TRAITS

1 Knowledge ndash professional knowledge of the job Understands the characteristics of his men2 Bearing ndash dignified appearance and behavior

3 Courage ndash physical and moral ability to act in spite of danger or hardship

4 Decisiveness ndash ability to decide promptly and correctly the proper time and to announce his decision clearly and briefly with authority

5 Dependability ndash performance of duty with or without supervision

6 Endurance ndash physical and mental strength to continue or complete a task

7 Enthusiasm ndash interest in his work or task at hand

8 Force ndash the ability to compel obedience

9 Humility ndash state of being reasonable and proud but not arrogant and boastful

10 Humor ndash ability to appreciate and narrate amusing incidents of everyday life

11 Initiative ndash ability to start or originate an idea or work even when others are absent

12 Judgment ndash power of mind to weight factors affecting a problem and to decide properly

13 Integrity ndash good moral character

14 Justice ndash impartiality in dealing with others giving credit when due and punishment when so demanded

15 Loyalty - sincerity and faithfulness to superiors for the good of the unit

16 Sympathy ndash mutual feelings to others

17 Tact ndash ability to deal with people without hurting their feelings

18 Unselfishness - avoidance of personal consideration that gives a disadvantage

to others

F PRINCIPLES IN LEADERSHIP

1 Know your job - must have thorough professional knowledge of his duties and responsibilities to

command and gain respect from his men

2Know yourself and seek self-improvement - a leader should analyze himself to determine his

good qualities and learn to recognize and correct his weakness

3 Know your men and look after their welfare - understand each of your men personally

psychologically in order to effectively lead them

4 Keep your men informed - keep your men knowledgeable background in all aspects its

organization and mission in order to function effectively

5 Set an example -set a good example as a model in loyalty in superiors and subordinates good

bearing and attitudes pride and faithfulness to the organization

6 Insure the task is understood supervised and accomplished - a leader should give a clear and

concise order that can be understood He supervises his men to accomplish the

assigned mission

7 Train your men as a team - teamwork is a must within and among units from the

smallest to the largest Each men should understand that he has a job to perform

and must cooperate with others in achieving the common objective

8 Make sound and timely decisions - the ability to make raid estimate of the situation Arrive at the

sound decision and announce his decision in the correct form of the proper is

essential to a leader For any situation that may arise the leader should be able to

act logically

9 Develop a sense of responsibility among your subordinates - the leader should train his

subordinates to act in the absence of orders when the situation so demands He

develops responsibility among his subordinates byproper delegation of his

authority and holding them responsible for theaccomplishment of their mission

10 Employ your commands in accordance with its capability - the leader must have thorough knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of his command He must assign objectives that is responsible to be attained However when the situation so demands then men must be forced to action beyond their normal endurance so as to avoid a harder or more costly consequence on their part

11 See responsibility and take responsibility for your action - learn the seniors job for youmay assume his position later on Take advantage of the responsibility delegated toyou and do not back out in case of failure

ROLES OF A LEADER

1 The leader is a model soldier2 The leader is a commander3 The leader is an instructor4 The leader is a personal manager5 The leader is a councilor6 The leader is a custodian of his mens welfare

OBJECTIVES OF A LEADER

1 MORALE - the mental and emotional state of an individual 2 DISCIPLINE - the prompt and willing obedience to orders Complying to regulations and initiating appropriate action even in theabsence of orders 3 PROFICIENCY - the technical tactical and physical ability of an individual to perform their mission 4 ESPRIT DE CORPS - More than the aggregate personality it is how the individuals feel about their unit Jealous of enthusiasticfor pride in and devotion for

MAP READING

MAP - is a graphical representation of the earths surface drawn to a scale on aplane When you look at the map you are actually looking at a picture ofthe ground from a high spot in the air MAP COLOR - different colors are used on the printing of the maps to assist the use understanding it A GREEN - represents all types of vegetables B BLUE - signifies bodies of water such as rivers lakes swamps and streams C RED - indicates first class roads and prominent locations such as theProvincial or Municipal Capitals May be used to stress the significance ofimportant map locations

D BROWN - depicts contour lines which are representation of the relatives elevation and relief of the terrain

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

Cry of BalintawakDECEMBER 14 1897 ndashdate when the Treaty of Paris and Fact of Biak-na-bato was signed

FACT OF BIAK-NA-BATO ndash an agreement between the Filipino and the Spanish authoritieson December 14 1897 to stop all hostilities

MARCELA AGONCILLO ndash designed and made the first flag of the first Philippine Republic

JULIAN FELIPE ndash was the composer of the Philippine National AnthemEMILIO AGUINALDO ndash was the first president of the Philippines

BALANAN ISABELA ndash the place where Gen Emilio Aguinaldo was captured In 1922 the US War Dept authorized the establishment of the Dept of Military Science andTactics under the supervision of the US Army This was established in theUniversity of the Philippines

MANUEL LUIS QUEZON ndash the first president of the Philippine Commonwealth

COMMONWEALTH ACT NO1 ndash is otherwise known as the National Defense Act issued by President Quezon and approved on December 21 1935 and gave the basicorganization of the AFP

GENERAL DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash served as the Military Adviser to President Manuel L Quezon during the Commonwealth period that helped in the planning andorganization of the Philippine Military EstablishmentGENDOUGLAS MCARTHURrsquoS STAFF

1 MAJ GEN DWIGHT D EISENHOWER2 MAJ GEN JAMES ORD

JANUARY 11 1936 ndash the date President Manuel L Quezon issued Executive Order No 11 onthe establishment of the PA

BRIG GEN BASILIO J VALDEZ ndash first assistant Chief of staff

BRIG GEN JOSE DELOS REYES ndash designated as the first Chief of Staff of the PhilippineArmy

COL GUILLERMO B FRANCISCO ndash 2nd assistant Chief of Staff The PHILLIPINE CONSTABULARY became the nucleus of the Philippine Army and the Philippine Constabulary Air Corps (PCA) was activated on January 2 1937

FEBRUARY 9 1939 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol (OSP) was activated and organized as a unit of thePhilippine Army The Off-Shore Patrol was equipped with Q-Boats (Torpedo Boat)and referred to as the ldquoMosquito Fleetrdquo

PRESIDENT FRANKLIN DELANO ROOSEVELT ndash President of the USA who set July 26 1941 as the date for the declaration of State of National Emergency and at the sametime the induction of the Philippine Army to United States Armed Forces to the Far East (USAFFE) with a total force of 160000 officers and men

GEN DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash was designated as the USAFFE COMMANDER

DECEMBER 8 1941 ndash the date the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked Pearl Harbor Clark Fieldand other targets

APRIL 9 1942 ndash fall of Bataan

MAY 6 1942 ndash fall of Corregidor

MAJOR FERDINAND EDRALIN MARCOS ndash was the most decorated soldier during the World War II and was a recipient of 27 medals

OCTOBER 20 1944 ndash the date the US Liberation Forces landed in Red Beach in Palo Leyte

JULY 3 1947 ndash the date the PC Air Corps was re-designated as the Philippine Air Force

OCTOBER 1947 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol was renamed Phil Naval Patrol ndash the date President Manuel Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 remainingthe Army of the Philippines as Armed Forces of the Philippines andactivating the 4 military areas

ARAW NG KAGITINGAN ndash a day set to commemorate the Fall of Bataan Fall of Corregidorand Fall of Bessang Pass Based on the historical records the independenceof the Republic of the Philippines was on June 12 1898

JULY 4 1946 ndash declaration of the Independence by the USA celebrated today as PhilippineAmerican Friendship Day

JULY 1950 ndash the Philippine Army was separated from the Gen Headquarters Philippine Army

DECEMBER 23 1950 ndash President ElpidioQuirino issued Executive Order No 389 renamingthe Headquarters AFP to Gen Headquarters AFP (GHQ AFP)

JANUARY 5 1951 ndash the Phil Naval Patrol was renamed the Philippine Naval of thePHILIPPINE NAVY

1959 ndash 1955 ndash the Battalion Combat Teams were sent to Korea to comply with the commitmentsof the Philippines as member of the UN The BCT was known as the PHILIPPINE EXPEDITIONARY FORCE TO KOREA (PEFTOK)

SEPTEMBER 1954 ndash The Philippines joined the Southeast Asian Treaty Org (SEATO)

APRIL 11 1963 ndash the PAF contingent of 77 officers and men were sent to Congo Republic of South VietnamPHIL CIVIC ACTION GROUP (PHILCAG) ndash the group of engineers medical and ruralcommunity development team and security personnel were sent by thePhilippines to the representative of South Vietnam

FEBRUARY 22-25 1986 ndash the bloodless peoples revolution which deposed Ferdinand Marcosfrom the presidency and as Commander in elected President of thePhilippines commonly referred to as the EDSA Revolution

ACRONYMSBCT ndash Battalion Combat TeamGHQ ndash General HeadquartersHMB ndash HukbongMapagpalayang Bayan (HUKBALAHAP)PHILCAG-V ndash Philippine Civic Action Group to VietnamSEATO ndash Southeast Asian Treaty OrganizationOSP ndash Off-Shore PatrolPEFTOK ndash Philippine Expeditionary Force to Korea

ENLISTED PERSONNELrsquoS RANKS

MarinesArmy Navy Constabulary Air Force

C ndash CadetCadette M- MidshipmanMidshipwoman

CHAPTER V

MILITARY LEADERSHIP AND COMMAND

A Leadership ndash is the art of influencing and directing men to an assigned goal is such a way toobtain their obedience respect and loyal cooperation Leadership can beexercised by anyone at anytime respective of the frame work of the command

Command ndash is the authority which an individual in the military service lawfully exercisedover subordinates by virtue of his rank and assignment Command andleadership are inseparable whether the function of the command is complex orsimple the commander should always be the controlling head

B TWO TYPES OF LEADER

1 Authoritarian ndash a leader who leads his men by means of rank and position

2 Persuasive ndash a leader who leads his men by always setting examples

C BASIC ELEMENTS OF LEADERSHIP

1 Character ndash to be a leader a person must be of good character Some indications arehonesty good manners industrious self-control and bravery

2 Intelligence ndash is the ability to grasp knowledge easily It includes native ability goodcommon sense and judgment

3 Alertness ndash is mental and physical watchfulness vigilance and observance to his planned and future activity

D LEADERSHIP RESPONSIBILITIES

1 Accomplishment of the assigned mission or task

2 Work for the welfare of his men

E LEADERSHIP TRAITS

1 Knowledge ndash professional knowledge of the job Understands the characteristics of his men2 Bearing ndash dignified appearance and behavior

3 Courage ndash physical and moral ability to act in spite of danger or hardship

4 Decisiveness ndash ability to decide promptly and correctly the proper time and to announce his decision clearly and briefly with authority

5 Dependability ndash performance of duty with or without supervision

6 Endurance ndash physical and mental strength to continue or complete a task

7 Enthusiasm ndash interest in his work or task at hand

8 Force ndash the ability to compel obedience

9 Humility ndash state of being reasonable and proud but not arrogant and boastful

10 Humor ndash ability to appreciate and narrate amusing incidents of everyday life

11 Initiative ndash ability to start or originate an idea or work even when others are absent

12 Judgment ndash power of mind to weight factors affecting a problem and to decide properly

13 Integrity ndash good moral character

14 Justice ndash impartiality in dealing with others giving credit when due and punishment when so demanded

15 Loyalty - sincerity and faithfulness to superiors for the good of the unit

16 Sympathy ndash mutual feelings to others

17 Tact ndash ability to deal with people without hurting their feelings

18 Unselfishness - avoidance of personal consideration that gives a disadvantage

to others

F PRINCIPLES IN LEADERSHIP

1 Know your job - must have thorough professional knowledge of his duties and responsibilities to

command and gain respect from his men

2Know yourself and seek self-improvement - a leader should analyze himself to determine his

good qualities and learn to recognize and correct his weakness

3 Know your men and look after their welfare - understand each of your men personally

psychologically in order to effectively lead them

4 Keep your men informed - keep your men knowledgeable background in all aspects its

organization and mission in order to function effectively

5 Set an example -set a good example as a model in loyalty in superiors and subordinates good

bearing and attitudes pride and faithfulness to the organization

6 Insure the task is understood supervised and accomplished - a leader should give a clear and

concise order that can be understood He supervises his men to accomplish the

assigned mission

7 Train your men as a team - teamwork is a must within and among units from the

smallest to the largest Each men should understand that he has a job to perform

and must cooperate with others in achieving the common objective

8 Make sound and timely decisions - the ability to make raid estimate of the situation Arrive at the

sound decision and announce his decision in the correct form of the proper is

essential to a leader For any situation that may arise the leader should be able to

act logically

9 Develop a sense of responsibility among your subordinates - the leader should train his

subordinates to act in the absence of orders when the situation so demands He

develops responsibility among his subordinates byproper delegation of his

authority and holding them responsible for theaccomplishment of their mission

10 Employ your commands in accordance with its capability - the leader must have thorough knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of his command He must assign objectives that is responsible to be attained However when the situation so demands then men must be forced to action beyond their normal endurance so as to avoid a harder or more costly consequence on their part

11 See responsibility and take responsibility for your action - learn the seniors job for youmay assume his position later on Take advantage of the responsibility delegated toyou and do not back out in case of failure

ROLES OF A LEADER

1 The leader is a model soldier2 The leader is a commander3 The leader is an instructor4 The leader is a personal manager5 The leader is a councilor6 The leader is a custodian of his mens welfare

OBJECTIVES OF A LEADER

1 MORALE - the mental and emotional state of an individual 2 DISCIPLINE - the prompt and willing obedience to orders Complying to regulations and initiating appropriate action even in theabsence of orders 3 PROFICIENCY - the technical tactical and physical ability of an individual to perform their mission 4 ESPRIT DE CORPS - More than the aggregate personality it is how the individuals feel about their unit Jealous of enthusiasticfor pride in and devotion for

MAP READING

MAP - is a graphical representation of the earths surface drawn to a scale on aplane When you look at the map you are actually looking at a picture ofthe ground from a high spot in the air MAP COLOR - different colors are used on the printing of the maps to assist the use understanding it A GREEN - represents all types of vegetables B BLUE - signifies bodies of water such as rivers lakes swamps and streams C RED - indicates first class roads and prominent locations such as theProvincial or Municipal Capitals May be used to stress the significance ofimportant map locations

D BROWN - depicts contour lines which are representation of the relatives elevation and relief of the terrain

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

PRESIDENT FRANKLIN DELANO ROOSEVELT ndash President of the USA who set July 26 1941 as the date for the declaration of State of National Emergency and at the sametime the induction of the Philippine Army to United States Armed Forces to the Far East (USAFFE) with a total force of 160000 officers and men

GEN DOUGLAS MCARTHUR ndash was designated as the USAFFE COMMANDER

DECEMBER 8 1941 ndash the date the Japanese Imperial Forces attacked Pearl Harbor Clark Fieldand other targets

APRIL 9 1942 ndash fall of Bataan

MAY 6 1942 ndash fall of Corregidor

MAJOR FERDINAND EDRALIN MARCOS ndash was the most decorated soldier during the World War II and was a recipient of 27 medals

OCTOBER 20 1944 ndash the date the US Liberation Forces landed in Red Beach in Palo Leyte

JULY 3 1947 ndash the date the PC Air Corps was re-designated as the Philippine Air Force

OCTOBER 1947 ndash the Off-Shore Patrol was renamed Phil Naval Patrol ndash the date President Manuel Roxas issued Executive Order No 94 remainingthe Army of the Philippines as Armed Forces of the Philippines andactivating the 4 military areas

ARAW NG KAGITINGAN ndash a day set to commemorate the Fall of Bataan Fall of Corregidorand Fall of Bessang Pass Based on the historical records the independenceof the Republic of the Philippines was on June 12 1898

JULY 4 1946 ndash declaration of the Independence by the USA celebrated today as PhilippineAmerican Friendship Day

JULY 1950 ndash the Philippine Army was separated from the Gen Headquarters Philippine Army

DECEMBER 23 1950 ndash President ElpidioQuirino issued Executive Order No 389 renamingthe Headquarters AFP to Gen Headquarters AFP (GHQ AFP)

JANUARY 5 1951 ndash the Phil Naval Patrol was renamed the Philippine Naval of thePHILIPPINE NAVY

1959 ndash 1955 ndash the Battalion Combat Teams were sent to Korea to comply with the commitmentsof the Philippines as member of the UN The BCT was known as the PHILIPPINE EXPEDITIONARY FORCE TO KOREA (PEFTOK)

SEPTEMBER 1954 ndash The Philippines joined the Southeast Asian Treaty Org (SEATO)

APRIL 11 1963 ndash the PAF contingent of 77 officers and men were sent to Congo Republic of South VietnamPHIL CIVIC ACTION GROUP (PHILCAG) ndash the group of engineers medical and ruralcommunity development team and security personnel were sent by thePhilippines to the representative of South Vietnam

FEBRUARY 22-25 1986 ndash the bloodless peoples revolution which deposed Ferdinand Marcosfrom the presidency and as Commander in elected President of thePhilippines commonly referred to as the EDSA Revolution

ACRONYMSBCT ndash Battalion Combat TeamGHQ ndash General HeadquartersHMB ndash HukbongMapagpalayang Bayan (HUKBALAHAP)PHILCAG-V ndash Philippine Civic Action Group to VietnamSEATO ndash Southeast Asian Treaty OrganizationOSP ndash Off-Shore PatrolPEFTOK ndash Philippine Expeditionary Force to Korea

ENLISTED PERSONNELrsquoS RANKS

MarinesArmy Navy Constabulary Air Force

C ndash CadetCadette M- MidshipmanMidshipwoman

CHAPTER V

MILITARY LEADERSHIP AND COMMAND

A Leadership ndash is the art of influencing and directing men to an assigned goal is such a way toobtain their obedience respect and loyal cooperation Leadership can beexercised by anyone at anytime respective of the frame work of the command

Command ndash is the authority which an individual in the military service lawfully exercisedover subordinates by virtue of his rank and assignment Command andleadership are inseparable whether the function of the command is complex orsimple the commander should always be the controlling head

B TWO TYPES OF LEADER

1 Authoritarian ndash a leader who leads his men by means of rank and position

2 Persuasive ndash a leader who leads his men by always setting examples

C BASIC ELEMENTS OF LEADERSHIP

1 Character ndash to be a leader a person must be of good character Some indications arehonesty good manners industrious self-control and bravery

2 Intelligence ndash is the ability to grasp knowledge easily It includes native ability goodcommon sense and judgment

3 Alertness ndash is mental and physical watchfulness vigilance and observance to his planned and future activity

D LEADERSHIP RESPONSIBILITIES

1 Accomplishment of the assigned mission or task

2 Work for the welfare of his men

E LEADERSHIP TRAITS

1 Knowledge ndash professional knowledge of the job Understands the characteristics of his men2 Bearing ndash dignified appearance and behavior

3 Courage ndash physical and moral ability to act in spite of danger or hardship

4 Decisiveness ndash ability to decide promptly and correctly the proper time and to announce his decision clearly and briefly with authority

5 Dependability ndash performance of duty with or without supervision

6 Endurance ndash physical and mental strength to continue or complete a task

7 Enthusiasm ndash interest in his work or task at hand

8 Force ndash the ability to compel obedience

9 Humility ndash state of being reasonable and proud but not arrogant and boastful

10 Humor ndash ability to appreciate and narrate amusing incidents of everyday life

11 Initiative ndash ability to start or originate an idea or work even when others are absent

12 Judgment ndash power of mind to weight factors affecting a problem and to decide properly

13 Integrity ndash good moral character

14 Justice ndash impartiality in dealing with others giving credit when due and punishment when so demanded

15 Loyalty - sincerity and faithfulness to superiors for the good of the unit

16 Sympathy ndash mutual feelings to others

17 Tact ndash ability to deal with people without hurting their feelings

18 Unselfishness - avoidance of personal consideration that gives a disadvantage

to others

F PRINCIPLES IN LEADERSHIP

1 Know your job - must have thorough professional knowledge of his duties and responsibilities to

command and gain respect from his men

2Know yourself and seek self-improvement - a leader should analyze himself to determine his

good qualities and learn to recognize and correct his weakness

3 Know your men and look after their welfare - understand each of your men personally

psychologically in order to effectively lead them

4 Keep your men informed - keep your men knowledgeable background in all aspects its

organization and mission in order to function effectively

5 Set an example -set a good example as a model in loyalty in superiors and subordinates good

bearing and attitudes pride and faithfulness to the organization

6 Insure the task is understood supervised and accomplished - a leader should give a clear and

concise order that can be understood He supervises his men to accomplish the

assigned mission

7 Train your men as a team - teamwork is a must within and among units from the

smallest to the largest Each men should understand that he has a job to perform

and must cooperate with others in achieving the common objective

8 Make sound and timely decisions - the ability to make raid estimate of the situation Arrive at the

sound decision and announce his decision in the correct form of the proper is

essential to a leader For any situation that may arise the leader should be able to

act logically

9 Develop a sense of responsibility among your subordinates - the leader should train his

subordinates to act in the absence of orders when the situation so demands He

develops responsibility among his subordinates byproper delegation of his

authority and holding them responsible for theaccomplishment of their mission

10 Employ your commands in accordance with its capability - the leader must have thorough knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of his command He must assign objectives that is responsible to be attained However when the situation so demands then men must be forced to action beyond their normal endurance so as to avoid a harder or more costly consequence on their part

11 See responsibility and take responsibility for your action - learn the seniors job for youmay assume his position later on Take advantage of the responsibility delegated toyou and do not back out in case of failure

ROLES OF A LEADER

1 The leader is a model soldier2 The leader is a commander3 The leader is an instructor4 The leader is a personal manager5 The leader is a councilor6 The leader is a custodian of his mens welfare

OBJECTIVES OF A LEADER

1 MORALE - the mental and emotional state of an individual 2 DISCIPLINE - the prompt and willing obedience to orders Complying to regulations and initiating appropriate action even in theabsence of orders 3 PROFICIENCY - the technical tactical and physical ability of an individual to perform their mission 4 ESPRIT DE CORPS - More than the aggregate personality it is how the individuals feel about their unit Jealous of enthusiasticfor pride in and devotion for

MAP READING

MAP - is a graphical representation of the earths surface drawn to a scale on aplane When you look at the map you are actually looking at a picture ofthe ground from a high spot in the air MAP COLOR - different colors are used on the printing of the maps to assist the use understanding it A GREEN - represents all types of vegetables B BLUE - signifies bodies of water such as rivers lakes swamps and streams C RED - indicates first class roads and prominent locations such as theProvincial or Municipal Capitals May be used to stress the significance ofimportant map locations

D BROWN - depicts contour lines which are representation of the relatives elevation and relief of the terrain

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

SEPTEMBER 1954 ndash The Philippines joined the Southeast Asian Treaty Org (SEATO)

APRIL 11 1963 ndash the PAF contingent of 77 officers and men were sent to Congo Republic of South VietnamPHIL CIVIC ACTION GROUP (PHILCAG) ndash the group of engineers medical and ruralcommunity development team and security personnel were sent by thePhilippines to the representative of South Vietnam

FEBRUARY 22-25 1986 ndash the bloodless peoples revolution which deposed Ferdinand Marcosfrom the presidency and as Commander in elected President of thePhilippines commonly referred to as the EDSA Revolution

ACRONYMSBCT ndash Battalion Combat TeamGHQ ndash General HeadquartersHMB ndash HukbongMapagpalayang Bayan (HUKBALAHAP)PHILCAG-V ndash Philippine Civic Action Group to VietnamSEATO ndash Southeast Asian Treaty OrganizationOSP ndash Off-Shore PatrolPEFTOK ndash Philippine Expeditionary Force to Korea

ENLISTED PERSONNELrsquoS RANKS

MarinesArmy Navy Constabulary Air Force

C ndash CadetCadette M- MidshipmanMidshipwoman

CHAPTER V

MILITARY LEADERSHIP AND COMMAND

A Leadership ndash is the art of influencing and directing men to an assigned goal is such a way toobtain their obedience respect and loyal cooperation Leadership can beexercised by anyone at anytime respective of the frame work of the command

Command ndash is the authority which an individual in the military service lawfully exercisedover subordinates by virtue of his rank and assignment Command andleadership are inseparable whether the function of the command is complex orsimple the commander should always be the controlling head

B TWO TYPES OF LEADER

1 Authoritarian ndash a leader who leads his men by means of rank and position

2 Persuasive ndash a leader who leads his men by always setting examples

C BASIC ELEMENTS OF LEADERSHIP

1 Character ndash to be a leader a person must be of good character Some indications arehonesty good manners industrious self-control and bravery

2 Intelligence ndash is the ability to grasp knowledge easily It includes native ability goodcommon sense and judgment

3 Alertness ndash is mental and physical watchfulness vigilance and observance to his planned and future activity

D LEADERSHIP RESPONSIBILITIES

1 Accomplishment of the assigned mission or task

2 Work for the welfare of his men

E LEADERSHIP TRAITS

1 Knowledge ndash professional knowledge of the job Understands the characteristics of his men2 Bearing ndash dignified appearance and behavior

3 Courage ndash physical and moral ability to act in spite of danger or hardship

4 Decisiveness ndash ability to decide promptly and correctly the proper time and to announce his decision clearly and briefly with authority

5 Dependability ndash performance of duty with or without supervision

6 Endurance ndash physical and mental strength to continue or complete a task

7 Enthusiasm ndash interest in his work or task at hand

8 Force ndash the ability to compel obedience

9 Humility ndash state of being reasonable and proud but not arrogant and boastful

10 Humor ndash ability to appreciate and narrate amusing incidents of everyday life

11 Initiative ndash ability to start or originate an idea or work even when others are absent

12 Judgment ndash power of mind to weight factors affecting a problem and to decide properly

13 Integrity ndash good moral character

14 Justice ndash impartiality in dealing with others giving credit when due and punishment when so demanded

15 Loyalty - sincerity and faithfulness to superiors for the good of the unit

16 Sympathy ndash mutual feelings to others

17 Tact ndash ability to deal with people without hurting their feelings

18 Unselfishness - avoidance of personal consideration that gives a disadvantage

to others

F PRINCIPLES IN LEADERSHIP

1 Know your job - must have thorough professional knowledge of his duties and responsibilities to

command and gain respect from his men

2Know yourself and seek self-improvement - a leader should analyze himself to determine his

good qualities and learn to recognize and correct his weakness

3 Know your men and look after their welfare - understand each of your men personally

psychologically in order to effectively lead them

4 Keep your men informed - keep your men knowledgeable background in all aspects its

organization and mission in order to function effectively

5 Set an example -set a good example as a model in loyalty in superiors and subordinates good

bearing and attitudes pride and faithfulness to the organization

6 Insure the task is understood supervised and accomplished - a leader should give a clear and

concise order that can be understood He supervises his men to accomplish the

assigned mission

7 Train your men as a team - teamwork is a must within and among units from the

smallest to the largest Each men should understand that he has a job to perform

and must cooperate with others in achieving the common objective

8 Make sound and timely decisions - the ability to make raid estimate of the situation Arrive at the

sound decision and announce his decision in the correct form of the proper is

essential to a leader For any situation that may arise the leader should be able to

act logically

9 Develop a sense of responsibility among your subordinates - the leader should train his

subordinates to act in the absence of orders when the situation so demands He

develops responsibility among his subordinates byproper delegation of his

authority and holding them responsible for theaccomplishment of their mission

10 Employ your commands in accordance with its capability - the leader must have thorough knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of his command He must assign objectives that is responsible to be attained However when the situation so demands then men must be forced to action beyond their normal endurance so as to avoid a harder or more costly consequence on their part

11 See responsibility and take responsibility for your action - learn the seniors job for youmay assume his position later on Take advantage of the responsibility delegated toyou and do not back out in case of failure

ROLES OF A LEADER

1 The leader is a model soldier2 The leader is a commander3 The leader is an instructor4 The leader is a personal manager5 The leader is a councilor6 The leader is a custodian of his mens welfare

OBJECTIVES OF A LEADER

1 MORALE - the mental and emotional state of an individual 2 DISCIPLINE - the prompt and willing obedience to orders Complying to regulations and initiating appropriate action even in theabsence of orders 3 PROFICIENCY - the technical tactical and physical ability of an individual to perform their mission 4 ESPRIT DE CORPS - More than the aggregate personality it is how the individuals feel about their unit Jealous of enthusiasticfor pride in and devotion for

MAP READING

MAP - is a graphical representation of the earths surface drawn to a scale on aplane When you look at the map you are actually looking at a picture ofthe ground from a high spot in the air MAP COLOR - different colors are used on the printing of the maps to assist the use understanding it A GREEN - represents all types of vegetables B BLUE - signifies bodies of water such as rivers lakes swamps and streams C RED - indicates first class roads and prominent locations such as theProvincial or Municipal Capitals May be used to stress the significance ofimportant map locations

D BROWN - depicts contour lines which are representation of the relatives elevation and relief of the terrain

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

ENLISTED PERSONNELrsquoS RANKS

MarinesArmy Navy Constabulary Air Force

C ndash CadetCadette M- MidshipmanMidshipwoman

CHAPTER V

MILITARY LEADERSHIP AND COMMAND

A Leadership ndash is the art of influencing and directing men to an assigned goal is such a way toobtain their obedience respect and loyal cooperation Leadership can beexercised by anyone at anytime respective of the frame work of the command

Command ndash is the authority which an individual in the military service lawfully exercisedover subordinates by virtue of his rank and assignment Command andleadership are inseparable whether the function of the command is complex orsimple the commander should always be the controlling head

B TWO TYPES OF LEADER

1 Authoritarian ndash a leader who leads his men by means of rank and position

2 Persuasive ndash a leader who leads his men by always setting examples

C BASIC ELEMENTS OF LEADERSHIP

1 Character ndash to be a leader a person must be of good character Some indications arehonesty good manners industrious self-control and bravery

2 Intelligence ndash is the ability to grasp knowledge easily It includes native ability goodcommon sense and judgment

3 Alertness ndash is mental and physical watchfulness vigilance and observance to his planned and future activity

D LEADERSHIP RESPONSIBILITIES

1 Accomplishment of the assigned mission or task

2 Work for the welfare of his men

E LEADERSHIP TRAITS

1 Knowledge ndash professional knowledge of the job Understands the characteristics of his men2 Bearing ndash dignified appearance and behavior

3 Courage ndash physical and moral ability to act in spite of danger or hardship

4 Decisiveness ndash ability to decide promptly and correctly the proper time and to announce his decision clearly and briefly with authority

5 Dependability ndash performance of duty with or without supervision

6 Endurance ndash physical and mental strength to continue or complete a task

7 Enthusiasm ndash interest in his work or task at hand

8 Force ndash the ability to compel obedience

9 Humility ndash state of being reasonable and proud but not arrogant and boastful

10 Humor ndash ability to appreciate and narrate amusing incidents of everyday life

11 Initiative ndash ability to start or originate an idea or work even when others are absent

12 Judgment ndash power of mind to weight factors affecting a problem and to decide properly

13 Integrity ndash good moral character

14 Justice ndash impartiality in dealing with others giving credit when due and punishment when so demanded

15 Loyalty - sincerity and faithfulness to superiors for the good of the unit

16 Sympathy ndash mutual feelings to others

17 Tact ndash ability to deal with people without hurting their feelings

18 Unselfishness - avoidance of personal consideration that gives a disadvantage

to others

F PRINCIPLES IN LEADERSHIP

1 Know your job - must have thorough professional knowledge of his duties and responsibilities to

command and gain respect from his men

2Know yourself and seek self-improvement - a leader should analyze himself to determine his

good qualities and learn to recognize and correct his weakness

3 Know your men and look after their welfare - understand each of your men personally

psychologically in order to effectively lead them

4 Keep your men informed - keep your men knowledgeable background in all aspects its

organization and mission in order to function effectively

5 Set an example -set a good example as a model in loyalty in superiors and subordinates good

bearing and attitudes pride and faithfulness to the organization

6 Insure the task is understood supervised and accomplished - a leader should give a clear and

concise order that can be understood He supervises his men to accomplish the

assigned mission

7 Train your men as a team - teamwork is a must within and among units from the

smallest to the largest Each men should understand that he has a job to perform

and must cooperate with others in achieving the common objective

8 Make sound and timely decisions - the ability to make raid estimate of the situation Arrive at the

sound decision and announce his decision in the correct form of the proper is

essential to a leader For any situation that may arise the leader should be able to

act logically

9 Develop a sense of responsibility among your subordinates - the leader should train his

subordinates to act in the absence of orders when the situation so demands He

develops responsibility among his subordinates byproper delegation of his

authority and holding them responsible for theaccomplishment of their mission

10 Employ your commands in accordance with its capability - the leader must have thorough knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of his command He must assign objectives that is responsible to be attained However when the situation so demands then men must be forced to action beyond their normal endurance so as to avoid a harder or more costly consequence on their part

11 See responsibility and take responsibility for your action - learn the seniors job for youmay assume his position later on Take advantage of the responsibility delegated toyou and do not back out in case of failure

ROLES OF A LEADER

1 The leader is a model soldier2 The leader is a commander3 The leader is an instructor4 The leader is a personal manager5 The leader is a councilor6 The leader is a custodian of his mens welfare

OBJECTIVES OF A LEADER

1 MORALE - the mental and emotional state of an individual 2 DISCIPLINE - the prompt and willing obedience to orders Complying to regulations and initiating appropriate action even in theabsence of orders 3 PROFICIENCY - the technical tactical and physical ability of an individual to perform their mission 4 ESPRIT DE CORPS - More than the aggregate personality it is how the individuals feel about their unit Jealous of enthusiasticfor pride in and devotion for

MAP READING

MAP - is a graphical representation of the earths surface drawn to a scale on aplane When you look at the map you are actually looking at a picture ofthe ground from a high spot in the air MAP COLOR - different colors are used on the printing of the maps to assist the use understanding it A GREEN - represents all types of vegetables B BLUE - signifies bodies of water such as rivers lakes swamps and streams C RED - indicates first class roads and prominent locations such as theProvincial or Municipal Capitals May be used to stress the significance ofimportant map locations

D BROWN - depicts contour lines which are representation of the relatives elevation and relief of the terrain

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

C ndash CadetCadette M- MidshipmanMidshipwoman

CHAPTER V

MILITARY LEADERSHIP AND COMMAND

A Leadership ndash is the art of influencing and directing men to an assigned goal is such a way toobtain their obedience respect and loyal cooperation Leadership can beexercised by anyone at anytime respective of the frame work of the command

Command ndash is the authority which an individual in the military service lawfully exercisedover subordinates by virtue of his rank and assignment Command andleadership are inseparable whether the function of the command is complex orsimple the commander should always be the controlling head

B TWO TYPES OF LEADER

1 Authoritarian ndash a leader who leads his men by means of rank and position

2 Persuasive ndash a leader who leads his men by always setting examples

C BASIC ELEMENTS OF LEADERSHIP

1 Character ndash to be a leader a person must be of good character Some indications arehonesty good manners industrious self-control and bravery

2 Intelligence ndash is the ability to grasp knowledge easily It includes native ability goodcommon sense and judgment

3 Alertness ndash is mental and physical watchfulness vigilance and observance to his planned and future activity

D LEADERSHIP RESPONSIBILITIES

1 Accomplishment of the assigned mission or task

2 Work for the welfare of his men

E LEADERSHIP TRAITS

1 Knowledge ndash professional knowledge of the job Understands the characteristics of his men2 Bearing ndash dignified appearance and behavior

3 Courage ndash physical and moral ability to act in spite of danger or hardship

4 Decisiveness ndash ability to decide promptly and correctly the proper time and to announce his decision clearly and briefly with authority

5 Dependability ndash performance of duty with or without supervision

6 Endurance ndash physical and mental strength to continue or complete a task

7 Enthusiasm ndash interest in his work or task at hand

8 Force ndash the ability to compel obedience

9 Humility ndash state of being reasonable and proud but not arrogant and boastful

10 Humor ndash ability to appreciate and narrate amusing incidents of everyday life

11 Initiative ndash ability to start or originate an idea or work even when others are absent

12 Judgment ndash power of mind to weight factors affecting a problem and to decide properly

13 Integrity ndash good moral character

14 Justice ndash impartiality in dealing with others giving credit when due and punishment when so demanded

15 Loyalty - sincerity and faithfulness to superiors for the good of the unit

16 Sympathy ndash mutual feelings to others

17 Tact ndash ability to deal with people without hurting their feelings

18 Unselfishness - avoidance of personal consideration that gives a disadvantage

to others

F PRINCIPLES IN LEADERSHIP

1 Know your job - must have thorough professional knowledge of his duties and responsibilities to

command and gain respect from his men

2Know yourself and seek self-improvement - a leader should analyze himself to determine his

good qualities and learn to recognize and correct his weakness

3 Know your men and look after their welfare - understand each of your men personally

psychologically in order to effectively lead them

4 Keep your men informed - keep your men knowledgeable background in all aspects its

organization and mission in order to function effectively

5 Set an example -set a good example as a model in loyalty in superiors and subordinates good

bearing and attitudes pride and faithfulness to the organization

6 Insure the task is understood supervised and accomplished - a leader should give a clear and

concise order that can be understood He supervises his men to accomplish the

assigned mission

7 Train your men as a team - teamwork is a must within and among units from the

smallest to the largest Each men should understand that he has a job to perform

and must cooperate with others in achieving the common objective

8 Make sound and timely decisions - the ability to make raid estimate of the situation Arrive at the

sound decision and announce his decision in the correct form of the proper is

essential to a leader For any situation that may arise the leader should be able to

act logically

9 Develop a sense of responsibility among your subordinates - the leader should train his

subordinates to act in the absence of orders when the situation so demands He

develops responsibility among his subordinates byproper delegation of his

authority and holding them responsible for theaccomplishment of their mission

10 Employ your commands in accordance with its capability - the leader must have thorough knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of his command He must assign objectives that is responsible to be attained However when the situation so demands then men must be forced to action beyond their normal endurance so as to avoid a harder or more costly consequence on their part

11 See responsibility and take responsibility for your action - learn the seniors job for youmay assume his position later on Take advantage of the responsibility delegated toyou and do not back out in case of failure

ROLES OF A LEADER

1 The leader is a model soldier2 The leader is a commander3 The leader is an instructor4 The leader is a personal manager5 The leader is a councilor6 The leader is a custodian of his mens welfare

OBJECTIVES OF A LEADER

1 MORALE - the mental and emotional state of an individual 2 DISCIPLINE - the prompt and willing obedience to orders Complying to regulations and initiating appropriate action even in theabsence of orders 3 PROFICIENCY - the technical tactical and physical ability of an individual to perform their mission 4 ESPRIT DE CORPS - More than the aggregate personality it is how the individuals feel about their unit Jealous of enthusiasticfor pride in and devotion for

MAP READING

MAP - is a graphical representation of the earths surface drawn to a scale on aplane When you look at the map you are actually looking at a picture ofthe ground from a high spot in the air MAP COLOR - different colors are used on the printing of the maps to assist the use understanding it A GREEN - represents all types of vegetables B BLUE - signifies bodies of water such as rivers lakes swamps and streams C RED - indicates first class roads and prominent locations such as theProvincial or Municipal Capitals May be used to stress the significance ofimportant map locations

D BROWN - depicts contour lines which are representation of the relatives elevation and relief of the terrain

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

CHAPTER V

MILITARY LEADERSHIP AND COMMAND

A Leadership ndash is the art of influencing and directing men to an assigned goal is such a way toobtain their obedience respect and loyal cooperation Leadership can beexercised by anyone at anytime respective of the frame work of the command

Command ndash is the authority which an individual in the military service lawfully exercisedover subordinates by virtue of his rank and assignment Command andleadership are inseparable whether the function of the command is complex orsimple the commander should always be the controlling head

B TWO TYPES OF LEADER

1 Authoritarian ndash a leader who leads his men by means of rank and position

2 Persuasive ndash a leader who leads his men by always setting examples

C BASIC ELEMENTS OF LEADERSHIP

1 Character ndash to be a leader a person must be of good character Some indications arehonesty good manners industrious self-control and bravery

2 Intelligence ndash is the ability to grasp knowledge easily It includes native ability goodcommon sense and judgment

3 Alertness ndash is mental and physical watchfulness vigilance and observance to his planned and future activity

D LEADERSHIP RESPONSIBILITIES

1 Accomplishment of the assigned mission or task

2 Work for the welfare of his men

E LEADERSHIP TRAITS

1 Knowledge ndash professional knowledge of the job Understands the characteristics of his men2 Bearing ndash dignified appearance and behavior

3 Courage ndash physical and moral ability to act in spite of danger or hardship

4 Decisiveness ndash ability to decide promptly and correctly the proper time and to announce his decision clearly and briefly with authority

5 Dependability ndash performance of duty with or without supervision

6 Endurance ndash physical and mental strength to continue or complete a task

7 Enthusiasm ndash interest in his work or task at hand

8 Force ndash the ability to compel obedience

9 Humility ndash state of being reasonable and proud but not arrogant and boastful

10 Humor ndash ability to appreciate and narrate amusing incidents of everyday life

11 Initiative ndash ability to start or originate an idea or work even when others are absent

12 Judgment ndash power of mind to weight factors affecting a problem and to decide properly

13 Integrity ndash good moral character

14 Justice ndash impartiality in dealing with others giving credit when due and punishment when so demanded

15 Loyalty - sincerity and faithfulness to superiors for the good of the unit

16 Sympathy ndash mutual feelings to others

17 Tact ndash ability to deal with people without hurting their feelings

18 Unselfishness - avoidance of personal consideration that gives a disadvantage

to others

F PRINCIPLES IN LEADERSHIP

1 Know your job - must have thorough professional knowledge of his duties and responsibilities to

command and gain respect from his men

2Know yourself and seek self-improvement - a leader should analyze himself to determine his

good qualities and learn to recognize and correct his weakness

3 Know your men and look after their welfare - understand each of your men personally

psychologically in order to effectively lead them

4 Keep your men informed - keep your men knowledgeable background in all aspects its

organization and mission in order to function effectively

5 Set an example -set a good example as a model in loyalty in superiors and subordinates good

bearing and attitudes pride and faithfulness to the organization

6 Insure the task is understood supervised and accomplished - a leader should give a clear and

concise order that can be understood He supervises his men to accomplish the

assigned mission

7 Train your men as a team - teamwork is a must within and among units from the

smallest to the largest Each men should understand that he has a job to perform

and must cooperate with others in achieving the common objective

8 Make sound and timely decisions - the ability to make raid estimate of the situation Arrive at the

sound decision and announce his decision in the correct form of the proper is

essential to a leader For any situation that may arise the leader should be able to

act logically

9 Develop a sense of responsibility among your subordinates - the leader should train his

subordinates to act in the absence of orders when the situation so demands He

develops responsibility among his subordinates byproper delegation of his

authority and holding them responsible for theaccomplishment of their mission

10 Employ your commands in accordance with its capability - the leader must have thorough knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of his command He must assign objectives that is responsible to be attained However when the situation so demands then men must be forced to action beyond their normal endurance so as to avoid a harder or more costly consequence on their part

11 See responsibility and take responsibility for your action - learn the seniors job for youmay assume his position later on Take advantage of the responsibility delegated toyou and do not back out in case of failure

ROLES OF A LEADER

1 The leader is a model soldier2 The leader is a commander3 The leader is an instructor4 The leader is a personal manager5 The leader is a councilor6 The leader is a custodian of his mens welfare

OBJECTIVES OF A LEADER

1 MORALE - the mental and emotional state of an individual 2 DISCIPLINE - the prompt and willing obedience to orders Complying to regulations and initiating appropriate action even in theabsence of orders 3 PROFICIENCY - the technical tactical and physical ability of an individual to perform their mission 4 ESPRIT DE CORPS - More than the aggregate personality it is how the individuals feel about their unit Jealous of enthusiasticfor pride in and devotion for

MAP READING

MAP - is a graphical representation of the earths surface drawn to a scale on aplane When you look at the map you are actually looking at a picture ofthe ground from a high spot in the air MAP COLOR - different colors are used on the printing of the maps to assist the use understanding it A GREEN - represents all types of vegetables B BLUE - signifies bodies of water such as rivers lakes swamps and streams C RED - indicates first class roads and prominent locations such as theProvincial or Municipal Capitals May be used to stress the significance ofimportant map locations

D BROWN - depicts contour lines which are representation of the relatives elevation and relief of the terrain

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

E LEADERSHIP TRAITS

1 Knowledge ndash professional knowledge of the job Understands the characteristics of his men2 Bearing ndash dignified appearance and behavior

3 Courage ndash physical and moral ability to act in spite of danger or hardship

4 Decisiveness ndash ability to decide promptly and correctly the proper time and to announce his decision clearly and briefly with authority

5 Dependability ndash performance of duty with or without supervision

6 Endurance ndash physical and mental strength to continue or complete a task

7 Enthusiasm ndash interest in his work or task at hand

8 Force ndash the ability to compel obedience

9 Humility ndash state of being reasonable and proud but not arrogant and boastful

10 Humor ndash ability to appreciate and narrate amusing incidents of everyday life

11 Initiative ndash ability to start or originate an idea or work even when others are absent

12 Judgment ndash power of mind to weight factors affecting a problem and to decide properly

13 Integrity ndash good moral character

14 Justice ndash impartiality in dealing with others giving credit when due and punishment when so demanded

15 Loyalty - sincerity and faithfulness to superiors for the good of the unit

16 Sympathy ndash mutual feelings to others

17 Tact ndash ability to deal with people without hurting their feelings

18 Unselfishness - avoidance of personal consideration that gives a disadvantage

to others

F PRINCIPLES IN LEADERSHIP

1 Know your job - must have thorough professional knowledge of his duties and responsibilities to

command and gain respect from his men

2Know yourself and seek self-improvement - a leader should analyze himself to determine his

good qualities and learn to recognize and correct his weakness

3 Know your men and look after their welfare - understand each of your men personally

psychologically in order to effectively lead them

4 Keep your men informed - keep your men knowledgeable background in all aspects its

organization and mission in order to function effectively

5 Set an example -set a good example as a model in loyalty in superiors and subordinates good

bearing and attitudes pride and faithfulness to the organization

6 Insure the task is understood supervised and accomplished - a leader should give a clear and

concise order that can be understood He supervises his men to accomplish the

assigned mission

7 Train your men as a team - teamwork is a must within and among units from the

smallest to the largest Each men should understand that he has a job to perform

and must cooperate with others in achieving the common objective

8 Make sound and timely decisions - the ability to make raid estimate of the situation Arrive at the

sound decision and announce his decision in the correct form of the proper is

essential to a leader For any situation that may arise the leader should be able to

act logically

9 Develop a sense of responsibility among your subordinates - the leader should train his

subordinates to act in the absence of orders when the situation so demands He

develops responsibility among his subordinates byproper delegation of his

authority and holding them responsible for theaccomplishment of their mission

10 Employ your commands in accordance with its capability - the leader must have thorough knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of his command He must assign objectives that is responsible to be attained However when the situation so demands then men must be forced to action beyond their normal endurance so as to avoid a harder or more costly consequence on their part

11 See responsibility and take responsibility for your action - learn the seniors job for youmay assume his position later on Take advantage of the responsibility delegated toyou and do not back out in case of failure

ROLES OF A LEADER

1 The leader is a model soldier2 The leader is a commander3 The leader is an instructor4 The leader is a personal manager5 The leader is a councilor6 The leader is a custodian of his mens welfare

OBJECTIVES OF A LEADER

1 MORALE - the mental and emotional state of an individual 2 DISCIPLINE - the prompt and willing obedience to orders Complying to regulations and initiating appropriate action even in theabsence of orders 3 PROFICIENCY - the technical tactical and physical ability of an individual to perform their mission 4 ESPRIT DE CORPS - More than the aggregate personality it is how the individuals feel about their unit Jealous of enthusiasticfor pride in and devotion for

MAP READING

MAP - is a graphical representation of the earths surface drawn to a scale on aplane When you look at the map you are actually looking at a picture ofthe ground from a high spot in the air MAP COLOR - different colors are used on the printing of the maps to assist the use understanding it A GREEN - represents all types of vegetables B BLUE - signifies bodies of water such as rivers lakes swamps and streams C RED - indicates first class roads and prominent locations such as theProvincial or Municipal Capitals May be used to stress the significance ofimportant map locations

D BROWN - depicts contour lines which are representation of the relatives elevation and relief of the terrain

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

18 Unselfishness - avoidance of personal consideration that gives a disadvantage

to others

F PRINCIPLES IN LEADERSHIP

1 Know your job - must have thorough professional knowledge of his duties and responsibilities to

command and gain respect from his men

2Know yourself and seek self-improvement - a leader should analyze himself to determine his

good qualities and learn to recognize and correct his weakness

3 Know your men and look after their welfare - understand each of your men personally

psychologically in order to effectively lead them

4 Keep your men informed - keep your men knowledgeable background in all aspects its

organization and mission in order to function effectively

5 Set an example -set a good example as a model in loyalty in superiors and subordinates good

bearing and attitudes pride and faithfulness to the organization

6 Insure the task is understood supervised and accomplished - a leader should give a clear and

concise order that can be understood He supervises his men to accomplish the

assigned mission

7 Train your men as a team - teamwork is a must within and among units from the

smallest to the largest Each men should understand that he has a job to perform

and must cooperate with others in achieving the common objective

8 Make sound and timely decisions - the ability to make raid estimate of the situation Arrive at the

sound decision and announce his decision in the correct form of the proper is

essential to a leader For any situation that may arise the leader should be able to

act logically

9 Develop a sense of responsibility among your subordinates - the leader should train his

subordinates to act in the absence of orders when the situation so demands He

develops responsibility among his subordinates byproper delegation of his

authority and holding them responsible for theaccomplishment of their mission

10 Employ your commands in accordance with its capability - the leader must have thorough knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of his command He must assign objectives that is responsible to be attained However when the situation so demands then men must be forced to action beyond their normal endurance so as to avoid a harder or more costly consequence on their part

11 See responsibility and take responsibility for your action - learn the seniors job for youmay assume his position later on Take advantage of the responsibility delegated toyou and do not back out in case of failure

ROLES OF A LEADER

1 The leader is a model soldier2 The leader is a commander3 The leader is an instructor4 The leader is a personal manager5 The leader is a councilor6 The leader is a custodian of his mens welfare

OBJECTIVES OF A LEADER

1 MORALE - the mental and emotional state of an individual 2 DISCIPLINE - the prompt and willing obedience to orders Complying to regulations and initiating appropriate action even in theabsence of orders 3 PROFICIENCY - the technical tactical and physical ability of an individual to perform their mission 4 ESPRIT DE CORPS - More than the aggregate personality it is how the individuals feel about their unit Jealous of enthusiasticfor pride in and devotion for

MAP READING

MAP - is a graphical representation of the earths surface drawn to a scale on aplane When you look at the map you are actually looking at a picture ofthe ground from a high spot in the air MAP COLOR - different colors are used on the printing of the maps to assist the use understanding it A GREEN - represents all types of vegetables B BLUE - signifies bodies of water such as rivers lakes swamps and streams C RED - indicates first class roads and prominent locations such as theProvincial or Municipal Capitals May be used to stress the significance ofimportant map locations

D BROWN - depicts contour lines which are representation of the relatives elevation and relief of the terrain

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

10 Employ your commands in accordance with its capability - the leader must have thorough knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of his command He must assign objectives that is responsible to be attained However when the situation so demands then men must be forced to action beyond their normal endurance so as to avoid a harder or more costly consequence on their part

11 See responsibility and take responsibility for your action - learn the seniors job for youmay assume his position later on Take advantage of the responsibility delegated toyou and do not back out in case of failure

ROLES OF A LEADER

1 The leader is a model soldier2 The leader is a commander3 The leader is an instructor4 The leader is a personal manager5 The leader is a councilor6 The leader is a custodian of his mens welfare

OBJECTIVES OF A LEADER

1 MORALE - the mental and emotional state of an individual 2 DISCIPLINE - the prompt and willing obedience to orders Complying to regulations and initiating appropriate action even in theabsence of orders 3 PROFICIENCY - the technical tactical and physical ability of an individual to perform their mission 4 ESPRIT DE CORPS - More than the aggregate personality it is how the individuals feel about their unit Jealous of enthusiasticfor pride in and devotion for

MAP READING

MAP - is a graphical representation of the earths surface drawn to a scale on aplane When you look at the map you are actually looking at a picture ofthe ground from a high spot in the air MAP COLOR - different colors are used on the printing of the maps to assist the use understanding it A GREEN - represents all types of vegetables B BLUE - signifies bodies of water such as rivers lakes swamps and streams C RED - indicates first class roads and prominent locations such as theProvincial or Municipal Capitals May be used to stress the significance ofimportant map locations

D BROWN - depicts contour lines which are representation of the relatives elevation and relief of the terrain

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

A MILITARY MAP HAS TWO MAIN PARTS The MAP ITSELF and the MARGINAL INFORMATION Printed in the margin around it

MARGINAL INFORMATION - in order to use your map intelligently you must read and be able to understand the information printed in the margin This information is like a book of instructions telling what is printed on the face of the map and how to use it The marginal information is divided into three parts such as TOP MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN and BOTTOM MARGIN

TOP MARGIN

1 SERIES NAME AND SCALE ndash indicates the name of the map series of which particular map is apart The series name is followed by the numerical scale of the map

2 MAP TITLE ndash it is the title by which the map is referred to It is usually the name of the most prominent geographical place found in the map

3 SHEET NUMBER ndash represents the specific sheet number of the map in relation with the other sheets of the same map series of which it is a part of

RIGHT MARGIN

1 INDEX TO BOUNDARIES ndash indicates the relative location of boundaries of provinces and Municipalities included in the place

2 COVERAGE DIAGRAM ndash represents the manner by which the information included in the map on every particular area were compiled It signifies the degree of reliability of information of a part of the map compared with others

3 INDEX TO ADJOINING SHEETS ndash shows the location of different adjoining map sheets in relation with this particular map This information is important when requesting for sheets of adjoining areas

BOTTOM MARGIN

1 LEGEND ndash list of all symbols used in the map and their respective meanings2 GRAPHIC SCALE ndash it is the graphic representation of the map scales It is used in

converting map distance without going through mathematical computations3 CONTOUR INTERVALS ndash indicates intervals in meters of contour lines used in the map as

reckoned from the mean sea level4 DECLINATION DIAGRAM ndash shows relative location of the grid and magnetic north in

relation with the true north Tis information is particularly important when you are orienting your map

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

TYPES OF MAP

1 PLANIMETRIC MAP ndash A map which represents only the horizontal position for features presented It is distinguished from Topographic map

2 TOPOGRAPHIC ndash A map which portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal position of the features presented

3 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A topographic map reprinted on plastic material and formed by heat and vacuum over a reproductive positive mold thus giving the same information as contained on topographic map

4 PHOTO MAP ndash A reproduction of an oralaerial photograph or photomosaic made from a series of photographs upon grid lines marginal data places name route members important elevations boundaries approximate scale and approximate direction have been needed

5 JOINT OPERATIONS GRAPHIC MAP ndash Use for ground and air operations The maps are published in ground and air direction

6 PICTO MAP ndash It is a map on which the photographic imagery of standard photomap has been converted into interpretable colors and symbols

7 PLASTIC RELIEF MAP ndash A photomap made on plastic in the same manner as a topographic map

8 PHOTOMOSAIC MAP ndash An assembly of aerial photograph to form a composite picture9 HYDROGRAPHIC MAP ndash A nautical map used as a navigational aid either below or above

surface10 MILITARY CITY MAP ndash A topographic map usually 112500 scale of a city delineating

streets and showing street names and showing important buildings and other urban elements of military importance which are compatible with the scale of the map

11 SPECIAL MAP ndash Maps for special purposes such as traffic ability transportation boundaries population etc

12 TERRAIN MODEL ndash It is designed to provide means for visualizing the terrain for planning or indoctrination purpose and briefing assault landings

USES AND CATEGORIES OF MILITARY MAPS

SCALE ndash Is expressed as a fraction and gives the ration of map distance to ground distance

TYPES OF SCALE

1 SMALL SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 and smaller are used for general planning and strategical studies at high echelons The standard small scale is 11000000

2 MEDIUM SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 1600000 but smaller than 175000 are used for planning operations including the movement and concentration of troop supplies The standard medium scale is 1250000

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

3 LARGE SCALE ndash Maps at scale of 175000 and larger are used to meet the tactical technical and administrative needs of field units The standard large scale is 150000

THREE TYPES OF NORTH

1 GRID NORTH ndash Always vertical It is established by the vertical gridlines on the map Grid north may be symbolized by the letters Gn or the letter Y

2 TRUE NORTH ndash A line from any position of the earthrsquos surface to the north pole All lines of longitude are true north lines True north is usually symbolized as a star

3 MAGNETIC NORTH ndash The direction to the north magnetic pole as indicated by the north seeking needle of the magnetic instrument Magnetic north is usually represented by a half arrowhead

MEASURING DISTANCE ndash Since the maps are drawn to scale it is possible to determine the actual ground distance between two points depicted in the map We have ways or methods in getting the distance of two points To convert map distance to actual ground distance

a USE OF NUMERICAL SCALE ndash Represents the equivalent in the ground distance of every unit of measurement use in the map Hence the scale is 150000 Meaning if the distance of two objects on the map is measured to be 1 cm the actual ground distance between them on the ground is 50000 cm or 500 m (100 cm = 1m) therefore when converting map distance to ground distance it is simply multiplying the map distance to the right figure of the ratio

MAP DISTANCE ndash the measurement of two points depicted on the map

EXAMPLE

Scale is 125000 Question What is the actual ground distanceMap distance 3cm

3cm x 25000 = 75000 cm 75000 divide 100 = 750 meters

b USE OF THE GRAPHIC SCALE ndash This is a faster way of converting map distance to actual ground distance You may use a strip of paper or piece of paper on relatively straight For example you are using a piece of paper transfer the map distance on a paper strip and lay them or put them over the graphic scale see to it that one end of the distance is on the zero mark Read the whole unit of measurement on the scale right of the zero mark (primary scale) If there is a fraction of a unit lay the right end of the paper on the mark of the nearest graduation of the primary scale and read the fraction of the unit that extends beyond the zero mark into the secondary scale That is your actual ground distance

LOCATION IDENTIFYING ndash Procedure on how to locate grid square (GS) and grid coordinates (GC)

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

GD = 216 km (21600) I km = 100000 cm

RF = 1X= 432216000 cm OR 432 X = 216000

X = 216000432 X = 50000 therefore

RF = 150000 OR 1 50000

The amount of time required to travel a certain distance on the ground is an important factor in most military operations This can be determined if the map of the area is available and graphic time distances scale is consideredconstructed for used with the map as follows

R = Rate of travel FORMULA D = Distance (ground distance) T = DB T = Time

FOR EXAMPLE

If an infantry unit is marching at an average speed of 4 kilometers per hour (R) it will take approximately 3 hours (T) to travel 12 kilometers (D)

12(D) divide 4 (R) = 3(T)

PROBLEM You are a flight leader of the 1st flight of Alpha sqdn Your flt CP (command post) is located at the school at GS 0736 You just received a radio message directing you to report at the sqdn CP and the sqdn CP is 165 km

QUESTION

1 If your service jeep will be traveling at an average speed of 30 kmhra What will be your travel time in minutesb What time will you arrive at the company CP If you will at 0830 H

GIVEN

D = 165 km

A T = 165 km divide 30 kmhr = 55 hrs = 160 minutesT = 60 x 55 = 33 minutes

B 0830H + 0033H = 0903 H

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

GENERAL RULE IN MAP READING ndash READ RIGHT UP

You must read the vertical grid lines from left side going to the right and read the horizontal grid lines from the bottom going up

EXAMPLE OF GRID SQUAREThe grid square id in four (4) digits meaning the first two digits represents the vertical grid lines then the second two digits represents the horizontal grid lines

GS ndash 1701 GS ndash 1824

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 100 meters (6 digits)

GC ndash 173017 GC ndash 18422467

Before reading of locating the grid coordinates you must get first the grid square then after getting the grid square divide it into ten (10) equal parts vertical and horizontal then apply the basic rule

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 10 meters (8 digits)

GC ndash 17320174 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 100 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in 100 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

GRID COORDINATES (GC) Nearest to 1 meter (10 digits)

GC ndash 1732101743 GC ndash 1842124671

The same sequence in nearest to 10 meters but after getting the grid coordinates in nearest to 10 meters divide it again into 10 equal parts vertical and horizontal

The situation may arise where a map or sketch map has no RF (represented fraction or scale) The RF must be determined so that you can determine the actual ground distance by using numerical scale

a Measure the distance between two points on the map (MD)b Determine the actual ground distance of two points by using the graphic scalec Utilizing the RF formula and remembering that RF must be in general form

1X x RF = MDGD

d Both the MD and GD must be in the same order of unit of measurement and the MD must be reduced to one (1)

MD = 432 CM

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

MILITARY SYMBOLS ndash a symbol used by the map user when he wants to show the disposition of the troops and overlaying of military installations

A COLORS 1 Blue or Black ndash color used to indicate friendly unitsforces installation equipment and

activities2 Red ndash color used to indicate enemyhostile unitsforces installation equipment and activities3 Green ndash color used to indicate engineering obstacle activities either enemy of friendlyunitsforces4 Yellow ndash color used to indicate contaminated areas such as gases and radioactives( chemicals biological and radiological )

B FIGURES

1 Troop units ndash Fire team ndash Company ndash I Division ndash xx Squad - bull Battalion ndash II Corps ndash xxx Section - bullbull Regiment ndash III Army ndash xxxxPlatoon - bullbullbull Brigade ndash x Army Group ndash xxxxx

2 Military units

Troop units First Aid station Engineering

Quarter Master Message Center Finance

Artillery Airborne Infantry Armor

Ordinance Airborne Cavalry

Anti- Aircraft Infantry Transportation

Armored Cavalry Air force Military Police

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

Observation Post Signal Engineering Airborne

Supply Installations Medical Civil Affair

Chemical Shipyard

3 Unit Representation SUB SIZE

SUB ndash SUB BRANCH OF MOTHER SUB ndash UNIT SERVICE UNIT

EXAMPLE

bullbull

46 1 - 4th section 6 platoon 1st Armor company bullbullbull

96 5 ndash 9th platoon 6th company 5th Infantry Battalion bull

26 7 - 2nd squad 6 section 7th Medical Platoon

BASIC COMMUNICATIONRADIO COMMUNICATION

Communication ndash A two way process of conveying information from one person to another

Two-way process 1 Talking 2 Listening

Means of communication

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

1 RADIO ndash Has speed and flexibility2 WIRE ndash More secure and reliable than radio3 MESSENGER ndash More secure and reliable means4 VISUAL ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )5 SOUND ndash Limited in use ( must have pre arrangement meaning )

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO

1 Types of Radio Setsa Portable ndash handy from one place to another operational while movingb Transportable ndash not operational while movingc General use of utility ndash combination of portables and transportable typesd Vehicular ndash operates through the use of the battery of a vehicle

2 Types of Modulationa AM ndashamplitude modulationb FM ndash frequency modulation

3 Types of Emissiona CW or MCW ndash continuous wave or moderate continuous waveb Voice ndash AM FM SSB (single side band )c KSK ndash frequency shift keying

4 Frequency Spectrumsa AM ndash FM ndash medium wave = 3 to 3mhz ( 300-3000khz )b HF ndash high frequency = 3 to 30mhzc VHF ndash very high frequency = 30 to 300mhzd UHF ndash ultra high frequency = 300 to 3000mhz

5 Transmission Range ndash depend on Radio type used6 Power Source

a Dry cellb Wet cell or secondary batteryc Generatord Alternating current

ADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Speed installation2 Can be integrated with wire3 Flexibility4 Provides aid to ground communications

DISADVANTAGES OF RADIO

1 Least secured communications2 Subject to interference

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RELIABILITY OF RADIO

1 Antenna sighting 3 Operator training2 Antenna choice 4 Circuit discipline

SAMPLES OF RADIO SETSAAN - system indicatorP - PortableR - RadioC - Communication77 - model number

ANURC 77 Never operate the radio without antennaANURC 734B ndash utility

ANPRC77 ndash 30 to 7595 mhz

Modulation ndash FMEmission ndash voiceTransmission Range ndash 5 milesPower output -15 to 4 watts

FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE PROPER USE OF RADIO SETS 1 Same emission 2 Modulation 3 Frequency

HOW TO ESTABLISH RADIO STATIONS 1 Individual 2 Net 3 Collective

INTERNATIONAL MORSE CODE ndash standard of naval communication transmitted by flashing of radio telegraph It is dot-dash system

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

A ALFA bull˗ ALFAB BRAVO ˗bullbullbull BRAH VOC CHARLIE bull˗bull˗ TSAR LEHD DELTA ˗bullbull DELL TAHE ECHO bull ECK OHF FOXTROT bullbull˗bull FOKS TROTG GOLF ˗ ˗bullbull GOLFH HOTEL bullbullbullbull HOH TELLI INDIA bullbull IN DEE AHJ JULIET bull˗ ˗ ˗ JEW LEE ETT

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

K KILO ˗bull˗ KEY LOHL LIMA bull˗bullbull LEE MAHM MIKE ˗ ˗ MIKEN NOVEMBER ˗bull NO VEM BERO OSCAR ˗ ˗ ˗ OSS CAR

LETTER PHONETIC ALPHABET INTrsquoL MORSE CODE PRONUNCIATION

P PAPA bull˗ ˗bull PAH PAHQ QUEBEC ˗ ˗ bull˗ KEH BECKR ROMEO bull˗bull ROW ME OHS SIERRA bullbullbull SEE AIR RAHT TANGO ˗ ˗ TANGOU UNIFORM bullbull˗ YOU NEE FORMV VICTOR bullbullbull˗ VIK TAHW WHISKY bull˗ ˗ WISS KEYX X-RAY ˗bullbull˗bull ECKS REYY YANKEE ˗bull˗ ˗ YANG KEYZ ZULU ˗ ˗bullbull ZOO LOO

NUMBER

1 ONE bull˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ WUN2 TWO bullbull˗ ˗ ˗ TOO3 THREE bullbullbull˗ ˗ THUH REE4 FOUR bullbullbullbull˗ FO WER5 FIVE bullbullbullbullbull FII VIV6 SIX ˗bullbullbullbull SIX7 SEVEN ˗ ˗bullbullbull SEVEN8 EIGHT ˗ ˗ ˗bullbull ATE9 NINE ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗bull NINE0 ZERO ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ZERO

SURVIVAL

SURVIVAL ndash continuation or method by which life can exist

S ndash Size up the situationU ndash Undo ways and wake waysR ndash Remember where you areV ndash Vanquish fear and panicI ndash Improvise V ndash Value of livingA ndash Act like a nativeL ndash Learn basic skill

JUNGLE AND SEA SURVIVAL

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

POLAR COORDINATE ndash It has specific starting point and has direction

ROUTE SECTION

1 Terrain Analysis 5 Traveling the mountain2 Following a ridge 6 Crossing the water3 Following streams 7 Vegetation route4 Following shore lines coast lines

GORGE - a deep narrow cut in the mountain often with river on the bottom

WATER SOURCESI FINDING WATER A Ground of surface water or surface water 1 rivers 2 springs 3 streams 4 swamps 5 ponds 6 lakes 7 sea B Earths water table run-off water for soil 1 rocky soil 2 loose soil 3 along the sea shore 4 indecent or arid lands 5 on mountains C Plants 1 plant tissues 2 vines 3 palms 4 coconuts 5 plants that catch and hold water (bamboo)II IMPURE WATER - is dangerous to drink classified by 1 stagnant water 2 muddy water 3 polluted water

III IMPURE WATER ( treated to become potable ) 1 Boil for at least one (1) minute 2 Clear it by letting it stand for 12 hours or pass it through about 3 feet of bamboo filled with sand and staff with grass in one end to keep in or pour in into a clean clothe with sand 3 All charcoal from the fire to get rid of odors 4 Let it stand for about 45 minutes before drinking 5 Use water purification tables if availabe

FOOD SOURCES I VEGETABLE FOODS

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

A Wild plant foods 1 Roots and other underground partsa Tubers Ex wild potato b Roots and stalks Ex maniac plant cattail and wild onion 2 Shoots and stems - Ex bamboo ferns 3 Leaves - Ex papaya lotus and lily 4 Nuts -Ex pine nuts coconuts and cashew nuts 5 Seeds and grains - Ex rice and beans 6 Fruits - Ex will grape vines 7 Barks 8 Fungi - Ex Mushrooms 9 Senweeds - Ex green brown red fresh water algae B Cultivated FoodsII ANIMAL FOODS A Water Foods 1 Fish frog and salamander 2 Mollusks - Ex snails clams mussel and sea orchids 3 Crustacean - Ex crabs crayfish lobster and shrimps B Reptiles - Ex snakes lizards alligator and turtles C Insects - Ex grasshoppers and termite D Birds and mammalsFIRE MAKINGFire - is very important to our daily needs It is used for cooking boiling water and heater HOW TO PRODUCE FIRE 1 Eye glasses or glass Dont panic in the 2 Flint or steel JUNGLESURVIVAL IN THE JUNGLE NEEDS1 Discipline 2 TeamworkTHINGS TO REMEMBER ( FOR JUNGLE SURVIVAL )1 Native - be friendly with the native2 Jungle a primary jungleb secondary junglec cultivation jungle d tropical rain jungleTRAVELING ON THE MOUNTAIN1 Travel by day2 When traveling by night pick the easiest way possible3 Travel along with the animal tracks4 Travel along with stream5 Travel in steady phase6 Use loose clothing

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

SURVIVAL IN SPECIAL A

EVADER - a person that includes by dexterity or stratagemESCAPEE - any person who is captured and freed himselfRETURNEE - any person who captured and returned to his troopsE amp E NET - An escapee netBODY - a person who pass through the netDEAD BODY - any person who pass through the net who is blind folded and know who is his contactRECOVERY POINT - a friendly point or area in which the net personnel contactedSAFE HOUSE - a safe area or building guard by security personnel

S - selected FACTORS CONSIDERED IN ESCAPEEVASIONA - area 1 Terrain PhysicalF - for 2 Location of neutral territoryE - evasion 3 Counter measures of enemy

1 Preservation of man power2 Safe guarding military information3 Enhance moral of troops4 Provides good source and latest information

TYPE OF EampE1 Uncontrolled escape2 Controlled escape

OBJECTIVE OF EampE 1 Train the officer and men the technique2 Enhance the information regarding the subject3 Familiarize everybody the technique4 Familiarize each of leadership5 Instead everyone

CLASSIFICATION OF EVASION1 Short range evasion2 Long range evasion

A SUCCESSFUL 1 Prepare 2 Survival 3 Observe the elementary movement comouflageconcealment 4 Conserve food 5 Conserve so much strength

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

6 Restsleep as much as possible

TECHNIQUE OF EVASION1 Initial action2 The time that remains in the initial condition

1 Travel - scoutingpatrolling As major rule - avoid the major trialtracks and populated areas2 Concealment camouflage3 Day versus night travel4 Maps5 Progress and many stop point6 Shelters7 Speed and distance is primarily needed

OBSTACLES1 Natural obstacles - river streams and mountain2 Human obstacle - guard and patrol3 Artificial obstacle - contaminated area unexplained dead animals4 Boarder crossings5 Front-line crossing6 Distance and friendly force

CONDUCTS OF ESCAPE AND EVASION LINES1 Advantage of early escape attempt2 Opportunity of early escape3 Air stink train

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

A DEFINITIONMARKSMANSHIP ndash Is a skillful art of shooting and hitting a target at a given or known distance

B ELEMENTS OF MARKSMANSHIP1 Aiming 4 Sustained fire2 Position 5 Sight setting3 Trigger squeeze

C STEPS IN PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP1 Sighting and Aiming exercise2 Position exercise3 Trigger squeeze exercise4 Sustained fire exercise5 Effect of wind sight changes use of score card6 Examination before range fire

D SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE1 CORRECT SIGHT ALIGNMENT ndash When the front and rear sight are both into correct

adjustment with the eye the sights are said to be in alignment2 SIGHT PICTURE ndash Is the pattern seen by the riflemen when he aims his rifle This includes the

front sight and rear sight and if the bullrsquos eye of some other object if aimed at it includes the object

3 TO GET THE CORRECT PICTURE OF THE SIGHT ALONEA Look through the rear sightB Move your rifle until an imaginary horizontal line passing through the center of the rear sight

passes through the center of front sight4 COMPLETE SIGHT PICTURE

A Is made by adding the bullrsquos eyeB The bullrsquos eye should be centered over the front sight and should appear to barely touching

it5 SIGHTING AND AIMING CONSIST OF THREE EXERCISES

A Practical exercises on correct sight alignment and sight picture with the use of the sighting and aiming bar

B Making correct sight alignment and correct picture using the rifle sightsC Testing your sight picture by having three sight picture marked at distance of 50 ft These

three markings will form a shot group ( Triangulations )

E KINDS OF SLING ADJUSTMENT

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

REAR SIGHT

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT

COVER

FRONT SIGHT

A Loop sling ( web for Prone Sitting Squatting and Kneeling position )B Hasty sling ( web for Standing position )

F POSITION EXERCISE ( FIRING POSITION )1 Prone position 4 Kneeling position2 Sitting position 5 Standing position3 Squatting position

G TRIGGER SQUEEZEIt is defined as the independent action of the forefinger straight to the rear with uniform increasing pressure has been taken up so that the riflemen does not know the instant falling of the hammer

H IMPORTANT THINGS TO REMEMBER A Squeeze the trigger in such a way as to fire the rifle without affecting the aimB Hold the aim and align accurately as possible on the target and maintain a steady increasing

pressure upon the trigger until the hot is fired Slight movement of the sight will spoil a good shot

C Sequence in trigger squeezeB ndash Breath ndash Hold BreathR ndash Relax ndash Release a little air and hold itA ndash Aim ndash Complete sight alignmentS ndash Slack ndash Take slack with heavy initial pressureS ndash Squeeze ndash Apply correct squeeze to the remaining resistance

I ZEROING THE RIFLEA Each rifle has certain characteristics and you must be familiar with them Correcting the

characteristics by adjusting the rear sight is called ZEROING THE RIFLEB Initial setting of the rear sight

1 ELEVATION ndash 12 clicks up from the bottom2 DEFLECTION ndash zero or at the center of the index line

J ORGANIZATION OF FIRING LINE ( PURPOSE ) 1 To ensure safe and orderly conduct of firing2 To facilitate supervision

A Line of ScoresB Telephone OperatorsC Ready LineD Line of Rifle Racks and Cleaning Racks ndash 5 yards at the rear of the ready lineE Line of Ammunition TableF Individuals who are to fire

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

Correct Sight Alignment Correct Sight Picture

THE US RIFLE CAL 30M1 (GARAND)INTRODUCTION The CAL 30M1 is basically an infantry weapon Its capabilities and limitations are guiding factors on how this weapon will eventually help an individual Every soldier should have a basic knowledge of the organizational and maintenance of this rifle because in the event of war all regular and reserve forces will need this weapon very badly to achieve victory Therefore it is our prime duty as citizen of the Phil to learn how to repair and maintain this weapon for the future use and thus be of service to our country This weapon was invented by JOHN GARAND

THREE MAIN GROUPS OF CAL 30M1 1 Trigger Housing Group

2 Stock Group 3 Barrel and Receiver Group

CHARACTERISTICS S ndash Semi-Automatic C ndash Clip Fed A ndash Air Cooled G ndash Gas Operated S ndash Shoulder Weapon

OTHER DATADiameter of Bore - 30rdquo Overall Length wo Bayonet ndash 436rdquoWeight Without Bayonet ndash 95 lbs Maximum Range ndash 3500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet ndash 105 lbs Effective Range ndash 500 yrdsWeight with Bayonet and sling ndash 11 lbs Chamber Pressure ndash 50000 lbssq inLength of Barrel ndash 24rdquo Muzzle Velocity ndash 2600 ndash 2800 ftseSustained Rate of Fire ndash 16 rndsmin Clip capacity ndash 8 roundsMaximum Rate of Fire ndash 16 rnds ndash 32 rnds minTrigger Pull ndash 45 Minimum Approximation ndash 65 Maximum

SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY1 Trigger Housing Group2 Stock Group3 Barrel and Receiver Group

A Follower Rod E Follower Arm PinB Operating Rod Spring F Operating Rod HandleC Bullet Guide G BoltD Operating Rod Catch Assembly

OPERATION The clip holding 8 rounds is inserted with the gun locked To load pull the operating handle up to the point

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

where it catches and breach open Press the clip on the receiver until it engages the bolt will move forward automatically To unload pull back and hold the operating handle and press the clip catch

M16 RIFLE ( 556 mm ARMALITE)CHARACTERISTICSASHOULDER WEAPON ndash It is an individual weapon fired from the shoulder B GAS OPERATED ndash The rifle goes through the entire sequence of firing by the action of the expanding gas on its machine CMAGAZINE FED ndash The ammunition is fed into the rifle through either a short magazine ( 20 rounds) or a long magazine ( 30 rounds )

D BOTH AUTOMATIC AND SEMI-AUTOMATIC MODE ndash The weapon by changing the setting of the selector lever can be made to fire either automatic or semi-automatic E OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ndash The rifle is equipped with a flash suppressor mounted on the muzzle The barrel is surrounded by a heat resistant material made of fiberglass which is shaped into a handguard A rubber pad is mounted on the butt of the stock to help absorb the recoil of the rifle when firing The weapon has a forward assist assembly which is located on the rear of the upper rear receiver Pressure on the assembly will assist the action spring in driving the bolt fully home should it fail to do so

2 FUNCTIONINGA FEEDING ndash This action occurs when a round of ammunition is placed in the receiver ready for chambering This is accomplished by the pressure of the magazine spring when you pull the charging handle to the rearB CHAMBERING ndash In this action the first or new round is securely placed inside the chamber This action takes place almost simultaneously with feedingC LOCKING ndash In this action the bolt rotates in a counterclockwise position Locking is complete when the slugs on the bolt and barrel extension are aligned This is necessary to prevent the loss of gas pressure until after the projectile has left the muzzleD FIRING ndash In this action the explosive composition of the primer after it has been struck by the firing pin ignites and explodes the propellant powder inside the cartridge shell The explosion forces the bullet out of the barrelE UNLOCKING ndash After the firing the bolt as it move to the rear rotates clockwise until the locking slugs of the bolt are no longer aligned with the slugs in the barrel extensionF EXTRACTING ndash In this action the bolt carrier continues to move rearward and withdraws the extended cartridge shell from the chamber by the extraction clawG EJECTING ndash Here the ejector is compressed into the face of the bolt As the bolt carrier clears the ejector port the empty cartridge is thrown out by the ejector and springH COCKING ndash In this action all the operating parts of the rifle are again position in readiness to fire another round Here the lower hook of the hammer is engaged by the disconnector and is caught by the nose of the trigger preventing the hammer from going forward

3 GENERAL DATA A WEIGHTS B LENGTHSRifle without magazine and sling - 65 lbs Rifle with m7 Bayonet ndash 4425 inches

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min

Magazine - 2 lbs Rifle with Flash Suppressor ndash 39 inchesFull Magazine ( 20 rounds ) - 7lbs Barrel with Flash Suppressor ndash 21 inchesSling - 4 lbs Barrel wo Flash Suppressor ndash 20 inchesC MUZZEL VELOCITY ndash 3250 ft per sec D CYCLIC RATE OF FIRE ndash 700 ndash 800 rndmin E MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RATES OF FIRE F RANGESSemi-automatic mode ndash 45-65 rndmin maximum ndash 2653 metersAutomatic mode ndash 150-200 rndmin maximum effective ndash 460 meters G SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE ndash 12-15 rnds per min